Application manual

ProtectIT Line distance protection terminal REL 511*2.5

Application manual
Line distance protection terminal REL 511*2.5

About this manual

Document No: 1MRK 506 168-UEN Issued: December 2006 Revision: B

Copyright 2006 ABB. All rights reserved.

COPYRIGHT WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTERESTS OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB Power Technologies AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation

Contents

Chapter
Chapter 1

Page
Introduction ..................................................................... 1
Introduction to the application manual ................................................. 2 About the complete set of manuals for a terminal .......................... 2 About the application manual ......................................................... 2 Intended audience .......................................................................... 3 General...................................................................................... 3 Requirements ............................................................................ 3 Related documents......................................................................... 3 Revision notes ................................................................................ 3 Glossary ......................................................................................... 4

Chapter 2

General........................................................................... 11
Features............................................................................................. 12 Functions ........................................................................................... 13 Application ......................................................................................... 17 Design................................................................................................ 18 Requirements .................................................................................... 19 General ......................................................................................... 19 Voltage transformers .................................................................... 19 Current transformers..................................................................... 19 Classification ........................................................................... 19 Conditions................................................................................ 20 Fault current ............................................................................ 21 Cable resistance and additional load....................................... 21 General current transformer requirements .............................. 21 Distance protection ................................................................. 21 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards................................................................................. 22 Serial communication ........................................................................ 24 SPA .............................................................................................. 24 LON .............................................................................................. 24 IEC 870-5-103 .............................................................................. 24 Terminal identification and base values............................................. 25 Application .................................................................................... 25 Calculations .................................................................................. 25 Example 1................................................................................ 26 Example 2................................................................................ 28

Chapter 3

Common functions ....................................................... 31

Real-time clock with external time synchronzation (TIME) ................ 32 Application .................................................................................... 32 Functionality ................................................................................. 32

Contents

Calculations .................................................................................. 32 Four parameter setting groups (GRP) ............................................... 34 Application .................................................................................... 34 Functionality.................................................................................. 34 Design........................................................................................... 35 Setting restriction of HMI (SRH)......................................................... 36 Application .................................................................................... 36 Functionality.................................................................................. 36 I/O system configurator (IOP) ............................................................ 38 Application .................................................................................... 38 Functionality.................................................................................. 38 I/O position .............................................................................. 38 Configuration ........................................................................... 39 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) ......................................................... 40 Application .................................................................................... 40 Application ............................................................................... 40 Functionality.................................................................................. 40 Inverter (INV) ........................................................................... 40 Controllable gate (GT) ............................................................. 41 OR ........................................................................................... 41 AND ......................................................................................... 42 Timer ....................................................................................... 43 Timer settable through HMI/SMS/PST .................................... 46 Pulse........................................................................................ 47 Exclusive OR (XOR) ................................................................ 48 Set-Reset (SR) ........................................................................ 49 Set-Reset with/without memory (SM) ...................................... 50 MOVE ...................................................................................... 51 Calculations .................................................................................. 53 Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT) ............................ 54 Application .................................................................................... 54 Functionality.................................................................................. 54 Blocking of signals during test (BST) ................................................. 58 Functionality.................................................................................. 58

Chapter 4

Line distance ................................................................. 59

Distance protection (ZM).................................................................... 60 Application .................................................................................... 60 General .................................................................................... 60 Distance protection zones ....................................................... 60 Complement to the line differential protection ......................... 61 Set of simplified setting parameters......................................... 61 Basic characteristics ................................................................ 61 Functionality.................................................................................. 66 Measuring principle ................................................................. 66 Measured impedance .............................................................. 68 Directional lines ....................................................................... 71 Design........................................................................................... 72 Full-scheme measurement ...................................................... 72 Distance protection zone one .................................................. 73

Contents

Remaining distance protection zones...................................... 77 Calculations .................................................................................. 77 Setting instructions .................................................................. 77 Reach setting recommendations ............................................. 77 Conversion to secondary impedances .................................... 78 Basic zone setting recommendations...................................... 78 Earth return compensation ...................................................... 80 Fault resistance ....................................................................... 82 Zero-sequence mutual coupling on multicircuit lines............... 83 Setting of the reach in resistive direction ................................ 89 Setting of minimum operating current...................................... 91 Setting of timers for the distance protection zones.................. 92 Setting the directional lines...................................................... 92 Simplified operating characteristic........................................... 93 Set of simplified setting parameters ........................................ 93 Configuration ................................................................................ 93 Basic configuration .................................................................. 93 ZMn--BLOCK functional input.................................................. 94 ZMn--VTSZ functional input..................................................... 94 ZMn--BLKTR functional input .................................................. 94 ZMn--STCND functional input ................................................. 94 ZMn--START functional output................................................ 95 ZMn--TRIP functional output ................................................... 95 ZMn--STND functional output.................................................. 95 Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)........................................... 96 Application .................................................................................... 96 Functionality ................................................................................. 96 Calculations .................................................................................. 97 Setting instructions .................................................................. 97 Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)......................................................... 98 Application .................................................................................... 98 Functionality ................................................................................. 98 Zone extension ........................................................................ 98 Loss-of-load acceleration ........................................................ 98 Calculations .................................................................................. 99 Setting instructions .................................................................. 99 General fault criteria (GFC) ............................................................. 100 Application .................................................................................. 100 Phase preference logic.......................................................... 102 Functionality ............................................................................... 102 Impedance measuring elements ........................................... 102 Measuring elements for the ph-E faults................................. 102 Measuring elements for ph-ph and three-phase faults .......... 104 Current-based GFC elements ............................................... 106 Design ........................................................................................ 106 Phase preference logic.......................................................... 112 Calculations ................................................................................ 116 Setting instructions ................................................................ 116 General setting parameters ................................................... 116 Setting parameters for the I> mode of operation ................... 117 Setting parameters for the Z< mode of operation.................. 117 Phase preference logic.......................................................... 119 Power swing detection (PSD) .......................................................... 121

Contents

Application .................................................................................. 121 General .................................................................................. 121 Basic characteristics .............................................................. 121 Functionality................................................................................ 122 Theory of operation ............................................................... 122 Design......................................................................................... 123 Basic detection logic .............................................................. 123 Operating and inhibit conditions ............................................ 124 Calculations ................................................................................ 126 Setting instructions ................................................................ 126 Setting the reach of the inner characteristic .......................... 126 Setting the reach of the outer characteristic .......................... 127 Limitation of the resistive reach ............................................. 128 Determination of the impedance difference and speed ......... 128 Reactive reach....................................................................... 129 tH hold timer .......................................................................... 129 tR1 inhibit timer...................................................................... 130 tR2 inhibit timer...................................................................... 130 tEF timer for reclosing on persistent single-phase faults ....... 130 Radial feeder protection (PAP) ........................................................ 131 Application .................................................................................. 131 Functionality................................................................................ 131 Design......................................................................................... 131 Calculations ................................................................................ 136 Setting instructions ................................................................ 136 Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) ........................................... 137 Application .................................................................................. 137 Functionality................................................................................ 137 Theory of operation ............................................................... 137 Blocking communication scheme .......................................... 137 Permissive communication scheme ...................................... 138 Direct inter-trip scheme.......................................................... 139 Calculations ................................................................................ 139 Settings.................................................................................. 139 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)........................ 140 Application .................................................................................. 140 Current reversal logic............................................................. 140 Weak end infeed (WEI) logic ................................................. 140 Functionality................................................................................ 140 Current reversal logic............................................................. 140 Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 141 Design......................................................................................... 141 Current reversal logic............................................................. 141 Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 142 Calculations ................................................................................ 143 Setting ................................................................................... 143 Current reversal logic............................................................. 143 Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 144

Chapter 5

Current ......................................................................... 145

Contents

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)............ 146 Application .................................................................................. 146 Functionality ............................................................................... 147 Design ........................................................................................ 147 Calculations ................................................................................ 150 Setting instructions ................................................................ 150 Meshed network without parallel line..................................... 150 Meshed network with parallel line.......................................... 151 Setting instructions ................................................................ 152 Meshed network without parallel line..................................... 153 .......................................... Meshed network with parallel line154 Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC) ............. 155 Application .................................................................................. 155 Functionality ............................................................................... 155 Design ........................................................................................ 156 Calculations ................................................................................ 158 Setting instructions ................................................................ 158 Setting of operating current IP>............................................. 159 Setting instructions ................................................................ 159 Setting of operating current IN> ............................................ 160 Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)......................................................... 162 Application .................................................................................. 162 Functionality ............................................................................... 162 Calculations ................................................................................ 163 Setting instructions ................................................................ 163 Line protection in radial network............................................ 163 Line protection in meshed network........................................ 165 Setting characteristics ........................................................... 165 Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3) ........................................................ 167 Application .................................................................................. 167 Functionality ............................................................................... 167 Theory of operation and design............................................. 167 Current measuring element ................................................... 167 Directional overcurrent function............................................. 168 Calculations ................................................................................ 174 Setting instructions ................................................................ 174 Line protection in a radial network......................................... 174 Line protection in meshed network........................................ 176 Setting characteristics ........................................................... 176 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF) ...................... 178 Application .................................................................................. 178 Earth-fault overcurrent protection .......................................... 178 Directional comparison logic function .................................... 179 Functionality ............................................................................... 179 Theory of operation ............................................................... 179 Calculations ................................................................................ 182 Setting instructions ................................................................ 182 Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4) .......................................................... 186 Application .................................................................................. 186 Functionality ............................................................................... 186

Contents

Theory of operation ............................................................... 186 Function logic ........................................................................ 186 The directional measuring function........................................ 189 Definite time overcurrent step 1............................................. 190 Definite time overcurrent step 2 and 3................................... 191 Overcurrent step 4 ................................................................. 191 Calculations ................................................................................ 192 Settings.................................................................................. 192 General .................................................................................. 192 Step 1 .................................................................................... 192 Step 2 and 3 .......................................................................... 195 Step 4, non-directional........................................................... 196 Inverse time delay ................................................................. 197 Directional current function .................................................... 198 Example of protection scheme .............................................. 199 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1) .......... 200 Application .................................................................................. 200 Functionality................................................................................ 200 Calculations ................................................................................ 203 Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2) .................. 207 Application .................................................................................. 207 Functionality................................................................................ 207 Calculations ................................................................................ 211 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC) ......................................................... 215 Application .................................................................................. 215 Functionality................................................................................ 215 Theory of operation ............................................................... 215 Directional comparison logic function .................................... 215 Blocking scheme ................................................................... 216 Permissive overreach scheme............................................... 216 Design......................................................................................... 217 Blocking scheme ................................................................... 217 Permissive overreaching scheme.......................................... 218 Calculations ................................................................................ 218 Setting ................................................................................... 218 Blocking scheme ................................................................... 218 Permissive communication scheme ...................................... 218 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) ........................................... 219 Application .................................................................................. 219 Current reversal logic............................................................. 219 Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 219 Functionality................................................................................ 219 Theory of operation ............................................................... 219 Directional comparison logic function .................................... 219 Fault current reversal logic .................................................... 220 Weak and infeed logic ........................................................... 221 Design......................................................................................... 222 Calculations ................................................................................ 223 Setting ................................................................................... 223 Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) .................................... 224 Application .................................................................................. 224

Contents

Functionality ............................................................................... 224 Calculations ................................................................................ 225 Breaker failure protection (BFP) ...................................................... 228 Application .................................................................................. 228 Functionality ............................................................................... 230 Input and output signals ........................................................ 231 Start functions........................................................................ 231 Measuring principles.............................................................. 231 Design ........................................................................................ 233 Calculations ................................................................................ 234 Setting ................................................................................... 234 Human-machine interface (HMI) ........................................... 234

Chapter 6

Voltage ......................................................................... 235

Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) .................................. 236 Application .................................................................................. 236 Functionality ............................................................................... 236 Design ........................................................................................ 237 Calculations ................................................................................ 237 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) .................................... 238 Application .................................................................................. 238 Functionality ............................................................................... 238 Design ........................................................................................ 238 Calculations ................................................................................ 241 Setting ................................................................................... 241

Chapter 7

Power system supervision......................................... 243

Broken conductor check (BRC) ....................................................... 244 Application .................................................................................. 244 Functionality ............................................................................... 244 Design ........................................................................................ 244 Calculations ................................................................................ 245 Setting instructions ................................................................ 245 Setting of the minimum operating current IP> ....................... 245 Setting of time delay t ............................................................ 247 Loss of voltage check (LOV)............................................................ 248 Application .................................................................................. 248 Functionality ............................................................................... 248 Design ........................................................................................ 248 Calculations ................................................................................ 250 Setting instructions ................................................................ 250 Overload supervision (OVLD).......................................................... 251 Application .................................................................................. 251 Functionality ............................................................................... 251 Design ........................................................................................ 251 Calculations ................................................................................ 252 Setting instructions ................................................................ 252 Setting of operating current IP>............................................. 252

Contents

Dead line detection (DLD)................................................................ 254 Application .................................................................................. 254 Design......................................................................................... 254 Calculations ................................................................................ 255 Setting instructions ................................................................ 255

Chapter 8

Secondary system supervision.................................. 257

Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU) .......................... 258 Application .................................................................................. 258 Functionality................................................................................ 258 Calculations ................................................................................ 260 Setting instructions ................................................................ 260 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) ...................................................... 261 Application .................................................................................. 261 Functionality................................................................................ 261 Negative sequence ................................................................ 261 Zero sequence ...................................................................... 262 du/dt, di/dt .............................................................................. 265 Logic ...................................................................................... 265 Calculations ................................................................................ 267 Negative sequence function .................................................. 267 Setting of negative sequence voltage 3U2> .......................... 267 Setting of negative sequence current 3I2< ............................ 267 Zero sequence function ......................................................... 268 Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0>................................. 268 Setting of zero sequence current 3I0<................................... 268 Setting of voltage change DU>.............................................. 268 Setting of current change DI<................................................ 269 Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)............................................ 270 Application .................................................................................. 270 Functionality................................................................................ 270 Abbreviations and definitions................................................. 270 Description of operation......................................................... 270 Calculations ................................................................................ 272

Chapter 9

Control.......................................................................... 275
Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)..................................... 276 Application .................................................................................. 276 Synchrocheck, general .......................................................... 276 Synchrocheck, single circuit breaker ..................................... 277 Energizing check, general ..................................................... 278 Voltage selection, single circuit breaker ................................ 279 Voltage connection for a single bus and single bay............... 280 Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay ................ 281 Synchrocheck, double circuit breaker.................................... 282 Voltage connection, double circuitbreaker and single bay..... 283 Phasing, general.................................................................... 284 Phasing, single circuit breaker............................................... 285

Contents

Voltage selection, single circuit breaker ................................ 285 Voltage selection for a single bus and single bay.................. 286 Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay ................ 287 Phasing, double circuit breaker ............................................. 288 Voltage connection, double circuit breaker and single bay ... 289 Functionality ............................................................................... 290 Single circuit breaker ............................................................. 290 Synchrocheck ........................................................................ 290 Voltage selection ................................................................... 293 Double circuit breaker............................................................ 295 Synchrocheck ........................................................................ 295 Phasing and synchrocheck, single circuit breaker................. 298 Phasing and synchrocheck.................................................... 298 Voltage selection ................................................................... 302 Phasing and synchrocheck, double circuit breaker ............... 303 Phasing and synchrocheck.................................................... 303 Calculations ................................................................................ 307 Settings for single circuit breaker .......................................... 307 Operation............................................................................... 307 Input phase............................................................................ 307 UMeasure .............................................................................. 307 PhaseShift ............................................................................. 307 URatio.................................................................................... 307 USelection ............................................................................. 307 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 307 ManDBDL .............................................................................. 308 UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 308 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 308 VTConnection........................................................................ 308 tSync...................................................................................... 308 Settings for double circuit breaker ......................................... 308 Operation .............................................................................. 308 Input phase............................................................................ 309 UMeasure .............................................................................. 309 PhaseShift ............................................................................. 309 URatio.................................................................................... 309 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 309 ManDBDL .............................................................................. 309 UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 309 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 309 tSync...................................................................................... 310 Settings for single circuit breaker with phasing ..................... 310 Operation............................................................................... 310 Input phase............................................................................ 310 PhaseShift ............................................................................. 310 URatio.................................................................................... 310 USelection ............................................................................. 310 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 310 ManDBDL .............................................................................. 311 UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 311 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 311 OperationSync....................................................................... 311 ShortPulse ............................................................................. 311

Contents

FreqDiffSynch ........................................................................ 311 tPulse..................................................................................... 311 tBreaker ................................................................................. 311 VTConnection ........................................................................ 311 tSync...................................................................................... 311 FreqDiffBlock ......................................................................... 311 Settings for double circuit breaker with phasing .................... 312 Operation ............................................................................... 312 Input phase ............................................................................ 312 PhaseShift ............................................................................. 312 URatio.................................................................................... 312 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 312 ManDBDL .............................................................................. 313 UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 313 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 313 FreqDiffSynch ........................................................................ 313 OperationSynch ..................................................................... 313 ShortPulse ............................................................................. 313 tPulse..................................................................................... 313 tBreaker ................................................................................. 313 tSync...................................................................................... 313 FreqDiffBlock ......................................................................... 313 Autorecloser (AR) ............................................................................ 314 Application .................................................................................. 314 Functionality................................................................................ 316 AR operation.......................................................................... 316 Start and control of the auto-reclosing................................... 316 Extended AR open time, shot 1 ............................................. 316 Long trip signal ...................................................................... 317 Reclosing programs............................................................... 317 Blocking of a new reclosing cycle .......................................... 319 Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer..................................... 319 Pulsing of CB closing command ............................................ 320 Transient fault ........................................................................ 320 Unsuccessful signal ............................................................... 320 Permanent fault ..................................................................... 320 Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts... 320 Calculations ................................................................................ 321 Configuration and setting....................................................... 321 Recommendations for input signals....................................... 321 Recommendations for output signals .................................... 322 Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement ................ 324 Settings.................................................................................. 326 Single command, 16 signals (CD) ................................................... 327 Application .................................................................................. 327 Design......................................................................................... 328 Calculations ................................................................................ 329 Setting ................................................................................... 329 Multiple command (CM)................................................................... 330 Application .................................................................................. 330 Design......................................................................................... 330 General .................................................................................. 330 Binary signal interbay communication ................................... 330

Contents

Calculations ................................................................................ 331 Settings.................................................................................. 331

Chapter 10 Logic............................................................................. 333

Tripping logic (TR) ........................................................................... 334 Application .................................................................................. 334 Functionality ............................................................................... 335 Design ........................................................................................ 335 Three-phase front logic.......................................................... 336 Phase segregated front logic................................................. 336 Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode ......................... 337 Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode .................. 338 Final tripping circuits.............................................................. 339 Calculations ................................................................................ 340 Pole discordance logic (PDc)........................................................... 341 Application .................................................................................. 341 Functionality ............................................................................... 341 Functionality for contact based pole discordance.................. 341 Design ........................................................................................ 342 Calculations ................................................................................ 344 Setting Instruction.................................................................. 344 High speed binary output logic (HSBO)........................................... 345 Application .................................................................................. 345 Functionality ............................................................................... 345 Design ........................................................................................ 347 Communication channel test logic (CCHT)...................................... 350 Application .................................................................................. 350 Design ........................................................................................ 350 Selection of an operating mode............................................. 351 Operation at sending end ...................................................... 351 Operation at receiving end .................................................... 351 Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12) ................................. 352 Application .................................................................................. 352 Design ........................................................................................ 352 Remote end data communication.......................................... 354 Event function (EV).......................................................................... 355 Application .................................................................................. 355 Functionality ............................................................................... 355 Design ........................................................................................ 355 General.................................................................................. 355 Double indication ................................................................... 356 Communication between terminals ....................................... 356 Calculations ................................................................................ 357 Event counter (CN) .......................................................................... 358 Application .................................................................................. 358 Functionality ............................................................................... 358 Reporting ............................................................................... 358 Calculations ................................................................................ 358

Contents

Chapter 11 Monitoring .................................................................... 359

Disturbance report ........................................................................... 360 Application .................................................................................. 360 Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report .......... 360 Functionality................................................................................ 360 Disturbance information......................................................... 361 Indications ............................................................................. 362 Event recorder ....................................................................... 362 Fault locator ........................................................................... 362 Trip values ............................................................................. 362 Disturbance recorder ............................................................. 362 Recording times..................................................................... 362 Analog signals ....................................................................... 363 Binary signals ........................................................................ 364 Trigger signals ....................................................................... 364 Calculations ................................................................................ 365 Settings during normal conditions.......................................... 365 Operation ............................................................................... 366 Sequence number ................................................................. 366 Recording times..................................................................... 367 Binary signals ........................................................................ 367 Analog signals ....................................................................... 367 Behavior during test mode..................................................... 367 Indications........................................................................................ 369 Application .................................................................................. 369 Functionality................................................................................ 369 Calculations ................................................................................ 370 Disturbance recorder (DR)............................................................... 371 Application .................................................................................. 371 Functionality................................................................................ 371 Recording Capacity ............................................................... 372 Memory capacity ................................................................... 372 Time tagging .......................................................................... 372 Signal processing .................................................................. 372 Design......................................................................................... 373 Calculations ................................................................................ 374 Event recorder (ER) ......................................................................... 376 Application .................................................................................. 376 Functionality................................................................................ 376 Calculations ................................................................................ 376 Fault locator (FLOC) ........................................................................ 377 Application .................................................................................. 377 Functionality................................................................................ 377 Distance-to-fault locator......................................................... 377 Measuring principle..................................................................... 378 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault ........... 378 The non-compensated impedance model .................................. 382 Design......................................................................................... 383 Calculations ................................................................................ 383 Trip value recorder (TVR) ................................................................ 385 Application .................................................................................. 385

Contents

Design ........................................................................................ 385 Calculations ................................................................................ 385 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) .......................................... 386 Application .................................................................................. 386 Functionality ............................................................................... 386 User-defined measuring ranges ............................................ 387 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity .................. 387 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity................. 388 Design ........................................................................................ 393 Calculations ................................................................................ 394 Increased accuray of AC input quantities (IMA) .............................. 398 Application .................................................................................. 398 Functionality ............................................................................... 398 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) ........................................... 399 Application .................................................................................. 399 Functionality ............................................................................... 399 User-defined measuring ranges ............................................ 399 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity .................. 400 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity................. 401 Design ........................................................................................ 406 Calculations ................................................................................ 408

Chapter 12 Metering ....................................................................... 411

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC).............................................. 412 Application .................................................................................. 412 Functionality ............................................................................... 412 Design ........................................................................................ 413 Calculations ................................................................................ 414 Setting ................................................................................... 414

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions ................. 415

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)............................................................... 416 Application .................................................................................. 416 Oscillations of mechanical masses in power system............. 416 Requirements on protection systems during pole slip conditions in network ................................................... 421 Functionality ............................................................................... 422 Theory of operation ............................................................... 422 Detection of the oscillations and transitions .......................... 425 Tripping on way in and on way out ........................................ 428 Close-in and remote end tripping areas ................................ 431 Design ........................................................................................ 431 Detection of oscillations......................................................... 433 Logic for cooperation with the line distance protection.......... 434 Tripping criteria...................................................................... 436 Calculations ................................................................................ 443 Setting instructions ................................................................ 443 Low active power protection (LAPP)................................................ 454

Contents

Application .................................................................................. 454 General .................................................................................. 454 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 454 Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 455 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip ............................ 455 Functionality................................................................................ 456 General .................................................................................. 456 Active power calculation ........................................................ 456 Direction of active power ....................................................... 457 Conditioning elements ........................................................... 458 Design......................................................................................... 458 Calculation .................................................................................. 461 Setting instructions ................................................................ 461 Setting example ..................................................................... 462 Low active and reactive power protection (LARP) ........................... 464 Application .................................................................................. 464 General .................................................................................. 464 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 464 Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 465 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip ............................ 466 Functionality................................................................................ 466 General .................................................................................. 466 Active and reactive power calculation.................................... 467 Direction of reactive power .................................................... 468 Conditioning elements ........................................................... 468 Design......................................................................................... 469 Calculation .................................................................................. 472 Setting instructions ................................................................ 472 Setting example ..................................................................... 473 High active power protection (HAPP) .............................................. 475 Application .................................................................................. 475 Functionality................................................................................ 475 General .................................................................................. 475 Active power calculation ........................................................ 477 Direction of active power ....................................................... 478 Design......................................................................................... 479 Calculation .................................................................................. 482 Setting instructions ................................................................ 482 Setting example ..................................................................... 483 High active and reactive power protection (HARP).......................... 485 Application .................................................................................. 485 Functionality................................................................................ 486 General .................................................................................. 486 Active and reactive power calculation.................................... 486 Direction of reactive power .................................................... 487 Design......................................................................................... 488 Calculation .................................................................................. 490 Setting instructions ................................................................ 490 Setting example ..................................................................... 491 Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1).......... 493 Application .................................................................................. 493 General .................................................................................. 493 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 493

Contents

Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 494 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip............................ 495 Functionality ............................................................................... 495 General.................................................................................. 495 Sudden change in current calculation ................................... 496 Design ........................................................................................ 496 Calculation .................................................................................. 497 Setting instructions ................................................................ 497 Setting example..................................................................... 498 Sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC) ...... 500 Application .................................................................................. 500 Functionality ............................................................................... 500 Design ........................................................................................ 500 Calculation .................................................................................. 502 Setting instructions ................................................................ 502 Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV) ...................... 503 Application .................................................................................. 503 Functionality ............................................................................... 503 General.................................................................................. 503 Sudden change in voltage calculation ................................... 503 Design ........................................................................................ 504 Calculation .................................................................................. 505 Setting instructions ................................................................ 505 Overvoltage protection (OVP).......................................................... 507 Application .................................................................................. 507 Functionality ............................................................................... 507 General.................................................................................. 507 Votage calculation ................................................................. 508 Design ........................................................................................ 508 Calculation .................................................................................. 510 Setting instructions ................................................................ 510 Setting example..................................................................... 510 Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)............................ 513 Application .................................................................................. 513 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 513 Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 514 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip............................ 514 Functionality ............................................................................... 515 Design ........................................................................................ 516 Calculation .................................................................................. 517 Setting instructions ................................................................ 517 Setting example..................................................................... 518 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) ............................................... 520 Application .................................................................................. 520 Functionality ............................................................................... 520 Design ........................................................................................ 521 Calculation .................................................................................. 523 Setting instructions ................................................................ 523 Setting example..................................................................... 523 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) ......................................... 526 Application .................................................................................. 526 Functionality ............................................................................... 526 General.................................................................................. 526

Contents

Current calculation................................................................. 526 Conditioning elements ........................................................... 526 Design......................................................................................... 526 Calculation .................................................................................. 528 Setting instructions ................................................................ 528

Chapter 14 Data communication ................................................... 531

Remote end data communication .................................................... 532 Application .................................................................................. 532 General .................................................................................. 532 Design......................................................................................... 532 Fibre optical module DCM-FOM ................................................. 534 Application ............................................................................. 534 Design ................................................................................... 535 Calculation ............................................................................. 537 Galvanic interface ....................................................................... 537 Application ............................................................................. 537 Design ................................................................................... 540 Short range galvanic module DCM-SGM ................................... 541 Application ............................................................................. 541 Short range fibre optical module DCM-SFOM ............................ 542 Application ............................................................................. 542 Co-directional G.703 galvanic interface DCM-G.703.................. 545 Application ............................................................................. 545 Carrier module ............................................................................ 545 Application ............................................................................. 545 Design ................................................................................... 546 Serial communication....................................................................... 547 Serial communication, SPA ....................................................... 547 Application ............................................................................. 547 Functionality .......................................................................... 548 Design ................................................................................... 548 Calculations ........................................................................... 549 Serial communication, IEC (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)............. 549 Application ............................................................................. 549 Functionality .......................................................................... 551 Design ................................................................................... 551 Calculation ............................................................................. 553 Serial communication, LON ........................................................ 555 Application ............................................................................. 555 Functionality .......................................................................... 555 Design ................................................................................... 555 Calculations ........................................................................... 556 Serial communication modules................................................... 556 SPA/IEC ................................................................................ 556 LON ....................................................................................... 557

Chapter 15 Hardware modules ...................................................... 559

Contents

Platform ........................................................................................... 560 General ....................................................................................... 560 Platform configuration................................................................. 560 3/4x19" platform.......................................................................... 561 1/2x19" platform.......................................................................... 562 Transformer module (TRM) ............................................................. 563 A/D module (ADM)........................................................................... 566 Main processing module (MPM) ...................................................... 568 Input/Output modules ...................................................................... 570 General ....................................................................................... 570 Binary input module (BIM) .......................................................... 572 Binary output module (BOM) ...................................................... 573 Binary I/O module (IOM)............................................................. 575 Power supply module (PSM) ........................................................... 577 mA input module (MIM) ................................................................... 578 Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI) ............................ 579 Application .................................................................................. 579 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI).............................................. 581 Application .................................................................................. 581 Design ........................................................................................ 581 LED indication function (HL, HLED) ........................................... 582 Application ............................................................................. 582 Functionality .......................................................................... 582 Calculation............................................................................. 593 Serial communication modules (SCM) ............................................ 594 Design, SPA/IEC ........................................................................ 594 Design, LON ............................................................................... 594 Data communication modules (DCM).............................................. 595

Contents

About this chapter

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
About this chapter This chapter introduces you to the manual as such.

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1
1.1

Introduction to the application manual

About the complete set of manuals for a terminal
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of four different manuals:

Application manual

Technical reference manual

Installation and commissioning manual

Operators manual

en01000044.vsd

The Application Manual (AM) contains descriptions, such as application and functionality descriptions as well as setting calculation examples sorted per function. The application manual should be used when designing and engineering the protection terminal to find out when and for what a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings and creating configurations. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains technical descriptions, such as function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameter tables and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during the normal service phase. The Operator's Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection terminal during normal service (after commissioning and before periodic maintenance tests). The operator's manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection terminal. The manual can also be used as a reference if a periodic test is performed. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing a directional test. The chapters and sections are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection terminal should be installed and commissioned.

1.2

About the application manual

The application manual contains the following chapters: The chapter General describes the terminal in general. The chapter Common functions describes the common functions in the terminal. The chapter Line distance describes the line distance functions in the terminal.

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

The chapter Current describes the current protection functions. The chapter Voltage describes the voltage protection functions. The chapter Power system supervision describes the power system supervision functions. The chapter Monitoring describes the monitoring functions. The chapter Metering describes the metering functions. The chapter System protection and control functionsdescribes the system protection and control functions. The chapter Data communication describes the data communication and the associated hardware. The chapter Hardware modules describes the different hardware modules.

1.3
1.3.1

Intended audience
General The application manual is addressing the system engineer/technical responsible who is responsible for specifying the application of the terminal. Requirements The system engineer/technical responsible must have a good knowledge about protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protection.

1.3.2

1.4

Related documents
Documents related to REL 511*2.5 Operator's manual Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyer's guide Identity number 1MRK 506 165-UEN 1MRK 506 167-UEN 1MRK 506 166-UEN 1MRK 506 168-UEN 1MRK 506 164-BEN

1.5

Revision notes
Revision B Description Minor updates in chapter: Common functions/Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Line differential/Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL) Hardware/ Main processing module (MPM)

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.6

Glossary

AC ACrv2 A/D converter ADBS AIM ANSI ASCT ASD AWG BIM BLKDEL BOM BR BS BSR BST BT C34.97 CAN CAP 531 CB CBM CCITT

Alternating Current Setting A for programmable overvoltage IDMT curve, step 2 Analog to Digital converter Amplitude dead-band supervision Analog input module American National Standards Institute Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive Signal Detection American Wire Gauge standard Binary input module Block of delayed fault clearing Binary output module Binary transfer receive over LDCM British Standard Binary Signal Receive (SMT) over LDCM Binary Signal Transmit (SMT) over LDCM Binary Transfer Transmit over LDCM

Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. Current circuit supervision Controller area network emulation module Communication interface module Combined Mega Pulses Per Second Close-Open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals

CCS CEM CIM CMPPS CO cycle Co-directional Contra-directional

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

CPU CR CRC CRL CS CT CT1L1 CT1L1NAM CT2L3 CT2N

Central Processor Unit Carrier Receive Cyclic Redundancy Check POR carrier for WEI logic Carrier send Current transformer Input to be used for transmit CT group 1line L1 in signal matrix tool Signal name for CT-group 1line L1 in signal matrix tool Input to be used for transmission of CT-group 2 line L3 to remote end Input to be used for transmission of CT-group 2 neutral N to remote end.

CVT DAR db DBDL DBLL DC DIN-rail DIP-switch DLLB DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC ENGV1 ENMULT EMI ESD FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus FPGA FRRATED FSMPL

Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing dead band Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct Current Rail conforming to DIN standard Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Enable execution of step one Current multiplier used when THOL is used for two or more lines Electro magnetic interference Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Field Programmable Gate Array Rated system frequency Physical channel number for frequency calculation

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

G.703

Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Standard for pulse code modulation of analog signals on digital lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear. Generic Object Orientated Substation Event Global positioning system GOOSE Receive (interlock) High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Fibre connector receiver Human-Machine Interface High-Speed Auto-Reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Absolute hysteresis for over and under frequency operation Absolute hysteresis for signal magnitude in percentage of Ubase Relative hysteresis for signal magnitude Overexcitation level of absolute hysteresis as a percentage Overexcitation level of relative hysteresis as a percentage Magnitude of the bias current common to L1, L2 and L3 Integrating dead-band supervision Minimum inverse delay time Inverse delay minimum time in seconds Operational restrictive characteristic, section 1 sensitivity, multiple Ibase Magnitude of negative sequence differential current Unrestrained prot. limit multiple of winding1 rated current Amount of compensated charging current International Electrical Committee

G.711 GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GR HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC HysAbsFreq HysAbsMagn HysRelMagn HystAbs HystRel IBIAS IDBS IDMT IDMTtmin IdMin IDNSMAG Idunre ICHARGE IEC IEC 186A IEC 60044-6 IEC 60870-5-103 IEEE IEEE 802.12

IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

IEEE P1386.1

PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical Electro magnetic force Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Real current component, phase L1 Imaginary current component, phase L1 Negative sequence current must be higher than this to be used Present magnitude of residual current Magnitude of instantaneous value Instance name in signal matrix tool Binary Input/Output module Imaginary part of positive sequence current Real component of positve sequence current Enclosure protects against solid foreign objects 12.5mm in diameter and larger but no protection against ingression of liquid according to IEC60529. Equivalent to NEMA type 1. Enclosure protects against solid foreign objects 1.0mm in diameter or larger but no protection against ingression of liquid according to IEC60529. Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) according to IEC 60529. Dust protected. Protected against splashing water. Equivalent to NEMA type 12. Block of the function at high phase current in percentage of base Block of current reversal function Activation of current reversal logic International Telecommunications Union Time multiplier in IDMT mode Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Local area network

EMF IED I-GIS IL1RE IL1IM IminNegSeq INAMPL INSTMAGN INSTNAME IOM IPOSIM IPOSRE IP 20

IP 40

IP 54

Ip>block IRVBLK IRV ITU k2 kForIEEE LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD LED LNT LON

Liquid chrystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

MAGN MCB MCM MIM MIP MPPS MPM MV MVB MVsubEna NegSeqROA NSANGLE NUMSTEP NX OCO cycle PCI PCM PISA PLD PMC POTT PPS Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT R1A R1B RADSS RASC RCA REVAL RFPP

Magnitude of deadband value Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milliampere Input Module

Main processing module Medium voltage Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains Enable substitution Operate angle for internal/external negative sequence fault discriminator. Angle between local and remote negative sequence currents Number of steps that shall be activated

Open-Close-Open cycle Peripheral Component Interconnect Pulse code modulation Process interface for sensors & actuators Programmable Logic Device

Permissive overreach transfer trip Precise Positioning System Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Source resistance A (near end) Source resistance B (far end) Resource Allocation Decision Support System Synchrocheck relay, from COMBIFLEX range. Functionality characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance of phase-to-phase faults

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RS530 RTU RTC SA SC SCS SLM SMA connector SMS SPA SPGGIO SRY ST3UO STL1 ST SVC t1 1Ph t1 3PhHS tAutoContWait tCBCLosedMin tExtended t1 THL THOL tInhibit tPulse TP tReporting tRestore

Resistance of phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 A generic connector specification that can be used to support RS422, V.35 and X.21 and others Remote Terminal Unit Real Time Clock Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication Sub Miniature version A connector Station monitoring system Strmberg Protection Acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Single Point Gxxxxx Generic Input/Output Switch for CB ready condition RMS voltage at neutral point Start signal from phase L1 Switch or push-button to trip Static VAr compensation Open time for shot 1, single phase Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing three phase Wait period after close command before next shot Minimum time that the circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is permitted Open time extended by this value if Extended t1 is true Thermal Overload Line cable Thermal overload Reset reclosing time for inhibit Pulse length for single command outputs Logic Pulse Timer Cycle time for reporting of counter value Restore time delay

Introduction to the application manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

TCS TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS tReclaim TRIPENHA TRIPRES TRL1 truck tSync TTRIP UBase U/I-PISA UNom UPS UTC

Trip circuit supervision Type of bayonet connector, like BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC Duration of the reclaim time Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Trip by restrained differential protection Trip signal from phase 1 Isolator with wheeled mechanism Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK Estimated time to trip (in minutes) Base setting for phase-phase voltage in kilovolts Process interface components that delivers measured voltage and current values Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer Measured signal magnitude (voltage protection) Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals Same as RS449. A generic connector specification that can be used to support RS422 and others Volts Direct Current Week-end infeed logic Voltage transformer Block of trip from weak-end infeed logic by an open breaker Source reactance A (near end) Source reactance B (far end) Positive sequence line reactance A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Winding reactance in primary ohms Zero sequence line reactance Forward overreaching zone used in the communication scheme Carrier Receive Signal Trip from the communication scheme Alarm Signal LIne-check Guard

V.36 VDC WEI VT VTSZ X1A X1B X1L X.21 XLeak XOL ZCOM-CACC ZCOM-CR ZCOM-TRIP ZCOM-LCG

10

About this chapter

Chapter 2 General

Chapter 2 General
About this chapter This chapter describes the terminal in general.

11

Features

Chapter 2 General

Features
Versatile local human-machine interface (HMI) Simultaneous dual protocol serial communication facilities Extensive self-supervision with internal event recorder Time synchronization with 1 ms resolution Four independent groups of complete setting parameters Powerful software tool-box for monitoring, evaluation and user configuration Full scheme phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth distance protection with: general fault criteria, with or without the optional phase preference logic for high impedance earthed networks three to five zones

12

Functions

Chapter 2 General

Functions
Line distanceImpedance General fault criteria, impedance and current based (GFCzi) General fault criteria, impedance and current based, with phase preference logic (GFCppl-zi) Distance protection (ZM) Simplified impedance settings (SIS) Power swing detection (PSD) Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL) Radial feeder protection (PAP) Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF) Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)

Current Instantaneous non-directional phase overcurrent protection (IOCph) Instantaneous non-directional residual overcurrent protection (IOCr) Definite time non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOCph) Definite time non-directional residual overcurrent protection (TOCr) Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2) Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3) Time delayed non-directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) Time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (TEFdir) Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4) Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1) Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2) Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC) Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Thermal overload protection (THOL) Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Voltage Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

13

Functions

Chapter 2 General

Time delayed overvoltge protection (TOV) Time delayed residual overvoltage protection (TOVr)

Power system supervision Broken conductor check (BRC) Loss of voltage check (LOV) Overload supervision (OVLD) Dead line detection (DLD)

System protection and control Pole slip protection (PSP) Low active power protection (LAPP) Low active and reactive power protection (LARP) High active power protection (HAPP) High active and reactive power protection (HARP) Sudden change in phase current protection (SCC1) Sudden change in residual current protection (SCRC) Sudden change in voltage protection (SCV) Overvoltage protection (OVP) Undercurrent protection (UCP) Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Secondary system supervision Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU) Fuse failure supervision, negative sequence (FUSEns) Fuse failure supervision, zero sequence (FUSEzs) Fuse failure supervision, du/dt and di/dt based (FUSEdb) Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Control Single command, 16 signals (CD) Synchro-check and energizing-check, single circuit breaker (SYN1) Synchro-check and energizing-check, double circuit breakers (SYN12)

14

Functions

Chapter 2 General

Synchro-check with synchronizing and energizing-check, double circuit breaker (SYNsy1) Synchro-check with synchronizing and energizing-check, double circuit breaker (SYNsy12) Autorecloser - 1- and/or 3-phase, single circuit breaker (AR1-1/3) Autorecloser - 1- and/or 3-phase, double circuit breakers (AR12-1/3) Autorecloser - 3-phase, single circuit breaker (AR1-3) Autorecloser- 3-phase, double circuit breaker (AR12-3)

Logic Three pole tripping logic (TR01-3) Additional three pole tripping logic (TR02-3) Single, two or three pole tripping logic (TR01-1/2/3) Additional single, two or three pole tripping logic (TR02-1/2/3) Pole discordance logic (PDc) Additional configurable logic blocks (CL2) Communication channel test logic (CCHT) Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12) Multiple command, one fast block with 16 signals (CM1) Multiple command, 79 medium speed blocks each with 16 signals (CM79) Six event counters (CN)

Monitoring Disturbance recorder (DR) Event recorder (ER) Fault locator (FLOC) Trip value recorder (TVR) Increased accuracy of AC input quatities (IMA) Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Metering capabilities

15

Functions

Chapter 2 General

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

Hardware 18 LEDs for extended indication capabilities

Several input/output module options including measuring mA input module (for transducers)

16

Application

Chapter 2 General

Application
The main purpose of the REL 511 terminal is the protection, control and monitoring of overhead lines and cables in high impedance or solidly earthed distribution and sub-transmission networks. Full scheme phase to phase and phase to earth distance protecion is included. The terminal can also be used in transmission networks up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-circuit lines, and where the requirement for tripping is one-, two-, and/or three-pole. The terminal may also be used to provide backup protection for power transformers, busbars, etc.

17

Design

Chapter 2 General

Design
Type tested software and hardware that comply with international standards and ABBs internal design rules together with extensive self monitoring functionality, ensure high reliability of the complete terminal. The terminals closed and partly welded steel case makes it possible to fulfill the stringent EMC requirements. Serial data communication is via optical connections or galvanic RS485. An extensive library of protection, control and monitoring functions is available. This library of functions, together with the flexible hardware design, allows this terminal to be configured to each users own specific requirements. This wide application flexibility makes this product an excellent choice for both new installations and the refurbishment of existing installations.

18

Requirements

Chapter 2 General

5
5.1

Requirements
General
The operation of a protection measuring function is influenced by distortion, and measures need to be taken in the protection to handle this phenomenon. One source of distortion is current transformer saturation. In this protection terminal, measures are taken to allow for a certain amount of CT saturation with maintained correct operation. This protection terminal can allow relatively heavy current transformer saturation. Protection functions are also affected by transients caused by capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) but as this protection terminal has a very effective filter for these transients, the operation is hardly affected at all.

5.2

Voltage transformers
Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used. Capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) should fulfil the requirements according to IEC 186A, Section 20, regarding transients. According to the standard, at a primary voltage drop down to zero, the secondary voltage should drop to less than 10% of the peak pre-fault value before the short circuit within one cycle. The protection terminal has an effective filter for this transient, which gives secure and correct operation with CVTs.

5.3
5.3.1

Current transformers
Classification The performance of the REx 5xx terminal depends on the conditions and the quality of the current signals fed to it. The protection terminal REx 5xx has been designed to permit relatively heavy current transformer saturation with maintained correct operation. To guarantee correct operation, the CTs must be able to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to saturate. To fulfil the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfil the requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below. There are several different ways to specify CTs. Conventional magnetic core CTs are usually specified and manufactured according to some international or national standards, which specify different protection classes as well. However, generally there are three different types of current transformers: high remanence type CT low remanence type CT non remanence type CT

19

Requirements

Chapter 2 General

The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic core without any airgap and a remanent flux might remain for almost infinite time. In this type of transformers the remanence can be up to 70-80% of the saturation flux. Typical examples of high remanence type CT are class P, PX,TPS, TPX according to IEC, class P, X according to BS (old British Standard) and nongapped class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE. The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made with a small airgap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of the saturation flux. The small airgap has only very limited influence on the other properties of the CT. Class PR, TPY according to IEC is low remanence type CTs. The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This type of CT has relatively big airgaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically zero level. At the same time, these airgaps minimize the influence of the DC-component from the primary fault current. The airgaps will also reduce the measuring accuracy in the non-saturated region of operation. Class TPZ according to IEC is a non remanence type CT. The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard is used to specify the CT requirements for REx 5xx. The requirements are also specified according to other standards. 5.3.2 Conditions The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator. The tests have been carried out with an analogue current transformer model with a settable core area, core length, air gap and number of primary and secondary turns. The setting of the current transformer model was representative for current transformers of high remanence and low remanence type. The results are not valid for non remanence type CTs (TPZ). The performances of the protection functions were checked at both symmetrical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time constant of about 120 ms was used in the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase faults were tested in fault locations backward, close up forward and at the zone 1 reach. The protection was checked with regard to directionality, dependability and security. The remanence in the current transformer core has been considered for critical fault cases, for example fault in reverse direction. The requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence. They depend on the performance and economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (e.g. TPY, PR) are used, practically no additional margin is needed. For current transformers of high remanence type (e.g. TPX), the small probability of a fully asymmetrical fault, together with maximum remanence in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations have proved that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90.

20

Requirements

Chapter 2 General

5.3.3

Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance. When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered.

5.3.4

Cable resistance and additional load The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals. This voltage, for an earth fault, is developed in a loop containing the phase and neutral conductor, and relay load. For three-phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor and relay phase load have to be considered. In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resistance for three-phase faults.

5.3.5

General current transformer requirements The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to be detected. The minimum operating current is 20% of the nominal current. The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current that is less than 1% (e.g. class 1.0 or 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning. With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is concerned, and we therefore recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the type in question can be used. The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. Requirements for CTs specified in different ways are given at the end of this section.

5.3.6

Distance protection The current transformers must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than the maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

E al E alreq =

I k max Isn S a R CT + R L + R 2 I pn Ir

(Equation 1)

21

Requirements

Chapter 2 General

E al E alreq =

I kzone1 Isn S k R CT + R L + R I pn I2 r

(Equation 2)

where
Ikmax Ikzone1 Ipn Isn Ir RCT RL Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in forward and reverse faults (A) Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for faults at the end of the zone (A) The rated primary CT current (A) The rated secondary CT current (A) The protection terminal rated current (A) The secondary resistance of the CT () The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (). The loop resistance should be used for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resitance for three-phase faults. This factor is a function of the network frequency and the primary time constant for the dc component in the fault current. a = 2 for the primary time constant Tp 50 ms, 50 and 60 Hz a = 3 for the primary time constant Tp > 50 ms, 50 Hz a = 4 for the primary time constant Tp > 50 ms, 60 Hz k A factor of the network frequency and the primary time constant for the dc component in the fault current for a three-phase fault at the set reach of the zone. The time constant is normally less than 50 ms. k = 4 for the primary time constant Tp 30 ms, 50 and 60 Hz k = 6 for the primary time constant Tp > 30 ms, 50 Hz k = 7 for the primary time constant Tp > 30 ms, 60 Hz

5.3.7

Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to be used with REx 5xx terminals if they fulfil the requirements that correspond to the above specified according to the IEC60044-6 standard. From the different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT. It is then possible to compare this to the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq and judge if the CT fulfils the requirements. The requirements according to some other standards are specified below. Current transformer according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR A CT according to IEC60044-1 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max. The value of the E2max is approximately equal to Eal according to IEC60044-6. Eal E2max

22

Requirements

Chapter 2 General

The current transformers must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max that fulfills the following: E2max > maximum of Ealreq Current transformer according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC 60044-6, class TPS (and old British standard, class X) CTs according to these classes are specified by the rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee (or limiting secondary voltage Ual for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than Eal according to IEC60044-6. It is not possible to give a general relation between the Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is 80 to 85% of the Eal value. Therefore, the rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq for a CT specified according to these classes can be estimated to: Ealreq 1.2 x Eknee The current transformer must have a rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee that fulfills the following: 1.2 x Eknee > maximum of Ealreq Current transformer according to ANSI/IEEE A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is specified in a little different way. For example a CT of class C has a specified secondary terminal voltage UANSI. There is a few standardized value of UANSI (e.g. for a C400 the UANSI is 400V). The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI for a CT specified according to ANSI/IEEE can be estimated as follows: EalANSI = | 20 x Isn x RCT + UANSI | = | 20 x Isn x RCT + 20 x Isn x ZbANSI | where
ZbANSI UANSI The impedance (i.e. complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C class () The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)

The CT requirements are fulfilled if: EalANSI > maximum of Ealreq Often an ANSI/IEEE CT also has a specified knee-point voltage UkneeANSI. This is graphically defined from the excitation curve. The knee-point according to ANSI/IEEE has normally a lower value than the knee-point according to BS. The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI for a CT specified according to ANSI/IEEE can be estimated to: EalANSI 1.3 x UkneeANSI The current transformers must have a knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that fulfills the following: 1.3 x UkneeANSI > maximum of Ealreq

23

Serial communication

Chapter 2 General

6
6.1

Serial communication
SPA
Both plastic fibres and glass fibres can be used for the communication in the station. For distances up to 30 m, plastic fibres and for distances up to 500 m, glass fibres are suitable. Glass and plastic fibres can be mixed in the same loop. The transmitter and reciever connectors at the bus connection unit has to be of corresponding types, i.e. glass or plastic connector. See also Hardware modules in the Technical reference manual for technical data on the fibres. For communication on longer distances, telephone modems are used. The modems must be Hayes-compatible ones using AT commands with automatic answering (AA) capability. The telephone network must comply with the ITU (CCITT) standards. For connection of the optical fibre loop to a PC or a telephone modem, an opto/electrical converter is required. The converter is supplied by ABB.

6.2

LON
The protection terminal can be used in a substation control system (SCS). For that purpose, connect the LON communication link to a LON Star Coupler via optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plastic with specification according to Hardware modules in the Technical reference manual. A PC can be used as a station HMI. The PC must be equipped with a communication card for LON (e.g. Echelon PCLTA card). To configure the nodes in a SCS, the LON Network Tool is needed.

6.3

IEC 870-5-103
As an alternative to SPA communication, the terminals can use the IEC 8705103 standard protocol for protection functions. The terminals communicate with a primary station level system. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point to point principle, where the terminal is a slave. The master must have a program that can interpret the IEC 8705103 communication messages. The IEC communication link is connected via optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plastic with specification according to Hardware modules in the Technical reference manual. For more detailed requirements refer to the IEC 8705103 standard.

24

Terminal identification and base values

Chapter 2 General

7
7.1

Terminal identification and base values

Application
Serial number and software version are stored in the terminal. The identification names and numbers for the station, the object and the terminal (unit) itself can be entered into the terminal by the customer. Also the ordering numbers of included modules are stored in the terminal. This information can be read on the local HMI or when communicating with the terminal through a PC or with SMS/SCS. The base currents, voltages and rated frequency must be set since the values affect many functions. The input transformers ratio must be set as well. The ratio for the current and the voltage transformer automatically affects the measuring functions in the terminal. The internal clock is used for time tagging of: Internal events Disturbance reports Events in a disturbance report Events transmitted to the SCS substation control system

This implies that the internal clock is very important. The clock can be synchronized (see Time synchronization) to achieve higher accuracy of the time tagging. Without synchronization, the internal clock is useful for comparisons among events within the REx 5xx terminal.

7.2

Calculations
Most commonly the setting values of the high voltage power objects are calculated in primary values. This is based on the fact that all power system data like voltages, currents and impedances are given in primary values. In the terminal, the settings are made with reference to secondary values i.e. the values as seen by the terminal on the secondary side of the main voltage- and current transformers. Uxr and Ixr (x = 1-5) are the rated voltage and current values for the five voltage and five current input transformers within the REx 5xx terminal. The values of Uxr and Ixr are factory preset and should normally not be changed by the user since they are related to the delivered hardware. They are used only if the transformer input module (TRM) is replaced with a module that have different rated values than the one originally delivered in the terminal. Example: The terminal is delivered with 1A current transformers, but later changed to 5A current transformers. In this case it is necessary to change all the relevant input rated quantities for currents from 1A to 5A. This can only be done from the local HMI. The UxScale and IxScale are the actual ratio for the main measuring transformers for the protected object. The terminal only uses these settings to calculate the primary quantities and to show these quantities as service values, e.g. primary phasors in the local HMI or thru CAP 540 or SMS 510. They are also used by CAP 540 to visualize voltage and current waveforms in primary values.They do not affect the operation (trip or start) of any protection function.

25

Terminal identification and base values

Chapter 2 General

Uxb and Ixb define the secondary base voltage and current values, used to define the per-unit base of the terminal. The settings are made in percent of the Uxb and Ixb values. The only recommended way to use the base value settings Uxb and Ixb is to harmonize the per-unit base values of the terminal with the actual secondary rated values of the primary measuring transformers. The base values only affect the settings of current functions and voltage functions, not impedance based functions e.g. ZM, PHS and GFC. The impedance-based functions are set in secondary ohms. For more details on the setting calculations, see each function. 7.2.1 Example 1
Usprim

~
Issec

Isprim

~
Ussec Ur Ir
en03000164.vsd

REx 5xx

where: Usprim Isprim Ussec Issec Ur Ir is primary setting value of the voltage is primary setting value of the current is secondary setting value of the voltage is secondary setting value of the current is rated voltage of the terminal is rated current of the terminal

Figure 1:

Example system

Assume the following values: Ur = 110V, Ir = 1A, Usprim = 60kV phase to earth, and VT-ratio = Isprim = 1500A

CT-ratio =

1000A ---------------1A

110kV ---------------110V

26

Terminal identification and base values

Chapter 2 General

Current settings Ixscale = CT-ratio = 1000/1 = 1000 In this case the rated current of the terminal and the rated secondary current of the main CT match. The base value is set equal to the rated value.
Ixb = 1A

Isprim Issec = ----------------Ixscale

(Equation 3)

1500A - = 1.5A Issec = ---------------1000

(Equation 4)

A current setting value, e.g. IP>>, is given in percentage of the secondary base current value,Ixb, associated with the current transformer input Ix:

I ssec -% IP>> = 100 ---------Ixb

(Equation 5)

1.5 - % = 150% IP>> = 100 ------1

(Equation 6)

Voltage settings Uxscale = VT-ratio = 110 kV/110 V = 1000 The voltage levels are normally given as system (phase to phase) voltage, while the input transformers of the terminal are connected phase to earth. A Ur of 110V corresponds to a Uxr of 110/3 63.5V. In this case the rated voltage of the terminal and the rated secondary voltage of the main VT match. The base value is set equal to the rated values.
Uxb= 63.5V

U sprim Ussec = -----------------Uxscale

(Equation 7)

27

Terminal identification and base values

Chapter 2 General

60kV - = 60V Ussec = ---------------1000

(Equation 8)

A voltage setting value, e.g. UPE<, is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value,Uxb, associated with the voltage transformer input Ux:

Ussec -% UP< = 100 ---------Uxb

(Equation 9)

60 - % UP< = 100 -------63.5

(Equation 10)

7.2.2

Example 2
Assume the following values: Ur = 110V, Ir = 1A Usprim = 60kV phase to earth, and VT-ratio = Isprim = 1500A

CT-ratio =

1000A ---------------2A

110kV ---------------100V

Current settings Ixscale = CT-ratio = 1000/2 = 500 In this case the rated current of the terminal and the secondary rated current of the main CT do not match. This will have some implications on the setting procedure. Not using base values The base value is set equal to the rated value of the terminal.
Ixb = 1A

1500A - = 3A Issec = ---------------500

according to equation 3.

28

Terminal identification and base values

Chapter 2 General

This corresponds to 150% of the rated CT secondary current and 300% of the terminal rated current. A current setting value, e.g. IP>>, is given in percentage of Ixb.

3 - % = 300 % IP>> = 100 ------1

according to equation 5.

Using base values The base value is set equal to the rated secondary value of the main CT.
Ixb = 2A

1500A - = 3A Issec = ---------------500

according to equation 3

This corresponds to 150% of the rated CT secondary current. As Ixb is selected equal to the rated CT secondary current, the value (150%) can be directly entered as setting, see below.

3 - % = 150 % IP>> = 100 ------2

according to equation 5

Voltage settings Uxscale = VT-ratio = 110 kV/100 V = 1100 An Ur of 110 V corresponds to an Uxr of 110/3 63.5V. The rated secondary voltage of the VT corresponds to 100/3 57.7V. In this case the rated voltage of the terminal and the secondary rated voltage of the main VT do not match. This will have some implications on the setting procedure. Not using base values The base value is set equal to the rated value of the terminal.
Uxb = 63.5V

60kV= 54.5V Ussec = ---------------1100

according to equation 7.

29

Terminal identification and base values

Chapter 2 General

This corresponds to 94% of the rated VT secondary voltage and 86% of the terminal rated voltage. A voltage setting value, e.g. UPE<, is given in percentage of Uxb:

54.5 - % = 86 % UP< = 100 -------63.5

according to equation 9.

Using base values The base value is set equal to the rated secondary value of the main VT.
Uxb = 57.7V

60kV - = 54.5V Ussec = ---------------1100

according to equation 7.

This corresponds to 94% of the rated VT secondary voltage. As Uxb is selected equal to the rated VT secondary voltage, the value (94%) can be directly entered as setting, see below.

54.5 - % = 94 % UP< = 100 -------57.7

according to equation 9.

30

About this chapter

Chapter 3 Common functions

Chapter 3 Common functions

About this chapter This chapter presents the common functions in the terminal.

31

Real-time clock with external time synchronzation (TIME)

Chapter 3 Common functions

Real-time clock with external time synchronzation (TIME)

Application
Use time synchronisation to achieve a common time base for the terminals in a protection and control system. This makes comparision of events and disturbance data between all terminals in the system possible. Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances is an excellent help when evaluating faults. Without time synchronisation, only the events within the terminal can be compared to one another. With time synchronisation, events and disturbances within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared during an evaluation.

1.1

1.2

Functionality
Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the terminal as a telegram message including date and time, or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the terminals. The REx 5xx terminal has its own internal clock with date, hour, minute, second and millisecond. It has a resolution of 1 ms. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098. Any change between summer and winter time must be handled manually or through external time synchronization. The clock is powered by a capacitor, to bridge interruptions in power supply without malfunction. The internal clock is used for time-tagging disturbances, events in Substation monitoring system (SMS) and Substation control system (SCS), and internal events.

1.3

Calculations
The time is set with year, month, day and time. Refer to the Installation and commissioning manual for information on the setting procedure. When the source of time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter is called TimeSyncSource. The time synchronisation source can also be set from the CAP tool. The setting parameter is then called SYNCSCR. The setting alternatives are: None (no synchronisation) LON SPA IEC Minute pulse positive flank Minute pulse negative flank

32

Real-time clock with external time synchronzation (TIME)

Chapter 3 Common functions

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronisation is called TIME-MINSYNC. The internal time can be set manually down to the minute level, either via the local HMI or via any of the communication ports. The time synchronisation fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds). If no clock synchronisation is active, the time can be set down to milliseconds.

33

Four parameter setting groups (GRP)

Chapter 3 Common functions

2
2.1

Four parameter setting groups (GRP)

Application
Different conditions in networks of different voltage levels require high adaptability of the used protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity requirements. Protection units operate with higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimised regarding the conditions in power system. The operational departments can plan different operating conditions for the primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare in advance for the necessary optimised and pre-tested settings for different protection functions. Four different groups of setting parameters are available in the REx 5xx terminals. Any of them can be activated automatically through up to four different programmable binary inputs by means of external control signals.

2.2

Functionality
Select a setting group by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the GRP function block. Each input of the function block is configurable to any of the binary inputs in the terminal. Configuration must be performed by using the CAP configuration tool. Use external control signals to activate a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse longer than 200 ms. More than one input may be activated simultaneously. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.

ACTIVATE GROUP 4 ACTIVATE GROUP 3 ACTIVATE GROUP 2 +RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1 IOx-Bly1 IOx-Bly2 IOx-Bly3 IOx-Bly4 GRP--ACTGRP1 GRP--ACTGRP2 GRP--ACTGRP3 GRP--ACTGRP4

34

Four parameter setting groups (GRP)

Chapter 3 Common functions

2.3

Design
The GRP function block has four functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored within the terminal. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Four functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that continuous information on active setting group is available.

35

Setting restriction of HMI (SRH)

Chapter 3 Common functions

Setting restriction of HMI (SRH)

Note!
The HMI--BLOCKSET functional input must be configured to the selected binary input before setting the setting restriction function in operation. Carefully read the instructions.

3.1

Application
Use the setting restriction function to prevent unauthorized setting changes and to control when setting changes are allowed. Unpermitted or uncoordinated changes by unauthorized personnel may influence the security of people and cause severe damage to primary and secondary power circuits. By adding a key switch connected to a binary input a simple setting change control circuit can be built simply allowing only authorized keyholders to make setting changes from the local HMI.

3.2

Functionality
The restriction of setting via the local HMI can be activated from the local HMI only. Activating the local HMI setting restriction prevent unauthorized changes of the terminal settings or configuration. The HMI-BLOCKSET functional input can be configured only to one of the available binary inputs of the terminal. The terminal is delivered with the default configuration HMI--BLOCKSET connected to NONE-NOSIGNAL. The configuration can be made from the local HMI only, see the Installation and comissioning manual. The function permits remote changes of settings and reconfiguration through the serial communication ports. The restriction of setting from remote can be activated from the local HMI only. Refer to the Technical reference manual for SPA serial communication parameters. All other functions of the local human-machine communication remain intact. This means that an operator can read disturbance reports, setting values, the configuration of different logic circuits and other available information.

36

Setting restriction of HMI (SRH)

Chapter 3 Common functions

R E x 5 xx

+ S W IT C H W IT H K E Y

H M I--B L O C K S E T S e ttin g R e s tric t= B lo c k &

R E S T R IC T S E T T IN G S

e n 0 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 .vs d

Figure 2:

Connection and logic diagram for the BLOCKSET function

37

I/O system configurator (IOP)

Chapter 3 Common functions

4
4.1

I/O system configurator (IOP)

Application
The I/O system configurator must be used in order to recognize included modules and to create internal adress mappings between modules and protections and other functions.

4.2

Functionality
The I/O system configurator is used to add, remove or move I/O modules in the REx 5xx terminals. To configure means to connect the function blocks that represent each I/O module (BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM and MIM) to a function block for the I/O positions (IOP1) that represent the physical slot in the rack. Available I/O modules are: BIM, Binary Input Module with 16 binary input channels. BOM, Binary Output Module with 24 binary output channels. IOM, Input/Output Module with 8 binary input and 12 binary output channels. MIM, mA Input Module with six analog input channels. DCM, Data Communication Module. The only software configuration for this module is the I/O Position input.

An REx 5xx terminal houses different numbers of modules depending which kind of modules chosen. The 1/1 of 19-inch size casing houses a maximum of modules. But when Input/Output- or Output modules are included, the maximum of these modules are. The maximum number of mA Input modules are also limited to .

It is possible to fit modules of different types in any combination in a terminal, but the total maximum numbers of modules must be considered. Each I/O-module can be placed in any CAN-I/O slot in the casing with one exception. The DCM-module has a fixed slot position that depends on the size of the casing. To add, remove or move modules in the terminal, the reconfiguration of the terminal must be done from the graphical configuration CAP tool. Users refer to the CAN-I/O slots by the physical slot numbers, which also appear in the terminal drawings. If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual configuration in the terminal, an error output is activated on the function block, which can be treated as an event or alarm. 4.2.1 I/O position All necessary configuration is done in the configuration CAP tool. The Snn outputs are connected to the POSITION inputs of the I/O Modules and MIMs.

38

I/O system configurator (IOP)

Chapter 3 Common functions

4.2.2

Configuration The I/O-configuration can only be performed from CAP tool, the graphical configuration tool. To configure from the graphical tool: First, set the function selector for the logical I/O module to the type of I/O module that is used, BIM, BOM, IOM, MIM, IOPSM or DCM. Secondly, connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module to a slot output of the IOP function block.

39

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

5
5.1
5.1.1

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Application
Application Different protection, control, and monitoring functions within the REx 5xx terminals are quite independent as far as their configuration in the terminal is concerned. The user cannot enter and change the basic algorithms for different functions, because they are located in the digital signal processors and extensively type tested. The user can configure different functions in the terminals to suit special requirements for different applications. For this purpose, additional logic circuits are needed to configure the terminals to meet user needs and also to build in some special logic circuits, which use different logic gates and timers. Logical function blocks are executed according to their execution serial numbers. To get an optimal solution select their execution serial numbers in consequtive sequence.

5.2
5.2.1

Functionality
Inverter (INV) The INV function block is used to invert the input boolean variable. The function block (figure 3) has one input designated IVnn-INPUT where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each INV circuit has one output IVnn-OUT.

IVnn

INPUT

OUT

99000021.vsd

Figure 3:
Table 1:
INPUT 1 0

Function block diagram of the inverter (INV) function

Truth table for the INV function block
OUT 0 1

40

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

5.2.2

Controllable gate (GT) The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass or not depending on a setting. The function block (figure 4) has one input, designated GTnn-INPUT, where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each GT circuit has one output, GTnn-OUT. Each gate further has a Operation On/Off which controls if the INPUT is passed to the OUT or not.

G Tnn

INPUT Operation = On &

OUT

xx00000530.vsd
Figure 4: Function block diagram of the controllable gate (GT) function

The output signal from the GT function block is set to 1 if the input signal is 1 and Operation = On elsewhere it is set to 0. See truth table below.
Table 2:
INPUT 0 1 0 1

Truth table for the GT function block

Operation Off Off On On OUT 0 0 0 1

5.2.3

OR OR function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The function block (figure 5) has six inputs, designated Onnn-INPUTm, where nnn presents the serial number of the block, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each OR circuit has two outputs, Onnn-OUT and Onnn-NOUT (inverted).

41

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

O nnn

IN PU T1 IN PU T2 IN PU T3 IN PU T4 IN PU T5 IN PU T6 1 1 O U T N O U T

xx00000514.vsd
Figure 5: Function block diagram of the OR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if any of the inputs (INPUT1-6) is 1. See truth table below.
Table 3:
INPUT1 0 0 0 ... 1 1

Truth table for the OR function block

INPUT2 0 0 0 ... 1 1 INPUT3 0 0 0 ... 1 1 INPUT4 0 0 0 ... 1 1 INPUT5 0 0 1 ... 1 1 INPUT6 0 1 0 ... 0 1 OUT 0 1 1 1 1 1 NOUT 1 0 0 0 0 0

5.2.4

AND AND function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The function block (figure 6) has four inputs (one of them inverted), designated Annn-INPUTm (Annn-INPUT4N is inverted), where nnn presents the serial number of the block, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each AND circuit has two outputs, Annn-OUT and Annn-NOUT (inverted).

42

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

Annn INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 1 NOUT & OUT

xx00000515.vsd

Figure 6:

Function block diagram of the AND function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the inputs INPUT1-3 are 1 and INPUT4N is 0. See truth table below.
Table 4:
INPUT1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Truth table for the AND function block

INPUT2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 INPUT3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 INPUT4N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 NOUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

5.2.5

Timer The function block TM timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer (figure 7) has a settable time delay TMnn-T between 0.00 and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The input signal for each time delay block has the designation TMnn-INPUT, where nn

43

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

presents the serial number of the logic block. The output signals of each time delay block are TMnn-ON and TMnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timer delayed on pick-up and the second one to the timer delayed on drop-out. Both timers within one block always have the same setting.

TMnn INPUT OFF

ON

Time delay 0.00-60.00s

xx00000523.vsd

Figure 7:

Function block diagram of the Timer function

The function block TL timer (figure 8) with extended maximum time delay at pick-up and at drop-out, is identical with the TM timer. The difference is the longer time delay TLnn-T, settable between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.

TLnn INPUT OFF

ON

Time delay 0.0-90000.0s

xx00000526.vsd

Figure 8:

Function block diagram of the TimerLong function

44

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at output OFF when the input variable changes from 1 to 0 in accordance with the time pulse diagram, figure 9. The output OFF signal is set to 1 immediately when the input variable changes from 0 to 1.

IN PU T OF F

T=3s 1 0 1 0

10

xx00000528.vsd

Figure 9:

Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on drop-out with preset time T = 3 s

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at output ON when the input variable changes from 0 to 1 in accordance with the time pulse diagram, figure 10. The output ON signal returns immediately when the input variable changes from 1 to 0.

IN PU T

T=3s 1 0 1

ON

10

xx00000529.vsd

Figure 10:

Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on pick-up with preset time T = 3 s

If more timers than available in the terminal are needed, it is possible to use pulse timers with AND or OR logics. Figure 11 shows an application example of how to realize a timer delayed on pick-up. Figure 12 shows the realization of a timer delayed on drop-out. Note that the resolution of the set time must be 0.2 s, if the connected logic has a cycle time of 200 ms.

45

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

AND FIXED-ON INPUT1 OUT INPUT2 NOUT INPUT3 INPUT4N

Pulse 0.00-60.00s INPUT T OUT NOUT

xx00000533.vsd

Figure 11:

Realization example of a timer delayed on pick-up

FIXED-OFF INV INPUT OUT Pulse INPUT T OUT

OR INPUT1 OUT INPUT2 NOUT INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6

0.00-60.00s

xx00000534.vsd

Figure 12: 5.2.6

Realization example of a timer delayed on drop-out

Timer settable through HMI/SMS/PST The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer (figure 13) has a settable time delay TSnn-T between 0.00 and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. It also has an Operation setting On, Off which controls the operation of the timer.The input signal for each time delay block has the designation TSnn-INPUT, where nn presents the serial number of the logic block. The output signals of each time delay block are TSnn-ON and TSnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timer delayed on pick-up and the second one to the timer delayed on drop-out. Both timers within one block always have the same setting.

46

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

TSnn INPUT Operation = On &

t

OFF

ON

Time delay T=0.00-60.00s

xx00000531.vsd

Figure 13:

Function block diagram of the Settable timer function

For details about the function see the description of TM Timer. 5.2.7 Pulse The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP (figure 14) has a settable length of a pulse between 0.00 s and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The input signal for each pulse timer has the designation TPnn-INPUT, where nn presents the serial number of the logic block. Each pulse timer has one output, designated by TPnn-OUT. The pulse timer is not retriggable, that is, it can be restarted first after that the time T has elapsed.

TPnn INPUT T OUT

Time delay 0.00-60.00s

xx00000524.vsd

Figure 14:

Function block diagram of the Pulse function

The function block TQ pulse timer (figure 15) with extended maximum pulse length, is identical with the TP pulse timer. The difference is the longer pulse length TQnn-T, settable between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.

47

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

TQnn INPUT T OUT

Time delay 0.0-90000.0s

xx00000525.vsd

Figure 15:

Function block diagram of the PulseLong function, TQ

A memory is set when the input INPUT is set to 1. The output OUT then goes to 1. When the time set T has elapsed, the memory is cleared and the output OUT goes to 0. If a new pulse is obtained at the input INPUT before the time set T has elapsed, it does not affect the timer. Only when the time set has elapsed and the output OUT is set to 0, the pulse function can be restarted by the input INPUT going from 0 to 1. See time pulse diagram, figure 16.

1 INPUT 0 1 OUT T=3 s 0

10

xx00000571.vsd

Figure 16: 5.2.8

Example of time diagram for the pulse function with preset pulse length T = 3 s

Exclusive OR (XOR) The function block exclusive OR (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XOR (figure 17) has two inputs, designated XOnn-INPUTm, where nn presents the serial number of the block, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each XOR circuit has two outputs, XOnn-OUT and XOnn-NOUT (inverted). The output signal (OUT) is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.

48

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

XOnn

INPUT1 INPUT2 =1 1

OUT NOUT

xx00000517.vsd

Figure 17:

Function block diagram of the XOR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the input signals are different and to 0 if they are equal. See truth table below.
Table 5:
INPUT1 0 0 1 1

Truth table for the XOR function block

INPUT2 0 1 0 1 OUT 0 1 1 0 NOUT 1 0 0 1

5.2.9

Set-Reset (SR) The function block Set-Reset (SR) (figure 18) has two inputs, designated SRnn-SET and SRnn-RESET, where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each SR circuit has two outputs, SRnn-OUT and SRnn-NOUT (inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if the input (SET) is set to 1 and if the input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to 1, the output is unconditionally reset to 0.
Table 6:
S 1 0 1 0 R 0 1 1 0

Truth table for the Set-Reset (SR) function block

OUT 1 0 0 0 NOUT 0 1 1 1

49

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

SRnn

SET

& 1

OUT NOUT

RESET

xx00000519.vsd

Figure 18: 5.2.10

Function block diagram of the Set-Reset function

Set-Reset with/without memory (SM) The function block Set-Reset (SM) (figure 19) with/without memory has two inputs, designated SMnn-SET and SMnn-RESET, where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each SM circuit has two outputs, SMnn-OUT and SMnn-NOUT (inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if the input (SET) is set to 1 and if the input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to 1, the output is unconditionally reset to 0. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return to the state it had before or if it will be reset.

50

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

SMnn

SET

& 1

OUT NOUT

RESET

Memory=On,Off
xx00000520.vsd

Figure 19: 5.2.11

Function block diagram of the Set-Reset with/without memory function

MOVE The MOVE function blocks, so called copy-blocks, are used for synchronization of boolean signals sent between logics with slow execution time and logics with fast execution time. There are two types of MOVE function blocks - MOF located First in the slow logic and MOL located Last in the slow logic. The MOF function blocks are used for signals coming into the slow logic and the MOL function blocks are used for signals going out from the slow logic. The REx 5xx terminal contains 3 MOF function blocks of 16 signals each, and 3 MOL function blocks of 16 signals each. This means that a maximum of 48 signals into and 48 signals out from the slow logic can be synchronized. The MOF and MOL function blocks are only a temporary storage for the signals and do not change any value between input and output. Each block of 16 signals is protected from being interrupted by other logic application tasks. This guarantees the consistency of the signals to each other within each MOVE function block. Synchronization of signals with MOF should be used when a signal which is produced outside the slow logic is used in several places in the logic and there might be a malfunction if the signal changes its value between these places. Synchronization with MOL should be used if a signal produced in the slow logic is used in several places outside this logic, or if several signals produced in the slow logic are used together outside this logic, and there is a similar need for synchronization. Figure 20 shows an example of logic, which can result in malfunctions on the output signal from the AND gate to the right in the figure.

51

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

Fast logic Function 1

Slow logic Function 2

Fast logic

& Function 3 &

xx00000537.vsd

Figure 20:

Example of logic, which can result in malfunctions

Figure 21 shows the same logic as in figure 20, but with the signals synchronized by the MOVE function blocks MOFn and MOLn. With this solution the consistency of the signals can be guaranteed.

Fast logic Function 1

Slow logic MOFn MOVE Function 3 & MOLn Function 2

Fast logic

& MOVE

xx00000541.vsd

Figure 21:

Example of logic with synchronized signals

MOFn and MOLn, n=1-3, have 16 inputs and 16 outputs. Each INPUTm is copied to the corresponding OUTPUTm, where m presents the serial number of the input and the output in the block. The MOFn are the first blocks and the MOLn are the last blocks in the execution order in the slow logic.

52

Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

Chapter 3 Common functions

5.3

Calculations
For the AND gates, OR gates, inverters, normal SR (Set-Reset) flip-flops, XOR gates and MOVE elements no settings exist. For the normal On/Off delay timers and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set from the CAP configuration tool. Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Setting values of the pulse length are independent of one another for all pulse circuits. For the controllable gates, settable timers, SR flip-flops with/without memory the setting parameters are accessible through the HMI and SMS. Configuration The configuration of the logics is performed from the CAP configuration tool. Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs in a fixed sequence in two different cycle times, typical 6 ms and 200 ms. For each cycle time, the function block is given an execution serial number. This is shown when using the CAP configuration tool with the designation of the function block and the cycle time, for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of the function block, 1044 is the execution serial number and 6 is the cycle time. Execution of different function blocks within the same cycle follows the same order as their execution serial numbers. Always remember this when connecting in series two or more logical function blocks. When connecting function blocks with different cycle times, the MOVE function blocks can be used. These function blocks synchronize boolean signals sent between logics with slow execution time and logics with fast execution time. The MOVE functions are available as additional configurable logic circuits.

Note!
Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle time to function blocks with a slow cycle time. So design the logic circuits carefully and check always the execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors, for example, race between functions.

53

Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT)

Chapter 3 Common functions

6
6.1

Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT)

Application
The REx 5xx protection and control terminals have a complex design with many included functions. The included self-supervision function and the INTernal signals function block provide good supervision of the terminal. The different safety measures and fault signals makes it easier to analyze and locate a fault. Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate possible faults through a hardware contact on the PSM and/or through the software communication. Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory functions supervise the status of the various modules in the terminal and, in case of failure, a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated. Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated when the status changes for the: built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order). external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated: whenever any setting in the terminal is changed. when the content of the Disturbance report is erased.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot be modified. The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during commissioning and fault tracing. The information can only be retrieved with the aid of the SMS. The PC can be connected either to the port at the front or at the rear of the terminal.

6.2

Functionality
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or via the PST Parameter Setting Tool or a SMS/SCS system. Under the Terminal Report menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervision function can be viewed. A detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI is found in the Installation and Commissioning Manual. In the PST under Terminal Report these summary signals are available: InternalStatus CPU-Status

54

Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT)

Chapter 3 Common functions

When an internal fault has occurred, extensive information about the fault from the list of internal events can be retrieved from the PST under the menu Terminal Report - Internal Events. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INT--FAIL signal (figure 24) and a couple of more severe faults that can happen in the terminal (figure 23). Some signals are available from the function block InternSignals (INT), see figure 22. The signals from this function block can be connected to an Event function block, which generates and sends these signals as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the INT-function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.

INT-INTERNSIGNALS FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN ADC SETCHGD xx00000169.vsd

Figure 22:

Function block INTernal signals.

Individual error signals from I/O modules and time synchronization can be obtained from respective function block of IOM-, BIM-, BOM-, MIM-, IOPSM-modules and from the time synchronization block TIME.

55

Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT)

Chapter 3 Common functions

Power supply fault

Power supply module

Fault

Watchdog TX overflow Master resp. Supply fault ReBoot I/O Checksum fault

I/O nodes

Fault & INTERNAL FAIL

A/D conv. module

Fault

Supply fault Parameter check

Main CPU

Fault

I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOM PSM, MIM or DCM DSP = Digital Signal Processor xxxx = Inverted signal
99000034.vsd

Figure 23:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

56

Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT)

Chapter 3 Common functions

A/D Converter Module

Checksum Node reports

OK OK & INT--ADC

Synch error Remote terminal communication NO RX Data

>1

Send Rem Error RTC-WARNING >1

NO TX Clock Check RemError

TIME-RTCERR TIME-SYNCERR RTC-WARNING INT--CPUWARN Watchdog Check CRC Main CPU RAM check OK OK OK

>1

INT--CPUWARN

>1

INT--WARNING

DSP Modules, 1-12

OK & OK OK OK & &

INT--CPUFAIL

Parameter check Watchdog Flow control INT--CPUFAIL INT--ADC I/O node FAIL

>1

>1

INT--FAIL

Start-up self-test

Fault

RTC-WARNING = DIFL-COMFAIL or RTC1-COMFAIL + RTC2-COMFAIL I/O node = BIM, BOM, IOM, PSM, MIM, DCM (described in the hardware design)
99000035.vsd

Figure 24:

Software self-supervision, function block INTernal signals.

57

Blocking of signals during test (BST)

Chapter 3 Common functions

7
7.1

Blocking of signals during test (BST)

Functionality
This blocking function is only active during operation in the test mode, see example in figure 25. When exiting the test mode, entering normal mode, this blocking is disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the terminal. No settings etc. will be changed. Thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. Each of the terminal related functions is described in detail in the documentation for the actual unit. The description of each function follows the same structure (where applicable).

TUV--BLKTR TEST TUV--TEST & Block TUV=Yes TUV--BLOCK TUV--VTSU TUV--STUL1N TUV--STUL2N TUV--STUL3N & & & >1 & t TUV--TRIP TUV--START TUV--STL1 TUV--STL2 TUV--STL3
en00000121.vsd

>1 Function enable

Figure 25:

Example of blocking the Time delayed Under-Voltage function.

58

About this chapter

Chapter 4 Line distance

Chapter 4 Line distance

About this chapter This chapter describes the line impedance functions in the terminal.

59

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1
1.1
1.1.1

Distance protection (ZM)

Application
General The distance protection function is the most widely spread protection function in transmission and subtransmission networks. It is also becoming increasingly important in distribution networks. The main reasons for this are: Its independence on communication links between the line ends, because for its operation, it uses information about the locally available currents and voltages. The distance protection forms a relatively selective protection system (non-unit protection system) in the power network. This means that it can also operate as a remote back-up protection for other primary elements in the network.

The basic requirements for modern line protection, such as speed, sensitivity and selectivity, with their strict requirements for dependability and security (availability), are getting more stringent. In addition, modern distance protections must be able to operate in networks with existing distance relays, which are mostly designed in a different technology (static or even electromechanical relays). Older distance relays protect in many cases power lines only at phase-to-phase and three-phase faults. Some other protection is used for phase-to-earth faults. The flexibility of modern distance protection is for this reason very important. This especially applies when it is used in a complex network configuration, for example, on parallel operating multicircuit lines and on multiterminal lines. The selective operation of the distance protection does not depend on communication facilities between two line ends. At the same time, the distance protection can detect faults beyond the current transformers at the remote terminal. This functionality makes it an ideal complement to the line differential protection function that cannot detect faults beyond the current transformer at the opposite terminal.

1.1.2

Distance protection zones The distance protection function in REx 5xx line protection, control, and monitoring terminals consists of three to five independent distance protection zones, each of them comprising three measuring elements for phase-to-earth (Ph-E) faults and/or three measuring elements for phase-to-phase (Ph-PH) faults. Different terminals suit different requirements in different networks on various voltage levels. For this reason, some characteristic parameters of the distance protection function differ from terminal to terminal. For detailed information, please refer to ordering particulars for each line protection terminal REx 5xx separately. Distance protection zone five differs from other zones with respect to its speed of operation. It starts faster than other distance protection zones and might have for this reason higher overreaching for different system transients. It is for this reason suggested to use it only for the applications, which permit higher overreaching, (i.e. switch-onto-fault function) or as a time delayed distance protection zone with time delay longer than 100 ms.

60

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1.1.3

Complement to the line differential protection The distance protection function can become optional protection in some line differential protection terminals (REL 561, for example). At the same time it represents the primary protection for faults beyond the current transformers at the opposite terminal. This functionality is achieved by the time delayed overreaching zone (generally zone 2), which covers at least the adjacent busbar and thus forms a primary or back-up protection for the busbar. So the overreaching zone should be continuously in operation. An underreaching zone (generally zone 1) can form a back-up to the line differential protection. There is no need for this function as long as the differential protection is in operation. To minimize the risk of unwanted operation from zone 1, this function can be activated only when the differential function is out of operation. The most likely cause to lose the differential protection is a failure within the communication system. The communication scheme used with the distance protection should for this reason use another communication channel than the one used by the line differential protection.

1.1.4

Set of simplified setting parameters Each distance protection zone comprises basically completely independent setting parameters for phase-to-earth, and for phase-to-phase measurement. This is an application advantage in complex network configurations and in networks, where it is required to adjust the newly applied distance protection functions to the existing other types of relays (overcurrent earth fault, for example). A set of simplified optional parameters is available optionally for applications, where equal zone reaches for all kinds of faults are a standard practice. See the table of setting parameters and the setting instructions.

1.1.5

Basic characteristics The distance protection function, as built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals, is a full-scheme distance protection. This means that it has individual measuring elements for different types of faults within different zones. Depending on the type of terminal, it consists of up to five (for details see the corresponding ordering details) independent, impedance-measuring zones, each has a quadrilateral characteristic, as symbolically illustrated in figure 26, RL and XL represent line resistance and reactance and RF represents the resistive reach of a protective zone.

61

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

jX

Z L =R L + jX L
ArgNegRes L

R
ArgDir

R
en00000376.vsd

Figure 26:

Typical characteristic of a distance protection zone.

The static characteristic in reactive direction is a straight line, parallel with the R-axis. The measuring algorithm used for the reactance part of the characteristic for phase-to-earth faults compensates for the influence of the load current on the impedance measurement for distance zone 1. So the static characteristic has no declination against the R-axis. Setting of the reach in a reactive direction is independent for each separate zone. It can also differ for ph-ph and for ph-E measuring elements. A straight line limits the reach of the distance protection zone in resistive direction. It is generally parallel with ZL, the line-impedance characteristic. This means that it forms, with the R-axis, a L line-characteristic angle. Setting of the reach in resistive direction is independent for each separate zone. Different setting values are also possible for phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) and for phase-to-phase faults (RFPP). With the X-axis, the directional characteristic in the second quadrant forms an ArgNegRes settable angle (default value 25). With the R-axis, the corresponding part forms a settable ArgDir angle in the fourth quadrant (default value -15), as in figure 26 and figure 27. All distance protection zones have the same directional characteristics. The characteristics of the distance zones are independent of one another as far as their directionality and reach in different directions are concerned. One can program the directionality of each distance zone. Figure 27 shows a typical example of the characteristics of an impedance-measuring zone when directed into forward or reverse directions. A polygon, completed with dashed lines, represents the characteristic of a non-directional zone.

62

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

jX RF RF

Forward XL

ArgNegRes

RF
ArgDir

Reverse XL

en00000377.vsd

Figure 27:

Nondirectional and directional (forward and reverse) operating characteristic

The set value of a reach in resistive direction determines whether the directional line in the second quadrant meets, as first, the reactive or the resistive characteristic. Compare the characteristics in figure 26 and 27 The values of the reaches in reactive and resistive direction for a particular zone are the same for forward and reverse impedance-measuring elements and for the non-directional mode of operation. The terminal automatically adapts the line characteristic angle according to the line parameters. Thus, the measurement of different faults follows the real conditions in a power system. Figure 28 shows an example of an operating characteristic for the ph-E fault, which faces the forward direction. Here, a Zloop, phase-to-earth loop measuring impedance, consists of a Z1 line operational impedance, ZN earth return impedance, and the RFPE fault resistance. The characteristic angle of the complete measuring loop automatically follows the real system conditions and the complete line characteristic.

63

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

jX

X +j Z
N

line

=R

Z 1 =R1PE+jX1PE

Z loop

RFPE

visf039.vsd

Figure 28:

Characteristic of the phase-to-earth measuring loop.

The earth return impedance follows for each particular zone the expression:

1 - ( Z0 Z 1 ) Z N = -3
(Equation 11)

with:

Z 1 = R1PE + j X1PE
(Equation 12)

and

64

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Z 0 = R0PE + j X0PE
(Equation 13)

Where R1PE, X1PE, R0PE and X0PE are the reach setting parameters. It is possible to make the characteristic independent of line angle by setting the corresponding line resistances R1PE and R0PE to their minimum possible values. For more details see setting instructions. The possibility to cover a sufficient fault resistance is a major consideration in short-line applications. Load encroachment problems are not so common. The independent setting option of the reach in reactive and resistive direction is a function that greatly improves the flexibility of distance protection. For these short line applications, an optional overreaching scheme communication logic, also improves, the resistive coverage. The optimum solution in some applications is to add the optional, directional-comparison, earth-fault, overcurrent protection to the distance protection scheme. In long line applications, the margin to the load impedance (to avoid load encroachment) is usually a major consideration. Quadrilateral characteristics with independent settings of the reach in reactive (to cover sufficient length of a line) and resistive (to avoid load encroachment) direction greatly diminish the conflict that is very characteristic for circular characteristics. A wide setting range of the reach in a reactive direction, which one set independently for each zone with good current sensitivity down to 10% of the rated current is an important factor that improves the performances of the distance protection when used on long transmission lines. High-voltage power cables have two main characteristics that make them, from the distance protection perspective, different from overhead lines: They are relatively short, compared to overhead lines. The value of their zero-sequence reactance is very low, in many cases even lower than the positive-sequence reactance. This results in a negative value of the characteristic angle for the earth-return impedance.

Without approximation, the value of the earth-return compensation automatically follows the parameters of a power cable for positive and zero sequence reactance and resistance. This makes the impedance measuring function, as built into the REx 5xx line-protection terminals, suitable for the protection of short, EHV power cables. The independent setting of the reach (in reactive and resistive direction, separately and independently for each distance zone) improves these basic performances. Zero-sequence, mutual impedance between different circuits of the multicircuit parallel operating lines is a factor that particularly influences the performance of distance protection during single-phase-to-earth fault conditions. Distance protection must also operate selectively for intersystem faults and simultaneous faults to the greatest possible extent. The separate and independent setting of the parameters that determine the value of earth-return compensation for different distance-protection zones, enables the compensation of the influence of the zero-sequence, mutual impedance on the measurement of the impedance-measuring elements for single-phase-to-earth faults.

65

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Separate, optional, phase selectors usage, with their reach setting independent of the reach of the zone measuring elements, greatly improves the performance of distance protection on the multicircuit parallel operating lines. At the same time and to the lowest possible level, these selectors reduce the influence of the heavy load current, that is present during a fault, on the phase selection function within the terminals. Additional phase-segregated, scheme communication logic (refer to the ordering information for its availability within the different types of terminals) enables absolute phase selectivity of the distance protection of multi-circuit, parallel operating lines. For the selective operation of distance protection on tied and multiterminal lines, flexibility in scheme communication logic associated with the distance protection function is a great advantage. Scheme communication logic built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals enables the adaptation of any communication scheme to the existing system conditions. The free selection of overreaching and underreaching zones, with the free selection of a conditional zone, and independent settings of the reach for different zones, makes the REx 5xx line protection terminals extremely flexible for such applications.

1.2
1.2.1

Functionality
Measuring principle Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows the equation (example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault):

UL1 UL2 ---------------------Zap = -I L1 IL2

(Equation 14)

Here represent U and I the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3) The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner for ph-E faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault):

U L1 Z ap = ----------------------------I L1 + K N I N
(Equation 15)

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X, as presented in figure 29.

66

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The measuring elements receive information about currents and voltages from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (I) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

I U

en00000379

Figure 29:

Apparent impedance with resistance and reactance connected in series

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to the formula:

X I -- ---U = R I + ---0 t
(Equation 16)

in complex notation, or:

X Re ( I ) Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ----------------0 t
(Equation 17)

X Im ( I ) Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ---------------0 t
(Equation 18)

with

67

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

0 = 2 f 0
(Equation 19)

Where: Re Im f0 designates the real component, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) Re ( I ) Re ( U ) Im ( I ) ----------------------------------R m = ----------------------------------------------- Re ( I ) Im ( I ) Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 20)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )Xm = 0 t ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Re ( I ) Im ( I ) Im ( I ) Re ( I )
(Equation 21)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each millisecond and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other causes. The algorithm is insensitive to changes in frequency, transient dc components, and harmonics because a true replica of the protected line is implemented in the algorithm. The directional evaluations are simultaneously performed in forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point. 1.2.2 Measured impedance Phase-to-earth measurement The impedance measurement for the phase-to-earth faults is performed on the loop basis by comparing the calculated Rm resistance and Xm reactance with the set values of the reach in the resistive and reactive direction:

1 - ( R0PE R1PE ) p RFPE Rm R1PE + -3

(Equation 22)

68

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1 - ( R0PE R1PE ) p + RFPE R m R1PE + -3

(Equation 23)

1 - ( X0PE X1PE ) X m X1PE -3

(Equation 24)

1 - ( X0PE X1PE ) Xm X1PE + -3

(Equation 25)

The p factor represents the relative fault position (-1p1) within the reactive operating limits in forward and reverse direction. Equations for resistive measurement represent in the impedance plane non-directional operating limits in resistive direction (see figure 30). For the faults on radial lines equation 22 represents a straight line (left side operating characteristic in loop domain), which passes the R axis at point D = - RFPE + j0 and forms with it an angle of:

1 - ( X0PE X1PE ) X1PE + -3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- = atan 1 - ( R0PE R1PE ) R1PE + -3

(Equation 26)

Equation 23 represents for the same conditions a straight line (right side operating limit) passing the R axis in set point B = RFPE + j0 and is parallel to the left side operating characteristic. Equations 24 and 25 represent in the impedance plane the operating limits in reactive direction (see figure 30). For faults on radial lines equation 24 represents in impedance plane (loop domain) a straight line, which is parallel with the R axis and passes the point

1 - ( X0PE X1PE ) C = 0 j X1PE + -3

(Equation 27)

Similarly represents equation 25 a straight line, which is also parallel with the R axis and passes the point

1 - ( X0PE X1PE ) A = 0 + j X1PE + -3

(Equation 28)

69

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

jX A

Res ArgNeg

Forward

D
ArgDir B

Reverse

en00000383.vsd

Figure 30:

General operating characteristic of impedance measuring elements

Phase-to-phase measurement The impedance measurement for the phase-to-phase faults is performed on a phase basis by comparing the calculated Rm resistance and Xm reactance with the set values of the reach in the resistive and reactive direction:

1 - RFPP R m R1PP p -2
(Equation 29)

1 - RFPP Rm R1PP p + -2
(Equation 30)

X m X1PP
(Equation 31)

70

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

X m X1PP
(Equation 32)

Here represents p factor the relative fault position (- 1 < p < 1) within the reactive zone reach. Parameters R1PP, X1PP and RFPP are the reach setting parameters for the ph-ph and three-phase faults. The first two equations represent the left and right side operating boundaries, see figure 30. For the faults on radial feeders represent these two equations straight lines in impedance plain, which cross the R axis in points:

1 - RFPP + j0 D = -2
(Equation 33)

and

1 - RFPP + j0 B = 2
(Equation 34)

respectively. Both operating limits are parallel and form with the R axis an angle of:

X1PP -------------- = atan R1PP

(Equation 35)

The third and the fourth equations represent the reactive operating boundaries in forward and reverse direction, see figure 30. They cross in impedance plain the X axis in operating points: A = X1PP and C = -X1PP respectively. For the faults on radial feeders this two boundaries are straight lines, parallel with the R axis. 1.2.3 Directional lines The results of impedance measurement are combined in and combination with the directional measurement, to obtain the desired directionality for each distance protection zone separately, see figure in Phase-to-earth measurement. The directional overcurrent function, TOC3, uses the results of the directional impedance measuring element to create the directional overcurrent function. The directional measurement is based on the use of a positive-sequence voltage for the respective fault loop. For the L1-N element, the equation for forward direction is:

71

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

0.8 U1L1 + 0.2 U1L1M -ArgDir < arg ----------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes IL1
(Equation 36)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is:

0.8 U1L1L2 + 0.2 U1L1L2M - < ArgNegRes -ArgDir < arg ---------------------------------------------------------------------I L1L2

Where: ArgDir ArgNegRes is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 (degrees)

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the rated voltage Ur. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the terminal rated current Ir), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

1.3
1.3.1

Design
Full-scheme measurement Up to three digital signal processors execute algorithms for up to five, full-scheme distance protection zones, depending on the type of the REx 5xx line protection terminal. Figure 31 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones when both, ph-E and ph-ph fault measuring loops are included into the terminal.

72

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The first digital-signal processor (DSP) measures different fault loops for different single-phase-to-earth faults and for different zones. This way, it forms the resistive and reactive part of a characteristic for single-phase-to-earth faults. The second DSP performs the same task for the phase-to-phase fault loops. The third DSP separately performs the directional measurement for all types of faults in forward and reverse directions. The presence of the first or the second DSP within the terminal depends on its type and the fault type, for which the distance protection is ordered (see ordering particulars for each REx 5xx terminal separately).

L1-N L1-N L1-N L1-N L1-N

L2-N L2-N L2-N L2-N L2-N

L3-N L3-N L3-N L3-N L3-N

L1-L2 L1-L2 L1-L2 L1-L2 L1-L2

L2-L3 L2-L3 L2-L3 L2-L3 L2-L3

L3-L1 L3-L1 L3-L1 L3-L1 L3-L1

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5

L1-N L1-N

L2-N L2-N

L3-N L3-N

L1-L2 L1-L2

L2-L3 L2-L3

L3-L1 L3-L1

Forward Reverse
en00000487.vsd

Figure 31:

Location of different measuring loops within the three digital signal processors

The parallel execution of measurements in up to three different DSPs permits the separate evaluation of each impedance measuring loop for each zone every millisecond. This gives the distance protection function the same features as those known for the full-scheme design of conventional distance relays (REZ 1, RAZFE). So each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements. 1.3.2 Distance protection zone one The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase. Different terminals REx 5xx have built-in different measuring circuits, dependent on ordering details. In the following description consider only the phase-to-earth related signals, if only phase-to-earth measurement is included in terminal. Similarly consider only the phase-to-phase related signals, if only phase-to-phase measurement is included in terminal. The phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where represents n the corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1). Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the logical one signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.

73

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Group functional input signal (ZM1--STCND), as presented in figure 32.

The ZM1--STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from other measuring functions within the terminal, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately (see ZMn--STCND functional input in Basic configuration).

OR STCND L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1N L2N L3N AND AND AND AND AND AND OR

STZMPP

STNDL1L2 STNDL2L3 STNDL3L1 STNDL1N STNDL2N STNDL3N STNDPE

OR VTSZ BLOCK OR AND STND BLK

99000557.vsd

Figure 32:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal ZM1--STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-directional mode, is presented in figure 33.

74

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

STNDL1N STNDL2N STNDL3N STNDL1L2 STNDL2L3 STNDL3L1

OR AND OR AND AND AND 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t STL1 STL2 STL3 START

OR OR

BLK
en00000488.vsd

Figure 33:

Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 34.

75

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

STNDL1N-cont. DIRL1N STNDL2N-cont. DIRL2N STNDL3N-cont. DIRL3N STNDL1L2-cont. DIRL1L2 STNDL2L3-cont. DIRL2L3 STNDL3L1-cont. DIRL3L1 & >1 BLK-cont. STZMPP-cont. & >1 & 15 ms t ZM1--STL3 & >1 & & & >1 & 15 ms t ZM1--STL1 & >1 & STZMPE-cont.

15 ms t

ZM1--STL2

&

>1

&

15 ms t

ZM1--START

en00000489.vsd

Figure 34:

Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented on figure 35.

76

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Timer tPP=On STZMPP Timer tPE=On STZMPE BLKTR AND AND

tPP t OR tPE t 15ms AND

t

TRIP

STL1 STL2 STL3

AND AND AND

TRL1 TRL2 TRL3

en00000490.vsd

Figure 35:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

Phase related starting and tripping signals are available only in case, when the 1/2/3 phase tripping unit is ordered within the terminal. Please, refer to ordering particulars for each REx 5xx terminal separately. 1.3.3 Remaining distance protection zones Distance protection zones two and three have the same composition as distance protection zone 1. All descriptions for the distance protection zone 1 are for this reason valid also for the distance protection zones two and three. It is only necessary to replace the ZM1- designation with corresponding designations ZM2- for zone two and ZM3- for zone three respectively. Distance protection zones four (ZM4-) and five (ZM5-) are based on the same principles as the other distance protection zones. The only difference is in the presentation of phase selective signals, belonging to these two zones. The phase selective signals are not available with distance protection zones four and five.

1.4
1.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The setting values of all parameters that belong to distance protection within the REx 5xx line-protection terminals, must correspond to the parameters of the protected line and to the selectivity plan for the network. Reach setting recommendations Before starting the setting activities for the distance protection function, check that the setting values of the secondary rated current within the terminal correspond to the current transformers used for the same purposes for a specific REx 5xx terminal.

1.4.2

77

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1.4.3

Conversion to secondary impedances Convert the primary line impedances to the secondary sides of the current and voltage instrument transformers. The following relation applies to these purposes:
U sec I pri m - Z prim Z sec = -------------- ----------U prim I sec
(Equation 37)

Where: Abbreviation: Is a set value of:

Iprim Isec Uprim Usec Zprim Zsec

Rated primary current of the used current instrument transformers Rated secondary current of the used current instrument transformers Rated primary voltage of the used voltage instrument transformers Rated secondary voltage of the used voltage instrument transformers Primary impedance Calculated secondary impedance

1.4.4

Basic zone setting recommendations An impedance seen by the distance protection might differ from the calculated values due to: Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under transient conditions. Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated value of the earth-return compensation factor. The effect of infeed between the relay and the fault location, including the influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources. The phase impedance of untransposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance. The effect of a load transfer between the terminals of the protected line. When the fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized. Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

Usually, these errors require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 85-90% of the protected line. For the same reason, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone (normally zone 2) to at least 120% of the protected line to ensure that the overreaching zone always covers a complete line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher, but in general it should never exceed 80% of the following impedances: The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the shortest adjacent line. The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the protected line.

78

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The back-up overreaching zone (normally zone 3) must never exceed 90% of the shortest zone 2 reach of any of the lines connected to the remote end bus. It must be at least 2 times the zone 1 reach. The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the busbar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line terminal for the telecommunication purposes. In the case of a long line followed by a short line, or by a large bank of low impedance transformers, the mandatory 120% setting might overreach zone 1 of the adjacent line, or reach through the transformer bank at the other line end. In such cases, one must increase the zone 2 time delay and thus secure the selectivity. The zone 2 reach must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. It must be covered under all conditions. In networks with lines tied at an intermediate location, consider an increase in the measured impedance due to the fault current fed into the system at the teed point. If a fault occurs at point F (see figure 36, also for the explanation of all abbreviations used), the relay at point A senses the impedance:

IA + I B I B Zm = Z AC + --------------- ZC F = Z AC + 1 + ---- Z CF I A IA
(Equation 38)

IA and IB are fault currents from sources A and B respectively. Assume that the reach of zone 1 of the relay in C covers 85% of ZCD, and the reach of zone 2 of the relay in A covers 80% of (ZAC + 85% of ZCD). The impedance from station A up to the reach limit of the first zone at C corresponds to:

I B - Z CD Z AC + 0.85 1 + ---I A
(Equation 39)

The reach of zone 2 can not be longer than 80% of the apparent impedance at the limit of the first zone at C, which means that:

I B - Z CD Z2 = 0.8 Z AC + 0.85 1 + ---I A

(Equation 40)

79

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

ZAC ZCF

ZCD

A ~
IA

C
I +I A B

IB B ~
99000103.vsd

Figure 36:

Network with line tied at an intermediate location

Also consider the apparent increase of measured impedance due to the power fed into the system for the zone 3 setting. When calculating the setting, consider the lowest value of the current ratio from two sources that can occur when only one group of setting parameters is used for all operating conditions. The distance protection function performs best in the power system with its setting values optimized to specific system conditions. So use different pre-set and pre-test groups of setting parameters for different expected system operating conditions. REx 5xx terminals have a built-in memory capacity for four groups of setting parameters, all completely independent of one another. It is possible to set and pre-test all of them during the commissioning. Their activation is possible: Locally with the local HMI or a PC Remotely with the SMS or/and SCS (depending on whether the optional remote communication is built into the terminal or not).

1.4.5

Earth return compensation A simplified measuring loop at the single-phase-to-earth faults consists of three impedances, as shown in figure 37

80

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Where: Abbreviation: Is a set value of:

Z1 Rf ZN Z0

Positive sequence impedance of the line Fault resistance Earth-return impedance Zero sequence impedance of the line

The earth return impedance is equal to:

1 - (Z0 Z1 ) ZN = -3
(Equation 41)

a) I U Irsd F

L1 L2 L3

b) U

Z1 ZN Rf

99000036.vsd

Figure 37:

Equivalent circuits for measurement at single-phase-to-earth faults.

The complete measuring impedance, according to Figure 37 is equal to:

1 - ( 2 Z1 + Z 0 ) + R f Z loop = Z1 + Z N + R f = -3
(Equation 42)

The reach of distance protection zone is related to the positive sequence line impedance. So an earth-return compensation factor has been introduced into the measuring algorithm. Its value is equal to:

(Equation 43)

81

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

(Equation 44)

The impedance measuring algorithm within the REL 5xx terminals calculates automatically the complex value of the earth-return compensation factor KN on the basis of the set values for the 1.4.6 Positive sequence reactance of protected line section X1PE Positive sequence resistance of protected line section R1PE Zero-sequence reactance of protected line section X0PE Zero-sequence resistance of protected line section R0PE

Fault resistance The performance of distance protection for single-phase-to-earth faults is very important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single-phase-to-earth faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warringtons formula:

28707 L R arc = -----------------------------1.4 I

(Equation 45)

Where: L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1. Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 with time delay of 0.7 seconds and wind speed of approximately 50 km/h. is the actual fault current in A.

Calculate or measure the tower-footing resistance for the specific case, because the variation of this parameter is very large. The distance protection cannot detect very high-resistive earth faults, because the load impedance and load transfer limit its reach. For faults with resistance higher than those that can be detected by the impedance measurement, an optional earth-fault overcurrent protection can be included in the REx 5xx terminals.

82

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1.4.7

Zero-sequence mutual coupling on multicircuit lines When calculating the settings for distance-protection ph-E fault measuring elements, one must consider zero-sequence mutual coupling between the circuits of the multicircuit lines. The positive and the negative-sequence mutual coupling generally have no significant influence on the operation of the impedance-measuring protection schemes. The distance protection within the REx 5xx terminals can compensate for the influence of a zero-sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single-phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by using: The possibility of different values that influence the earth-return compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters. Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected multicircuit line.

Most multicircuit lines have two parallel operating circuits, as shown in figure 38 The application guide mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic principles also apply to other multicircuit lines. The Application Guide on Protection of Complex Transmission Network Configurations describes the problems in more detail. The CIGRE Working Group 04 of Study Committee 34 (Protection), published the guide in November 1991. Zm0 in figure 38 represents the zero-sequence mutual-coupling impedance between circuits of a double-circuit, parallel operating line.

ZS

IB Zm0 IA REL 5xx

99000037.vsd

Figure 38:

Double-circuit parallel operating line

The parallel circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends Figure 39 represents an equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit parallel operating line. Input terminals A and B are related to the input terminals of each circuit close to the busbar A in figure 38 Terminal C is related to the F fault point, moved towards the B busbar.

83

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Z 0 Z m0 Z m0 C Z 0 Z m0
99000038.vsd

Figure 39:

Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar

The distance protection overreaches for single-phase-to-earth faults on the protected line when the parallel circuit is disconnected and earthed on both ends. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit gets the configuration as in figure 40

I0

Z 0 Z m0 Z m0

I0

Z 0 Z m0

99000039.vsd

Figure 40:

Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends

Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to:

Z 0 Z m0 Z 0E = ---------------------Z0
(Equation 46)

This influences the value of the total loop impedance as measured by the distance-protection function, thus causing it to overreach. It is necessary to compensate for this overreaching by setting the compensated zero-sequence impedance for the particular underreaching zone. All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero-sequence, mutual resistance Rm0 equals to zero. They consider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance Xm0.

84

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to the equations below for each particular line section and set them for the particular underreaching zone of distance protection function.

Xm0 R 0E = R 0 1 + ------------------------2 2 R0 + X0
(Equation 47)

X m0 - X 0E = X 0 1 ------------------------2 2 R0 + X0
(Equation 48)

The parallel circuit out of service and not earthed When the parallel circuit is out of service and not earthed, it has the equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote busbar as shown in figure 41 The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance-protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.

I0

Z 0 Z m0 Z m0 Z 0 Z m0
99000040.vsd

I0

Figure 41:

Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one circuit disconnected and not earthed

The reduction of the reach is equal to:

KU

1 2 -- ( 2 Z1 + Z 0E ) + R f Zm0 3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = 1 -------------= --------------1 Z0 ( 2 Z 1 + Z0 + 3R f ) -- ( 2 Z 1 + Z0 ) + R f 3

(Equation 49)

85

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and imaginary components of the constant A are equal to:

Re ( A ) = R 0 ( 2 R 1 + R 0 + 3 Rf ) X 0 ( 2 X 1 + X0 )
(Equation 50)

Im ( A ) = X 0 ( 2 R 1 + R 0 + 3 R1 ) + R 0 ( 2 X 1 + X0 )
(Equation 51)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to:

Re ( A ) X m0 Re ( K U ) = 1 + ----------------------------------------------------2 2 [ Re ( A ) ] + [ Im ( A ) ]
(Equation 52)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to:

Im ( A ) X m0 Im ( KU ) = ----------------------------------------------------2 2 [ Re ( A ) ] + [ Im ( A ) ]
(Equation 53)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit. Parallel circuit in service The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected circuit when the parallel circuit is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line terminal closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreach scheme. Setting of the overreaching zones Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with a single-phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 39 The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at least:

86

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

R0E = R0 + R m0
(Equation 54)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 55)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero-sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z m0 K0 = 1 ---------------------------------------------------------2 Z 1 + Z0 + Z m0 + 3R f
(Equation 56)

If the real and imaginary components of the B constant are equal to:

Re ( B ) = 2 R1 + R 0 + Rm0 + 3 R f
(Equation 57)

Im ( B ) = 2 X1 + X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 58)

The real and the imaginary value of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones are equal to:

Xm0 Im ( B ) ------------------------Re ( K0 ) = 1 ---------------------------2 2 [ Re ( B ) ] + [ Im ( B ) ]

(Equation 59)

Xm0 Re ( B ) Im ( K 0 ) = ----------------------------------------------------2 2 [ Re ( B ) ] + [ Im ( B ) ]
(Equation 60)

87

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Use of different setting groups on double circuit lines Each of the REx 5xx line-protection terminals has a built-in possibility for setting and activating four different groups of setting parameters according to the system conditions. Different setting groups can also suit different operating conditions of a multicircuit, parallel operating line. The advantage of such an approach is a better coverage of the line during normal and abnormal operating conditions. The parallel circuit out of operation with both ends earthed Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single-phase-to-earth faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

Xm0 - R 0E = R 0 1 + ------------------------2 2 R0 + X0
(Equation 61)

X m0 X 0E = X 0 1 ------------------------2 2 R0 + X0
(Equation 62)

Double-circuit parallel line in normal operation Normally, the underreaching zone of distance protection underreaches for the single-phase-to-earth faults located closer to the opposite end of the circuit. To overcome this underreaching and trip without a sequential tripping for the faults along the greatest possible percentage of a line, increase the value of the equivalent zero-sequence impedance to the one also recommended for the overreaching zones. This means that the values of the equivalent zero-sequence resistance and reactance are equal to:

R0E = R0 + R m0
(Equation 63)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 64)

Overreaching distance protection zones The same rules apply to the overreaching zones as in cases with a single set of setting parameters. Ensure that they will always overreach. So increase the setting of the zero-sequence resistance and reactance to the values that correspond to at least:

88

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

R0E = R0 + R m0
(Equation 65)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 66)

In many cases, it is sufficient if the influence of the zero-sequence mutual impedance is compensated only in the first overreaching zone (generally, zone 2). The setting of the back-up overreaching zones (zone 3 and higher) is usually so high that no such compensation is necessary. Instructions for overreaching zones are applicable for normal network configurations. Always reconsider their settings if any special lines or other elements (cables, power transformers, etc.) follow the double-circuit, parallel operating line. Pay special attention to the distance protection of double-circuit, parallel operating multiterminal or tapped lines. 1.4.8 Setting of the reach in resistive direction Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, and separately for phase-to-phase, and phase-to-earth loop measurement. Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults (RFPP) and for the phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) for each zone. Set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other for each distance zone. The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the protected zone is equal to:

1 - ( 2 R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE R = -3

(Equation 67)

The blinder in the resistive direction forms an angle with the R-axis equal to:
2 X 1 + X0 ---------------------- loop = arctan ---2 R 1 + R0
(Equation 68)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition:

RFPE 4.5 X1PE

(Equation 69)

89

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault resistance for phase-to-earth faults. Limit the setting of the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:
RFPP 3 X1PP
(Equation 70)

Load impedance limitation Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the relay boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance [/phase] is calculated as:

U Z loadmin = -----S

(Equation 71)

Where: U S is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV is the maximum apparent power in MVA

The load impedance [/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the maximum load current:

Umin Z load = --------------------3 Imax

(Equation 72)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

Note!
Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase relay operation under combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics. To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

90

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

RFPE 0.8 Z load

(Equation 73)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single-phase-to-earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:

2 R1PE + R0PE - sin RFPE 0.8 Zloadmin cos -------------------------------------------2 X1PE + X0PE
(Equation 74)

Where

is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load impedance.
RFPP 1.6 Zloadr
(Equation 75)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:

R1PP RFPP 1.6 Z loadmin cos -------------- sin X1PP

(Equation 76)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element is in the protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin in cases when a power-swing detection element is in the protection scheme; see document Power swing detection. 1.4.9 Setting of minimum operating current Minimum operating fault current IMinOp defines the sensitivity of the distance protection as built in REx 5xx terminals. Default setting value, which is 20% of basic terminal current, proved in practice as the optimum value for the most of applications. Sometimes it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of terminal basic current. This happens especially in cases, when the terminal serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines.

91

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction. 1.4.10 Setting of timers for the distance protection zones The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E (tnPE, n = 1...5) and for the ph-ph (tnPP, n = 1...5) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection. Setting the directional lines ArgDir and ArgNegRes setting parameters define the position of the directional lines in impedance plane (see figure 42). Their default values are 15 and 25 respectively and should not be changed unless the simulation studies for the application on very long and heavilly loaded transmission lines show the need to change them accordingly.

1.4.11

jX

ArgNegRes Forward

ArgDir Reverse

en01000130.vsd

Figure 42:

Directional lines define the forward and reverse operating area for each distance protection zone

92

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1.4.12

Simplified operating characteristic Distance protection operating characteristic follows with its reach in resisitive direction automatically the line charcateristic angle. The R1PP setting parameters influences the line characateristic angle for the phase-to-phase measurement while R1PE and R0PE influence the characteristics for the phase-to-earth faults. The operating charatceristic for phase-to-phase faults becomes independent on line characteristic angle when RFPP is set to its minimum possible value (0.1 ohm for terminals with rated current Ir = 1A and 0.02 ohm for terminals with rated current Ir = 5A). Similarly becomes independent the operating characteristic for phase-to-earth faults, when R1PE and R0PE are set to their minimum values. In such case it is necessary to consider the reduction of a fault resistance coverage for the faults at the end of the protection zone. The simplified operating characteristic is schematically presented on

jX X

Zline

RFPP

RFPE

xx00000713.vsd

Figure 43:

Simplified operating characteristic with R1PP or (R1PE and R0PE) or (R1 and R0 with simplified setting parameters) are set to their minimum values

1.4.13

Set of simplified setting parameters All statements presented under this subject apply also in case when the set of simplified setting parameters has been ordered instead of a complete set. It is only necessary to consider the fact, that in this case the reactive reach setting is equal for the phase-to-phase as well as for the phase-to-earth measuring elements. This way the setting parameter X1 replaces the parameters X1PP and X1PE. Similarly replaces X0 the X0PE parameter.

1.5
1.5.1

Configuration
Basic configuration Each distance protection zone comprises different functional inputs, which influence its operation in different ways.

93

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1.5.2

ZMn--BLOCK functional input Logical one on ZMn--BLOCK functional input blocks completely the operation of the distance protection zone. The input should be connected to the functional outputs of those protection and logic functions, which are supposed to block instantaneously and completely the operation of the zone. Functional output PSD--START of the power swing detection function is a typical example. ZMn--VTSZ functional input The operation of the distance protection function must be blocked in cases of different faults within the secondary voltage measuring circuits. The ZMn-VTSZ functional input should be configured to the functional output FUSE-VTSZ of the fuse-failure supervision function or to the binary inputs of a terminal, connected to the output contacts of external fuse-failure relays and MCBs. ZMn--BLKTR functional input The ZMn--BLKTR functional input blocks only the tripping function of each particular distance protection zone, but it does not block its measurement and starting output signals. It is possible to use it in different cases together with internal logic circuits for different application purposes. ZMn--STCND functional input The ZMn--STCND functional input brings into each distance protection zone information on external measuring conditions, which influence the zone operation. It is necessary to configure it to one of the following functional outputs within the terminal: PHS--STCNDI functional output of the phase selection function. The operation of the distance protection zone depends in this case only on the fault current conditions, as used for the operation of the phase selection elements (see the document Phase selection for distance protection). PHS--STCNDZ functional output of the phase selection function. The operation of the distance protection depends in this case on the operation of different phase selection elements for a particular fault. The fault must be seen by the phase selection impedance measuring elements, to release the operation of the distance protection zone (see the document Phase selection for distance protection). GFC--STCND functional output of the general fault criteria (GFC). The operation of a particular distance protection zone is released only, if the fault has been detected also within the operating characteristic of a GFC element (see the document General fault criteria). FIXD-INTONE functional integer output signal. The operation of a particular distance protection function does not depend in this case on any external current or impedance measuring condition. All measuring loops are permitted to operate only on the basis of the measured impedance for a particular fault conditions.

1.5.3

1.5.4

1.5.5

Note!
It is not recommended to connect STCND to FIXD-INTONE. Such a connection means that all six measuring loops are continously enabled, which causes overlapping among all the six loops. This can lead to unexpected results from the impedance protection.

94

Distance protection (ZM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1.5.6

ZMn--START functional output The ZMn--START functional output becomes logical one at any detection of the measured impedance within a particular distance protection zone. It is not time delayed. It is possible to configure it as an input signal to the scheme communication logic (as a carrier send signal) or for a signalling purposes. Phase selective starting signals (ZMn--STL1, ZMn--STL2, and ZMn--STL3) are available in units with built-in single pole tripping function. They have the same functionality as the general starting signal ZMn--START with the addition, that they always relate to a specific faulty phase.

1.5.7

ZMn--TRIP functional output The ZMn--TRIP functional output represents a time delayed operation of a particular distance protection zone. It is generally used for tripping purposes. It is also possible to configure the trip output signals of time-delayed distance protection zones to the inhibit conditions of the autoreclosing function, when used within the terminal. Phase selective tripping signals (ZMn--TRL1, ZMn--TRL2, and ZMn--TRL3) are available in units with built-in single pole tripping function. They have the same functionality as the general tripping signal ZMn--TRIP with the addition, that they always relate to a specific faulty phase.

1.5.8

ZMn--STND functional output Informs about the non-directional start of the distance protection zone (see figure in Basic characteristics). It is possible, among others, to configure it to the functional input SOTF-NDACC functional input of the switch-onto-fault function.

95

Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)

Chapter 4 Line distance

2
2.1

Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)

Application
The switch-onto-fault function is a complementary function to impedance measuring functions but may make use of information from such functions. The switch-onto-fault function is a complementary function to impedance measuring functions. With the switch-onto-fault (SOTF-) function, a fast trip is achieved for a fault on the whole line, when the line is being energized. The SOTF tripping is generally non-directional in order to secure a trip at fault situations where directional information can not be established, for example, due to lack of polarizing voltage when a line potential transformer is used. Automatic activation can be used only when the potential transformer is situated on the line side of a circuit breaker.

2.2

Functionality
The switch-onto-fault function can be activated either externally or automatically, internally, by using the information from a dead-line-detection (DLD) function (see figure 44).

S O T F -B C S O T F -D L C N D S O T F -N D A C C S O T F -B L O C K & 200 m s
t

>1

1000 m s t & 15 m s t S O T F -T R IP

&
e n 0 0 0 0 0 4 9 2 .vs d

Figure 44:

SOTF function - simplified logic diagram

After activation, a protection zone (usually a non-directional function) is allowed to give an instantaneous trip. The functional output signal from the protection zone to be used, should be connected to the SOTF-NDACC functional input of the SOTF function, see figure 44. The protection zone used together with the switch-onto-fault function shall be set to cover the entire protected line. Always use distance protection zone 5 as a criteria for the SOTF function, if the high-speed protection function is used in the REx 5xx line protection terminal. It is also suggested to use the distance protection zone 5, when faster operation of SOTF function is required. The non-directional instantaneous condition is maintained for 1 s after closing the line circuit breaker. The external activation is achieved by an input (SOTF-BC), which should be set high for activation, and low when the breaker has closed. This is carried out by an NC auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or by the closing order to the breaker.

96

Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The internal automatic activation is controlled by the DLD function and its functional output DLD--START. The DLD--START functional output is activated when all phase voltages and phase currents have been below their set operate values. The DLD--START functional output is usually configured to the SOTF-DLCND functional input. It activates the operation of the SOTF function, if present for more than 200 ms without the presence of a starting signal SOTF-NDACC. Operation of a SOTF function can be blocked by the activation of a SOTF-BLOCK functional input.

2.3
2.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the switch-onto-fault function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The low voltage and low current criteria for automatic activation is settable under the DLD-function. Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. This setting is not critical as long as it is lower then the lowest operation voltage during normal and emergency conditions. The protection zone used for a switch-onto-fault criterion (SOTF zone) have to be set to cover the entire protected line with a safety margin of minimum 20%.

97

Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

3
3.1

Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)

Application
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, also in cases where no communication channel is available, local acceleration logic is used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel. The logic can be controlled either by the auto-recloser (zone extension) or by the loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

3.2
3.2.1

Functionality
Zone extension When the auto-recloser controls the function, a signal auto-recloser ready (ZCLC-ARREADY) allows an overreaching zone (ZCLC-EXACC) to trip instantaneously (see figure 45). For this reason, configure the ZCLC-ARREADY functional input to a AR0n-READY functional output of a used auto-reclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device.

Z C L C -B L O C K Z C L C -A R R E A D Y Z C L C -N D S T Z C L C -E X A C C 1

& &

TR IP 1 - co n t.

990 00452.vsd

Figure 45:

Simplified logic diagram for the local acceleration logic

After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will be no ZCLC-ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) or on adjacent line, only the first trip will be instantaneous. 3.2.2 Loss-of-load acceleration When the acceleration is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used for acceleration (ZCLC-LLACC) is not allowed to trip instantaneously during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been >10% of Ir for more than 35 ms, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip instantaneously during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite terminal,

98

Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

see figure 46. The current measurement is performed internally in one of the built-in digital signal processors and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.

ZCLC-BLOCK ZCLC-BC

>1
15 ms

STILL ZCLC-LLACC

&

TRIP2 - cont.

99000453.vsd

Figure 46:

Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

3.3
3.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the local acceleration logic functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. To allow the overreaching trip controlled by the auto-recloser at earth-faults only, the zone used for this function can be set with a normal reach of 85% for phase-to-phase faults, but with an increased X1PE and X0PE setting that gives an overreach for earth-faults. This setting generally excludes the use of this zone for any purpose other than local acceleration logic.

99

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

4
4.1

General fault criteria (GFC)

Application
General fault criterion is a basic function in line protection terminals REL 501 and REL 511 as well as in their C-series variants. The following description is relevant for all of them, with the exception of all functionality for the earth-faults related to REL 501 and its C-series variants. It is also possible to apply it to different other, customer specific REx 5xx terminals. Please, check the ordering details for each specific terminal. The distance protection function remains the most widely used protection function in all networks. It is a common practice to have two line protection units installed on the transmission, and in many cases also on the subtransmission lines, to achieve a sufficient degree of availability for the selected protection system. The remote back-up protection systems play an important, but not essential role. A different type of practice is applied in distribution and in certain subtransmission networks. Here, the economical reasons dictate the use of a single line protection at each line end. If it is a line differential protection, which depends very much on the availability of a communication link, it is necessary to add a relative selective protection scheme (distance protection), either locally as a local backup, or also on all the adjacent lines, as a remote back-up. Therefore, the security of the used protection schemes is very important. Many utilities require that two different measuring elements - which must operate for the same fault - are built into the existing distance relays. The first one is generally an overall impedance measuring element with a very high reach and a long time delay for its tripping function. Since many older distance relays used for these purposes are switched scheme relays and these overall measuring elements are used for the course detection of a fault type and starting the zone measurement and related timers, they are called starting elements. The second measuring element must measure impedance in the fault loop more precisely, according to the selectivity planning in the network. In the existing protection schemes, these measuring relays are called measuring elements, and usually only one of them is built into each of the conventional distance relays.

The distance protection, as built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals, is a full scheme distance protection (see the document Distance protection. This means that it has separate and independent measurement for each separate fault loop in each respective distance protection zone. Besides the full scheme design, separate measuring elements can be added to perform the functions of the overall measuring elements in the existing protection schemes. They determine only whether there is a fault in the bigger part of a network around the terminal. They are therefore called General fault criteria elements (GFC). The underimpedance based GFC function has an advanced operate characteristic as presented principally in figure 47 . The overcurrent based GFC function has built-in separate phase and residual current measuring elements. It is also possible to use both the underimpedance and overcurrent criteria at the same time. Please, refer to the ordering particulars for each terminal separately for more details about the included options.

100

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Settings of the reach for impedance based GFC elements are independent of each other to the greatest possible extent. It is therefore possible to set the reactive reach in reverse direction independent of the one in forward direction. It is also possible to set different reactive reach for the phase-to-phase and for the phase-to-earth measurement. The zero-sequence reactance for the setting of the reach in forward and reverse direction can differ from one another. The algorithm calculates automatically the earth return compensation according to the set values.

jX
XFW ZONE 3 ZONE 2 ZONE 1

LA

RLoad

RF

XRV
99000189.vsd

ZONE 4

Figure 47:

Operating characteristics of the GFC (impedance measuring principle) and zone measuring elements

Figure 47 presents principally a shaped operate characteristic for an impedance based GFC function. Different designations have the following meaning: XFW: reactive reach in forward direction XRV: reactive reach in reverse direction RF: resistive reach within the unlimited area RLoad: resistive reach restricted by the minimum load impedance LA: expected load impedance angle

The setting of the resistive reaches is independent of that of the reactive reaches. It is possible to have the resistive reach different for phase-to-earth (ph - E) and phase-to-phase (ph-ph) or three-phase faults. To make the GFC function as sensitive as possible to faults with higher fault

101

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

resistances, a separate setting of the reach in resistive direction in the possible load impedance area has been introduced. In addition to this, a characteristic is also adaptable to the possible load impedance with a settable load impedance angle. 4.1.1 Phase preference logic Phase preference logic is a possible addition to the GFC in isolated and high-impedance earthed networks, where the single-pole-to-earth faults are not to be cleared by impedance measurement. To achieve a fast and selective tripping of one of the earth faults in case of cross-country faults (two single-phase to earth faults on different lines in network), the phase preference logic selects one of faulty lines to be tripped according to a selected preference scheme.

4.2
4.2.1

Functionality
Impedance measuring elements The basic algorithm for the operation of the impedance based GFC is the same as that for the distance protection measuring function (see section Distance protection). The difference, compared to the zone-measuring elements, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults. Measuring elements for the ph-E faults The GFC elements for the ph-E faults measure the impedance according to the following equation:

4.2.2

U Ln ZMLn = --------------------------------I Ln ( 1 + K NF )
(Equation 77)

Where: ULN ILN KNF is a phasor of measured voltage in phase Ln is a phasor of measured current in phase Ln is an earth return compensation factor, calculated automatically according to the equation:

X0FwPE X1FwPE KNF = -----------------------------------------------------3 X1FwPE

(Equation 78)

Where: X1FwPE and X0FwPE are the reactive reach setting parameters for forward direction.

102

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

A separate earth return compensation is calculated according to similar formula with the reactive reach setting parameters for reverse direction, X1RvPE and X0FwRv respectively. The operation of the corresponding measuring loop occurs, when the following conditions are satisfied.

Im ( Z MLn ) < X1FwPE

(Equation 79)

and

X1RvPE < Im ( Z ML n )
(Equation 80)

as well as:

Re ( Z MLn )

<

RFPE 1+KNF
(Equation 81)

Where: RFPE is the resistive reach for the phase-to-earth measurement, outside the load impedance area

The resistive reach is limited within the load impedance area, which is defined by the load angle ARGLd. The resistive reach conditional equation changes in this case to:

RLd ---------Re ( ZM Ln ) < --------1 + KN F

(Equation 82)

Where: RLd is a set resistive reach within the load impedance area.

Besides this, the relation between the measured currents must correspond to the following conditions:
Iph > 0.5 IMinO p
(Equation 83)

103

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

and
3 I 0 > 0. 5 IMinOp
(Equation 84)

and

INReleasePE - I phmax IN1 3 I0 > ----------------------------------100

(Equation 85)

Where: IMinOp Iphmax INReleasePE IN1 is the set value of a minimum operating current for the distance protection is a maximum current among all three phase currents. is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E fault loops (in %) is a corresponding logic signal.

4.2.3

Measuring elements for ph-ph and three-phase faults The GFC elements for the ph-ph faults measure the impedance according to the equation

ULm ULn ZMLmLn = -------------------------ILm I Ln

(Equation 86)

The operation occurs under the following conditions:

Im ( ZM LmLn ) < X1FwPP

(Equation 87)

and

X1Rv PP < Im ( ZMLmLn )

(Equation 88)

as well as:

104

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Re Z MLmLn

<

RFPP
2
(Equation 89)

Where: X1FwPP X1RvPP RFPP is a forward reactive reach for the phase-to-phase measurement is a reverse reactive reach for the phase-to-phase measurement is an unlimited resistive reach for the phase-to-phase measurement

The resistive reach is limited within the load impedance area, which is defined by the load angle ARGLd. The resistive reach conditional equation changes in this case to:

RLd Re ( Z MLmLn ) < ---------2

(Equation 90)

Besides this, the relation between the measured currents must correspond to the following conditions:
Iph ph > I MinOp
(Equation 91)

and
3 I 0 < ( 0, 2 I r )
(Equation 92)

or

INBlockPP ------------- I phmax IN2 3 I 0 < --------------100

(Equation 93)

Ir is the rated current of the terminal and IN2 is a corresponding logic signal. Iphmaxis the maximum current of all three phase currents. INBlockPP is the setting for the residual current level below which operation of the ph-ph fault loops is allowed. Iph-ph is a difference of phase currents in observed faulty phases.

105

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

4.2.4

Current-based GFC elements The current-based GFC measuring elements measure continuously three phase currents and the residual current, comparing them with the set values. Fourier's recursive filter filters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements. If Ilim is a set value of the operating current for the phase measuring elements (designated by I> in the terminal), and INlim for the measuring element that measures the residual current (designated by IN> in the terminal), the operating conditions are as follows:
IL1 > I lim IL1
(Equation 94)

for the phase L1 current measuring element

IL2 > I lim IL2
(Equation 95)

for the phase L2 current measuring element

IL3 > I lim IL3
(Equation 96)

for the phase L3 current measuring element

3 I 0 > I Nli m IN
(Equation 97)

for the residual current measuring element where ILn and IN are corresponding logical signals.

4.3

Design
A separate digital signal processor, independent of the zone measuring elements, performs the measurement for the general fault criteria. The built-in logic follows the following Boolean equations:

GFCL1 = I> IL1 + Z< IN1 ZML1 + Z< IN2 ( ZML1L2 + ZML1L3 )
(Equation 98)

106

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

GFCL2 = I> IL2 + Z< IN1 ZML2 + Z< IN2 ( ZML2L3 + ZML1L2 )
(Equation 99)

GFCL3 = I> IL3 + Z< IN1 ZML3 + Z< IN2 ( ZML3L1 + ZML2L3 )
(Equation 100)

GFCN = I> IN + Z< IN1 ZML1 + ZML2 + ZML3

(Equation 101)

Where: Z< I> represents active underimpedance mode of operation (setting) represents active overcurrent mode of operation (setting)

Later on, the signals produced by the GFC measuring elements serve for different parts of the distance protection. These are: indication of the faulty phases phase selection for the zone measuring elements general criteria for the operation of the trip logic time delayed trip as a backup function to the zone measuring elements phase preference logic, when included in a terminal

Figure 48 presents basic logic circuits dealing with current conditions for the detection of ph-E and ph-ph faults (consider only the parts and signals, which correspond to the actual functionality of a used terminal)

107

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

3 I0 0.5 IMinOp & 3I0 (INRelease PE/100) Iph max GFC--BLOCK &
t

IRELPE - cont. 15 ms GFC--STPE

15 ms 3 I0 0.2 Ir & or 3I0 (INBlockPP/100) Iph max 10 ms

t

20 ms
t

&

GFC--STPP

IRELPP - cont.

en01000048.vsd

Figure 48:

Detection of ph-E and ph-ph fault conditions

108

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

NO FILTER ACTIVE = 1 ST3U0 STUL1 STUL2 STUL3 IRELPE-cont. GFCN GFCL1N GFCL2N GFCL3N GFCL1L2 GFCL2L3 GFCL3L1 IRELPP-cont.

&

15 ms t

GFC--STNDPE

& & & 1 INDL1N - cont. INDL2N - cont. INDL3N - cont. 1 & & & 1 & & & INDL1L2 - cont. INDL2L3 - cont. INDL3L1 - cont. 1 15 ms t GFC--STNDL3 1 15 ms t 15 ms t

& 1 GFC--STNDL1

GFC--STNDL2

99000546.vsd

Figure 49:

Composition of non-directional GFC signals

Figure 49 presents schematically the composition of non-directional general criteria signals GFC--STNDLn, where n presents the corresponding phase number. Signals GFCLnN and GFCLmLn (m and n change between 1 and 3 according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element.

109

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

&
INDL1N - cont. DFWL1N INDL1L2 - cont. DFWL1L2 INDL3L1 - cont. DFWL3L1 INDL2N - cont. DFWL2N INDL1L2 - cont.

& & & >1 & & >1

15 ms t

15 ms t 15 ms t

GFC--STFW1PH

GFC--STFWL1

15 ms

>1 & & & >1

15 ms

GFC--STFWPE

15 ms t

GFC--STFWL2

15 ms t

INDL2L3 - cont. DFWL2L3 INDL3N - cont. DFWL3N INDL2L3 - cont.

& &

>1

GFC--STFW2PH

&

&

15 ms t

GFC--STFWL3

&
INDL3L1 - cont.

>1
15 ms

& &

GFC--STFW3PH

en00000483.vsd

Figure 50:

Composition of forward directed GFC signals.

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 50 and figure 51. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm (m and n are running between 1 and 3). Designation FW (figure 50) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 51) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.

110

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

INDL1N - cont. DRVL1N INDL1L2 - cont. DRVL1L2 INDL3L1 - cont. DRVL3L1 INDL2N - cont. DRVL2N INDL1L2 - cont.

&
15 ms

&

>1

GFC--STRVL1

&
15 ms

>1 &

GFC--STRVPE

15 ms

&
INDL2L3 - cont. DRVL2L3 INDL3N - cont. DRVL3N INDL2L3 - cont.

>1

GFC--STRVL2

INDL1N -cont.

&

INDL2N - cont. INDL3N - cont. INDL1L2 - cont. Bool to integer GFC--STCND

&

INDL2L3 - cont. INDL3L1 - cont. 15 ms GFC--STRVL3

&
INDL3L1 - cont.

>1

&
en00000484.vsd

Figure 51:

Composition of reverse directed GFC signals and measured impedance related zone starting conditions

Figure 52 presents a composition of a GFC tripping signal, which consists of two different conditions: earth fault and phase-to-phase fault operating conditions. Each path has its own timer (tPE and tPP), to further increase the flexibility of a complete function

111

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Timer tPE=On INDL1N-cont. INDL2N-cont. INDL3N-cont. Timer tPP=On INDL1L2-cont. INDL2L3-cont. INDL3L1-cont. 1 & tPP t tPE 1 &
t

15ms t

GFC--TRIP

en000000485.vsd

Figure 52:

Composition of time-delayed tripping signal

Figure 53 presents a composition of a starting condition integer signal, which is supposed to be configured to the distance protection zones and their starting condition inputs (ZMn--STCND). The signal controls the operation of different measuring loops in each distance protection separately.

PPINDL1N - cont.

&
PPINDL2N - cont.

IN: 1 Bool to integer

&
PPINDL3N - cont. 2/3ENABLE - cont. INDL1L2 - cont. INDL2L3 - cont. INDL3L1 - cont.

2 IN GFC - STCND

&

4 8 16 32

99000541.vsd

Figure 53: 4.3.1

GFC start condition with phase preference

Phase preference logic The phase preference logic has two different parts: The first part inhibits tripping at single-pole earth faults The second part initiates tripping at cross-country faults, together with the selection of the selected fault-loop, to trip the preferred line.

112

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The initiation of the tripping is achieved by measuring the earth-fault current (3I0). At single-pole earth-faults in isolated or high-impedance earthed systems, a transient residual current 3I0 with a duration up to 60 ms can occur. To eliminate false release and consequently false tripping at single-phase-to-earth faults, a logic evaluating the earth-fault voltage (3U0) and the phase-to-phase voltages is used. This logic prevent false tripping without delaying the tripping at cross-country faults, see figure 54. In addition to the cross country current controlled logic it is possible to activate a logical 2 out of 3 criteria. The logic blocks the GFC forward and reverse functions until two earth-faults are detected by the GFC nondirectional function. See figure 55.

STUL1 STUL2 STUL3

& & & & >1 100 m s t 100 m s t 150 m s t >1 & IU E N A B L E

ST3U 0 S T IN P P L

e n 0 0 0 0 0 4 8 6 .vs d

Figure 54:

Cross-country fault detection logic

The phase preference logic is controlled by the GFC output signals. Both cyclic, acyclic and acyclic with one phase blocked can be chosen with the different phase preference combinations. The principle for each type of logic are shown in figures 56 to 58.

113

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Block1phTrip =OFF Block1phTrip =ON

INDL1N - cont.

&
INDL2N - cont.

&
INDL3N - cont.

>1

&

>1

2/3 ENABLE - cont.

&
STUL1 STUL2 STUL3

& & &

100 ms 100 ms t t

>1

&

ST3UO STINPPL

&

>1

IUENABLE - cont.

99000542.vsd

Figure 55:

Cross-country fault detection logic with phase preference logic

NO PREF. ACTIVE = 1 NO FILTER ACTIVE = 1 IUENABLE - cont.

>1 >1 & PPINDL1N - cont

INDL1N - cont.

INDL2N - cont.

&

PPINDL2N - cont

INDL3N - cont.

&

PPINDL3N - cont

99000537.vsd

Figure 56:

Phase preference logic with no filter setting and no preference setting

114

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

132c ACTIVE = 1 IUENABLE - cont. INDL1N - cont.

&

PPINDL1N - cont

INDL2N - cont.

&

PPINDL2N - cont

INDL3N - cont.

&

PPINDL3N - cont

99000538.vsd

Figure 57:

Cyclic phase preference logic with 132c setting active

132a ACTIVE = 1 IUENABLE - cont. INDL1N - cont.

&

PPINDL1N - cont

INDL2N - cont.

&

PPINDL2N - cont

INDL3N - cont.

&

PPINDL3N - cont

99000539.vsd

Figure 58:

Acyclic phase preference logic with 132a setting active

115

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

132aBL ACTIVE = 1 IUENABLE - cont. INDL1N - cont. INDL2N - cont.

&

PPINDL1N - cont

&

PPINDL2N - cont

INDL3N - cont.

&

PPINDL3N - cont

99000540.vsd

Figure 59:

Acyclic phase preference logic with one phase blocked, 132Bl. setting active

4.4
4.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the general fault criteria functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. For the remote setting facilities and local HMI via a personal computer, please refer to the corresponding SMS or SCS documents. The first parameter under the GFC is the operating mode, which is selectable among two different possibilities:

Operation Z< = On Operation I> = On

the GFC will operate on an underimpedance basis the GFC will operate on an over current basis

It is also possible to have active both operating modes at the same time. The available operating mode depends on the functions available within the terminal. Only one of two or both operating modes are available depending on ordering. Please, refer to ordering particulars for each terminal separately. 4.4.2 General setting parameters Operation of the GFC measurement is enabled or disabled by setting the Operation = On or Off respectively. Setting the parameters Timer tPP and Timer tPE On or Off enables or disables the time delayed tripping, caused by the GFC measurement for the ph-ph and ph-E faults respectively.

116

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

If not the 2 out of 3 logic is active it is recommend to set Timer tPP and Timer tPE to Off in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks, if the distance protection is not intended or permitted to operate at single-phase-to-earth faults. Setting of tPP and tPE timers define the tripping time delay of the GFC function, if activated. 4.4.3 Setting parameters for the I> mode of operation The setting of the operating value for the overcurrent GFC phase measuring elements IP> must be higher than the maximum expected load current in the protected feeder. It is necessary to consider an additional margin of at least 10% to the declared inaccuracy of the current instrument transformers and measuring elements. There will always be a certain low value of measured residual current 3I0 in the measuring circuits due to the differences in the current instrument transformers. Higher values can be expected on longer lines with a higher operating voltage. The presence of the close untransposed lines, where the zero-sequence mutual coupling effect is significant, will additionally increase the apparent residual current measured by the terminal. Therefore, it is usually necessary to set the operating value of the earth-fault current measuring element IN> at a minimum of 10% of the line nominal current. The setting value must be increased on the longer, untransposed lines and in cases where the zero-sequence mutual coupling effect is significant. 4.4.4 Setting parameters for the Z< mode of operation The setting instructions refer to the operating characteristic of the GFC elements as shown principally in a figure in Application. The GFC characteristic should, in general, cover all the impedance measuring zones used for the distance protection, regardless of their directionality. The following parameters should be set for the GFC, operating in the underimpedance mode: X1FwPP is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach of the GFC elements in forward direction for ph-ph faults. X1FwPE is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach of the GFC elements in forward direction for ph-E fault (not available in REL 501). X0FwPE is a zero-sequence reactance that defines the total reactive reach of the GFC earth-fault loop measuring elements in forward direction (not available in REL 501) for the ph-E faults. X1RvPP is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach of the GFC elements in reverse direction for the ph-ph faults. We recommend having X1RvPP > =10% of X1FwPP in order to guaranty a correct measurement for close up faults. X1RvPE is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach of the GFC elements in reverse direction for the ph-E faults. We recommend having X1RvPE > = 10% of X1FwPE in order to guaranty a correct measurement for close up faults. X0RvPE is a zero-sequence reactance that defines the complete reactive reach of the GFC earth-fault loop measuring elements in reverse direction (not available in REL 501) for ph-E faults. We recommend having X0RvPE > =10% of X0FwPE in order to guaranty a correct measurement for close up faults.

117

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

RFPP is the resistive reach of the GFC elements for multi-phase faults. It should be set as a loop value of the measured resistances, according to the formula:

RFPP > 2 R1PP + RF

(Equation 102)

Where: R1PP RF is a corresponding line positive sequence resistance is the expected fault resistance between two faulty phases.

RFPE is the resistive reach of the GFC elements for the phase-to-earth-faults (not available in REL 501). It should be set as a loop value of the measured resistances, according to the formula:

1 - ( 2 R1PE + R0PE ) + RF RFPE > -3

(Equation 103)

Where: R1PE R0PE RF is a corresponding line positive-sequence resistance is a corresponding line zero-sequence resistance is a fault resistance as expected for the single-phase-to-earth-faults.

RLd is the resistive reach in the load impedance area. For the corresponding instructions, please refer to the Setting instructions for the distance protection function (document Distance protection). Observe the loop character of this setting parameter. It should be set generally to:

RLd < 1.6 R Lmin

(Equation 104)

Where: RLmin represents the minimum expected load resistance

118

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

ARGLd is the maximum expected load angle that could appear under the maximum load conditions on a protected line. One of the following expressions can be used for its calculation:

P Q Q ARGLd = acos --- = asin --- = atan --S S P

(Equation 105)

Where: S P Q is the apparent power is the active power is the reactive power

Setting parameters INReleasePE and INBlockPP (both are settable in percentage of the terminal rated current Ir) control the operation of the phase-to-earth and the phase-to-phase measuring elements. They should in general be set to the default values, which are INReleasePE = 20%, and INBlockPP = 40%. Special system studies and calculations of fault currents are necessary in cases, when the remote end positive sequence source impedance is much higher than the zero sequence source impedance. The results of these studies may require in some special cases to set these parameters different from their default values.

4.4.5

Phase preference logic The phase preference logic is set in the menu under: Setting Functions Group n Impedance GenFltCriteria At PhasePref setting NoFilter the IUENABLE criteria is not blocking the tripping at single-phase-to-earth faults. The NoPref setting is blocking the tripping at single-phase-to-earth faults but allowing tripping without phase preference at cross-country faults. The phase preference tripping at cross-country faults is defined in the setting menu that phase L1 is tripped before L2 and L2 before L3 by the notation 123. The preference can be cyclic or acyclic by the added c or a. With the Bl it is indicated that fault in the last noted phase will not be tripped at any cases. The setting IN> shall be chosen higher than the maximum

3 I0
(Equation 106)

119

General fault criteria (GFC)

Chapter 4 Line distance

current at the relay point during any single-phase-to-earth fault. The

3 U0 >
(Equation 107)

is normally set to 30% of base voltage U1b. The setting UPP< and UPN< are used for the non directional phase selection and is normaly set to 70 % of base voltage U1b.

120

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

5
5.1
5.1.1

Power swing detection (PSD)

Application
General Various changes in power system may cause oscillations of rotating units. The most typical reasons for these oscillations are big changes in load or changes in power system configuration caused by different faults and their clearance. As the rotating masses strive to find a stable operate condition, they oscillate with damped oscillations until they reach the final stability. The extent of the oscillations depends on the extent of the disturbances and on the natural stability of the system. The oscillation rate depends also on the inertia of the system and on the impedance between different generating units. These oscillations cause changes in phase and amplitude of the voltage difference between the oscillating parts of the power system. This causes changes in power flow between two oscillating parts of the system - the power swings from one part to another - and vice-versa.

jX

Impedance locus at power swing

R
99000158.vsd

Figure 60:

Impedance plane with the locus of the measured impedance and operate characteristics of the zone measuring elements.

Distance relays see these power swings as the swinging of the measured impedance in relay points. The measured impedance varies with time along a locus in an impedance plane (see figure 60). This locus can enter the operate characteristic of a distance protection and causes, if no preventive measures have been considered, its unwanted operation. 5.1.2 Basic characteristics The power swing detection function (PSD) is optionally available in most of the REx 5xx terminals, which include also the line distance protection function. Please, refer to the ordering information for each terminal separately.

121

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The PSD function detects reliably power swings with periodic time of swinging as low as 200 ms (i.e. slip frequency as high as 10% of the rated frequency on the 50 Hz basis). It detects the swings under normal system operate conditions as well as during dead-time of a single-pole reclosing cycle. The function is able to secure selective operation for internal faults during power swings, when used together with optional power swing logic (PSL) and some additional functions, available within the REx 5xx terminals. The operation of the distance protection function remains stable for external faults during the power swing condition, even with the swing (electrical) centre on the protected line.

5.2
5.2.1

Functionality
Theory of operation The operation of the PSD function is based on the measurement of the transition time needed for the transient impedance to pass the area between the outer and the inner impedance characteristic of the PSD function, see figure 61.

jX
KX X 1IN

X 1IN Impedance locus at power swing KR R1IN R1IN R1IN

R
KR R1IN

tP1 X 1IN KX X 1IN

99000159.vsd

Figure 61:

Operating principle and characteristic of the PSD function.

The impedance measuring principle is based on the same impedance measuring algorithm as used by the distance protection zone measuring elements, see section 1 "Distance protection (ZM)".

122

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving the following equations (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase):
U L1 - R set Re -------- I L1

(Equation 108)

and

U L1 - X set Im -------- I L1
Where: Xset Rset corresponds to the reactive reach setting values X1IN for the internal and (KX . X1IN) for the external operate characteristic of the PSD function and corresponds to the resistive reach setting values R1IN for the internal and (KR . R1IN) for the external operate characteristic.

5.3
5.3.1

Design
Basic detection logic The PSD function can operate in two operating modes: The 1-of-3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of three phases. Figure 62 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DET-L1 in this particular phase. The internal signal PSD-CONS.-int. is related to the same signal in figure The 2-of-3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two out of three phases. Figure 63 presents a composition of the detection signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTLn (external boundary) and ZINLn (internal boundary) are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, and L3) They are internal signals, produced by the corresponding digital signal processors (DSPs). All tP1 timers in figure 62 have the same settings. They serve the detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timers become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings if the measured impedance exits the operate area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. All tP2 timers in figure 62 have the same setting.

123

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

ZOUTL1 ZINL1 tW t

&

tP1 t tP2 t 1

&

&

&

PSD-DET-L1

en01000056.vsd

Figure 62:

Detection of power-swing in phase L1.

PSD-DET-L1 PSD-DET-L2 PSD-DET-L3

DET1of3 - int.

& 1 DET2of3 - int.

&

&

en01000057.vsd

Figure 63: 5.3.2

Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode.

Operating and inhibit conditions Figure 64 presents a simplified logic diagram for a PSD function. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 62 and figure 63 respectively. Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, and PSD--BLK2PH (see the signal list in the appendix to this document).

124

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

ZOUTL1 ZOUTL2 ZOUTL3

tEF t

1 ZINL1 & ZINL2 ZINL3 & 1

PSD--ZOUT

PSD--ZIN

PSD--TRSP PSD--I0CHECK PSD--START PSD--BLKI02

&

10 ms t

1 tR1 t

& tR2 t

INHIBIT

PSD--BLKI01 PSD--BLOCK DET1of3 - int. PSD--REL1PH PSD--BLK1PH DET2of3 - int. PSD--REL2PH PSD--BLK2PH PSD--EXTERNAL

&

&
tH

PSD - CONS. - int.

t

1 &

&

PSD--START

en01000060.vsd

Figure 64:

PSD function - simplified block diagram.

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal: Logical 1 on functional input PSD--BLOCK inhibits the output PSD--START signal instantaneously. The INHIBIT internal signal becomes logical 1, if the power swing has been detected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the PSD--BLKI01 functional input.

125

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

The INHIBIT internal signal becomes logical 1 after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if the power swing appears before the functional PSD--I0CHECK becomes logical 1. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input. The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input PSD--I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes on persistent single-phase fault after single-pole auto-reclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

5.4
5.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the power swing detection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Setting the reach of the inner characteristic Set the reach of the inner characteristic R1IN in the resistive direction, see figure 65, as well as X1IN in the reactive direction, so that the inner operate characteristic completely covers all distance protection zones, which are supposed to be blocked by the PSD function. It is recommended to consider at least 10% of additional safety margin.

5.4.2

126

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

jX KX X1IN

X1IN

-KR R1IN - R1IN

- R1IN

R KR R1IN

-X1IN

-KX X1IN

en01000058.vsd

Figure 65: 5.4.3

Operating characteristic of the PSD function

Setting the reach of the outer characteristic Set the reach of the outer characteristic as a multiple of a reach for the inner characteristic. KR and KX are the setting parameters, expressed in percentages of the set reaches in resistive (R1IN) and reactive (X1IN) direction for the inner operate characteristic.

R1 OUT K R = 100 --------------------R1IN

(Equation 109)

and

127

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

X1OUT -----KX = 100 -------------X1IN

(Equation 110)

R1OUT and X1OUT are the calculated values of the reach for the outer characteristic. Also observe the fact, that the minimum values for KR and KX are equal to 120%. 5.4.4 Limitation of the resistive reach The reach in the resistive direction should not exceed more than 80% of the minimum load resistance RLmin. This stands for both the reach of the inner as well as for the reach of the outer characteristic.

R1IN 0.8 R Lmin

(Equation 111)

and
R Lmi n KR 80 -------------R1IN
(Equation 112)

5.4.5

Determination of the impedance difference and speed The resistive transition area, which is equal to:
R = R1OUT R1IN
(Equation 113)

should be set as wide as possible, considering the limitations for covering the desired distance protection zones and not entering the load impedance area. At the same time, it depends on the maximum required initial speed of the impedance, which should still be recognised as a power swing and not as a fault. The initial speed of impedance must be determined by the system studies. It is recommended to try the first iteration with the default time delay for the tP1 timer, which is 45 ms, and calculate, if the set speed of the transition impedance corresponds to the condition:
R1 OUT R1IN Z ----------------------------------------- > ----- t req tP1
(Equation 114)

The expression:

128

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

( Z t ) req
(Equation 115)

represents the maximum required speed of impedance, which should still be recognised as an initial power swing. Reduce the setting of the tP1 time delay only, if the upper condition can not be satisfied with the resistance settings on their specified minimum and maximum possible values. System studies also determine the maximum possible speed of the transition impedance. Set the tP2 timer so, that the maximum detectable speed of the transition impedance satisfies the condition:
R1OUT R1IN Z ----------------------------------------- > ----- t m ax tP2
(Equation 116)

The expression :
( Z t ) ma x
(Equation 117)

represents the maximum required speed of impedance, which should still be recognised as a power swing within the developed stage. 5.4.6 Reactive reach The reactive transition area should generally be equal to the resistive transition area. If supposed, that the reactive reach of the inner characteristic is determined by the distance protection zone reach and equal to X1IN, then the reactive multiplication factor must be equal to:
R1IN KR - --------- 1 + 1 KX = 100 ------------ X1IN 100
(Equation 118)

Set the KX to 120%, if the calculation requires a value less than 120%. 5.4.7 tH hold timer System studies should determine the settings for the hold timer tH see section 5.2 "Functionality". The purpose of this timer is, to secure continuous output signal from the PSD function during the power swing, even after the transient impedance leaves the PSD operate characteristic and is expected to return within a certain time due to continuous swinging. Consider the minimum possible speed of power swinging in a particular system.

129

Power swing detection (PSD)

Chapter 4 Line distance

5.4.8

tR1 inhibit timer The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current on the inhibit criteria for the PSD function. It prevents operation of the function for short transients in the residual current measured by the terminal. tR2 inhibit timer The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PSD--START signal from the PSD function, if the measured impedance remains within the PSD operate area for a time, longer than the set tR2 value. This time delay was usually set to approximately two seconds in older power-swing devices. tEF timer for reclosing on persistent single-phase faults The setting of the tEF timer must cover, with sufficient margin, the opening time of a circuit breaker and the dead-time of a single-phase auto-reclosing together with the breaker closing time.

5.4.9

5.4.10

130

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Chapter 4 Line distance

6
6.1

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Application
The most common application of Radial feeder protection is to provide tripping at the remote end of lines with passive load or with weak end infeed. The radial feeeder protection function must be included in the terminal at the weak infeed end of the feeder. Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection at the remote end of a feeder can detect the fault. The detection requires a minimum of fault current, normally > 20 % of Ir. The fault current can be low due to absence of generated power or low short circuit current of the source. The fault current can initially be too low due to the fault current distribution. In this case the fault current increases when the breaker opens at the strong line end, and a sequential tripping is achieved. The detection of the fault by an independent tripping zone 1 is then required. To avoid sequential tripping as described or when zone1 is not avaible, the protection terminal must be provided with the radial feeder protection function.

6.2

Functionality
The radial feeder protection function performs phase selection using the measured voltages. The selection logic is common for both fast and delayed tripping. The fast tripping makes use of scheme communication whilst the delayed tripping operates independently. The latter is activated in case of failure of the communication channel. On reception of the communication signals, the phase selective tripping outputs are activated on the relevant faulty phases. At single-phase fault the tripping can be subject to residual current check. The delay time is independently settable for single-pole and three-pole tripping. Furthermore it is possible to select or not the three-pole tripping as well to select three-pole tripping also for single-phase fault. Fault on more than one phase will always result in a three-pole tripping. In case of fuse failure, the normal single and three-phase operation is inhibited, but three-pole tripping will anyhow occur if the residual current exceeds the set level for a longer time than the three-pole trip delay time tT .

6.3

Design
The function consists of two subfunctions.

131

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Chapter 4 Line distance

one measuring part evaluating the measurands one logical part processing internal and external signals

The logical part consists of four subfunctions. fast fault clearing delayed fault clearing detection of residual current generation of commands for breaker tripping and autorecloser starting

Measuring functions The inputs for the measuring function are the three-phase voltages UL1 , UL2 , UL3 and either the three-phase currents IL11, IL2 , IL3 or the residual current IN Phase selection The phase selection is based on voltage measurement. The logical flow for phase L1 is shown in figure 66:

UL2 U L3

+ -

U =
1 - 6 0 (1 )s

*k
+ en01000066.vsd

k= 0 .5 -1 (0 ,0 5 ) PHSL1

UL1

Figure 66:

Phase selection function

The phase selection for phase L2 and L3 is performed in the same way.The function operates by comparing each phase voltage e.g. UL1 with the perpendicular main voltage UL2 UL3.The magnitude of phase phase voltage is monitored by feeding the full-wave rectified signal through a filter . This updates continuously the output voltage if it is lower than the input voltage but when the intput signal is lower than the output this twill decrease according to an exponential function with a time constant settable between 1 and 60 s. See figure 67:

Time constant=Tau

Output from filter Rectified input signal

en01000140.vsd

132

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Figure 67:

Filtering function

The phase selection time becomes <40 ms when the phase voltage drops below 70 % of the setting for phase phase voltage. Residual current detection The magnitude of the neutral current IN is obtained by summing the three-phase currents or it is directly detected by an appropriate monophase current transformer. See figure 68:

IL1 IL2 IL3 ILN

Setting Is=0.2 - 1,0(0,1)*Ir

t=600 ms STIN t

en01000067.vsd

Figure 68:

Residual current measurement

The choice between using the sum of phase currents or the residual current is made by setting.The residual current detection time is <40 ms when the current exceeds 150 % of the set level. Function for fast fault clearing The logic diagram for this function is shown in figure 69:

BLOCK VTSU CR

1 &

t t=650ms PHSL1
From phase selection

& & &

STL1 STL2 STL3

PHSL2 PHSL3

en01000068.vsd

Figure 69:

Function for fast fault clearing

133

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Tripping at the remote end of lines with passive load or with weak end infeed is obtained with the following criteria: The fault clearing is initiated by a received signal from the remote end terminal. The function is enabled for 650 ms after the signal is received.This is a one shoot circuit, i.e. once the pulse element is triggered it will emit a single pulse regardless of successive triggering under the set time.If no blocking signal is present, (BLOCK + VTSU where VTSU is fuse failure detection signal ), the and circuits, will generate the start signals STL1 , STL2 or STL3, depending on the status of the phase selection outputs PHSL1, PHSL2, PHSL3. The presence of either the signal BLOCK or VTSU will ihibit the operation. Function for delayed fault clearing This function entails a slower tripping than the remotely initiated tripping time. See figure 70:

BLOCK BLKDEL COMOK

1 PHSL1
From phase selection

1 tM=0,00-60,00(0,01)s & & & & & &

t

1 1 1

STL1 STL2 STL3

PHSL2 PHSL3

P2 STIN

1 & & & 1 & 1 2 &

t

VTSU P1

tT=0,00-60,00(0,01)s

P3

en01000069.vsd

Figure 70:

Function for delayed fault clearing

The inputs BLOCK (block of radial feeder protection) BLKDEL (block of delayed fault clearing) and COMOK (telecommunication link healthy) inhibit the delayed function.In case of fuse failure , signal VTSU high , the normal single and three-phase operation is inhibited. If during a fuse failure the residual current signal STIN is high for a longer time than the three-phase trip time tT , a three-phase tripping will occur.The settings P1 , P2 , P3, control the operating mode of the delayed fault clearing according to table 1 Selection of operating mode.

134

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Table 7:
Parameter

Selection of operating mode

Selection On OFF

P1 P2 P3

Del1PhFltTrip ResCurrCheck Del3PhTrip

Single-phase tripping for single-phase fault in time tM Single-phase operation with residual current check Time delayed trip for three-phase fault

Three-phase tripping for single-phase fault in time tT Single-phase operation without residual current check No time delayed trip for three-phase fault

Function for residual current detection This function indicates the presence of residual current when its value exceedes the set level for a longer time than the set time tPIR, see figure 72:

STIN

t tPIR=0,00 - 60,00(0,01)s

TRIN

en01000070.vsd

Figure 71:

Function for residual current detection

Trip and autorecloser start logic The start signals STL1, STL2, STL3, are generated in the function for fast fault clearing and delayed fault clearing. A trip signal will be issued in the relevant faulty phase(s), TRL1, TRL2, TRL3. The general trip signal TRIP will also be issued.These output signals will activate the standard trip functions included in the protection terminal.Both the minimum length of the trip pulse and the command for a three-phase trip at two phase start are controlled in the logic of the normal trip circuitry.The single/three-phase operation of the autorecloser depends on the status of the C.B signal CBCLOSED and on the existence of pole discrepancy signal POLDISC. If the conditions for a reclosing are fulfilled, a start signal will be issued in the concerned phase(s) ARSTL1, ARSTL2 and ARSTL3. A general start signal, ARSTART will also be issued. In the case of multiphase fault the issued signal will be ARST3P. The functional diagram of the relevant logic is shown in figure 72.

135

Radial feeder protection (PAP)

Chapter 4 Line distance

1 STL1 STL2 STL3

TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 ARSTL1 ARSTL2 ARSTL3

& & POLDISC t=100 ms t CBCLOSED & 1 1 &

ARSTART

ARST3P

en01000071.vsd

Figure 72:

Trip and autorecloser start logic

6.4
6.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the radial feeder protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

136

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

7
7.1

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)

Application
To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous zone, the stepped distance protection or overcurrent protection functions can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channel speed, and security against false or lost signals. For this reason special channels are used for this purpose. When power line carrier is used for communication, these special channels are strongly recommended due to the communication disturbance caused by the primary fault. The logic supports the following communications schemes; blocking scheme, permissive schemes (overreach and underreach) and direct intertrip.

7.2
7.2.1

Functionality
Theory of operation Depending on whether a reverse or forward directional zone is used to issue the send signal (ZCOM-CS), the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively. Blocking communication scheme In a blocking scheme, the received signal (ZCOM-CR) carries information about the fault position, which specifies that it is outside the protected line, on the bus or on adjacent lines. Do not prolong the sent signal, so set tSendMin to zero. The sending might be interrupted by operation of a forward zone if it is connected to ZCOM-CSNBLK. An overreaching zone is allowed to trip after a co-ordination time (tCoord), when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The tCoord time must allow for the transmission of the blocking signal with a certain margin. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (ZCOM-CR) must be received before the tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip.

7.2.2

Z C O M -C A C C Z C O M -C R

tC o o rd

&

Z C O M -T R IP

e n 0 00 0 0 2 9 3 .v sd

Figure 73:

Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme.

137

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Table 8:

Input and output signals for ZCOM

Forward overreaching zone used for the communication scheme. Carrier receive signal. Trip from the communication scheme.

ZCOM-CACC ZCOM-CR ZCOM-TRIP

7.2.3

Permissive communication scheme In a permissive scheme, the received signal (ZCOM-CR) carries information from the protection terminal at the opposite end of the line. It indicates detected faults in the forward direction out on the line. The received information is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip almost instantaneously for faults on the protected line.

Z C O M -C A C C Z C O M -C R

tC o o rd

&

Z C O M -T R IP

e n 0 00 0 0 2 9 4 .v sd

Figure 74:

Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme.

The permissive scheme principle is further subdivided into two types, underreaching and overreaching, where the names indicate that the send signal (ZCOM-CS) is issued by an underreaching or an overreaching zone, respectively. The signal (ZCOM-CR) must be received when the overreaching zone is still activated to achieve an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to the fault current distribution, the overreaching zone can operate only after the fault has been cleared at the terminal nearest to the fault. There is a certain risk that in case of a trip from an independent tripping zone, the zone issuing the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) resets before the overreaching zone has operated at the remote terminal. To assure a sufficient duration of the received signal (ZCOM-CR), the send signal (ZCOM-CS), can be prolonged by a tSendMin reset timer. The recommended setting of tSendMin is 100 ms. A ZCOM-CS signal from an underreaching zone can be prolonged during all circumstances without drawbacks, but a ZCOM-CS signal from an overreaching zone must never be prolonged in case of parallel lines, to secure correct operation of current reversal logic, when applied. At the permissive overreaching scheme, the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) might be issued in parallel both from an overreaching zone and an underreaching, independent tripping zone. The ZCOM-CS signal from the overreaching zone must not be prolonged while the ZCOM-CS signal from zone 1 can be prolonged. There is no race between the ZCOM-CR signal and the operation of the zone in a permissive scheme. So set the tCoord to zero. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received ZCOM-CR signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme. To overcome this lower dependability in permissive schemes, an Unblocking function can be used. Use this function at power-line carrier (PLC) communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal (ZCOM-CRG), which must always be present, even when no ZCOM-CR signal is received. The

138

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)

Chapter 4 Line distance

absence of the ZCOM-CRG signal during the security time is used as a CR signal. See figure 75. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity at 35 ms.

Z C O M -C R tS e c u rity

1
Z C O M -C R G 200 m s

t
150 m s

>1

Z C O M -C R L

&

>1

&
Z C O M -L C G

e n 0 0 0 0 0 4 9 1 .v s d

Figure 75:

Carrier guard logic with unblock logic.

The ZCOM-CR signals are always transferred directly to ZCOM-CRL without any delay.
Table 9:
ZCOM-CR ZCOM-CRG ZCOM-CRL ZCOM-LCG

Input and output signals for carrier guard

Received signal from the communication equipment Carrier guard signal from the communication equipment. Signal to the communication scheme. Alarm signal line-check guard

7.2.4

Direct inter-trip scheme In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal (ZCOM-CR) is directly transferred to a ZCOM-TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

7.3
7.3.1

Calculations
Settings The parameters for the scheme communication logic function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Configure the protection function used for the ZCOM-CS carrier send and for scheme communication tripping by using the CAP configuration tool.

139

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 4 Line distance

8
8.1

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Application
To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous zone, the stepped distance protection or overcurrent protection functions can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx 5xx line protection terminals have for this reason available a scheme communication logic, (ZCOM) see section 7 "Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)", and a phase segregated scheme communication logic (ZC1P) see section Different system conditions, in many cases, require additional special logic circuits, like current reversal logic and WEI, weak end infeed logic. Both functions are available within the additional communication logic for the distance and overcurrent protection function (ZCAL). The contents of the additional communication logic is always adjusted to the needs of each communication logic, ZCOM or ZC1P respectively, whichever included in REx 5xx terminal.

8.1.1

Current reversal logic If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectable due to current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security results in a total loss of inter-connection between the two buses. To avoid this kind of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.

8.1.2

Weak end infeed (WEI) logic Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current, normally >20% of Ir . The fault current can be too low due to an open breaker or low short-circuit power of the source. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed echo logic is used. The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current distribution. Here, the fault current increases when the breaker opens in the strong terminal, and a sequential tripping is achieved. This requires a detection of the fault by an independent-tripping zone 1. To avoid sequential tripping as described, and when zone 1 is not available, weak end infeed tripping logic is used.

Note!
Current reversal and week end infeed logic (ZCAL) and General fault criteriteria (GFC) including phase preference logic cannot be ordered together.

8.2
8.2.1

Functionality
Current reversal logic Figure 76 and figure 77 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault current reversal. Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker opening.

140

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 4 Line distance

In terminal A:2, where the forward zone was initially activated, this zone must reset before the carrier signal ZCOM-CRLn, initiated from B:2, arrives. The carrier send ZCOM-CS or ZC1P-CSLn from B:2 is therefore held back until the reverse zone ZCAL-IRVLn has reset and the tDelay time has elapsed; see figure in Design, Current reversal logic . Figure 76: Figure 77: 8.2.2 Initial system condition. Current distribution after the breaker B:1 is opened.

Weak end infeed logic The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements (protection functions in forward and reverse direction). The weak end infeed logic function can be extended to trip also the breaker in the weak terminal. The trip is achieved when one or more phase voltages are low during an echo function. In case of single-pole tripping, the phase voltages are used as phase selectors. Weak end infeed logic is generally used in permissive schemes only. It is also possible to use it together with the blocking teleprotection scheme. Some limitations apply in this case: Only the trip part of the function can be used together with the blocking scheme. It is not possible to use the echo function to send the echo carrier signal to the remote line terminal. The echo signal would block the operation of the distance protection at the remote line end and in this way prevent the correct operation of a complete protection scheme. It is not possible to use the carrier receive signal from the remote end to start the WEI function. Start the operation of the WEI function by connecting the TUV--START output signal of the time delayed undervoltage function to the ZCAL-CRL functional input. In this way, the operation of the undervoltage protection will start the WEI logic. Configure the carrier receive signal from the remote end to the ZCAL-WEIBLK functional input together with an OR combination of all fault detection signals, used within the terminal to detect the fault in forward or reverse direction. Do not use the undervoltage protection signals for this purpose.

8.3
8.3.1

Design
Current reversal logic The current reversal logic (IREV) uses a reverse zone (connected to the ZCAL-IRVLn input signal), which in terminal B:2 recognises the fault on the L1 line (see figure in Functionality, Current reversal logic. When the reverse zone is activated during the tPickUp time (see figure 78), the logic is ready to issue a ZCAL-IRVLLn output signal. This signal prevents sending of a ZCOM-CS (or ZC1P-CSLn) signal and activation of the ZCOM-TRIP (or ZC1P-TRLn) signal for a time as set on a tDelay timer, when connected to the ZCOM-BLOCK (or ZC1P-BLOCK) functional input of the ZCOM (or ZC1P) function.

141

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 4 Line distance

ZCAL-IRVLn ZCAL-IRVBLKLn

tPickUp 10 ms t t

tPickUp t & tDelay t ZCAL-IRVLLn

99000193.vsd

Figure 78:

Current reversal logic.

The tDelay timer makes it possible for the carrier receive signal, connected to the ZCOM-CR (or ZC1P-CRLn) functional input, to reset before the ZCOM-TRIP (or the ZC1P-TRLn) signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, connected to the ZCOM-CACC (or the ZC1P-CACCLn) functional input. 8.3.2 Weak end infeed logic The WEI function returns the received carrier signal (see figure 79), when: The functional input ZCAL-CRLLn is active. This input is usually connected to the ZCOM-CRL or to the ZC1P-CRLLn functional output. The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the ZCAL-BLOCK functional input or to the ZCAL-VTSZ functional input. The latest is usually configured to the FUSE-VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure function. No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the ZCAL-WEIBLKLn functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

ZCAL-VTSZ ZCAL-BLOCK ZCAL-CRLLn >1 tWEI t 200 ms t

99000194.vsd

&

50 ms t

200 ms t &

ECHOLn - cont. ZCAL-ECHOLn

ZCAL-WEIBLKLn

Figure 79:

Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function.

142

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 4 Line distance

WEI = Trip ECHOLn - cont. ZCAL-CBOPEN STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N & 100 ms t >1 15 ms t >1 ZCAL-TRWEI

&

ZCAL-TRWEIL1

&

15 ms t

ZCAL-TRWEIL2

&

15 ms t

ZCAL-TRWEIL3

en00000551.vsd

Figure 80:

Tripping part of the WEI logic - simplified logic diagram.

When an echo function is used in both terminals, a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 80.

8.4
8.4.1

Calculations
Setting The parameters for the current reversal logic and the WEI functionare are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Current reversal logic Set the tDelay time in relation to the reset time in the communication equipment for the ZCOM-CR (ZC1P-CRLn) signal. Set the tDelay at the maximum carrier reset time plus 30 ms. A minimum tDelay setting of 40 ms is recommended. A long tDelay setting increases security against unwanted tripping, but delay the fault clearing in case of a fault developing from one line to involve the other one. The probability of this type of fault is small. So set the tDelay with a good margin.

8.4.2

143

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 4 Line distance

Set the pick-up delay tPickUp to <80% of the breaker operate time, but with a minimum of 20 ms. 8.4.3 Weak end infeed logic Set WEI = Echo to activate the weak end infeed function. Set WEI = Trip to obtain echo with trip. Set the voltage criterion for the weak end trip to 90% of the minimum operation voltage and consider also the emergency conditions.

144

About this chapter

Chapter 5 Current

Chapter 5 Current
About this chapter This chapter describes the current protection functions.

145

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Application
Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electrical power from production to consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed electrical power at each end of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault on the line can easily endanger the stability of a complete system. The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at constant amount of transmitted electrical power): The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions. The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease of transmitted power is high. The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the generators on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted stability limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection operating time and the breaker opening time, is too long.

1.1

The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must operate very quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for which very high fault currents are characteristic. For this reason instantaneous, non-directional, phase-segregated, overcurrent protection (IOC), which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in some of the REx 5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details. The conventional distance protection can manage the fault clearance of earth-faults in most of the cases. In some applications, especially applications with long lines, the clearance can be improved by use of an instantaneous earth-fault protection. Those are for instance: In the case of high infeed of fault current from the opposite end of the line, this might increase the fault resistance seen by the distance relay to such a value that the instantaneous step of the distance protection will not operate. In applications with series compensated lines, where the capacitor is located at the end of the line and very strong infeed of fault current from that end, will result in a difficult problem for the distance protection to perform a selective fault clearance. This due to the voltage reversal that might occur.

The use of instantaneous overcurrent earth-fault protection is most suitable for long lines in meshed transmission systems. It can also be used for radial lines with low fault current infeed from the opposite end of the line.

146

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

The instantaneous residual overcurrent function is very suitable as back-up protection for phase to earth faults close to the terminal. This enables a short back-up faults clearance time for the phase to earth faults with high fault current. The instantaneous, non-directional, earth-fault overcurrent protection (IOC), which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in some of the REx 5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details.

1.2

Functionality
The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the current in all three phases, and compare them with the IP>> set value. The logical value of each phase current signal on the output of the digital signal processor (STIL1, STIL2 and STIL3 respectively) is equal to 1 if the measured phase current exceeds the preset value. The measuring technic is based on measuring of the incoming residual current to the terminal. The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the zero sequence current, and compare it with the IN>> set value. A recursive Fourier filter filters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements. The logical value of the signal on the output of the digital signal processor (IOC--STIN) is equal to 1 if the measured zero sequence current exceeds the pre-set value.

1.3

Design
The simplified logic diagram of the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is shown in figure 81. The overcurrent function is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockIOC=Yes) The input signal IOC--BLOCK is high.

The IOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the instantaneous phase overcurrent function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The IOC--BLOCK signal blocks also the instantaneous residual overcurrent function, if this is installed in the terminal. When the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is enabled, the output tripping signals IOC--TRL1, IOC--TRL2, IOC--TRL3, IOC--TRP and IOC--TRIP can operate. The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents, which go just a little above the set operating value. The single phase trip signals IOC--TRL1, IOC--TRL2, and IOC--TRL3 are related to L1, L2, and L3 phases and therefore also suitable for the single phase tripping with single-phase auto-reclosing.

147

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION TEST TEST-ACTIVE & BlockIOC = Yes

IOC--BLOCK

>1

Function Enable

>1

& & & & &

IOC--TRIP IOC--TRP IOC--TRL1 IOC--TRL2 IOC--TRL3

STIL1 STIL2 STIL3

en01000077.vsd

Figure 81:

Simplified logic diagram of instantaneous overcurrent protection

The signal IOC--TRP is the logic OR of the three single phase trips. It can be used to trip the circuit breaker if only three phase operation is desired. The IOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general instantaneous overcurrent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the instantaneous residual overcurrent function is implemented; i.e. this signal will be activated in case of any single phase overcurrent or residual overcurrent detection. If only the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is installed in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the signal IOC--TRP and can be used for signalization. The simplified logic diagram of the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is shown in figure 82. The overcurrent function is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockIOC=Yes) The input signal IOC--BLOCK is high.

148

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

The IOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overcurrent function. It can be connected to a binary input in order to receive a block command from external devices or it can be configured (software connection) to other internal functions within the terminal itself, in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gates it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. When the overcurrent function is enabled, the output tripping signals IOC--TRN and IOC--TRIP can operate. The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents, which go just beyond the set operating value. The IOC--TRN signal is related to the residual overcurrent trip. The IOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general instantaneous overcurrent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is implemented. I.e. this signal will be activated in case of residual overcurrent detection or in case of any single-phase overcurrent detection (IOC--STIL_: IOC--STIL1 or IOC--STIL2 or IOC--STIL3). If only the residual overcurrent function is implemented in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the signal IOC--TRN and can be used for signalising.

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION TEST TEST-ACTIVE & BlockIOC = Yes

IOC--BLOCK

>1

IOC--STIN

&

IOC--TRIP

&

IOC--TRN

en01000078.vsd

Figure 82:

Simplified logic diagram of instantaneous residual overcurrent protection.

149

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

1.4
1.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the instantaneous overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation. Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth conditions. Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection.

1.4.2

Meshed network without parallel line The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 83, apply a fault in B and then calculate the relay through fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to B. Figure 83: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be calculated, figure 84. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered. Figure 84: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence the minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB )
(Equation 119)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:

150

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

Is 1, 3 I min
(Equation 120)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal to or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear, IF in figure 85. Figure 85: Fault current: IF

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

IS EC - Is Is SEC = ------------I PRIM
(Equation 121)

Where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is the primary rated current of the main CT. The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:
IsS EC ------ 100 IP>> = -------I1b
(Equation 122)

1.4.3

Meshed network with parallel line In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 86 where the two lines are connected to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the relay in figure 86 will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open. A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM ) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated. Figure 86: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )
(Equation 123)

151

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:
Is 1.3 Im in
(Equation 124)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum phase fault current that the relay has to clear. The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:
I SE C - Is IsS EC = ------------IP RIM
(Equation 125)

Where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is the primary secondary rated current of the main CT. The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:

Is SE C - 100 IP>> = -------------I 1b

(Equation 126)

1.4.4

Setting instructions The parameters for the instantaneous overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The residual overcurrent protection is very sensitive to the change of zero source impedance. Since it must operate only in a selective way, it is necessary to check all system and transient conditions that can cause unwanted operation. Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during single-phase fault conditions. But also examine two-phase-to-earth conditions, since this type of fault can be higher than single-phase to earth fault in some cases. Also study transients that can cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the built-in, instantaneous, earth-fault protection.

152

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

1.4.5

Meshed network without parallel line The following fault calculations have to be done for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 87, apply a fault in B and then calculate the relay through fault residual current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to B. The zero sequence source impedances are of great importance. Figure 87: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault residual current IfA has to be calculated, figure 88. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered. Figure 88: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence the minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin MAX(I fA, IfA )

(Equation 127)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous residual overcurrent protection is then:
Is 1, 3 Imin
(Equation 128)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear IF in figure 89. Figure 89: Fault current: IF

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

I SE C IsS EC = ------------- Is IP RIM
(Equation 129)

Note: n=1,2,3 or 4, depending on which group to set.

153

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 5 Current

1.4.6

Meshed network with parallel line In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 90, where the two lines are connected to the same busbar. In this case the influence of the induced residual fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the relay in figure 90, will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open. A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated. Figure 90: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM.

The minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:
I m in M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
(Equation 130)

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:
Is 1, 3 Imin
(Equation 131)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum residual fault current that the relay has to clear. The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:
I SE C - Is IsS EC = ------------IP RIM
(Equation 132)

154

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Application
The time delayed phase overcurrent protection can be used as independent overcurrent protection, particularly for radially fed systems, or as back-up protection to the main distance or line differential protection functions. In the first case the protected zone of the time delayed overcurrent protection reaches upto the next overcurrent protection and works in its zone as back-up protection. The programmable time delay (definite time) of the function allows the time selectivity through an appropriate time grading among the overcurrent relays protecting the system. Where the function acts as back-up for the main line protection, the trip from the overcurrent protection can be activated when the main protection function is blocked (e.g. by the fuse failure protection) or it can be active all the time. In some cases, where it could be difficult to achieve a selective trip, the function can be used as a helpful overcurrent signallization for the post-fault analysis. The time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TOC) which is an earth-fault protection, serves as a built-in local back-up function to the main protection function. In most cases, it is used as a back-up for the earth-fault measuring in distance protection. The function is intended to be used in solidly earthed systems. The time delay makes it possible to set the relay to detect high resistance faults and still perform selective trip. The protection, which is non-directional, is included in some of the REx 5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details.

2.1

2.2

Functionality
The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the current in all three phases, and compare them with the IP> set value. A recursive Fourier filter filters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements. The logical value of each phase current signal on the output of the digital processor (STIL1, STIL2 and STIL3 respectively) is equal to 1 if the measured phase current exceeds the set value. These signals will instantaneously set their respective output starting signals (TOC--STL1, TOC--STL2, TOC--STL3), if the function is not blocked. If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value for a period longer than the set time tP, then a three phase trip is generated from the output signal TOC--TRP. The current-measuring element within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measures the residual current (3I0), and compares it with the IN> set value. A recursive Fourier filter filters the current signal, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring element. The logical value of the signal on the output of the digital signal processor (TOC--STIN) is equal to 1 if the measured residual current exceeds the pre-set value. This signal will instantaneously set the output start signal (TOC--STN), unless the function is blocked, see section 2.3 "Design".

155

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

The function trip signal (TOC--TRN) can be delayed 0-60 s. If the residual current exceeds the set value for a period longer than the set value, then a three phase trip is generated from the output signal TOC--TRN.

2.3

Design
The simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overcurrent function is shown in figure 91. The function is disabled (blocked) if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockTOC=Yes). The input signal TOC--BLOCK is high.

The TOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the time delayed phase overcurrent function. It prevents the activation of any trip or starting output signal. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The TOC--BLOCK signal blocks also the time delayed residual overcurrent protection, if this is installed in the same REx 5xx terminal. When the function is enabled, there is still the possibility to block the output trips only, without affecting the start signals, that will always be active. This can be obtained with the function input TOC--BLKTR. Similarly to the TOC--BLOCK signal, also the time delayed residual overcurrent protection, if present in the terminal, is blocked from TOC-BLKTR. The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents, which go just a little above the set operating value. The output trip signal TOC--TRP is a three phase trip. Single phase information is available from the starting signals, that are phase segregated. The TOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general time delayed overcurrent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the time delayed residual overcurrent function is implemented; i.e. this signal will be activated in case of any time delayed overcurrent or time delayed residual overcurrent trip. If only the time delayed phase overcurrent function is installed in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the signal TOC--TRP and can be used for signallization.

156

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

TOC - TIME DELAYED PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TOC-BLKTR tP t

TEST TEST-ACTIVE

& &

TOC--TRIP

TOC--TRP

BlockTOC= Yes

TOC-BLOCK

>1 & & &

>1

STP STL1

STIL1

STL2

STIL2

STL3

STIL3

en01000075.vsd

Figure 91:

Simplified logic diagram of time delayed phase overcurrent protection

The simplified logic diagram of the time delayed earth-fault protection is shown in figure 92. The time delayed residual function is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockTOC=Yes). The input signal TOC--BLOCK is high.

The TOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the earth-fault function. It blocks the whole function and prevents the activation of any trip or starting output signals. It can be connected to a binary input in order to receive a block command from external devices or it can be configured (software connection) to other internal functions within the terminal itself, in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gates it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. When the residual overcurrent protection is enabled, there is still a possibility to block the trip output only, without affecting the start signals, which always will be active. The input which provides this function is TOC--BLKTR. The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents, which go just a little beyond the set operating value. The TOC--TRN signal is related to the residual overcurrent trip.

157

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

The TOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general time delayed overcurrent trip when in the REx 5xx terminal also the time delayed phase overcurrent function is implemented. I.e. this signal will be activated in case of delayed residual overcurrent trip or in case of time delayed phase overcurrent trip. If only the residual overcurrent function is implemented in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the signal TOC--TRN and can be used for signalization.

TOC - TIME DELAYED RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TOC--BLKTR
Trip Blocking

TEST TEST-ACTIVE

& &

tN t

TOC--TRIP

TOC--TRN

BlockTOC= Yes

TOC--BLOCK

>1
Function Enable

TOC--STIN

&

TOC--STN
en01000076.vsd

Figure 92:

Simplified logic diagram of the TOC-- protection function.

2.4
2.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The current setting value must be selected to permit the detection of the lowest short circuit current without having any unwanted tripping or starting of the function under normal load conditions. The following relation has to be considered for the setting of the primary operating current (Is) of the function:

ILmax - < Is < 0.7 If min 1.2 ---------------k

(Equation 133)

Where: ILmax IFmin K is the maximum permissible load current of the protected unit, is the minimum fault current that the relay has to clear. The values 1.2 and 0.7 are safety factors and is the reset ratio of the overcurrent function: 0.95.

158

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

The settable time delay tP allows the time selectivity of the overcurrent function, according to the time grading plan of all the other overcurrent protections in the system. The time setting value should also consider transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when energized. Where the time delayed overcurrent function is used as back-up of impedance protection, normally the time delay is set higher than the time delay of distance zone 2 (or 3) in order to avoid interferences with the impedance measuring system. 2.4.2 Setting of operating current IP> If Is is the primary setting operating value of the function, than the secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:
I SE C ------ Is I sS EC = ------IP RIM
(Equation 134)

Where: ISEC IPRIM is the secondary rated current of the main CT and is the primary rated current of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP> is given from this formula:

Is SEC - 100 IP> = -------------I 1b

(Equation 135)

The parameters for the time delayed overcurretn protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

2.4.3

Setting instructions The residual overcurrent protection is very sensitive to the change of zero source impedance. Since it must operate only in a selective way, it is necessary to check all system and transient conditions that can cause unwanted operation. The settings should be chosen in such a way that it can detect high resistance faults on the protected line and still be selective to other residual time delayed protections in both forward and reverse directions. The time setting value should also consider transients that can cause a high increase of the residual line current for short times.

159

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high inrush current when being energised. In well transposed system, the false earth-fault current is normally lower than 5% of the line current. For non transposed lines a considerably higher false residual current may be found. In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, the false residual current must be measured or calculated when maximum sensitivity is desired. Generally, 80 A is recommended as a minimum primary operation value for the residual overcurrent protection. General criteria for the primary current setting value of the time delayed residual overcurrent protection is given in the formula below:

1.3 IRmax < Is < 0.7 If min

(Equation 136)

Where: IRmax IFmin 1.3 0.7 is the maximum permissive residual current flowing in the protection unit during normal service conditions and is the minimum residual fault current that the relay has to clear. and are safety factor values.

2.4.4

Setting of operating current IN> If Is is the primary setting operating value of the function, then the secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:
IS EC - Is Is SEC = ------------I PRIM
(Equation 137)

where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is the primary rated current of the main CT. The relay setting value IN> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I4b, associated to the current transformer on input I4. The value for IN> is given from the formula:

Is SE C - 100 IN> = -------------I4b

(Equation 138)

160

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 5 Current

The parameters for the time delayed overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

161

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 5 Current

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Application
The time delayed phase overcurrent function is to be used as short-circuit protection in three phase networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. It is intended to be used either as primary protection or back-up protection for differential functions or impedance measuring functions. In radial networks it is often sufficient to use phase overcurrent relays as short circuit protection for lines, transformers and other equipment. The current time characteristic should be chosen according to common practice in the network. It is strongly recommended to use the same current time characteristic for all overcurrent relays in the network. This includes overcurrent protection for transformers and other equipment. There is a possibility to use phase overcurrent protection in meshed systems as short circuit protection. It must however be realized that the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in meshed networks, can be very complicated and a large number of fault current calculations are needed. There are situations where there is no possibility to have selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent relays in a meshed system. The measuring function contains one current measuring element for each phase, each of them with a low set and a high set measuring step. The low set step can have either definite time or inverse time characteristic. The characteristics available are extremely inverse, very inverse, normal inverse or RI inverse. The high set step has definite time delay. The settings are common for all phases but both the low and high set step can be set On/Off individually and also have individual inputs for blocking.

3.1

3.2

Functionality
The time delayed overcurrent protection is used as short-circuit protection in power systems, either as the primary protection or as a back-up function for selective differential protection or impedance measuring protection.The protection function comprises of measuring circuits for the three phase currents, each with a low and high current setting. The low current setting has definite or inverse time-delay while the high current setting has only definite time-delay. The measuring circuits share common settings for all phases, however, both the low and high current settings can be blocked or enabled independent of the other setting. Figure 93 shows a simplified logic diagram for the two step phase overcurrent protection.

162

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 5 Current

Characteristic = Def

&

tLow

& I>Inv Characteristic = NI/VI/EI/RI &

TOC2-TRLS

I>Low IL1-3 &

tMinInv t

&

TOC2-STLS

I>High &

tHigh t

&

TOC2-TRHS

TOC2-BLOCK TOC2-BLKTRLS TOC2-BLKTRHS

50 ms t

& &

en01000090.vsd

Figure 93:

Two step time delayed phase overcurrent protection, simplified logic diagram

3.3
3.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the two step definite and inverse time delayed overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The phase overcurrent protection can be used in different applications. In most applications it is required that all short circuits within a protected zone shall be detected and cleared and the fault clearance shall be selective. As the protection can be used in several applications only some examples are discussed.

3.3.2

Line protection in radial network The phase overcurrent protection is suitable to use in radial systems without any fault current infeed from the radial feeders.

163

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 5 Current

The pick up current setting (inverse time relays) or the lowest current step (constant time relays) must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load current does not cause relay operation. Here consideration also has to be taken to the relay reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation of the relay even when the overcurrent has ceased. The lowest setting value can be written:

I max I s 1.2 ---------k

(Equation 139)

Where: 1.2 k Imax is a safety factor due to load estimation uncertainty etc., the resetting ratio of the relay (about 0.95) and the maximum load current.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics the load current up to the present situation can be found. Also emergency situations must be considered. There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be detected by the phase overcurrent relay. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by the relay, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can be written:

Is 0.7 I s c min
(Equation 140)

Where: 0.7 Iscmin is a safety factor, due to calculation uncertainty and the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval:

Imax - I s 0.7 I s cmin 1.2 ---------k

(Equation 141)

164

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 5 Current

The high current function of the overcurrent relay, which only has a short or no delay of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the relay is selective to other relays in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by the relay (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible dc component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent relay, can be written:

I high 1.2 k t I sc max

(Equation 142)

Where: 1.2 kt Iscmax is a safety factor, due to calculation uncertainty is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current. kt is less than 1.05 if the power system time constant is less than 100 ms. is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

The operate times of the phase-overcurrent protection have to be chosen so that the fault time is so short that equipment will not be damaged due to thermal overload, at the same time selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protections. 3.3.3 Line protection in meshed network The current setting can be made in the same way as for radial networks but observe the possibility to get high fault currents in the reverse direction if the adjacent station have low source impedance. If inverse time characteristics are used with equal current and time setting for all phase current protections in the system the selectivity is assured as long as there are more than two bays carrying fault current to each substation. Sometimes this is however impossible due to the fault current distribution between the different lines. If definite time characteristic is used the co-ordination between the different phase overcurrent line protections is done by means of current setting. As the phase overcurrent protection often is used as a back-up protection of lines, where a distance protection is the main protection, relatively long operation times are acceptable for the phase overcurrent protection. 3.3.4 Setting characteristics The following formulas are valid for the inverse time characteristic:

165

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 5 Current

Table 10:

Formulas for the inverse time characteristic

Time delay(s):

Characteristic:

Normal inverse

0, 14 -k t = -------------------0, 02 I 1

(Equation 143)

Very inverse

13, 5 -k t = -----------I1 80 -k t = -----------2 I 1

1 --------------- k t = --------------------------------------0, 339 ( 0, 236 ) I

(Equation 144)

Extremely inverse

(Equation 145)

RI inverse

(Equation 146)

where: I k denotes (measured current)/ I>Inv and is a time multiplier factor, settable in the range of 0.05 to 1.10.

The decisive factors for the setting of inverse time characteristic are the allowable time for disconnection of fault at minimum fault current that the function shall operate for together with selectivity at maximum fault current.

166

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Application
The time delayed phase overcurrent function is to be used as short-circuit protection in three phase networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. It is intended to be used either as primary protection or back-up protection for differential functions or impedance measuring functions. In radial networks it is often sufficient to use phase overcurrent relays as short circuit protection for lines, transformers and other equipment. The current time characteristic should be chosen according to common practice in the network. It is strongly recommended to use the same current time characteristic for all overcurrent relays in the network. This includes overcurrent protection for transformers and other equipment. There is a possibility to use phase overcurrent protection in meshed systems, as short circuit protection. It must however be realized that the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in meshed networks, can be very complicated and a large number of fault current calculations are needed. There are situations where there is no possibility to have selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent relays in a meshed system. In some applications the possibility of obtaining selectivity can be improved significantly if a directional phase overcurrent function is used. This can be the case in meshed networks and in radial networks with generation connected remote in the system, thus giving fault current infeed in reverse direction. The measuring function contains one current measuring element for each phase, each of them with a low set and a high set measuring step. The low set step can have either definite time or inverse time characteristic. The characteristics available are extremely inverse, very inverse, normal inverse or RI inverse. The high set step has definite time delay. The settings are common for all phases but both the low and high set step can be set On/Off individually and also got individual inputs for blocking.

4.1

4.2
4.2.1 4.2.2

Functionality
Theory of operation and design Current measuring element The current measuring element continuously measures the current in all phases and compares it to the set operating values for the two steps. If the current is above set value the corresponding output signal will be set. If the current is above both the setting I>Low and I>Inv the inverse time evaluation according to choosen characteristic starts and the INV signal sets after corresponding time. A filter ensures immunity to disturbances and DC-components and minimizes the transient overreach. A simplified block diagram is found in figure 94. The function is true phase segregated. This means that there are identical measuring elements in each phase.

167

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

I>Inv Characteristic= Def/NI/VI/EI/RI NI, VI, EI, RI k, I>Inv

STINVL1-int (L2,L3)

I>Low IL1 (IL2, IL3) STLSL1-int (L2,L3)

I>High STHSL1-int (L2,L3)

en01000175.vsd

Figure 94:

Simplified block diagram for definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent function

The inverse time delay can be set for different characteristics by the setting Characteristic = x, the x is choosen from the following: 1. Def (Definite time) 2. NI (Normal inverse) 3. VI (Very inverse) 4. EI (Extremely inverse) 5. RI (Inverse time corresponding to relays of type RI) With setting Characteristic = Def the signal INV will be set to zero. The different inverse time characteristics are defined in the Technical reference manual. 4.2.3 Directional overcurrent function The directional overcurrent function uses the information from the current measuring elements as described in section 4.2.2 "Current measuring element" and the directional impedance measuring element as described for the distance protection function, to create the directional overcurrent function. Directional phase selection In order to use correct directional information during all types of faults the function is provided with a simple phase selection. The phase selection is assigned to distinguish between phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults. The criteria for the two indications that are regarded in the function are: Phase to earth fault (PE FAULT):

168

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

3 I 0 0.5 IMinOp
(Equation 147)

and
3 I 0 INR el easeP E 100 I phmax
(Equation 148)

Phase to phase fault (PP FAULT):

3 I 0 < 0.2 Ir
(Equation 149)

or
3 I 0 < INBlo ckPP 100 I phmax
(Equation 150)

If the criteria for PE FAULT are fulfilled the phase to earth directional indications are used and if the criteria for PP FAULT are fulfilled the phase to phase directional indications are used. If all criteria are met, then only the directional indications for phase to phase are released. The aim is to preserve the phase to phase measurement also during two-phase to earth faults with high residual current (at least as long as the criteria allows, see equations above). However, the directional indications will appear also for healthy phases and in the phase to phase case the indications would overlap in an unwanted manner because the overcurrent evaluation is performed per phase only (both forward and reverse can be indicated for one phase, simultaneously). So in order to establish a complete directional phase selection the one and only faulty loop must be singled out. This is done by means of releasing the directional indication with the corresponding overcurrent indications (overcurrent in two phases is required, figure 95).

169

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

PE FAULT PP FAULT DIRFWL1N - int DIRFWL1L2 - int

& &

L1 L1L2 L3L1

>1

DFWL1 - int.

&
L2 L1L2 L2L3

STLSL1 - int STHSL1 - int STLSL2 - int STHSL2 - int

>1

DFWL2 - int.

>1 >1

DFWL3 - int.
en01000154.vsd

Figure 95:

Excerpt from directional phase selection

Consider the case where a reverse fault is cleared and the prefault forward load conditions are retrieved. So, in order not to issue a false trip if the reversal indication is deactivated (or the forward indication becomes active) before the overcurrent indication drops, the reversal of direction is actually held back during 50 ms according to the logic of figure 96. Each phase and each set stage is provided with an individual logic circuit (six circuits in all) to allow operation during simultaneous earth faults (one forward, one reverse).

DFW L1 - int & STLSL1 - int

50 m s
t

&

FW L1 - int.

50 m s DRVL1 - int &

t

RVL1 - int.

en01000155.vsd

Figure 96:

Current reversal logic for one phase and one set step

General overcurrent operating principles The low and high set steps can individually be set directional or non-directional. If set in non-directional mode the overcurrent function only uses the signals from the current measuring elements as seen from figure 94. In directional mode there are two modes of operation, forward release and reverse block denoted ForwRelease and RevBlock respectively. The principles of these three modes of operation are illustrated in figure 97.

170

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

Operation (Low) = NonDir STLSL1-int STARTLSL1-int.

Operation (Low) = ForwRelease STLSL1-int STARTLSL1-int. & FWL1-int

Operation (Low) = RevBlock STLSL1-int RVL1-int & STARTLSL1-int.

en01000156.vsd

Figure 97:

Directional operation modes of TOC3

In forward release operation mode a criteria that indicates that the fault is in forward direction is needed for tripping. Since the directional function needs voltage for the directional check it will not be able to operate when switching in a line against a persistent close-up three phase fault if voltage is measured on the line side of the breaker. A solution to this might be to use the SOTF function for the distance protection, with output TOC3-STND as acceleration signal. In reverse block operation mode a criteria that indicates that the fault is in reverse direction is used for blocking the function. In this case there is no problem switching in a line against a persistent close-up three phase fault even if voltage is measured on the line side of the breaker since the directional function will not issue any reverse signal. The general principles of time delay for the two steps of the overcurrent function is displayed in the following figure 98.

171

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

Characteristic = Def

Low set step & tMinInv t 1 & tLow t TRLSL1-int.

STARTLSL1-int

STINVL1-int High set step STARTHSL1-int tHigh t TRHSL1-int.

en01000157.vsd

Figure 98:

Delayed time operation for low set step and general time delay

General trip signals are derived from the phase segregated starts according to figure 99.

TOC3--BLKTRLS TOC3--BLKTRHS TOC3--BLOCK TRLSL1-int TRLSL2-int TRLSL3-int 50 ms t 1 & TOC3--TRLS

TRHSL1-int TRHSL2-int TRHSL3-int

& 1

TOC3--TRHS

en01000158.vsd

Figure 99:

General trip

With setting Characteristic = Def, figure 98 the signal TOC3-TRLS will be active if, at least, one of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>Low for the low set step, and if the directional criterion is fulfilled for a longer time than the set delay tLow. With setting Characteristic = NI/VI/EI or RI, figure 98 we have the following: If, at least one of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>Low, the timer circuit tMinInv is activated together with the inverse time measuring circuit, figure 94 in order to calculate the operating time. The operating time is determined by the magnitude of the current, characteristic choosen, set characteristic current I>Inv and time multiplier k. When both the inverse time and tMinInv have

172

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

elapsed the timer tLow will be activated and after its time is elapsed the signal TOC3-TRLS is activated. It must be observed that the time delay of operation, if inverse time characteristics is used, will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the tLow setting. The timer circuit tMinInv, figure 98 can be used to achieve a defined minimum operating time at high fault currents. The timer circuit tLow can be used for adding an additional time delay to the inverse time characteristic. The signal TOC3-TRHS will be active if one of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>High for a longer time than the set delay tHigh at the same time as TOC--BLKTRSH and TOC--BLOCK are not present. An external signal connected to TOC3_BLKTRLS will block tripping from low set step. The step can also be blocked with the setting Operation Low= Off. An external signal connected to TOC3_BLKTRHS will block tripping from high set step. The step can also be blocked with the setting Operation High= Off. An external signal connected to TOC3_BLOCK will block both low and high set steps. Figure 100 illustrates how the start signals are formed.

STLSL1-int STHSL1-int STLSL2-int STHSL2-int STLSL3-int STHSL3-int

>1 >1 >1 >1 >1

L1 L2 L3

& & & & & &

TOC3--STNDL1

TOC3--STNDL2

TOC3--STNDL3

TOC3--STND

TOC3--STNDLS

FWL1-int FWL2-int FWL3-int

>1

&

TOC3--STFW

RVL1-int RVL2-int RVL3-int TOC3--BLOCK

50 ms

&

L1 L2 L3

>1

&

TOC3--STRV

en01000159.vsd

Figure 100: Start signals

173

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

As the phase segregated start signals are non directional, and used for indication only, there is no possibility to use a phase segregated transfer trip scheme. A three-phase transfer trip scheme will be applicable using the output TOC3-STFW or TOC3-STRV, keeping in mind the performance expected during simultaneous faults on parallel lines. Carrier signals can be sent to other line-end through PLC, i.e. through binary outputs connected to PLC's binary inputs or directly from RTC function block (binary signal transfer to remote end), which allows to send to the other line-end up to 32 binary signals. The use of RTC function block requires communication cards installed in both terminals communicating to each others. Please refer to RTC description for further details

4.3
4.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The directional phase overcurrent protection can be used in different applications. In most applications it is required that all short circuits within a protected zone shall be detected and cleared and the fault clearance shall be selective. As the protection can be used in several applications only some examples are discussed. Line protection in a radial network The directional phase overcurrent protection is suitable to use in radial systems with generation connected out in the system. In such a network the fault current can be fed both in the forward and reverse direction. Normally the protection will detect and trip faults in the forward direction. The pick up current setting (inverse time functions) or the lowest current step (constant time functions) must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load current does not cause operation of the function. The reset ratio of the function has to be taken into consideration, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation of the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. The lowest setting value can be written:

4.3.2

I max I s 1.2 ---------k

(Equation 151)

Where: 1.2 k Imax is a safety factor due to load estimation uncertainty etc., the resetting ratio of the relay (about 0.95) and the maximum load current.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics the load current up to the present situation can be found. Also emergency situations must be considered. The current setting must be valid also for some years ahead.

174

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be detected by the phase overcurrent relay. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by the relay, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can be written:

Is 0.7 I s c min
(Equation 152)

Where: 0.7 Iscmin is a safety factor, due to calculation unsertainty and the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval:

Imax - I s 0.7 I s cmin 1.2 ---------k

(Equation 153)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short or no delay of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other protections in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by the relay (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. The risk of transient overreach, due to a possible DC component of the short circuit current has to be taken into consideration. The lowest current setting of the most rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent relay, can be written:

I high 1.2 k t I sc max

(Equation 154)

Where: 1.2 kt Iscmax is a safety factor, due to calculation unsertainty is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current. kt is less than 1.05 if the power system time constant is less than 100 ms. is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

175

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

The operate times of the phase overcurrent relay have to be chosen so that the fault time is so short that equipment will not be damaged due to thermal overload, at the same time selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protection. 4.3.3 Line protection in meshed network The current setting can be made in the same way as for radial networks. If inverse time characteristics are used with equal current and time setting for all phase current protections in the system the selectivity is assured as long as there are more than two bays carrying fault current to each substation. Sometimes this is however impossible due to the fault current distribution between the different lines. If definite time characteristic is used the coordination between the different phase overcurrent line protections are done by means of current setting. As the phase overcurrent protection often is used as a back-up protection of lines, where a distance protection is the main protection, relatively long operation times are acceptable for the phase overcurrent protection. 4.3.4 Setting characteristics The parameters for the two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Following formulas are valid for the inverse time characteristic:

Table 11:

Formulas for the inverse time characteristic

Time delay(s):

Characteristic:

Normal inverse

0, 14 -k t = -------------------0, 02 1 I

(Equation 155)

Very inverse

13, 5 -k t = -----------I1 80 -k t = -----------2 I 1

1 --------------- k t = --------------------------------------0, 339 ( 0, 236 ) I

(Equation 156)

Extremely inverse

(Equation 157)

RI inverse

(Equation 158)

Where: I k denotes (measured current)/ I>Inv and is a time multiplier with setting range 0,05 - 1,10.

176

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 5 Current

The decisive factors for the setting of inverse time characteristic are the allowable time for disconnection of fault at minimum fault current that the function shall operate for together with selectivity at maximum fault current.

177

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Application
This earth-fault overcurrent protection is intended for solidly earthed networks.

5.1

5.1.1

Earth-fault overcurrent protection In case of single-phase earth-faults, the primary fault resistance varies with the network conditions, the type of fault and location of the fault. In many cases, the fault resistance is much higher than the resistance that can be covered by an impedance-measuring distance protections. This can be the case with a phase to earth fault to a tower with large tower footing resistance. Earth-faults with high fault resistances can be detected by measuring the residual current (3I0). The inrush current can cause unwanted tripping of the earth-fault overcurrent relay when energizing a directly earthed power transformer. The earth-fault overcurrent protection is therefore provided with second harmonic restraint, which blocks the operation if the residual current (3I0) contains 20% or more of the second harmonic component. In some cases, it is possible to improve the selectivity by adding a settable minimum operate current (IMin) and a minimum operate time (tMin) to the inverse characteristic. These functions are included in the earth-fault protection modules. To minimize the operate time, in case of closing the circuit breaker to a fault, the residual overcurrent protection module is provided with a switch-onto-fault logic, which can be activated at breaker closure. The tripping time will temporarily be reduced to 300 ms. In order to achieve the most sensitive earth fault protection the non-directional function can be used. As the residual current is normally very small during normal operation the setting value can be set very low. In case of small residual currents, due to high resistance phase to earth faults or serial faults, the residual voltage in the system can be very low. A serial fault can be caused by broken phase conductor(s) with no contact to earth, or pole discrepancy in a circuit breaker or a disconnector. The most common type of serial fault is pole discrepancy at breaker maneuvers. As the residual voltage is often very small at high resistance earth faults and serial faults, any directional element can not be used. The function can have different types of time-current characteristics; definite time delay or different types of inverse time delay. By using the inverse time delay characteristics some degree of selectivity between non-directional residual protection can be achieved. Directional earth-fault protection is obtained by measuring the residual current and the angle between this current and the zero-sequence voltage (3U0). It is possible to obtain the polarizing voltage (-3U0) from an open delta winding in the voltage transformer or via summation of the three phase voltages supplied to the terminal.

178

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

The 3I0 current lags the polarizing voltage (-3U0) by a phase angle equal to the angle of the zero-sequence source impedance. In solidly earthed networks, this angle is in the range of 40 to nearly 90. The high value refers to stations with directly earthed transformers with delta winding. To obtain maximum sensitivity at all conditions, the forward measuring element should have a characteristic angle of 65. As a general rule, it is easier to obtain selectivity by using directional instead of non-directional earth-fault overcurrent protection, but sufficient polarizing voltage must be available. It is not possible to measure the distance to the fault by using the zero-sequence components of the current and voltage, because the zero-sequence voltage is a product of the zero-sequence components of current and source impedance. It is possible to obtain selectivity by the use of a directional comparison scheme, which uses communication between the line ends. If a communication scheme can not be used, the best selectivity is generally obtained by using inverse time delay. All relays, in the network, must have the same type of inverse characteristic. An earth-fault on a line is selectively tripped if the difference between the residual current (3I0) out on the faulted line and the residual current (3I0) out on the other lines gives a time difference of 0.3-0.4 seconds. A logarithmic characteristic is generally the most suitable for this purpose, because the time difference is constant for a given ratio between the currents. 5.1.2 Directional comparison logic function In the directional comparison scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. A short operate time enables auto-reclosing after the fault. During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the auto-reclosing device must block the directional comparison earth-fault scheme. A communication logic block for residual overcurrent protection can be included in the REx 5xx terminal to provide this feature. The function contains circuits for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. See section 9 "Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)".. Also an additional communication logic block for the communication can be included. It contains logic for the weak-end-infeed and current-reversal functions, which are used only in the permissive overreach scheme. See section 10 "Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)".

5.2
5.2.1

Functionality
Theory of operation This protection measures the residual current (3I0) and the residual voltage (3U0). Figure 101 shows the current measuring, time delay and logic circuits (both with and without directional check) of this protection function.

179

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

TEF--BLKTR TEF--BC 1000ms t 300ms t & TEF--TRSOTF

Operation = ON 3Io> Def/NI/VI/EI/LOG

&

>1 EFCh k &

t1 t

&

>1 TEF--TRIP

3Io IN> 20% 2fn

IMin & & tMin t TEF--START

TEF--BLOCK

50ms t

Option: Directional check Direction = Directional 2fn 3Uo EF3IoSTD 3Iox 100% FORW ARD cos ( -65) 60% REVERSE 0.01Un & & &

& & TEF--STFW

TEF--STRV

99000204.vsd

Figure 101: Simplified logic diagram for the residual overcurrent protection Activate the independent time-delay function by setting Characteristic= Def (or inverse time delay according to the setting table). The t1 timer starts when both the definite/inverse time characteristic and the tMin timer operate. The tMin timer starts when the 3I0 current to the relay is equal to or higher than the set operate value for IMin and the content of the second harmonic in 3I0 is less than 20%. The inverse time calculation starts when 3I0 is equal to or higher than the set operate value for IMin and the content of the second harmonic in 3I0 is less than 20%. The inverse time delay is determined by the selection of the characteristic (NI, VI etc.) in the Characteristic setting and the setting of the characteristic IN> current. The t1 timer is normally set to zero. Use it to add a constant time to the inverse time delay. Figure 102 shows the effect of the IMin and tMin settings on the inverse characteristic.

180

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

t (s)

IMIN Logaritmic Inverse Normal Inverse (k=0,4)

5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 5 7 tMIN

10

20 30

50 x IN>
99000105.vsd

Figure 102: Normal inverse and logarithmic inverse time characteristics. The switch-onto-fault function is used to minimise the operate time in case of pole discrepancy at breaker closing and in case of closing on to a fault. The function is released by activating the TEF--BC binary input. The function is activated for 1 second after the reset of the TEF--BC binary input. The function is blocked by activating the TEF--BLOCK binary input. Activating the TEF--BLKTR blocks the definite/inverse delay trip outputs TEF--TRIP and the switch-on-to-fault trip TEF-TRSOTF. The 3I0 current lags the polarising voltage (3U0) by a phase angle equal to the angle of the zero-sequence source impedance. The forward measuring element operates when:
3I 0 cos ( 65 ) IN>Dir
(Equation 159)

Where:

is the angle between 3I0 and 3U0 (positive if 3I0 lags 3U0) is the set operate value

IN>Dir

181

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

65

Upol = -3U0

IN Operation

IN>Dir

99000052.vsd

Figure 103: Measuring characteristic of the directional element The change in operate value is small when the phase angle deviates moderately from 65. A deviation of 20 increases the operate value by only 6.5%. The polarising voltage, normally obtained from the broken delta windings of the VTs, can have a high content of harmonics relative to the fundamental frequency when the output voltage is low, particularly when capacitive VTs are used. To secure a correct measurement, the directional function must have an effective bandpass filtering of the voltage. In the module, the filtering secures a correct function for fundamental frequency polarising voltages down to 1% of the rated voltage. In case of an external fault, the capacitive current generated on the line decreases the current to the earth-fault relay situated at the line end towards the fault. So the reverse direction comparator must have an increased sensitivity to secure reliable blocking in case of external faults when a directional comparison or a blocking communication scheme is used. The operate current of the reverse direction measuring element in the module is, as a fixed ratio, set at 0.6 IN> Dir.

5.3
5.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the time deleyed residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

182

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

To detect high resistive earth-faults, a low operate current is required. On the other hand, a low setting increases the risk for unwanted operation due to imbalance in the network and the current transformer circuits. Set the minimum operate current (IN> *IMin) of the earth-fault overcurrent protection higher than the maximum false earth-fault current. If the directional function is chosen, set the start level of the directional function (IN> Dir) higher than the maximum false earth-fault current. The imbalance in the network that causes false earth-fault currents is caused mainly by untransposed or not fully transposed parallel lines with strong zero-sequence mutual coupling. There might also be high imbalance currents for non-transposed single circuit lines if the zero sequence source impedance is low at both line ends. This false earth-fault current is directly proportional to the load current. In a well-transposed system, the false earth-fault current is normally lower than 5% of the line current. In case of not fully transposed parallel lines, measure or calculate the false earth-fault current at maximum load. The choice of time delay characteristics - definite time, normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse or logarithmic inverse - depends on the network. To achieve optimum selectivity, use the same type of characteristic for all earth-fault overcurrent protections in the network. This means that in networks already equipped with earth-fault overcurrent relays, the best selectivity is normally achieved by using the same type of characteristic as in the existing relays. The following formulas for the operate time (in seconds) apply to the characteristic used within the REx 5xx terminal with line protection, see table 12.
Table 12: Operate time formulas
Operate time (s)

Characteristics

Normal inverse

0.14 -k t = ------------------0.02 I 1
13.5 t = ---------- k I1

(Equation 160)

Very inverse

(Equation 161)

Extremely inverse

80 t = ------------k 2 I 1
t = 5.8 ( 1.35 ln I )

(Equation 162)

Logarithmic inverse

(Equation 163)

Where: I k is a multiple of set current 3I0> is a time multiplying factor, settable in the range of 0.05 to 1.10

183

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

All inverse time characteristic settings are a compromise between short fault clearing time and selective operation in a large current range. The main determining factors are the maximum allowed fault-clearing time at the maximum fault resistance to be covered and the selectivity at maximum fault current. Set the minimum operate current (IMin) of the earth-fault overcurrent protection to one to four times the set characteristic quantity (IN>) of the inverse time delay. So an inverse characteristic with a low set IN> set to get a short operate time at minimum fault current can be combined with a higher set IMin minimum operate current, to avoid unwanted operation due to false earth-fault currents. Set the minimum operate time independent of the inverse time characteristic. Normally, set this time longer than the time delay of distance zone 2 in REx 5xx to avoid interference with the impedance measuring system in case of earth-faults with moderate fault resistance within zone 2. When a solidly earthed, power transformer is energized, an inrush current normally flows in the neutral-to-earth connection of the transformer. This current is divided among other earthed transformers and lines connected to the same bus, inversely proportional to their zero-sequence impedance. The amplitude and time duration of this current can be sufficiently large to cause the unwanted operation of a sensitive earth-fault overcurrent protection. The earth-fault overcurrent protection has a built-in second harmonic current stabilization, which prevents unwanted operation if the inrush current has a second harmonic content of 20% or more. This is normally the case. On rare occasions, it may be necessary to increase the setting of the operate value for the residual earth-fault overcurrent protection to avoid unwanted operation due to transformer inrush current. When single-phase auto-reclosing is used, the minimum time of the inverse time delayed residual overcurrent protection (tMin) should be set to be longer than the time from the occurrence of the fault to the reclosing of the breaker at both line terminals. An alternative method is to block the earth fault protection by the autorecloser during the dead time. This avoids unwanted three-phase tripping during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle controlled by the distance protection. The polarizing voltage for directional earth-fault overcurrent protection is normally obtained from the broken delta windings of instrument voltage transformers or by internal calculation. The voltage contains a certain amount of harmonics, especially when the protection is connected to CVTs. Due to the bandpass filtering a polarizing voltage down to 1 percent of the rated voltage will provide correct directional functionality. This is also valid when the protection is connected to CVTs. The minimum polarizing voltage to the protection (Umin) is calculated from the formula:

184

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 5 Current

U m in = IF

m in

Z0

min

U sec -------------U pr im
(Equation 164)

Where: IFmin Z0min Usec, Uprim is the minimum primary operate fault current is the minimum zero-sequence impedance seen from the relay are the rated phase voltages of the broken delta connected CVTs (VTs)

Observe that when a blocking scheme or a permissive scheme with current reversal or weak-end-infeed logic is used, IFmin represents the primary operate current of the reverse-looking directional element which is 60% of the forward element. To even secure operation in unfavorable cases, Umin must be equal to at least 1 volt plus the maximum network frequency false voltage, due to measuring errors in the VT circuits. If not blocked, the directional comparator operates during the dead time in case of a single-phase auto-reclosure. So the TEF--BLOCK blocking input must be activated during the single-phase auto-reclosing cycle.

185

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Application
In some solidly earthed networks the 4-step earth fault overcurrent protection is used. The function can be used in a similar way as the distance protection. Below is described one example of the normal application of the 4-step earth fault overcurrent protection. Step 1 has directional function and is set to give instantaneous trip in case of phase to earth faults on the protected line, with large earth fault current. Due to selectivity requirements step 1 can not be set to cover the whole length of the line. Step 2 has directional function and is set to give a trip with a short delay (~ 0.4 s) for all remote phase to earth faults on the protected line. Step 2 will also serve as main or remote back-up protection for phase to earth faults on the remote busbar. Step 3 has directional function and is set to give a trip with a medium delay (0.8 - 1.2 s) for phase to earth faults with some fault resistance. Step 3 can also serve as remote back-up protection for phase to earth faults on other lines, out from the remote busbar. Step 4 has non-directional function and is set to give a trip with a long delay of 1.2 s or more. The current setting is chosen so that high resistive phase to earth faults will be detected and cleared. Also most series faults will be detected and cleared after operation of step 4. To achieve selectivity also for earth faults with small residual current, step 4 can have inverse time characteristic. The four step earth fault protection can also be used in a communication scheme together with the communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC). Blocking or permissive overreach schemes can be used. One possibility is that step 2 or step 3 is used in an overreach mode. If the overreaching step 2 (3) starts, an acceleration signal is sent to the remote line end. If an acceleration signal is received step 2 (3) will give an instantaneous function. In case of applicationt on a double circuit line or small infeed of residual current, the additional logic for Current reversal and weak-end-infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) should be used in permissive overreaching scheme. To assure dependable and secure function of the 4-step residual overcurrent protection, extensive network calculations are required.

6.1

6.2
6.2.1 6.2.2

Functionality
Theory of operation Function logic The 4 step earth-fault overcurrent protection has three current steps with independent time delay and a fourth current step with independent time delay or inverse time characteristics (Normal inverse (NI), Very inverse (VI), Extremely inverse (EI) and one logarithmic inverse characteristic (LOG)).

186

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

The formulas in table 13 are valid for the different inverse time characteristics in the four-step earth-fault protection.
Table 13: Inverse characteristics formulas
Time delay (s):

Characteristic:

Normal inverse

0 , 14 ----------------= -------------k 0, 02

( I I B)

(Equation 165)

Very inverse

t =

, ------------- -------k
13 5

(Equation 166)

( I IB) 1
Extremely inverse

80 t = -------------------------k 2 ( l l B) 1 t = 5.8 ( 1.35 ln ( l l B ) )

(Equation 167)

Logarithmic inverse

(Equation 168)

The simplified logic diagrams in figure 104 to 105 show the circuits for the four overcurrent steps and the directional function. The diagrams also include the logic of the switch-onto-fault function.

step1 Oper.mode stfw-int strv-int e-int Check of operation mode and conditions & IN1> 3I0 & EF4--STIN1 stin1-int 50 ms t t1 t EF4--TRIN1 trin1-int

EF4--BLOCK EF4--BLKTR

step 2 and 3 same as step 1.

99000057.vsd

Figure 104: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Step 1. Step 2 and step 3 are the same.

187

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

SOTF Oper. e-int stin2-int stin4-int block-int EF4--BC EF4--BLKTR

300 ms t 0 = Off t4U t 1 = IN2> 2 = IN4>Res &

Switch-onto-fault

EF4--TRSOTF trsotf-int

99000058.vsd

Figure 105: Simlified logic diagarm of internal function Switch-onto-fault.

trsotf-int trin1-int trin2-int trin3-int EF4--BLOCK EF4--BLKTR Step 4 Oper.mode stfw-int strv-int e-int Characteristic Def/NI/VI/EI/LOG Characteristic 3I0 IN4> Def. Check of operation mode and conditions t4Min t & >1 t4 t EF4--TRIN4 & EF4--TRIP 50 ms t

IN>Inv

EFCh k block-int EF4--STIN4 IN> 20/32% 2fn & e-int & >1 EF4--START

stin1-int stin2-int stin3-int stfw-int strv-int

99000059.vsd

Figure 106: Simplified logic diagram of internal function step 4.

188

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

EF4--BLOCK

50 m s t Directional check

3I0 3fn 3U0

EF3I0STD 3I0x cos( -65) 100% FORW ARD 60% REVERSE & 0.01 Un & & &

EF4--STFW stfw-int EF4--STRV strv-int

99000060.vsd

Figure 107: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Directional check. For all four current steps, one of the following operate modes can be selected, independently of the other steps: Non-directional overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, NonDirNonRestr. Forward directional overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, ForwRelease. Non-directional overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, Restrained. Forward directional overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, ForwRelRestr. Overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, with blocking from the reverse direction measuring element, RevBlock. Overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, with blocking from the reverse direction measuring element, RevBlRestr.

6.2.3

The directional measuring function The forward direction measuring element (STFW) operates when:

3I0 cos 65 IN > Dir

(Equation 169)

Where: IN>Dir = set operate current

= phase angel between the current and the voltage (positive if the current lags the voltage) The operate current can be set between 5 and 40% of the base current (Ib) of the REx 5xx terminal. The operate current is very little influenced by moderate phase angle differences. A deviation of 20 from the characteristic angle 65 only increases the operate value by 6.5%.

189

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

The operate value is practically independent of the magnitude of the polarising voltage in the interval from 0.5 to 100% of nominal value. When the voltage is less than 0.5%, the measuring circuit is blocked. In special cases when the polarising voltage is too low, current polarising can be used by inserting an external unit which converts the zero sequence current into a voltage. The polarising voltage is normally obtained from the broken delta winding of the VTs. When the voltage is low, it can have a high content of harmonics - especially third harmonic - relative the basic frequency component. This is specially the case when capacitive VTs are used. To secure correct directional function down to a polarising voltage of 0.5% of rated voltage, the measuring circuit is provided with a filter which has a damping factor of >20 for the third harmonic component of the voltage. The directional function has two comparators, one operates in the forward direction (STFW) and one operates in the reverse direction (STRV). The operate current of the reverse directional comparator is 0.6IN>Dir, i.e. 40% lower than that of the forward directional. The increased sensitivity is used to compensate for the influence of the capacitive current generated by the faulty line, which in case of an external fault decreases the current fed to the earth-fault protection situated at the line end towards the fault. By increasing the sensitivity, reliable blocking from the reverse directional measuring element is obtained for the directional comparison system.

65

U pol = -3U0

I set

99000061.vsd

Figure 108: Operate characteristic of the direction measuring element. 6.2.4 Definite time overcurrent step 1 When the current exceeds the set operate value for IN1> and no blocking is applied to input EF4-BLOCK, the &-gate operates and the start flag EF4-STIN1 is activated. When the setting ForwRelease is selected, the forward directional element must also operate in order to start the timer t1.

190

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

When the setting RevBlock is selected, the timer t1 is not activated if the reverse directional element is activated. When the setting Restrained is selected, the timer t1 is not activated if the second harmonic content in 3I0 is higher than the set blocking value (20 or 32%). 6.2.5 Definite time overcurrent step 2 and 3 The overcurrent steps 2 and 3 have the same functionality as step 1. Overcurrent step 4 With setting Characteristic = Definite, the function of step 4 with current detector IN4> and timer t4 is the same as for overcurrent steps 1 3. When logarithmic inverse time characteristic is selected the inverse time calculation starts when the current exceeds the set operate value of current detector IN4> (see figure 106). For the NI, VI and EI characteristics the inverse time calculation starts when the current exceeds the set characteristic current (IN>Inv). The inverse time delay is determined by the selection of the characteristic (NI,VI etc.), the setting of the time multiplier (k) and the characteristic current (IN>Inv). The timer t4 starts when both the inverse timer and the timer t4Min operate. Hence, the setting IN4> determines the minimum operate current and the setting t4Min determines the minimum operate time. The influence of the setting of minimum operate time and minimum operate time on the inverse time function is shown in figure 109. Observe that when inverse characteristic NI, VI or EI is selected, the second harmonic restrain is a fixed value=20 %, independent of the setting.

6.2.6

t (s)

l min (IN4>) Logarithmic inverse

5 4 3 2 t4MIN 1

Normal inverse (k=0.4)

10

20

30

50

x IN>Inv
99000062.vsd

Figure 109: Normal inverse and logarithmic inverse time characteristics. Timer t4Min is normally set to zero. It can be used to add a constant time to the inverse time delay.

191

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

The functions ForwRel, RevBlock and Restrain are applicable also when inverse time is selected. To release the switch-onto-fault function, the input EF4--BC is activated when the breaker is closed. The function remains released 5 seconds after reset of the input signal. When the operation mode SOTF is set to IN2>, the current stage IN2> activates the output EF4--TRSOTF with a fixed time delay of 300 ms. With the setting SOTF = IN4>Res, the current stage IN2> activates the output with a fixed time delay of 300 ms and the current stage IN4>Res activates the output EF4--TRSOTF with a time delay t4U. Nevertheless, a condition is that the second harmonic content in 3I0 is less than the set blocking value. Both time steps are blocked when input EF4--BLOCK is activated. When the setting BlkParTransf = On is selected and the second harmonic content in the current 3I0 is higher than the set restrain value 70 ms after the operation of current detector IN4>Res, the &-gate after the timer seals in and gives second harmonic blocking until the current detector resets. The function is used for parallel connected transformers, for which the second harmonic content of the inrush current may become substantially reduced within fractions of a second after breaker closure.

6.3
6.3.1 6.3.2

Calculations
Settings General The parameters for the four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection function (EF4) are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Only detailed network studies can determine the operate conditions under which the highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during single-phase fault conditions. But to examine two-phase-to-earth conditions is also needed, since this type of fault can give larger earth fault current than single-phase to earth fault in some cases. Also transients, that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times, should be considered. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end or at a line tap, which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause operation of the residual overcurrent protection. As the reach of each step is dependent on the operation conditions, fault calculations for the settings should be done with various switching states in the network.

6.3.3

Step 1 The settings for step 1 is described in the following sections. See section "Meshed network without parallel line" and section below, are valid for both directional and non-directional operation. For non-directional operation, also see section "Meshed network non-directional", must be considered.

192

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

Meshed network without parallel line This section describes the setting calculation for Step 1 for both directional and non-directional operation. But when non-directional operation is selected, an additional fault calculation, with a fault applied in A, has to be done. See section. "Meshed network non-directional". The following fault calculations have to be done for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 110, apply a fault in B and then calculate the relay through fault residual current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to B. For most protections a network switching state, with one of the lines out from the remote busbar taken out of service, will give the largest residual fault current to the protection. Figure 110: Through fault currency from A to B: IfB The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:
Imin MAX(I fB)
(Equation 170)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 10% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers during transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum setting (Is) for the residual overcurrent protection, step 1, is then:
Is 1, 2 I fB
(Equation 171)

Meshed network with parallel line In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 111, where the two lines are connected to the same busbar. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the through fault current IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the relay in figure 111 will be with a fault at the C point with the breaker C open. A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM) on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated. The through fault current IM is the sum of the induced fault current from line 1 and the fault current that would occur in line 2 if the mutual impedance M would be zero. Also in the case with fault at a parallel line, the case with one of the lines out from the remote busbar taken out of service, should be considered. Figure 111: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM The minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:

193

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

Im in MA X(I fB, I M )
Where: IfB has been described in the previous paragraph

(Equation 172)

Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the protection, step 1, is then:
Is 1, 2 Imin
(Equation 173)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum residual fault current that the relay has to clear. Meshed network non-directional First do the calculation according to section "Meshed network without parallel line". Then apply a fault in A and calculate the through fault residual current IfA, figure 110. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered. Figure 112: Through fault current from B to A: IfA The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will then be:
Imin MAX(I fA, IfB )
(Equation 174)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 10% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers during transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data. The minimum setting (Is) for the residual overcurrent protection, step 1, is then:
Is 1, 2 Imin
(Equation 175)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear IF in figure 113. Figure 113: Fault current: IF For parallel lines, the minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:

194

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

Imin MAXI I fA, I fB, I M

Where: IfA, IfB have been described in the previous paragraphs

(Equation 176)

6.3.4

Step 2 and 3 The calculation of the settings for step 2 and 3 differs from step 1. However, the method to calculate the values are the same for step 2 and 3. First it is necessary to apply the faults as in figure 114, one at a time, and measure the residual currents and calculate the settings for step 2. Phase to earth faults out on each line out from the remote busbar, are calculated. In these calculations the circuit breaker at the remote end of the faulted line is open (instantaneous trip).

C A B 3I0B-C D 3I0A-B 3I0B-D

Relay
xx00000714.vsd

Figure 114: Example of fault cases between stations. Calculation of 3I0min for step 2 (and step 3). Use the values for step 1 to calculate minimum residual current setting for step 2. Similarly, use the values from step 2 to calculate the settings for step 3. The minimum current for step 2 is calculated from:
3I02 1 = s a 1 3I01 B C
Where: 3I01B-C is the step 1 current setting for the B-C protection
(Equation 177)

3 I0 2 2 = s a 2 3I01 B D
Where: 3I01B-D is the step 1 setting for the B-D protection

(Equation 178)

195

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

Which then gives 3I0min as:

3I02 min = max (3I02 1,3I 022)
Where: s is the safety factor (=1.2)
(Equation 179)

3I0 A B a 1 = ------------------3I 0B C
3I0 A B a 2 = ------------------3I 0B D

(Equation 180)

(Equation 181)

The currents to be found in figure 114. For step 2 there is normally a requirement that faults on the remote busbar shall be detected and cleared. Calculations are done where a phase to earth fault is applied at the remote busbar. In this calculation the zero sequence source impedance, behind the relay, shall be minimized. This is normally done by taking one line out of service.The step 2 setting should be chosen according to:
3I0 m ax s2 min ( 3I0busbar )
(Equation 182)

Note!
The safety factor, s, may be increased if there exists a mutual coupling for the lines from B to C or D.

Step 2 or step 3 can also be used in communication schemes: Blocking or permissive overreach. In case of a blocking scheme step 3 can be given reverse direction. This step will be used as blocking criterion. The reverse step 3 must overreach the overreach step 2 in the remote line end. In case of a permissive overreach scheme it must be assured that the step to be used for sending and accelerated trip, must overreach the line. This can be done as described above for step 2 and 3. 6.3.5 Step 4, non-directional To detect high resistive earth-faults, a low operate current is required. On the other hand, a low setting will increase the risk for unwanted operation due to unbalance in the network and the current transformer circuits. The minimum operate current of the earth-fault overcurrent protection must be set higher than the maximum false earth-fault current. The unbalance in the network that causes false earth-fault currents is caused mainly by untransposed or not fully transposed single circuit or parallel lines. This false earth-fault current is directly proportional to the load current.

196

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

In well transposed systems, the false earth-fault current is normally lower than 5% of the line current. In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, the false earth-fault current must be measured or calculated when maximum sensitivity is desired. Generally, 80 A is recommended as a minimum primary operate value for the earth-fault overcurrent protection. 6.3.6 Inverse time delay To achieve optimum selectivity, the same type of inverse characteristic should be used for all earth-fault overcurrent protections in the network. Therefore, in networks already equipped with earth-fault overcurrent relays, the best selectivity will normally be achieved by using the same type of inverse characteristic as in the existing relays. The following formulas are valid for the inverse characteristics in the four-step earth-fault protection in REx 5xx:
Table 14: Inverse characteristics formulas
Operate time (s):

Characteristic:

Normal inverse
(Equation 183)

0 , 14 ----------------= -------------k 0, 02

( I I B)

Very inverse

t =
Extremely inverse

, ------------- -------k
13 5

(Equation 184)

( I IB) 1

80 t = -------------------------k 2 ( l l B) 1 t = 5.8 ( 1.35 ln ( l l B ) )

(Equation 185)

Logarithmic inverse

(Equation 186)

Where: I IB k is a multiple of set current 3I0>Inv is the set base current of the terminal is a time multiplying factor, setting range 0.05-1.10.

The determining factors for the inverse characteristic settings are the allowed fault clearing time at the maximum fault resistance to be covered, and the selectivity at maximum fault current. The minimum operate current IN4> of the inverse current step can be set in the range of one to four times the set characteristic current IN>Inv. Hence, an inverse characteristic with a low set IN> to get short operate time at minimum fault current can be combined with a higher set minimum operate current in order to avoid unwanted operation due to false residual currents.

197

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

The minimum operate time t4Min is set independent of the inverse time characteristic. This time is normally set longer than the time delay of impedance zone 2 in the line protections, in order to avoid interference with the impedance measuring system in case of earth-faults with moderate fault resistance within zone 2. 6.3.7 Directional current function Polarising voltage The polarising voltage for directional earth-fault protection is normally obtained from the broken delta connected secondary windings of instrument voltage transformers or interposing voltage transformers. The voltage contains a certain amount of harmonics, especially when the protection is connected to CVTs. Due to the efficient band-pass filtering within REx 5xx, a polarising voltage down to 0.5% of the rated voltage will provide correct directional functioning. This is also valid when the protection is connected to CVTs. The minimum voltage to the protection (Umin) is calculated from the formula:
U m in = IF Z0 U sec -------------Upr im
(Equation 187)

m in

mi n

Where: IFmin Z0min Usec Uprim is the minimum primary operate current, is the minimum zero-sequence sources impedance at the relay site and is the rated secondary phase voltage of the broken delta connected winding of the voltage transformers is the rated primary voltage

Directional current settings The operate value of the forward direction function (IN>Dir) should with some margin be set lower than both: The operate current of the most sensitive directional step. The lowest set current step which is used as input to the directional comparison logic.

Check according to the formula above that the necessary polarising voltage is obtained for the directional function. Observe that when the current reversal or weak-end-infeed logic is used, Ifmin represents the primary operate current of the reverse directional element. To secure operation in unfavorable cases as well, Umin should be equal to at least 0.5 volts plus the maximum network frequency false voltage, due to measuring errors in the VT circuits.

198

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 5 Current

If not blocked, the directional comparator will operate during the dead time in case of a single-phase auto-reclosure. Therefore, the blocking input EF4-BLOCK should be activated during the single-phase auto-reclosing cycle. 6.3.8 Example of protection scheme Due to the flexibility of the 4 step earth-fault protection, different protection schemes according to the customers preference can be realised. One established scheme is to use Step 1-3 as directional steps and the inverse time delayed step 4 as a low set, non-directional back-up step. A selectivity plan for the different current steps is presented in figure 115.

time

I3 I2 I1 Station A Station B Station C

99000064.vsd

Figure 115: Example of selectivity plan for the directional current steps. In systems with 3-phase tripping from the distance relays in case of earth-faults, no time delay is normally used for step 1. Step 2 is set to operate for all earth-faults on the entire line and at the remote end station, even with a certain additional fault resistance. The calculated minimum earth-fault current is multiplied with a safety factor of 0.9 to get the current setting of step 2. The time delay of step 2 is normally set to 0.4 s. Step 2 shall also be selective to step 2 in the adjacent station, see figure 115. It may, therefore, be necessary to compromise and accept a higher current setting than according to the above for the protection in station A. Directional current step 3 is set to operate for earth-faults with additional resistance or for the minimum current at which sufficient polarising voltage is obtained. The time delay of step 3 is normally set to 0.8-1.5 s. The inverse time delayed, non-directional step 4 is in this scheme used as a back-up function which shall trip the line in case of earth-faults with so high additional resistance that the directional steps cannot operate. Step 4 is normally given the same setting for all lines in the network with a time/current characteristic that normally gives selectivity towards the directional steps. Desirable values of the fault resistances for the different current steps are ~ 15 for RI2 , ~ 25 for RI3 and ~ 50 for RI4. If these values cannot be fulfilled, another protection function should be considered, for example current differential protection.

199

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Application
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersn coil, with or without a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth fault current

7.1

7.2

Functionality
Features Separate starting indicators Separate trip indicator Separate direction indicators Settable characteristic angle, RCA, between -90 deg. to +90 deg. Internal supervision Binary input to enable or block the operation Independent time delay for trip

Description of operation

200

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection function (WEF1) has two analog inputs, residual current and residual voltage. The main functionality goal is to measure the residual current component 3I0cos . The reference for the directional check is the voltage 3U0. Depending on the earthing of the network the angle of the voltage 3U0 must be adjusted with the relay characteristic angle, RCA.The reference voltage, see figure 116.

Uref = 3 U0 ej (RCA )
(Equation 188)

Where: -3U0 is equal to 3U0 with 180 degrees adjusted

RCA is usually equal to zero in compensated network (Petersn coil) and 90 degree in isolated network. Precondition for the calculation is the availability of high enough residual voltage and residual current respectively.The sum of and RCA (called ANGLE) is used in the protection algorithm, see figure 116.

201

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

Uref Forward Direction when is between 0 deg. to 180 deg.

RCA 3I0

-3U0 ANGLE = + RCA

Isolated network

RCA = 0 3I0

Forward Direction when is between 90 deg. to -90 deg.

-3U0 , Uref ANGLE = + RCA

Compensated network
en01000037.vsd

Figure 116: RCA with regard to compensated or isolated network The compensated angle is used for directional detection and for input of the calculation of the fault current component, 3I0 cos . Start conditions A start signal from the function is given if both residual voltage, (UN>) and residual current component, 3I0 cos (cosPhi>) exceeds the setting values, see figure 117.

202

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

Trip conditions A trip signal from the function is given if all the following conditions are fulfilled: The current component, 3I0 cos (cosPhi>) exceeds the setting value. The residual voltage, (UN>) exceeds the setting value. The fault is detected in the chosen direction (FW = forward or RV = reverse). The time delay tTrip has elapsed.

UN> INcosPhi> &

tTrip t

WEF1-STU WEF1-START

&

WEF1-TRIP

Direction=FW & FW

WEF1-STFW

Direction=RV & RV

WEF1-STRV

en01000083.vsd

Figure 117: Logic for sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection function (WEF1)

7.3

Calculations
The parameters for the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection function (WEF1) are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. In the setting of earth fault protection, in a high impedance grounded system, the neutral point voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the earth fault current will be calculated at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point voltage (zero sequence) can be calculated as:

203

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

V phase V 0 = ---------------------3 Rf -----------1+ Z0

(Equation 189)

Where: Vphase Rf Z0 is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault, is the resistance to earth in the fault point and is the system zero sequence impedance to earth

The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

3 V phase I j = 3I 0 = ------------------------Z0 + 3 Rf
(Equation 190)

The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system earthing. In an isolated system (without neutral point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling between the phase conductors and earth:

3 V phase Z0 = jX c = j ------------------------Ij
(Equation 191)

Where: Ij is the capacitive earth fault current at a non-resistive phase to earth fault

In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance grounded system) the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:

jX c 3R n Z 0 = ---------------------------- jX c + 3R n
(Equation 192)

Where: Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor

204

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or more transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:

j ( 3X n Xc ) 3R n Z 0 = --------------------------------------------j ( 3X n Xc ) + 3R n
(Equation 193)

Where: Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil

In the setting of the function a number of parameters shall be given. The characteristic angle RCA of the function is chosen to 0 degree in a system with a neutral point resistor and/or a Petersen coil. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 degrees in an isolated system. The start current Iset is chosen smaller than the smallest residual current, in the characteristic angel, to be detected by the protection function. In a system with resistive grounding the Iset can be chosen according to:

V0 Iset IRn ----------------V phase

(Equation 194)

Where: IRn V0 is the rated current of the neutral point resistor and is the neutral point voltage at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance)

In an isolated system Iset can be chosen according to:

V0 I set ( Icback Ic forw ) ----------------Vphase

(Equation 195)

Where: Icback Icforw is the capacitive earth fault current contribution behind the protection at a non-resistive fault and is the capacitive earth fault current contribution forward to the protection at a non-resisitive fault

205

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 5 Current

The Uset is set to a voltage to be sure to detect resistive earth faults at desired sensitivity. The time delay is chosen according to the selectivity plan of the system.

206

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Application
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has 90 phase shift compared to the residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersn coil, with or without a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual current protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.

8.1

8.2

Functionality
Features Separate starting indicators Separate trip indicator Settable characteristic angle, RCA, between -90 deg. to +90 deg. Internal supervision Binary input to enable or block the operation Independent time delay for trip

207

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

Inverse time function

Description of operation Sensitive directional residual power protection function (WEF2) has two analog inputs, residual current and residual voltage. The main functionality goal is to measure the residual power 3U0 3I0cos . The reference for the directional check is the voltage 3U0. Depending on the earthing of the network the angle of the voltage 3U0 must be adjusted with the relay characteristic angle, RCA.The reference voltage, see figure 118.

Uref = 3 U0 ej (RCA )
(Equation 196)

Where: -3U0 is equal to 3U0 with 180 degrees adjusted

RCA is usually equal to zero in compensated network (Petersn coil) and -90 degrees in isolated network. Precondition for the calculation is the availability of high enough residual voltage and residual current respectively.The sum of and RCA (called ANGLE) is used in the protection algorithm, see figure 118.

208

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

Uref Forward Direction when is between 0 deg. to 180 deg.

RCA 3I0

-3U0 ANGLE = + RCA

Isolated network

RCA = 0 3I0

Forward Direction when is between 90 deg. to -90 deg.

-3U0 , Uref ANGLE = + RCA

Compensated network
en01000037.vsd

Figure 118: RCA with regard to compensated or isolated network The compensated angle is used for directional detection and for input of the calculation of the fault power component, 3U0 3I0cos .

Start conditions

209

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

A start signal from the function is given if all the following conditions are fulfilled, see figure 119. Residual voltage exceeds the setting value (UN>) Residual current exceeds the setting value (IN>) The measured real power 3U0 3I0cos exceeds the setting value (SN>)

The inverse function An inverse time trip function for the Sensitive directional residual power protection is implemented in the algorithm for WEF2. The inverse time function:

Tinv = k Sref (3U0 3I 0 cos )

(Equation 197)

Where: k Sref 3U0I0cos is k-factor (0.0 - 2.0), is scaling factor (5.0 - 50.0) and is the measured real power

Trip conditions A trip signal from the function is given if all the following conditions are fulfilled: Residual voltage exceeds the setting value (UN>) Residual current exceeds the setting value (IN>) The measured real power component 3U0 3I0cos exceeds the setting value (SN>) The measured real power component 3U0 3I0cos is activated until the inverse time Tinv has elapsed. The time delay tTrip has elapsed. The fault is detected in the chosen direction (forward or reverse).

210

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

UN> IN> SN> & Inverse time

t

WEF2-START

&
SN

tTrip t

WEF2-TRIP

&

Direction=FW & FW 1 Direction=RV & RV

en01000084.vsd

Figure 119: Logic for sensitive directional residual power protection function (WEF2)

8.3

Calculations
The parameters for the sensitive directional residual power protection function (WEF2) are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Consider a MV system with a medium size neutral point resistor connected to the neutral of the transformer feeding the system. A phase to earth fault occurs on a line in the system, as shown in figure 120.

211

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

Source impedance Zsc (pos. seq)

ZT,1 (pos. seq) ZT,0 (zero seq)

RN

V0A 3I0

Substation A

ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq) ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)

V0B

Substation B

ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq) ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)

Phase to earth fault

xx00000715.vsd

Figure 120: Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting The residual fault current can be written:
3 Vph 3I 0 = ---------------------------------------------2 Z1 + Z 0 + 3 R f
(Equation 198)

Where: Vph is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault

Z1 = Z sc + Z T,1 + Z lineAB,1 + ZlineBC,1

(Equation 199)

212

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point,

Z0 = Z T,0 + 3 RN jX 0tot + ZlineAB,0 + Z lineBC,0
(Equation 200)

is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point and Rf is the fault resistance. The residual voltage in stations A and B can be written.
V0A = 3I0 ( ZT, 0 + 3 R N )
(Equation 201)

V0B = 3I0 ( ZT,0 + 3 R N + Z lineAB,0 )

(Equation 202)

The residual power will be:

S 0A = 3 V 0A 3I0
(Equation 203)

S 0B = 3 V 0B 3I0

(Equation 204)

The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum sensitivity in the characteristic angle . The protection will use the component with the characteristic angle for measurement and as base for the inverse time delay.
S0A,prot = 3 V 0A 3I 0 cos A
(Equation 205)

S0B,prot = 3 V 0B 3I 0 cos A

(Equation 206)

The time delay for the two protections in A and B will be:

S 0A,prot t A = k -----------------Sref
(Equation 207)

S0B,prot tB = k ----------------S ref

(Equation 208)

Where: k, Sref are setting parameters

213

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 5 Current

The network calculation should be used to find the base for setting of the parameters.

214

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Chapter 5 Current

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Application
This communication logic is intended for residual overcurrent protections. To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous zone 1, the directional residual overcurrent protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channel speed and security against false or lost signals. So special channels are used for this purpose. When power line carrier is used for communication, these special channels are strongly recommended due to the communication disturbance caused by the primary fault. In the directional comparison scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, an operate time of 50-60 ms, including a channel transmission time of 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid automatic reclosing function after the fault. During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the auto-reclosing device must block the directional comparison earth-fault scheme. The communication logic module for the REx 5xx terminal contains circuits for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The module also contains logic for the weak-end-infeed and current-reversal functions, which are used only in the permissive overreach scheme.

9.1

9.2
9.2.1 9.2.2

Functionality
Theory of operation Directional comparison logic function The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak-end-infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme. Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions that prevents operation of the directional comparison logic. Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the EFC--BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.

215

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Chapter 5 Current

9.2.3

Blocking scheme In the blocking overreach scheme, a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects a fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips the line after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally 30-40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and the chosen safety margin. One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed and the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that also works in the blocking mode. The communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will occur due to the fault. Blocking schemes are particularly favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence current outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. But the fault clearing time is generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive one. If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the EFC--CR binary input (carrier receive) the EFC--TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

EFC-CSBLK

&

EFC-CS

EFC-BLOCK & EFC-CACC EFC-CR

50 ms t

0-60 s t

25 ms t

EFC-TRIP

t Coord

&

EFC-CRL

99000107.vsd

Figure 121: Simplified logic diagram, Scheme type = blocking 9.2.4 Permissive overreach scheme In the permissive scheme, the forward directed measuring element sends a permissive signal to the other line end if a fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before giving a trip signal. Independent channels (frequencies) must be available for the communication in each direction. An impedance-measuring relay which works in an underreach permissive mode with one channel in each direction can share the channels with the earth-fault overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be

216

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Chapter 5 Current

used in single-line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S / Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source impedance) is about equal at both line ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping. Common channels can not be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the distance or earth-fault protection. In case of an internal fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the EFC--CS output (carrier send). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the EFC--CR binary input (carrier receive). The total operate-time for the system is the sum of the Pick-up time (of the measuring element) and the Transmission time (of the permissive signal)

EFC-BLOCK EFC-CR

&

EFC-CRL

EFC-CACC

&

&

0-60 s t

25 ms t 50 ms t

EFC-TRIP

t Coord

>1 EFC-CSBLK EFC-CSPRM & &

EFC-CS

99000108.vsd

Figure 122: Simplified logic diagram, Scheme type = permissive

9.3
9.3.1

Design
Blocking scheme In the blocking scheme, a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element in the residual overcurrent function, connected to the EFC--CSBLK input signal, detects a fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips the line after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally 30-40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and the chosen safety margin.

217

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Chapter 5 Current

9.3.2

Permissive overreaching scheme In the permissive scheme, the forward direction measuring element in the residual overcurrent function, connected to the EFC--CSPRM input, sends a permissive signal to the other line end if a fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before giving a trip signal. Independent channels (frequencies) must be available for the communication in each direction.

9.4
9.4.1

Calculations
Setting The parameters for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Blocking scheme In the blocking scheme, set the tCoord timer to the channel transmission time during disturbance conditions. Add a margin of 20-30 ms. Two times the nominal value of the channel transmission time is recommended when a power line carrier is used. Permissive communication scheme In the permissive communication scheme, the security against unwanted operation caused by spurious carrier receive signals can be increased by delaying the tripping output with the tCoord timer. Set the timer in the range of 0.000 to 60.000 s. In most cases, a time delay of 30 ms is sufficient.

9.4.2

9.4.3

218

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 5 Current

10

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)
Application
This additional communication logic is intended for the Communication logic for residual overcurrent protections. To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous zone 1, the earth-fault protection functions can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx 5xx terminals have for this reason available a scheme communication logic. Different system conditions require in many cases additional special logic circuits, like current reversal logic and weak-end-infeed logic. Both functions are available within the additional communication logic for earth-fault protection.

10.1

10.1.1

Current reversal logic If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.

10.1.2

Weak end infeed logic Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or low short-circuit power of the source. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current distribution. Here, the fault current increases when the breaker opens in the strong terminal and a sequential tripping is achieved. This requires a detection of the fault by an independent-tripping zone 1. To avoid sequential tripping as described and when zone 1 is not available, weak end infeed tripping logic is used.

10.2
10.2.1 10.2.2

Functionality
Theory of operation Directional comparison logic function The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme.

219

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 5 Current

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic. Figure 125, figure 126 and figure 127 shows the logic circuits. Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the EFCA-BLOCK input of the directional comparison module. 10.2.3 Fault current reversal logic Figure 123 and figure 124 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault current reversal; note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker opening. This can cause an unselectiv trip on line L2 if the current reversal logic does not block the permissive overreach scheme in the terminal at B:2. Figure 123: Initial condition Figure 124: Current distribution after the breaker at B:1 is opened The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to EFCA-IRV, which in terminal at B:2 recognises the fault on the L1 line. See figure 126. When the reverse direction element is activated during the tPickUp time, the EFCA-IRVL signal is activated, see figure 125. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. EFCA-IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme. When breaker in B:1 operate, the fault current is reversed in line L2. The terminal at B:2 recognises now the fault in forward direction. Together with the remaining carrier received signal it will trip the breaker in B:2. To ensure that this does not occur, the permissive overreach function need to be blocked by EFCA-IRVL, until the carrier receive signal is reset. When the fault current is reversed in line L2, EFCA-IRV is deactived and EFCA-IRVBLK is actived. The reset of EFCA-IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see figure 125. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive EFCA-CR signal in terminal B:2. In terminal A:2, where the forward direction element was initially activated. This direction element must reset before the carrier send signal is initiated from B:2. The delayed reset of EFCA-IRVL also ensures the carrier send signal from terminal B:2 is held back until the forward direction element is reset in terminal A:2.

EFCA-BLOCK EFCA-IRV EFCA-IRVBLK

0-60 s t tPickUp 10 ms t 0-60 s t tPickUp

&

0-60 s t tDelay

EFCA-IRVL

99000053.vsd

Figure 125: Simplified logic diagram, current reversal

220

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 5 Current

10.2.4

Weak and infeed logic Figure 123 shows a typical system condition, which can result in a missing operation; note that there is no fault current from node B. This cause that terminal at B cannot detect the fault and trip the breaker in B. To cope with this situation, a selectable weak end infeed logic is provided for the permissive overreach scheme. The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 127 and figure 128. Figure 126: Initial condition The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to EFCA-WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 127. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weak-end-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 127. If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the terminal in B to detect the fault with the earth-fault function that is in operation.

EFCA-BLOCK EFCA-WEIBLK EFCA-CRL WEI = Echo

99000055.vsd

200 ms t

&

50 ms t

200 ms t

&

EFCA-ECHO

Figure 127: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo. With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the EFCA-TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0. The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth-fault function that is in operation.

221

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 5 Current

EFCA-BLOCK EFCA-WEIBLK EFCA-CRL

200 ms t 50 ms t 200 ms t

&

&

EFCA-ECHO

WEI = Trip EFCA-ST3U0 EFCA-CBOPEN &

&

EFCA-TRWEI

99000056.vsd

Figure 128: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip. The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both line ends.

10.3

Design
The complete EFCA additional logic for the directional residual overcurrent protection is consisting of two parts: Current reversal logic and weak end infeed logic. Each of them has its own setting parameters and possibility for its own configuration. Figure 129 presents a simplified logic diagram for the current reversal function. The reverse directed signal from the directional residual overcurrent function should be connected to the EFCA-IRV functional input, to start the operation of a logic. The EFCA-IRVL signal will be activated, if the fault has been detected in reverse direction for more than the tPickUp time set on the corresponding timers.

EFCA-BLOCK EFCA-IRV EFCA-IRVBLK

0-60 s t tPickUp 10 ms t 0-60 s t tPickUp

&

0-60 s t tDelay

EFCA-IRVL

99000053.vsd

Figure 129: Simplified logic diagram, current reversal The tDelay timer delays the reset of the output signal, when the current reversal occurs and the fault is detected in the forward direction. This prevents the residual overcurrent function to operates unnecessarily during the current reversal conditions.

222

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 5 Current

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). The function is released with either of the WEI=Echo or WEI=Trip settings in the menu. The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward directional element, connected to EFCA-WEIBLK via an OR-gate. The weak-end-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal, if neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the EFCA-TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the residual voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0>.

10.4
10.4.1

Calculations
Setting The parameters for the current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Current reversal The Current-reversal function is set on and off by setting the parameter CurrRev = On/Off. Time delays shall be set for the timers tPickUp and tDelay. tPickUp is chosen shorter (<80%) than the breaker opening time, but minimum 20 ms. tDelay is chosen at a minimum to the sum of protection reset time and the communication reset time. A minimum tDelay setting of 40 ms is recommended. Weak end infeed The weak end infeed can either be set off or to echo or trip by setting the parameter WEI = Off/Echo/Trip. (Echo = Echo, Trip = Echo + Trip). Operate zero sequence voltage for WEI trip is set with Ugr = xx % of Ub. The zero sequence voltage for a fault at the remote line end and appropriate fault resistance is calculated. To avoid unwanted trip from the weak end infeed logic (if spurious carrier signals should occur), set the operate value of the broken delta voltage level detector (3U0) higher than the maximum false network frequency residual voltage that can occur during normal service conditions. The recommended minimum setting is two times the false zero-sequence voltage during normal service conditions.

223

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)

Chapter 5 Current

11
11.1

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)

Application
When the load currents exceed the permitted continuous current there is a risk that the conductor or the insulation will be subject to permanent damage due to overheating. Even moderate overloads under long time give appreciable temperature increase. For example, a current of 1.2 times rated load current gives a temperature rise of 1.2 x 1.2 = 1.44 times rated value. The temperature rise as a function of time for a fixed load is determined by the so called thermal time constant of the element. Moderate overloads are normally not detected by current or impedance measuring relays. A current thermal overload protection can prevent damage caused by excessive temperature increase due to moderate or heavy current overloads. Electrical cables which can be loaded up to the permissible load current should be provided with thermal protection. For cables surrounded by air, the thermal time constant can vary from some few minutes for 10 kV cables with small cross-sectional area to more than one hour for high voltage cables with large cross-sectional area. The shorter time constant valid for cables in air is decisive if some part of the cable is surrounded by air. For overhead lines and cables placed in the air, the ambient temperature will normally vary considerably. Since the temperature of the element is the sum of the ambient temperature and the temperature rise, the thermal protection for heavily loaded lines should be provided with compensation for the ambient temperature. The heating effect of radiant power from the sun can also be appreciable in some areas.

11.2

Functionality
The function includes a memory that is continuously updated with the heat content of the line based on the RMS value of the line current and the ambient temperature. The current used in the function is the phase current having the highest RMS value out of the three phase currents. The function has two settable operating levels for temperature, one intended for alarm and one intended for tripping. For the tripping function a reset hysteresis is included that can be set between 5 and 30C while for the alarm function it is fixed at 5C hysteresis. For the alarm there is an output denoted ALARM which is active as long as the temperature is above alarm level. For the tripping there are two outputs, one denoted TRIP which gives only a 50 ms pulse at operation and one denoted START which is active as long as the temperature is above tripping level. The function also includes a possibility for ambient temperature compensation through a mA transducer input. The upper and lower value for the input range can be set between -25 and +25 mA and corresponding temperature between -1000 and + 1000C. If transducer for ambient temperature is not available the function uses a +20C reference value instead. This value will also be used if a fault is detected in the transducer circuits or mA input module.

224

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)

Chapter 5 Current

11.3

Calculations
The parameters for the thermal phase overload protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The settings can also be made by aids of the SMS or PST setting tools. For temperature compensation, input No. 1 on the MIM module No.1 is always used (fixed configuration). Necessary settings for the MIM module are On/Off for activation, time intervals for measuring of current, upper and lower value for the current input and temperatures corresponding to max. respectively min. current. These settings can only be made via the SMS or PST setting tools. To make the correct settings, the following data are required for the protected object: Final temperature rise after continuos load with specified load current Max. permissible continuous temperature and thermal time constant of the object Max. ambient temperature Max. temperature rise due to radiant power from the sun - if significant

The time constant can be found if a curve is available which shows the temperature rise as a function of time for a given load current. At load current Iload and final temperature rise Tfin the following is valid:
Time:

1x

2x 86

3x 95

4x 98

5x 99

Temperature rise in % of 63 Tfin:

If different values of are calculated from the curve, select the lowest value of to obtain the best protection. The time to function is calculated from the formula:

225

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)

Chapter 5 Current

I 2 2 --------- Ibase p t = In ------------------------------------------------------I 2 Ttrip T amb ----------- --------------------------- I base Tbase

(Equation 209)

Where: p Ip Tamb is Ip/Ibase is continuous load current before the current is increased to I is ambient temperature. (Tamb is 20 C as a fixed value if temperature compensation is not used)

For other parameters: see description in the setting table in the Technical Reference Manual. Setting example Assume the following data: I1b: 5 A Temperature increase of the conductor: 90C at continuous load current 4.5 A. Max. permissible temperature of the conductor: 125C Time constant = 20 min Max. ambient temperature: 30C Max. temperature increase due to radiant power from the sun: 5C

Example 1: THOL with no temperature compensation Ibase = 4.5 A = 4.5/5 x 100 = 90% of I1b Tbase = 90C, = 20 min The thermal function assumes 20C ambient temperature as a fixed value instead of the actual value 30C. Also, the 5C temperature increase due to the sun radiant power is not included in the calculated temperature increase. Hence, the function calculates continuos conductor temperature 20 + 90 = 110C at 4.5 A whereas the max. value is 30 + 90 +5 = 125C. Hence the setting should be TTrip = 125 - (125 - 110) = 110C. Example 2: THOL with temperature compensation Assume temperature measuring elements with output 4 mA at -20C and 20 mA at 100C. Settings of Ibase, Tbase and same as above. MI11-1_Max= 20.00mA MI11-MaxValue = +100C MI11-I_Min= 4.00mA MI11-MinValue = -20C

226

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)

Chapter 5 Current

The influence of the ambient temperature is included in the calculated values. The 5C temperature increase due to the sun radiant power, however, is not included. Hence the setting should be Ttrip = 125 - 5 = 120C.

227

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

12
12.1

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Application
This function issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker (CB), and clears the fault as requested by the object protection. The breaker-failure function is started by a protection trip command, from the line and busbar protection through the breaker-related trip relays. A general START input is always available that starts the measurement in all appropriate phases. In some implementations also phase selective START signals are available. For retrip there is always a general RETRIP output available and in applications with phase selective START signals also phase selective RETRIP output signals are available. Correct fault current clearing or failure is detected by a current check in each phase. The current level can be set at 0,05 to 2 times the rated current. Retrip of the faulty CB can be done with or without current check. A delay, 0-60 s, can be set for the retrip. The use of retrip, limits the impact on the power system if the breaker-failure protection function (BFP) is started by mistake during testing or other maintenance work. A second time step is used for the back-up trip command. It should be connected to trip the adjacent breakers, to clear the busbar section and intertrip the remote end, if so required. The time setting range is 0-60 s. By using separate timers for each phase, correct operation at evolving faults is ensured. The timer setting should be selected with a certain margin to allow variation in the normal fault clearing time. The properties of the BFP function allow the use of a small margin.

228

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

TEST Block BFP=Yes & TEST-ACTIVE 1

t2 t

tp 1 &
t1 t

BFP-BLOCK STIL1 BFP-START BFP-STL1 1

&

BFP-TRBU

tp

1 &

BFP-TRRET

t2 t

& STIL2 BFP-START BFP-STL2 & RETRIP=No I>Check RETRIP=I>Check 1 &

t1 t

tp

BFP-TRRETL1 BFP-TRRETL2 BFP-TRRETL3

t2 t

& STIL3 BFP-START BFP-STL3 & 1

t1

tp

&

en01000185.vsd

Figure 130: Breaker-failure protection, simplified logic diagram The application functions of the protection are: Individual phase-current detection Two time steps, one for retrip of the related circuit breaker and one for the back-up trip of the adjacent circuit breakers Selection of current controlled or unconditional retrip Phase separated timers gives correct operation at an evolving fault Accurate timers and current elements reset in 10 ms, allowing the use of short back-up trip time

229

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

Start BFP

Normal CB Opening

Retrip original CB 110 ms

General trip adjacent CB 150 ms

Relay time 30 ms

CB Opening time 40 ms

Margin 20 ms BFP Time <10 ms CB Opening time 40 ms Marginal 20 ms BFP time <10 ms
99000047.vsd

Figure 131: Time sequence

12.2

Functionality
The breaker-failure protection will be started by a general signal, or in some cases phase selective signals, either from an external protection, or internally from a protection trip signal in the terminal. The breaker receiving the original protection trip command can be retripped from the BFP. The retrip can be controlled by a current check, or carried out as a direct retrip without any current check. The direct retrip can be used, because the breaker-to-trip has already received a tripping command, and the direct retrip does not cause any unselective tripping The use of retrip, limits the extent of unwanted power disconnection in case of an accidental start of the BFP at work in the initiating circuits, with the primary circuit in service and the load above the set current level. The back-up trip is sent to the adjacent circuit breakers in order to clear the fault and disconnect the failing circuit breaker.

230

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

12.2.1

Input and output signals

External start Trip Logic >1 >1 >1 >1

Breaker-failure protection TRIPL1 TRIPL2 TRIPL3 TPTRIP STL1 STL2 STL3 START BLOCK

TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 TRRET TRBU

99000049.vsd

Figure 132: Input and output signals The connectable inputs are connectable by configuration to the binary inputs of the terminal or to other internal functions outputs. The outputs are connectable by configuration to the binary output relays. Connectables and outputs can be connected to the free-logic functions of the unit, OR gates, and in that way add connection links 12.2.2 Start functions The breaker-failure protection can be started either internally or externally. The start pulse is sealed-in as long as the current exceeds the preset current level, to prevent a restart of the BFP timers in case of a chattering starting contact. The preset current level may be set to 5-200% of the secondary base current, I1b. Measuring principles The current is filtered through a specially designed high-pass filter to obtain the required suppression of the dc components. High-pass filtering is performed basically for two reasons, i.e. to remove the: dc component caused by saturated current transformers with a decaying current due to de-energizing of the secondary circuit. This is done to achieve a more correct representation of the real current in the line. dc component that is a part of the fault current. This is done to achieve a correct base for both ASD and RMS calculations.

12.2.3

The frequency limit of the filter is very close to the service frequency, to obtain a maximum suppression of the above dc components.

231

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

The intention of the adaptive signal detection (ASD) concept is to achieve independence from the absolute filtering requirement, when dealing with extremely high fault currents in combination with low preset values. This is obtained by creating a new stabilizing signal to compare the current with. The ASD works continuously, regardless of if the BFP was started. Its result is however considered only when the BFP has started and the pre-set time has elapsed. As the current exceeds the previously stabilized sample, it adapts the value of the current and when it does not, it decays. This adaptive behaviour makes it possible to rapidly and securely detect a breaker failure situation after the pre-set time has elapsed.Continuously and in parallel, the RMS value of the post-filtered signal is calculated and compared with a preset current level. As the RMS value decreases below the preset current level, the breaker-failure function is momentarily reset. At normal operation of the circuit breaker, the stabilizing signal exceeds the post-filtered signal for a consecutive period of maximum 10 ms before it is reset. Resetting occurs before the back-up trip timer t2 has timed out. At a breaker failure situation, the post-filtered current exceeds the stabilizing signal, resulting in a trip from the breaker-failure function within 10 ms after the trip timer t2 has elapsed. The breaker-failure protection works totally separated when comes to current measurement and timers. The back-up trip is always non-segregated.

Current

Current detector ASD & RMS t t1 Back-up trip

Start

& t t

99000104.vsd

Figure 133: Breaker-failure protection

232

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

Current samples

Highpass filtering

Rectifying

Creation of stabilizing signal

Decision through comparison Decision through comparison

ASD

RMS calculation

RMS

en00000011.vsd

Figure 134: Current detector, ASD and RMS measurement Retrip functions The retrip function of the original circuit breaker is set at one of three options:
Setting: The retrip;

Off I> check No I> check

function is not executed. occurs with a current check. occurs without a current check.

The retrip timer t1 can be set from 0 to 60 s. A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms. Back-up trip The back-up trip delay timer t2 can be set between 0 and 60 s. A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

12.3

Design
The breaker failure protection is initiated by the trip commands from the protection functions, either internal to the terminal or from external commands through binary inputs. The start can be initiated by a general signal, or in some cases phase selective signals. The operating values of the current measuring elements are settable within a wide setting range. The measuring is stabilised against the dc-transient that can cause unwanted operation at saturated current transformers and correct breaker operation. Time measurement is individual for each phase. Two independent timers are available, t1 for repeated tripping of own breaker and t2 which operates trip logic for adjacent breakers.

233

Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Chapter 5 Current

12.4
12.4.1 12.4.2

Calculations
Setting Human-machine interface (HMI) The parameters for the breaker failure protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The breaker-failure protection can be controlled from the human-machine interface (HMI) by an Operation parameter, to be set between alternatives Off/On. When Operation is set to Off, the function becomes inoperative. The configuration of input and output signals to the function is made with the CAP configuration tool. The inputs and the outputs to and from the breaker-failure protection are presented in the signal list.
Fixed values

Trip pulse, tp

150 ms, fixed

The breaker failure protection shall be set by means of a current limit for detection of a breaker failure. The current setting shall be chosen in relation to the protection functions, initiating the breaker failure protection. Normally the current setting should be equal to or lower than the most sensitive setting of a residual overcurrent protection. If the retrip function is used a time delay before retrip has to be set. In most cases this time delay can be set to zero. The time delay of the back-up trip function shall be chosen so that selectivity is maintained. Consider the following: t1: Set retrip time delay tbr: Circuit breaker opening time BFR reset time The back-up trip delay t2 shall be set:

t2 t1 + t br + margin
(Equation 210)

At the same time it is desired that the back-up trip is done so fast that remote protections will not trip.

234

About this chapter

Chapter 6 Voltage

Chapter 6 Voltage
About this chapter This chapter describes the voltage protection functions.

235

Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

1
1.1

Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

Application
Undervoltage protection prevents the sensitive elements from running under conditions that could cause their overheating and thus shorten their life expectancy below the economical limits. In many cases, it is a useful tool in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.

1.2

Functionality
Figure 135 shows a simplified logic diagram of the undervoltage protection function. The trip output signal TUV--TRIP changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if at least one of the signals TUV--STUL1N, TUV--STUL2N or TUV--STUL3N remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer than the set value on the corresponding timer. The TUV--VTSU signal, that is normally connected to the fuse failure supervision function, can inhibit the operation of the undervoltage protection. Any external signal, connected to the TUV--BLOCK input also blocks the operation of the undervoltage protection. Trip output signal TUV--TRIP is blocked by any signal connected to TUV--BLKTR input.

236

Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

TUV--BLKTR TEST TUV--TEST & Block TUV=Yes TUV--BLOCK TUV--VTSU TUV--STUL1N TUV--STUL2N TUV--STUL3N & & & >1 & t TUV--TRIP TUV--START TUV--STL1 TUV--STL2 TUV--STL3
en00000121.vsd

>1 Function enable

Figure 135: Simplified logic diagram - Undervoltage protection

1.3

Design
The voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the phase-to-neutral voltages in all three phases. Recursive Fourier filter filters the input voltage signals and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching or underreaching of the measuring elements.

1.4

Calculations
The parameters for the time delayed undervoltage protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. All the voltage conditions in the system where the undervoltage protection performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time characteristic.

237

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

2
2.1

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

Application
The application areas of the overvoltage protection functions are different in distribution and transmission networks. The overvoltage protection is used to protect the equipment and its insulation against overvoltage. In this way it prevents damage to the equipment in the power system and shortening of their life time. The residual overvoltage protection function is mainly used in distribution networks, primarily as a back-up protection for the residual overcurrent protection in the line feeders. This to secure disconnection of earth-faults.

2.2

Functionality
The phase overvoltage protection function continuously measures the three phase voltages and initiates the corresponding output signals if the measured phase voltages exceed the preset value (starting) and remain high longer than the time delay setting on the timers (trip). This function also detects the phases which caused the operation. The residual overvoltage protection function calculates the residual voltage (3U0) from the measuring three phase voltages and initiates the corresponding output signals if the residual voltage is larger than the preset value (starting) and remains high longer than the time delay setting (trip).

2.3

Design
Figure 136 shows a simplified logic diagram of the overvoltage protection function. The time delayed residual overvoltage protection and the time delayed overvoltage protection share some input signals and logical elements. For this reason and for the sake of better overview both the protections are shown in the figure.

238

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

TOV--BLKTR TEST TOV--TEST Block TOV=Yes TOV--BLOCK &

TOV--STUL1N TOV--STUL2N TOV--STUL3N

& & & 1 & t

TOV--TRIP TOV--TRPE TOV--STPE TOV--STL1 TOV--STL2 TOV--STL3 TOV--STN

TOV--ST3UO

&

&

TOV--TRN

en01000187.vsd

Figure 136: Time delayed overvoltage protection - simplified logic diagram

239

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

TOV--BLKTR TEST TOV--TEST & Block TOV=Yes TOV--BLOCK 1

TOV--STUL1N TOV--STUL2N TOV--STUL3N

& & & 1 &

t

TOV--TRIP TOV--TRPE TOV--STPE TOV--STL1 TOV--STL2 TOV--STL3

en01000088.vsd

Figure 137: Logic diagram, time delayed overvoltage protection, phase wise The TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRPE output signals changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if at least one of the logical signals TOV--STUL1N, TOV--STUL2N, TOV--STUL3N remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer than the set value on the corresponding timer. The signal TOV--TRPE will be high, to indicate that the overvoltage protection caused the trip Any signal connected to the TOV--BLOCK input blocks the operation of the time delayed overvoltage protection. Similarly any signal connected to TOV--BLKTR will block the trip output from the time delayed overvoltage protection.

240

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

TOV--STN TOV--ST3UO & & t TOV--TRN

TOV--BLKTR TEST TOV--TEST & Block TOV=Yes TOV--BLOCK 1

TOV--TRIP

en01000089.vsd

Figure 138: Logic diagram, time delayed overvoltage protection, residual The TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRN output signal changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if TOV--ST3U0 remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer than the set value on the corresponding timer. The signal TOV--TRN will be high, to indicate that the residual overvoltage protection caused the trip. Any signal connected to the TOV--BLOCK input blocks the operation of the time delayed residual overvoltage protection. Similarly any signal connected to TOV--BLKTR will block the trip output from the time delayed residual overvoltage protection.

2.4
2.4.1

Calculations
Setting The time delayed overvoltage protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. All the voltage conditions in the system where the overvoltage protection performs its functions must be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage-time characteristic. The overvoltage protection should be set higher than the expected maximum system operate voltage that is in a particular part of a network. A safety margin of at least 10% should also be considered due to the inaccuracies in the instrument transformers, calculation methods, and the inaccuracy of the measuring elements in the terminal. The residual overvoltage protection should be set higher than the expected maximum system operate voltage that is in a particular part of a network. A safety margin of at least 10% should also be considered due to the inaccuracies in the instrument transformers, calculation methods, and the inaccuracy of the measuring elements in the terminal.

241

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

Chapter 6 Voltage

242

About this chapter

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

About this chapter This chapter describes the power system supervision functions.

243

Broken conductor check (BRC)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

1
1.1

Broken conductor check (BRC)

Application
Conventional protections can not detect the broken conductor condition. In REx 5xx terminals this detection is achieved through the broken conductor check function (BRC), consisting of continuous current unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected. The detection might also concern possible interruptions in the connecting circuits between the instrument current transformers and the terminal.

1.2

Functionality
The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents. The current unsymmetry signal STI is set to 1 if : Any phase current is lower than 80% of the highest current in the remaining two phases The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>

If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time t, a three phase trip signal BRC--TRIP is issued.

1.3

Design
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 139. The function is disabled (blocked) if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockBRC=Yes) The input signal BRC--BLOCK is high

The BRC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the broken conductor check function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The output trip signal BRC--TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit breaker or for a signallization.

244

Broken conductor check (BRC)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

BRC - BROKEN CONDUCTOR CHECK FUNCTION TEST TEST-ACTIVE & BlockBRC = Yes

BRC--BLOCK

>1

Function Enable &

t t

BRC--TRIP

Unsymmetrical Current Detection STI

99000494.vsd

Figure 139: Simplified logic diagram of broken conductor check function

1.4
1.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The operating values for the broken conductor check function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The minimum operating current is usually set to about 15% of the rated protected line current. The time delay must comply with the selectivity planning of the protection in the whole network if the function is used for tripping the circuit breaker. The time delay might be longer if the function is intended for alarming purposes. For the parameter list and their setting ranges, please see Setting parameters in the Technical reference manual.

1.4.2

Setting of the minimum operating current IP> If the rated current of the protected line is IL, then the primary set value IsPRIMwill be:
(Equation 211)

The secondary setting value IsSEC is:

(Equation 212)

245

Broken conductor check (BRC)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

Where: ISEC IPRIM is the secondary rated current of the main CT and is the primary rated current of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP> is given from this formula:

Is SE C - 100 IP> = -------------I1b

(Equation 213)

and this is the value that has to be set in the terminal. Set this value under the setting menu: Settings Functions Group n BrokenConduct on the value IP>.

Note!
Usually IPRIM is chosen to be 1.4 times the rated line current (IPRIM = 1.4 . IL) and is set to the relay rated current, equal to the secondary rated current of the main CT (I1b = ISEC). So it is obtained:

I SE C ------------ Is PRIM IP RIM ------------------------------------ 100 IP> = I 1b

(Equation 214)

I SE C --------- ------ 0, 15 IL 1.4 I L - 100 = 10.7 % IP> = ------------------------------------------I SEC

(Equation 215)

246

Broken conductor check (BRC)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

This is why the default setting for IP> is 10%. 1.4.3 Setting of time delay t Set the time delay of the function, t, under the setting menu: Settings Functions Group n BrokenConduct on the value t.

247

Loss of voltage check (LOV)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

2
2.1

Loss of voltage check (LOV)

Application
The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after a major blackout. The loss of voltage check function gives a trip signal only if the voltage in all the three phases is low for more then 7 seconds. If the trip to the circuit breaker is not required, then the function can be used for signallization through an output contact or through the event recording function.

2.2

Functionality
The voltage-measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages, and compare them with the set values. Fourier recursive filter filters the voltage signals. The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if the related phase measured voltage decrease under the pre-set value: STUL1N for UL1N voltage STUL2N for UL2N voltage STUL3N for UL3N voltage

The 150 ms output trip pulse is issued if all the three phase voltages are below the setting value for more than 7s. The function can be blocked from the fuse failure supervision function intervention and when the main circuit breaker is open.

2.3

Design
The simplified logic diagram of the loss of voltage check function is shown in figure 140. The function is disabled (blocked) if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockLOV=Yes) The input signal LOV--BLOCK is high

The LOV--BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the loss of voltage check function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through an OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The function has a particular internal latched enable logic that: enables the function (signal latched enable in figure 140 is set to 1) when the line is restored; i.e. at least one of the three voltages is high for more then 3 seconds (signal set enable in figure 140). disables the function (signal latched enable in figure is set to 0) if the signal reset enable in figure 140 is set to 1 (reset of latced enable signal).

248

Loss of voltage check (LOV)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

The latched enable signal is reset (i.e. the function is blocked) if: the main circuit breaker is opened. This is achieved by connecting a N.C. contact of the main circuit breaker to a terminal binary input connected to the function input LOV--BC the fuse failure supervision function has tripped. This is achieved by connecting the output signal of the fuse failure supervision, FUSE-VTSU, to the function input LOV--VTSU not all the three phase voltages are low for more then 10 s (only one or two phase voltages are low).

The output trip signal of the voltage check function is LOV--TRIP.

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST TEST-ACTIVE

&
BlockLOV = Yes

LOV-BLOCK

>1
Function Enable

STUL1N

& &
Latched Enable

7s t

150 ms

LOV--TRIP

STUL2N

STUL3N

only 1 or 2 phases are low for at least 10 s (not three)

&

>1
LOV-CBOPE N LOV-VTSU

10 s t

>1

Reset Enable

&

>1

3s t

Set Enable

>1
Line restored for at least 3 s

99000488.vsd

Figure 140: Simplified logic diagram of loss of voltage check protection function

249

Loss of voltage check (LOV)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

2.4
2.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the loss of voltage check function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The low voltage primary setting should be lower than the minimum system operating voltage. A reasonable setting will probably be 20-50% of system nominal voltage. For a primary set value UsPRIM the secondary setting value UsSEC is:
US EC - Us PRIM Us SE C = ---------------U PRIM
(Equation 216)

Where: USEC UPRIM is the secondary rated voltage of the main VT and is the primary rated voltage of the main VT

The relay setting value UPE< is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b, associated to the voltage transformer input. The value for UPE< is given from this formula:

UsS EC - 100 UPE< = ----------------U1b

(Equation 217)

and this is the value that has to be set in the terminal.

250

Overload supervision (OVLD)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

3
3.1

Overload supervision (OVLD)

Application
The overload supervision function sends an alarm signal when the current exceeds the set level for longer than a pre-set time. The operating level of the current measuring element can be set to the maximum, accepted, continuous current. So operators are alerted if the primary system operates in a dangerous overload mode. A typical application is the signalling of the overload of the current transformers connected to the terminal, as they usually can withstand a small current beyond their rated current.

3.2

Functionality
The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three phase currents, and compare them with the set values. Fourier's recursive filter filters the current signals. The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if the measured current in any phase exceeds the pre-set value: STIL1 STIL2 STIL3

If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value IP> for a period longer than the delay time t, then the trip signal OVLD-TRIP is emitted.

3.3

Design
The simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overload function is shown in figure 141. The function is disabled (blocked) if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockOVLD=Yes) The input signal OVLD-BLOCK is high

The OVLD-BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overload supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through an OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The output trip signal OVLD-TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit breaker or for a signallization.

251

Overload supervision (OVLD)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

OVLD - OVERLOAD SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST TEST-ACTIVE

&
BlockOVLD = Yes

OVLD-BLOCK

>1

Function Enable

STIL1 STIL2 STIL3

>1

&

OVLD-TRIP

99000491.vsd

Figure 141: Simplified logic diagram of overload supervision function

3.4
3.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the overload supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The current level set should be above the maximum permissible load current. Consider the accuracy class of the used instrument current transformers and the specified accuracy of the current measuring elements in the REx 5xx terminals. The corresponding time delay must comply with the selectivity planning of the protection in the whole network, and with the permissible overloading of the conductors, if the function is used for tripping the circuit breaker. The above settings might change to a lower current value and longer time delay if the function serves only for alarming and not for tripping purposes.

3.4.2

Setting of operating current IP> The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b , associated to the current transformer. If IsSEC is the secondary current operating value of the function, then the relay setting value IP> is given from this formula:

252

Overload supervision (OVLD)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

Is SE C - 100 IP> = -------------I1b

(Equation 218)

and this is the value that has to be set in the terminal.

253

Dead line detection (DLD)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

4
4.1

Dead line detection (DLD)

Application
The dead-line detection function (DLD) detects the disconnected phase(s) of a protected object. The output information serves as an input condition for some other measuring functions within the REx 5xx terminals. Typical examples of such functions are: Fuse failure supervision function (FUSE) Switch-onto-fault function (SOTF)

For this reason, always configure the DLD--START output signal to the corresponding inputs of the above functions.

4.2

Design
Figure 142 presents a simplified logic diagram of the function. Phase L1, L2 and L3 currents and voltages are measured by one of the built-in digital signal processors. Logical signals STMILn become logical one, if the measured current in the corresponding phase (n = 1..3) decreases under the set operating level. Logical signals STULnN become logical one, if the measured voltage in the corresponding phase (n = 1..3) decreases under the set operating level.

254

Dead line detection (DLD)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

DLD--BLOCK

STMIL1

&

DLD--STIL1

STMIL2

&

DLD--STIL2

STMIL3

&

DLD--STIL3

STUL1N

&

DLD--STUL1

STUL2N

&

DLD--STUL2

STUL3N

&

DLD--STUL3

& &

>1

&

DLD--STPH

& &

&

DLD--START

en00000493.vsd

Figure 142: DLD - simplified logic diagram of the dead line detection function Corresponding phase starting output signals DLD--STILn and DLD--STULn become in this case logical one, if the function is not blocked by the logical one on DLD--BLOCK functional input. Simultaneous operation of current and voltage measuring elements in one phase is a necessary condition for the determination of a dead-phase condition. This condition is presented by the activation of a DLD--STPH output signal. A complete line is determined as a dead-line, when the voltages and the currents in all three phases decrease under the set operate values. A DLD--START output informs about this operating condition.

4.3
4.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the dead line detection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

255

Dead line detection (DLD)

Chapter 7 Power system supervision

Set the minimum operate voltage UP< (phase value) with a sufficient margin (at least 15%) under the minimum expected system operate voltage. Set the minimum operate current with sufficient margin (15 - 20%) under the minimum expected load current. In many cases the minimum load current of a line is close to 0 or even 0. In such cases a setting must be chosen so that signals DLD-STILn are given during normal operation. The operate value must however acceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases).

256

About this chapter

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

About this chapter This chapter describes the secondary system supervision functions.

257

Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

1
1.1

Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU)

Application
The correct operation of a protection depends on correct information about the primary value of currents and voltages. When currents from two independent 3-phase sets of CTs, or CT cores, measuring the same primary currents are available, a reliable current circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned are to be blocked and an alarm given. In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient period must be avoided. The supervision function must be sensitive and have short operate time to prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of errors in the current circuits. Note that the same current input transformer (I5) in REx 5xx is used for the reference current Iref of the CT supervision, the residual current from the parallel line for the fault locator and, dependent on setting I4 or I5, maybe for the earth-fault protection function. Hence, when the CT supervision function is used, the other functions mentioned can not be used. Also the settings Xm0 = 0 and Rm0 = 0 must be used for the fault locator.

1.2

Functionality
The supervision function compares the numerical value of the sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| (current inputs I1, I2 and I3) and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| (current input I5) from another current transformer set, see figure 143. The CTSU-FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled: The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp (5 - 100% of I1b). No phase current has exceeded 1.5 times rated relay current I1b during the last 10 ms The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The CTSU-FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the CTSU-FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a CTSU-ALARM will be issued. In this case the CTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

258

Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

CTSU-BLOCK
I>

I L1 I L2 I L3 Iref

+
x 0,8

+ +
1,5 x Ir

& >1
10 ms

>1
20 ms 100 ms

CTSU-FAIL

150 ms

1s

CTSU-ALARM

OPERATION
99000067.vsd

Figure 143: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 144.

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Slope = 0.8 I MinOp

Operation area

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

Figure 144: Operate characteristics Note that due to the formulas for the axis compared, |Iphase| - |Iref| and |Iphase| + |Iref| respectively, the slope can not be above 1.

259

Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

1.3
1.3.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the current circuit supervision function (CTSU) are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The function is activated by setting Operation = On. The minimum operate current (IMinOp) should as a minimum be set to twice the residual current in the supervised CT circuits under normal service conditions and rated primary current. The setting range is 5 100% of I1b The CTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM outputs are connected to the blocking input of the actual protection function and output alarm relay respectively via the internal logic programming of the REx 5xx relay.

260

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

2
2.1

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Application
Different protection functions within the REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals operate on the basis of the measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are: distance protection function, undervoltage measuring function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic. These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the terminal. It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, located as close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one of them. Separate fuse-failure monitoring relays or elements within the protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are combined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function (FUSE) of REx 5xx terminals. The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the REx 5xx terminals can operate on the basis of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not affect the impedance measuring functions. The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2, is recommended for terminals used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0, is recommended for terminals used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the FUSE function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.

2.2
2.2.1

Functionality
Negative sequence The current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate: The negative-sequence current 3I2 The negative-sequence voltage 3U2

comparing them with their respective set values 3I2< and 3U2> . Fouriers recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements. The signal STNEG is set to 1, if the negative sequence measured voltage exceeds its set value 3U2> and if the negative sequence measured current does not exceed its pre-set value 3I2<.

261

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION 20 ms STORE3PH From non volatile memory & FUSE-VTF3PH 0: All voltages are high (Reset Latch) 1 1 1:All voltages are low & 1 Store in non volatile memory (FUSE-STORE3PH)

STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N 1:Fuse Failure Detection STNEG & 1:Function Enable FUSE-DLCND FUSE-MCB FUSE-DISC FUSE-BLOCK TEST TEST-ACTIVE & BlockFUSE= Yes & &

1:Fuse failure for more than 5 s

&

1 (Set Latch)

5s t FUSE-VTSU

1 150 ms t

Dead-Line Block 200 ms t

&

FUSE-VTSZ

99000497.vsd

Figure 145: Simplified logic diagram for the fuse failure supervision function, negative sequence based. 2.2.2 Zero sequence The current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate:

262

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

The zero-sequence current 3I0 The zero-sequence voltage 3U0

comparing them with their respective set values 3I0< and 3U0>. Fouriers recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements. The signal STZERO is set to 1, if the zero sequence measured voltage exceeds its set value 3U0> and if the zero sequence measured current does not exceed its pre-set value 3I0<.

263

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION 20 ms STORE3PH From non volatile memory & FUSE-VTF3PH 0: All voltages are high (Reset Latch) 1 1 1:All voltages are low & 1 Store in non volatile (FUSE-STORE3PH)

STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N 1:Fuse Failure Detection STZERO &

1:Fuse failure for more than 5 s

&

5s t FUSE-VTSU

(Set Latch) 150 ms t Dead-Line Block 200 ms t

1:Function Enable FUSE-DLCND FUSE-MCB FUSE-DISC FUSE-BLOCK TEST TEST-ACTIVE & BlockFUSE= Yes 1 & &

&

FUSE-VTSZ

99000500.vsd

Figure 146: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervisione function, zero sequence based

264

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

2.2.3

du/dt, di/dt The current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously measure the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate: The change of current I/t The change of voltage U/t

comparing them with their respective set values I< and U>. The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input CBCLOSED through a binary input of the terminal. The signal STDUDI is set to 1, if the measured voltage change exceeds its set value DU> and if the measured current change does not exceed its pre-set value DI<. If the voltage is low in any phase (STUL1N, STUL2N or STUL3N=1), the STDUDI signal is sealed in.

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

20 ms STORE3PH From non volatile memory 1:All voltages are low Store in non volatile (FUSE-STORE3PH)

& &

>1

FUSE-VTF3PH

>1
STUL1N STUL2N STDUDIL1 IL1> STDUDIL2 IL2> STDUDIL3 IL3> 0: All voltages are high (Reset Latch)

>1

1:Fuse failure for more than 5 s

& & & 1 &

STUL3N 1:Fuse Failure Detection STDUDI

&

>1
(Set Latch)

5s t FUSE-VTSU

& &

>1
150 ms t

1:Function Enable Dead-Line Block

FUSE-CBCLOSED FUSE-DLCND FUSE-MCB 200 ms t

&

>1

FUSE-VTSZ

& &

FUSE-DISC FUSE-BLOCK TEST TEST-ACTIVE

>1

&
BlockFUSE= Yes

en01000097.vsd

Figure 147: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, du/dt based. 2.2.4 Logic Signals STUL1N, STUL2N and STUL3N are related to phase to earth voltages and become 1 when the respective phase voltage is lower than the set value. The set value (U<) is chosen in the dead line detection function, that is always present in the terminal when the fuse failure supervision is present.

265

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

The fuse failure supervision function is disabled (blocked) if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes) The input signal FUSE-BLOCK is high

The FUSE-BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. Function input signal FUSE-MCB is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. Function input signal FUSE-DISC is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The function output FUSE-VTSU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchrocheck etc.) except for the impedance protection. Function output FUSE-VTSZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function. The FUSE-MCB signal sets the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of FUSE-MCB signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The FUSE-DISC signal sets the output signal FUSE-VTSU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector. The function input signal FUSE-DLCND is related to the dead line condition detection. It has to be connected to the output signal of the dead line condition function DLD-STPH (dead phase condition detected). This signal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase are below their respective setting values. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance protection for unequal pole closing. If a fuse failure condition is detected, the signal FUSE-VTSU is turned high, and if there is no dead line condition also FUSE-VTSZ is high. If the fuse failure condition remains for more then five seconds and at least one of the phases has a low phase to earth voltage, then the fuse failure condition is latched. The output signal FUSE-VTF3PH is high if the fuse failure condition is detected for 5 seconds and all the three measured voltages are low (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 1). Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 0).

266

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory of the terminal. In the new start-up procedure the terminal checks the VTF3PH (STORE3PH) value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corresponding starting conditions.

2.3

Calculations
The operating value for the voltage check functionare set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

2.3.1

Negative sequence function The negative sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operating conditions. Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multi circuit lines and so on.

2.3.2

Setting of negative sequence voltage 3U2> The relay setting value 3U2> is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b, associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If UsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3U2> is given from equation 219.

USSEC ------ 100 3U2> = ----------U 1b

(Equation 219)

The parameters for the fuse failure supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. 2.3.3 Setting of negative sequence current 3I2< The relay setting value 3I2< is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. If IsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3I2< is given from equation 220.

IS SEC - 100 3I2< = -------------I1b

(Equation 220)

267

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

2.3.4

Zero sequence function The zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operating conditions. Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multi circuit lines and so on.

2.3.5

Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0> The relay setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b, associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If UsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3U0> is given from equation 221.

Us SE C - 100 3U0> = ----------------U1b

(Equation 221)

The parameters for the fuse failure supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. 2.3.6 Setting of zero sequence current 3I0< The relay setting value 3I0< is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. If IsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3I0< is given from equation 222.

Is SE C 3I0< = -------------- 100 I1b

(Equation 222)

2.3.7

Setting of voltage change DU> The relay setting value DU> is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b, associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If UsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay, the value for DU> is given from equation 223.

US SEC - 100 DU> = ----------------U1b

(Equation 223)

The parameters for the fuse failure supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

268

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

2.3.8

Setting of current change DI< The relay setting value DI< is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, associated to the current transformer input I1. If IsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay, the value for DI< is given from equation 224.

ISSEC - 100 DI< = -------------I1b

(Equation 224)

269

Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

3
3.1

Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Application
If a capacitor element in a capacitive voltage transformer breaks down, that is the element is short circuited or interrupted an unbalance appears. This unbalance occurs as a false residual voltage on the capacitive voltage transformer terminals. If the capacitor element is interrupted the corresponding phase voltage will be undefined, and if the capacitor element is short circuited the corresponding phase voltage is increased. This false voltage change might affect different functions, such as distance protection, under voltage, overvoltage and voltage check for weak infeed logic. After a settable time delay, the voltage transformer supervision function activates the TCT_START signal, if the residual voltage exceeds the set value. This signal can be used as an alarm to the operator that the capacitive voltage transformer is not in a good condition and/or as a blocking signal for certain relays that rely on any phase voltage or the residual voltage. To ensure that the function is not activated while the protected object is out of operation, it is required that at least one of the phase to phase voltages exceeds 80% of nominal voltage. Fuse failure supervision is a related function, but is activated only when a secondary voltage totally disappears, i.e. goes to approximately zero. The TCT function can act on smaller residual voltages.

3.2
3.2.1

Functionality
Abbreviations and definitions
Table 15:
TCT UL1 UPP STUPP UR STUR

Abbreviations and definitions

Voltage transformer supervision Phase L1 Phase-to-phase voltage Start phase-to-phase voltage Residual voltage Start residual voltage

3.2.2

Description of operation Algorithm The algorithm of the Voltage transformer supervision function is rather straightforward. The phase voltages pass a fourier filter. The magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage, UPP is measured. An indicator signal STUPP will be issued when the magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage passes the set value of nominal phase-to-phase voltage. See figure 148. Residual voltage pass a frequency adjusted fourier filter. The magnitude of residual voltage, UR is measured. An indicator signal STUR will be issued when the magnitude of residual voltage passes the set value of residual voltage.

270

Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

TCT_UL1 TCT_UL2

+ -

Fourier filter

UPP Hysteresis1

STUPP1

TCT_UR Fourier filter

UR Hysteresis2

STUR

en01000002.vsd

Figure 148: Phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltage measurement Logic Following modules for the TCT are described: Start logic Block and VTSU logic

The logic consists of two different functions, one for detection of lower limit phase-to-phase voltage and one for detection of over limit residual voltage.

STUPP1 STUPP2 STUPP3 &

>1 tDelay t

&

START

STUR BLOCK VTSU

>1

en01000001.vsd

Figure 149: TCT logic

271

Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

Start logic The START signal shall be issued when all the conditions below are fulfilled: Residual voltage 3U0 passing the set value for residual voltage limit UN>. At least one of the phase-to-phase voltage is higher than 80% of the rated voltage phase-to-phase, see figure 149. Time delay tDelay has elapsed.

The START signal shall be reset when at least one of the conditions below is fulfilled: Residual voltage is lower than the set value for residual voltage limit UN>. All of the phase-to-phase voltages are lower than 40% of the rated voltage phase to phase.

Block logic All binary outputs shall be reset when the input BLOCK or VTSU is set. Note that the BLOCK or VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executing. Disabling the input BLOCK or VTSU can trip the TCT instantaneously.

3.3

Calculations
There are only two parameters to set for the TCT function: the residual overvoltage limit, and the time delay. The capacitive voltage transformer is schematically shown in figure 150, the voltage increase in a phase voltage, after the insulation break-down in one capacitor element, is shown i figure 151 and can be calculated as:

1 1 1 1 - V ------------ V = -------------------- V = --V V a = V a V a = -------------------------(n 1 ) + 1 A n + 1 A n(n + 1 ) A n a

(Equation 225)

272

Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

VA

VB

VC

Va

Vb

Vc
en01000030.vsd

Figure 150: Capacitive voltage transformer The corresponding vector diagram is shown in figure 151, where also the residual voltage is shown. The residual voltage will be equal to the voltage increase in the phase with the broken capacitor element.

V'A VA

Vresidual

VC

VB

Figure 151: The residual voltage will be equal to the voltage increase in the phase with the broken capacitor element. With a security margin of about 15% the suitable setting for the residual overvoltage limit should be:

273

Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision

UN> = 0.85 1 n
(Equation 226)

Where: (n+1) is the total number of capacitor elements in one phase of the capacitive voltage transformer, having one element feeding the magnetic voltage transformer.

The time delay is set in such a way that high speed protective functions, not sensitive to the residual voltage caused by the insulation break-down of one capacitor element, are not affected. Sensitive delayed protective functions, that are sensitive to this change in residual voltage could be blocked by this voltage transformer supervision function.

274

About this chapter

Chapter 9 Control

Chapter 9 Control
About this chapter This chapter describes the control functions.

275

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1
1.1
1.1.1

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Application
Synchrocheck, general The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in an interconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal at satisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is a parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the two sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phase angle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the parallel circuit or circuits. The synchro-check function measures the difference between the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of the circuit breaker when the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the base voltage U1b. The differences in the voltage and phase angles are smaller than the set values of UDiff and PhaseDiff. The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff. The bus frequency must also be within a range of +/-5 Hz from the rated frequency.

Note!
Phase-phase voltage (110 V or 220 V) can not be connected directly to an individual input voltage transformer. The individual transformer is designed for phase-neutral voltage (Ur = 63.5 V or Ur = 127 V). The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breaker is closed at manual closing and/or together with the auto-recloser function.

276

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

U-Line

U-Bus SYN 1
UHigh>70-100% Ur UDiff<5-60% Ur PhaseDiff<5-75 FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail U-Line Fuse fail Line reference voltage

99000069.vsd

Figure 152: Synchrocheck. 1.1.2 Synchrocheck, single circuit breaker The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number of synchrocheck functions that are included in the terminal. In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase is selected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase voltage L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 153 shows the voltage connection. In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phase circuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phase measurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to the same phase or phases. The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

277

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

U SYN1 AUTOOK SYN1 MANOK f

HMI Setting L1,L2,L3 L12,L23 L31 AD

U1 U2 U3 U5

UL1 UL2 UL3 UN U UN U-Bus U-Line

99000070.vsd

Figure 153: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay. 1.1.3 Energizing check, general The energizing check is made when a disconnected line is to be connected to an energized section of a network, see figure 154. The check can also be set to allow energization of the busbar or in both directions.

U-Bus

U-Line

UHigh>70-100%Ub ULow<10-80%Ub
99000071.vsd

Figure 154: Principle for energizing check. An energizing can occur, depending on: the set direction of the energizing function the set limit for energized (live - UHigh) condition the set limit for non-energized (dead - Ulow) condition

278

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

The equipment is considered energized if the voltage is above the set value UHigh (e.g. 80% of the base voltage), and non-energized if it is below the set value, ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage). The user can set the UHigh condition between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80% U1b. A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance, induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 30% or more of the rated voltage of the line. The energizing operation can be set to operate in either direction over the circuit breaker, or it can be permitted to operate in both directions. Use the AutoEnerg and ManEnerg HMI setting to select the energizing operation in: Both directions (Both) Dead line live bus (DLLB) Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse can be issued to the circuit breaker if one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the other is Low, that is, when only one side is energized. The user can set AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to enable different conditions during automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker. In the manual mode it is also possible to allow closing when both sides of the breaker are dead. This is done by setting the parameter ManDBDL = On and ManEnerg to DLLB, DBLL or Both. 1.1.4 Voltage selection, single circuit breaker The voltage selection function is used for the synchrocheck and energizing check functions. When the terminal is used in a double bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on the status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of the disconnectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal can select the right voltage for the synchrocheck and energizing check functions. Select the type of voltage selection from the synchrocheck, Uselection, SingleBus or DoubleBus on the HMI. When using voltage selection, some extra binary inputs are required. The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be different for different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the terminal.

279

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.1.5

Voltage connection for a single bus and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK SYN1 U-Bus U-Line

VOLT SELECTION

I/O BI

AI U-Bus 1 U-Line 1 FUSEUB1 FUSEF1

U5 ULx SYN1-UB1OK/FF SYN1-VTSU FUSEUB1 FUSEF1

U5 ULx

F1

en01000106.vsd

Figure 155: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement. Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 155 shows the principle for the connection arrangement. One terminal unit is used for one bay. For the synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function, there is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are straight forward, no special voltage selection is needed. For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-Bus 1) is connected to the single phase analogue input (U5) on the terminal unit. The line voltage (U-line 1) is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx). Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, single bus and single bay The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to inputs of the synchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input is related to the line voltage. The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

280

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.1.6

Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK SYN1 U-Bus U-Line

VOLT SELECTION U5 U4 ULx SYN1-CB1OPEN/CLD SYN1-CB2OPEN/CLD SYN1-UB1OK/FF SYN1-UB2OK/FF SYN1-VTSU

I/O BI

AI U-Bus 1 U-Bus 2 1CB1 1CB2 FUSEUB1 FUSEUB2 FUSEF1 ULx U-Line 1

U5 U4 1CB1 1CB2 FUSEUB1 FUSEUB2 FUSEF1

en01000105.vsd

Figure 156: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement. Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 156 shows the principle for the connection arrangement. One terminal is used for one bay. For the synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function, the voltages on the two busbars are selected by the voltage selection in the terminal unit. The bus voltage from Bus 1 is fed to the U5 analog single-phase input, and the bus voltage from Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analog single-phase input. The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line 1. The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of the disconnectors' auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltage selection logic inputs, SYN1-CB1OPEN (Disconnector section 1 open), SYN1-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and SYN1-CB2OPEN (Disconnector section 2 open), SYN1-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2 closed). Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double bus and single bay The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1-UB1(2)OK and SYN1-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to each busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input is related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse failure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energizing check unit. The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF, SYN1-UB2OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

281

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.1.7

Synchrocheck, double circuit breaker The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number of synchrocheck functions that are included in the terminal. In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase is selected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 157 shows the voltage connection. In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phase circuits. The voltage can be selected for phase-neutral or phase-to-phase measurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to the same phase or phases. The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

SYN1 U SYN1 AUTOOK SYN1 MANOK SYN2 U SYN2 AUTOOK SYN2 MANOK f f

HMI Setting L1,L2,L3 L12,L23 L31

UL1 U1 U2 U3 UL2 UL3 UN U U-Bus 1 U-Line

HMI Setting L1,L2,L3 L12,L23 L31

U5 AD U4

UN U UN

U-Bus 2

99000079.vsd

Figure 157: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay.

282

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.1.8

Voltage connection, double circuitbreaker and single bay

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK SYN1 U-Bus U-Line

VOLT SELECTION

I/O BI

AI U5 U-Bus 1 U4 U-Bus 2 FUSEUB1 FUSEUB2

U5 ULx SYN1-UB1OK/FF SYN1-VTSU FUSEUB1 FUSEF1

SYN2 U-Bus U-Line U4 ULx SYN2-UB1OK/FF SYN2-VTSU FUSEUB2 FUSEF1 ULx U-Line 1 FUSEF1 F1

en01000116.vsd

Figure 158: Voltage connection in a double breaker arrangement. The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in figure 158. One terminal is used for the two circuit breakers in one bay. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward, without any special voltage selection. For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-bus 1) is connected to the single-phase analog input (U5) on the terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (U-bus 2) is connected to the single-phase analog input (U4). The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx). The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal, and the voltage is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line 1). This means that the two synchrocheck units are operating without any special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line 1) voltage. The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be different for different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the terminal.

283

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double circuit breaker and single bay The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1(2)-UB1OK and SYN1(2)-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1(2)-VTSU input is related to the line voltage from each line. The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line check) is blocked via the inputs (SYN1(2)-UB1OK/FF or SYN1(2)-VTSU). 1.1.9 Phasing, general The phasing function is used to close a circuit breaker when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components. The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than this threshold value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchro-check function is used. The phasing function measures the difference between the U-line and the U-bus. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the base voltage U1b. The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiff. The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffSynch and larger than the set value of FreqDiff. If the frequency is less than FreqDiff the synchro-check is used. The bus and line frequencies must also be within a range of 5 Hz from the rated frequency. The frequency rate of change is less than 0.21 Hz/s for both U-bus and U-line. The closing angle is less than approx. 60 degrees.

The phasing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well as the circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continuously by the following formula:

(Equation 227)

Closing angle is the change in angle during breaker closing operate time.

284

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

U-Line

U-Bus SYN 1
UHigh>70-100% Ur UDiff<5-60% Ur FreqDiffSynch<50-500mHz |dFbus/dt|,|dFline/dt|<0.21Hz/s Fbus,Fline=Fr PhaseDiff<60

Fuse fail U-Line Fuse fail Line reference voltage

99000084.vsd

Figure 159: Phasing. 1.1.10 Phasing, single circuit breaker The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 160 shows the voltage connection.

U SYN1 AUTOOK SYN1 MANOK f SYN1 CLOSECB

HMI Setting L1,L2,L3 L12,L23 L31 AD

U1 U2 U3

UL1 UL2 UL3 UN U-Line

U5

U UN

U-Bus

99000085.vsd

dF/dt

Figure 160: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay. 1.1.11 Voltage selection, single circuit breaker The voltage selection function is used for the phasing and synchronism (SYN1) and energizing check functions. When the terminal is used in a double bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on the positions of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the position of the

285

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

disconnectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal can select the right voltage for the synchronism and energizing function. Select the type of voltage selection from the Synchro-check, Uselection, SingleBus or DbleBus on the HMI. The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be different for different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the terminal. 1.1.12 Voltage selection for a single bus and single bay
Bus 1 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK SYN1 U-Bus U-Line

VOLT SELECTION

I/O BI

AI U-Bus 1 U-Line 1 FUSEUB1 FUSEF1

U5 ULx SYN1-UB1OK/FF SYN1-VTSU FUSEUB1 FUSEF1

U5 ULx

F1

en01000106.vsd

Figure 161: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement. Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 161 shows the principle for the connection arrangement. For the phasing, synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function, there is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are straight forward, no special voltage selection is needed. For the phasing, synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-Bus 1) is connected to the single phase analog input (U5) on the terminal. The line voltage (U-line 1) is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx). Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, single bus and single bay The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input is related to the line voltage. The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

286

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line check) is blocked via the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU). 1.1.13 Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay
Bus 1 Bus 2 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK SYN1 U-Bus U-Line

VOLT SELECTION U5 U4 ULx SYN1-CB1OPEN/CLD SYN1-CB2OPEN/CLD SYN1-UB1OK/FF SYN1-UB2OK/FF SYN1-VTSU

I/O BI

AI U-Bus 1 U-Bus 2 1CB1 1CB2 FUSEUB1 FUSEUB2 FUSEF1 ULx U-Line 1

U5 U4 1CB1 1CB2 FUSEUB1 FUSEUB2 FUSEF1

en01000105.vsd

Figure 162: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement. Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 162 shows the principle for the connection arrangement. For the phasing and synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function, the voltages on the two busbars are selected by the voltage selection in the terminal unit. The bus voltage from Bus 1 is fed to the U5 analog single-phase input, and the bus voltage from Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analog single-phase input. The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line 1. The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of the disconnectors' auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltage selection logic inputs, SYN1-CB1OPEN (Disconnector section 1 open), SYN1-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and SYN1-CB2OPEN (Disconnector section 2 open), SYN1-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2 closed). Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double bus and single bay The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1-UB1(2)OK and SYN1-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to each busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input is related to each line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse failure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energizing check unit.

287

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line check) is blocked via the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF, SYN1-UB2OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU). 1.1.14 Phasing, double circuit breaker The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 163 shows the voltage connection.

SYN1 U SYN1 AUTOOK SYN1 MANOK SYN1 CLOSECB f

HMI Setting L1,L2,L3 L12,L23 L31

U1 U2 U3

UL1 UL2 UL3 UN U U-Line

U5 AD HMI Setting L1,L2,L3 L12,L23 L31 U4

UN U UN

U-Bus 1

dF/dt SYN2 U

U-Bus 2

99000092.vsd

SYN2 AUTOOK SYN2 MANOK SYN2 CLOSECB

dF/dt

Figure 163: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

288

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.1.15

Voltage connection, double circuit breaker and single bay

Bus 1 Bus 2 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK SYN1 U-Bus U-Line

VOLT SELECTION

I/O BI

AI U5 U-Bus 1 U4 U-Bus 2 FUSEUB1 FUSEUB2

U5 ULX SYN1_UB1OK/FF SYN1_VTSU FUSEUB1 FUSEF1

SYN2 U-Bus U-Line U4 ULX SYN2_UB1OK/FF SYN2_VTSU FUSEUB2 FUSEF1 ULX U-Line 1 FUSEF1 F1

99000093.vsd

Figure 164: Voltage connection in a double breaker arrangement. The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in figure 164. One terminal unit is used for the two circuit breakers in one bay. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straight forward, without any special voltage selection. For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-bus 1) is connected to the single-phase analog input (U5) on the terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (U-bus 2) is connected to the single-phase analog input (U4). The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx). The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal unit, and the voltage is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line 1). This means that the two synchrocheck units are operating without any special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line 1) voltage. The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be different for different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the terminal. Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double circuit breaker and single bay The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

289

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

The SYN1(2)-UB1OK and SYN1(2)-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1(2)-VTSU input is related to the line voltage from each line. The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line- check) is blocked via the input (SYN1(2)-UB1OK/FF or SYN1(2)-VTSU).

1.2
1.2.1

Functionality
Single circuit breaker
Connectable inputs

SYNx

x=1, 2 or 3

General Block From fuse failure detection, line side (external or internal) From fuse failure detection bus side

SYNx-BLOCK SYNx-VTSU SYNx-UB1/2FF SYNx-UB1/2OK FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz PhaseDiff< 5-75 deg UDiff <5-60 % UHigh>70-100 % ULow < 10-80 % SYNx-AUTO SYNx-MANOK SYNx-UDIFF SYNx-FRDIFF SYNx-PHDIFF
99000074.vsd

Connectable outputs

Figure 165: Input and output signals. 1.2.2 Synchrocheck Description of input and output signals for the synchrocheck function.

290

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Input signals

Description

SYNx-BLOCK SYNx-VTSU

General block input from any external condition, that should block the synchrocheck. The synchrocheck function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 2 (U4). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal.

SYNx-UB1FF

SYNx-UB1OK SYNx-UB2FF

SYNx-UB2OK

Output signals

Description

SYNx-AUTOOK

Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal. Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker. Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit. Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit. Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

SYNx-MANOK SYNx-UDIFF SYNx-FRDIFF SYNx-PHDIFF

291

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

SYNCHROCHECK SYN1 OPERATION OFF RELEASE ON

SYN1-BLOCK UDiff UBusHigh ULineHigh FreqDiff PhaseDiff & AUTOENERG1 MANENERG1 UDIFF FRDIFF PHDIFF & 50 ms t &

0.00-60.0s t t Sync

&

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

ENERGIZING CHECK AutoEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 UL High UL Low UB High UB Low UENERG1OK ManEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 & 1 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t MANENERG1 1 & & 1 1 & 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t AUTOENERG1

1 ManDBDL OFF ON xx06000056.vsd &

Figure 166: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check. The internal signal UENERG1OK refers to the voltage selection logic.

292

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.2.3

Voltage selection

SYN1-CB1OPEN SYN1-CB1CLD

&

SYN1-VSUB1 U5 SYN1-U-BUS SYN1-VSUB2

SYN1-CB2OPEN SYN1-CB2CLD

&

U4

SYN1-UB1OK SYN1-UB1FF

>1

&

>1 SYN1-UB2OK SYN1-UB2FF &

UENERG1OK

>1

SYN1-VTSU

99000112.vs

Figure 167: Voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement. In case of three bay arrangement the 1 in SYN1 and UENERG1OK are replaced by 2 and 3 in the logic. Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplified logic diagrams for voltage selection:
Input signal Description

SYNx-CB1OPEN

Disconnector section of Bay x open. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnector section in a double-bus, single- breaker arrangement, to inform the voltage selection about the positions. Disconnector section of Bay x closed. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnector section in a double-bus, single-breaker arrangement to inform the voltage selection about the positions. Same as above but for disconnector section 2. Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYNx-CB1CLD

SYNx-CB2OPEN SYNx-CB2CLD

293

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Input signal

Description

SYNx-UB1FF

External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 2 (U4). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal. Internal fuse failure detection or configured to a binary input indicating external fuse failure of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocks the energizing function.

SYNx-UB1OK SYNx-UB2FF

SYNx-UB2OK SYNx-VTSU

Output signals

Description

SYNx-VSUB1 SYNx-VSUB2

Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage. Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage.

294

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.2.4

Double circuit breaker

Connectable inputs

SYNx

x=1, 2, 3 or 4

General Block From fuse failure detection, line side (external or internal) From fuse failure detection bus side

SYNx-BLOCK SYNx-VTSU SYNx-UB1FF SYNx-UB1OK FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz PhaseDiff< 5-75 deg UDiff <5-60 % UHigh>70-100 % ULow < 10-80 % SYNx-AUTO SYNx-MANOK SYNx-UDIFF SYNx-FRDIFF SYNx-PHDIFF
en01000117.vsd Connectable outputs

Figure 168: Input and output signals. 1.2.5 Synchrocheck Description of input and output signals for the synchrocheck function.
Input signals Description

SYNx-BLOCK SYNx-VTSU

General block input from any external condition, that should block the synchrocheck. The synchrocheck function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.

SYNx-UB1FF

SYNx-UB1OK

295

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Output signals

Description

SYNx-AUTOOK

Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal. Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker. Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit. Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit. Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

SYNx-MANOK SYNx-UDIFF SYNx-FRDIFF SYNx-PHDIFF

296

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

SYNCHROCHECK SYN1 OPERATION OFF RELEASE ON

SYN1-BLOCK UDiff UBusHigh ULineHigh FreqDiff PhaseDiff & AUTOENERG1 MANENERG1 UDIFF FRDIFF PHDIFF & 50 ms t &

0.00-60.0s t t Sync

&

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

ENERGIZING CHECK AutoEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 UL High UL Low UB High UB Low UENERG1OK ManEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 & 1 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t MANENERG1 1 & & 1 1 & 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t AUTOENERG1

1 ManDBDL OFF ON xx06000056.vsd &

Figure 169: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check for one circuit breaker. The internal signal UENERG1OK derives from the external or internal

297

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

fuse failure inputs SYN1-UB1OK/FF and SYN1-VTSU. 1.2.6 Phasing and synchrocheck, single circuit breaker
Connectable inputs Initiate Phasing operation

SYN1 Phasing
SYN1-START

Fbus,Fline = Fr 5 Hz FreqDiffSynch < 50-500 mHz |dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s UHigh > 70-100 % UDiff < 5-60 % PhaseDiff < 60 deg SYN1-CLOSECB SYN1-INPROGR Phasing and synchrocheck
General Block

Connectable outputs

SYN1-BLOCK

SYN1-TESTCB

Synchrocheck Fbus,Fline = Fr 5 Hz FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz PhaseDiff < 5-75 deg UDiff < 5-60 % UHigh > 70-100 % ULow < 10-80 %
From fuse failure detection, lineside (external or internal)

SYN1-VTSU

SYN1-AUTOOK SYN1-MANOK SYN1-UDIFF SYN1-FRDIFF SYN1-PHDIFF

en01000120.vsd

Figure 170: Input and output signals. 1.2.7 Phasing and synchrocheck Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchrocheck function.

298

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Input signals

Description

SYN1-BLOCK SYN1-VTSU

General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and the synchrocheck. The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function The signal initiates the phasing operation. When initiated the function continues until the SYN1-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped by the SYN1-BLOCK signal. In test mode (SYN1-TESTCB) ends the phasing operation.

SYN1-START

Output signals

Description

SYN1-TESTCB

Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing sequence is performed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYN1-TESTCB indicates when the SYN1-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are fulfilled, from the synchro-check function Close breaker command from phasing. Used to the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function. The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYN1-START is received until the operation is terminated. The operation is teminated when SYN1-CLOSECB or SYN1-TESTCB has been submitted or if a SYN1-BLOCK is received. Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchro-check conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal. Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker. Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit. Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit. Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

SYN1-CLOSECB SYN1-INPROGR

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK SYN1-UDIFF SYN1-FRDIFF SYN1-PHDIFF

299

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON SYN1-START SYN1-BLOCK

1 & S R & 1

SYN1-INPROGR

UDiff UBusHigh ULineHigh FreqDiffSynch

& &
50 ms t

& 1

SYN1-CLOSECB

FreqDiffBlock FreqDiff dF/dt Bus dF/dt Line Fbus 5 Hz Fline 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 60 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle SYN1-AUTOOK

&

SYN1-TESTCB

tPulse

& &

&

&

SYN1-MANOK

en02000469.vsd

Figure 171: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing. The input signals SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK derive from the synchrocheck and energizing logic.

300

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

SYNCHROCHECK SYN1 OPERATION OFF RELEASE ON

SYN1-BLOCK UDiff UBusHigh ULineHigh FreqDiff PhaseDiff & AUTOENERG1 MANENERG1 UDIFF FRDIFF PHDIFF & 50 ms t &

0.00-60.0s t t Sync

&

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

ENERGIZING CHECK AutoEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 UL High UL Low UB High UB Low UENERG1OK ManEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 & 1 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t MANENERG1 1 & & 1 1 & 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t AUTOENERG1

1 ManDBDL OFF ON xx06000056.vsd &

Figure 172: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check. The internal signal UENERG1OK refers to the voltage selection logic.

301

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.2.8

Voltage selection

S Y N 1 -C B 1 O P E N S Y N 1 -C B 1 C L D S Y N 1 -C B 2 O P E N S Y N 1 -C B 2 C L D S Y N 1 -U B 1 O K S Y N 1 -U B 1 F F S Y N 1 -U B 2 O K S Y N 1 -U B 2 F F S Y N 1 -V T S U

&

1 U5 1 U4

S Y N 1 -V S U B 1 S Y N 1 -U -B U S S Y N 1 -V S U B 2

&

& 1 &

UENERG 1O K

99 00008 9.vs d

Figure 173: Simplified voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement. Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplified logic diagrams for voltage selection:
Input signal Description

SYN1-CB1OPEN

Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 open. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnector section in a double-bus, single breaker arrangement, to inform the voltage selection about the positions. Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 closed. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnector section in a double-bus, single breaker arrangement to inform the voltage selection about the positions. Same as above but for disconnector section 2. Same as above but for disconnector section 2. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 2 (U4). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal. Internal fuse failure detection or configured to a binary input indicating external fuse failure of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocks the energizing function.

SYN1-CB1CLD

SYN1-CB2OPEN SYN1-CB2CLD SYN1-UB1FF

SYN1-UB1OK SYN1-UB2FF

SYN1-UB2OK SYN1-VTSU

302

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Output signals

Description

SYN1-VSUB1 SYN1-VSUB2

Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage. Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage.

1.2.9

Phasing and synchrocheck, double circuit breaker

Connectable inputs Initiate Phasing operation

SYNx Phasing
SYNx-START

x = 1 or 2

Fbus,Fline = Fr 5 Hz FreqDiffSynch < 50-500 mHz |dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s UHigh > 70-100 % UDiff < 5-60 % PhaseDiff < 60 deg SYNx-CLOSECB SYNx-INPROGR Phasing and synchrocheck
General Block

Connectable outputs

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx-TESTCB

Synchrocheck Fbus,Fline = Fr 5 Hz FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz PhaseDiff < 5-75 deg UDiff < 5-60 % UHigh > 70-100 % ULow < 10-80 %
From fuse failure detection, lineside (external or internal)

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-AUTOOK SYNx-MANOK SYNx-UDIFF SYNx-FRDIFF SYNx-PHDIFF

en01000119.vsd

Figure 174: Input and output signals. 1.2.10 Phasing and synchrocheck Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchrocheck function.

303

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Input signals

Description

SYNx-BLOCK SYNx-VTSU

General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and the synchrocheck. The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function. External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked. No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal. The signal initiates the phasing operation. When initiated the function continues until the SYNx-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped by the SYNx-BLOCK signal. In test mode SYNx-TESTCB ends the phasing operation.

SYNx-UB1FF

SYNx-UB1OK SYNx-START

Output signals

Description

SYNx-TESTCB

Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing sequence is performed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYNx-TESTCB indicates when the SYNx-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are fulfilled, from the synchro-check function. Close breaker command from phasing. Used to control the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function. The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYNx-START is received until the operation is terminated. The operation is teminated when SYNx-CLOSECB or SYNx-TESTCB has been submitted or if a SYNx-BLOCK is received. Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal. Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker. Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit. Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit. Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

SYNx-CLOSECB SYNx-INPROGR

SYNx-AUTOOK

SYNx-MANOK SYNx-UDIFF SYNx-FRDIFF SYNx-PHDIFF

304

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON SYN1-START SYN1-BLOCK >1 &

S R

&

SYN1-INPROGR

UDiff
50 ms

UBusHigh ULineHigh FreqDiffSynch

&

& >1 &

SYN1-CLOSECB

FreqDiff dF/dt Bus dF/dt Line Fbus 5 Hz Fline 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 60 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle & SYN1-AUTOOK & SYN1-MANOK &
tPulse

>1

SYN1-TESTCB

&

99000090.vsd

Figure 175: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing. The input signals SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK derive from the synchrocheck and energizing logic.

305

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

SYNCHROCHECK SYN1 OPERATION OFF RELEASE ON

SYN1-BLOCK UDiff UBusHigh ULineHigh FreqDiff PhaseDiff & AUTOENERG1 MANENERG1 UDIFF FRDIFF PHDIFF & 50 ms t &

0.00-60.0s t t Sync

&

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

ENERGIZING CHECK AutoEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 UL High UL Low UB High UB Low UENERG1OK ManEnerg. OFF Both DLLB DBLL 1 & 1 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t MANENERG1 1 & & 1 1 & 50 ms t & 0.00-60.0s t AUTOENERG1

1 ManDBDL OFF ON xx06000056.vsd &

Figure 176: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check for one circuit breaker. The internal signal UENERG1OK derives from the external or internal

306

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

fuse failure inputs SYN1-UB1OK/FF and SYN1-VTSU.

1.3
1.3.1

Calculations
Settings for single circuit breaker The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. (The number of Synchro Check functions is dependent of the version) Comments regarding settings.

1.3.2

Operation Off/Release/On
Off Release On The synchrocheck function is disabled and the output is low. There are fixed, high output signals SYNx-AUTOOK = 1 and SYNx-MANOK = 1. The function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

1.3.3

Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only available in terminals intended for one bay). UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase) measurement.(Only available in terminals intended for several bays). PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase difference. The bus voltage is reference voltage. URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes to connect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The Input phase-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the URatio-setting to sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage. USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic. AutoEnerg and ManEnerg Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

1.3.4

1.3.5

1.3.6

1.3.7

1.3.8

307

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

Off DLLB DBLL Both tAutoEnerg tManEnerg

The energizing function is disabled The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% U1b). The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% U1b). Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL. The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK. The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.

1.3.9

ManDBDL If the parameter is set to On, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both. UHigh and ULow Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condition, ULow, for the line or bus. FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle and voltage respectively. VTConnection This setting defines which side, line or bus, that leave three-phase connection of the VT. This setting is available only for single breaker arrangement for one bay. tSync Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information. Settings for double circuit breaker The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. (The number of SynchroCheck settings is dependent of the version) Comments regarding settings.

1.3.10

1.3.11

1.3.12

1.3.13

1.3.14

1.3.15

Operation Off/Release/On
Off Release On The synchrocheck function is disabled and the output is low. There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1. The function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

308

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.3.16

Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only available in terminals intended for one bay). UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase) measurement. (Only available in terminals intended for several bays). PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase difference. The bus voltage is reference voltage. URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes to connect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The Input phase-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the URatio-setting to sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage. AutoEnerg and ManEnerg Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.
Off DLLB DBLL Both tAutoEnerg tManEnerg The energizing function is disabled. The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% U1b). The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% U1b). Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL. The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK. The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.

1.3.17

1.3.18

1.3.19

1.3.20

1.3.21

ManDBDL If the parameter is set to On, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both. UHigh and ULow Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condition, ULow, for the line or bus. FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle and voltage respectively.

1.3.22

1.3.23

309

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.3.24

tSync Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information. Settings for single circuit breaker with phasing The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Operation
Off Release On The synchrocheck function is disabled and the output is low. There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1. The synchro-check function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

1.3.25

1.3.26

1.3.27

Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase difference. The bus voltage is reference voltage. URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if wished to connect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The Input phase-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the URatio-setting to sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage. USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic. AutoEnerg and ManEnerg Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.
Off DLLB DBLL Both tAutoEnerg tManEnerg The energizing condition is not used, only the synchro-check. The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% U1b). The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% U1b). Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL. The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK. The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.

1.3.28

1.3.29

1.3.30

1.3.31

310

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.3.32

ManDBDL If the parameter is set to On, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both. UHigh and ULow Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condition, ULow, for the line or bus. FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle and voltage respectively. OperationSync
Off On The phasing function is disabled and all outputs are low. The phasing function is in service and the output signals depends on the input conditions.

1.3.33

1.3.34

1.3.35

1.3.36

ShortPulse
Off On The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=tPulse. The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=one cycle time in the internal logic.

1.3.37

FreqDiffSynch Setting for frequency difference between line and bus for the phasing function. tPulse The length of the breaker closing pulse. See also the setting ShortPulse, which sets the length to one cycle timer of the internal logic. tBreaker Closing time of the breaker. VTConnection This setting defines which side, line or bus, that have three-phase connection of the VT. This setting is available only for single breaker arrangement for one bay. tSync Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information. FreqDiffBlock The setting can be set ON or OFF. Setting ON enables the phasing function even if the frequency difference is lower then set value of the setting FreqDiff for the synchrocheck function. Both the phasing function and synchrocheck function will operate in parallel. When the setting is OFF

1.3.38

1.3.39

1.3.40

1.3.41

1.3.42

311

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

the phasig function will be blocked if the frequency difference is lower than the set value of the setting FreqDiff. The synchrocheck function operates when the value is below the set value and the phasing function starts to operate when the value is above the set value. 1.3.43 Settings for double circuit breaker with phasing The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Operation
Off Release On The function is disabled and the output is low. There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1. The function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

1.3.44

1.3.45

Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a power transformer between the two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase difference. The bus voltage is reference voltage. URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for the voltage difference if UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral is used. The Input phase-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the URatio-setting to sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage. AutoEnerg and ManEnerg Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.
Off DLLB DBLL Both tAutoEnerg tManEnerg The energizing condition is not used only the synchro-check. The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% U1b). The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% U1b). Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL. The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK. The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the energizing condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.

1.3.46

1.3.47

1.3.48

312

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

Chapter 9 Control

1.3.49

ManDBDL If the parameter is set to On, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both. UHigh and ULow Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condition, ULow, for the line or bus. FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle and voltage respectively. FreqDiffSynch Setting for frequency difference between line and bus for the phasing function. OperationSynch
Off On The phasing function is disabled and all outputs are low. The phasing function is in service and the output signals depends on the input conditions.

1.3.50

1.3.51

1.3.52

1.3.53

1.3.54

ShortPulse
Off On The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=tPulse. The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=one cycle time in the internal logic.

1.3.55

tPulse The length of the breaker closing pulse. See also the setting ShortPulse, which sets the length to one cycle timer of the internal logic tBreaker Closing time of the breaker. tSync Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information. FreqDiffBlock The setting can be set ON or OFF. Setting ON enables the phasing function even if the frequency difference is lower then set value of the setting FreqDiff for the synchrocheck function. Both the phasing function and synchrocheck function will operate in parallel. When the setting is OFF the phasig function will be blocked if the frequency difference is lower than the set value of the setting FreqDiff. The synchrocheck function operates when the value is below the set value and the phasing function starts to operate when the value is above the set value.

1.3.56

1.3.57

1.3.58

313

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

2
2.1

Autorecloser (AR)
Application
Automatic reclosing (AR) is a well-established method to restore the service of a power line after a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashover arcs, which are transient by nature. When the power line is switched off by operation of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionises and recovers voltage withstand at a somewhat variable rate. So a certain line dead time is needed. But then line service can resume by the auto-reclosing of the line breakers. Select the length of the dead time to enable good probability of fault arc de-ionisation and successful reclosing. For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the Auto-reclose open time (AR open time) expression is used. At simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, Auto-reclose open time equals approximaltely the dead time of the line. Otherwise these two times may differ. In case of a permanent fault, the line protection trips again at reclosing to clear the fault.

314

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

Instat of fault

Operates

Resets

Operates

Operate time

Operate time

Closed Circuit breaker Open

Break time

Closing time

Fault

Line protection

Break time

Contacts separated

Are extinguishers

Close command

Trip command

Contact closed

Fault duration

AR open time for breaker

Fault duration

Set AR open time Reclosing command Start AR Auto-reclosing function

Reclaim time AR reset

99000118.vsd

Figure 177: Single-shot auto-reclosing at a permanent fault In a bay with one circuit breaker only, a terminal is normally provided with one AR function. Single-phase tripping and single-phase reclosing is a way to limit the effect of a single-phase line fault to system operation. Especially at higher voltages, the majority of line faults are of the single-phase type. The method is of particular value to maintain system stability in systems with limited meshing or parallel routing. It requires individual operation of each phase of the breakers, which is common at the higher transmission voltages. A somewhat longer dead time may be required at single-phase reclosing compared to high-speed three-phase reclosing, due to influence on the fault arc from voltage and current of the non-tripped phases. There is also a possibility to trip and reclose two of the circuit breaker poles, in case of faults when two out of the three phases are involved and parallel lines are in service. This type of faults is less common compared to single phase to earth faults, but more common than three phase faults.

Resets

315

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

In order to maximize the availability of the power system there is a possibility to chose single pole tripping and auto-reclosing at single phase faults, two pole tripping and auto-reclosing at faults involving two phases and three pole tripping and auto-reclosing at three phase faults. During the single pole open time there will be an equivalent series-fault in the system. As a consequence there will be a flow of zero sequence current. Therefor the residual current protections must be co-ordinated with the single pole tripping and auto-reclosing. The reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase, two-phase and/or three-phase reclosing from six single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing programs. The three-phase auto-reclose open time can be set to give either high-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR) or delayed auto-reclosing (DAR). In the reclosing programs the delayed auto-reclosing (DAR) is always a three pole trip and reclosing, even if the first high-speed reclosing is a single pole action.

2.2

Functionality
The AR function is a logical function built up from logical elements. It operates in conjunction with the trip output signals from the line protection functions, the OK to close output signals from the synchrocheck and energizing check function, and binary input signals (for circuit breaker position/status, or from other external protection functions). In the AR logic a number of parameters can be set to adjust the auto-reclosing function to the desired requirements. Examples are: Number of AR attempts AR programs Open times for different AR attempts

2.2.1

AR operation The mode of operation can be selected by setting the parameter Operation to ON, OFF or Stand-by. ON activates automatic reclosing. OFF deactivates the auto-recloser. Stand-by enables On and Off operation via input signal pulses. Start and control of the auto-reclosing The automatic operation of the auto-reclosing function is controlled by the parameter Operation and the input signals as described above. When it is on, the AR01-SETON output is high (active). See Function block diagrams. The auto-reclosing function is activated at a protection trip by the AR01-START input signal. At repeated trips, this signal is activated again to make the reclosing program continue. There are a number of conditions for the start to be accepted and a new cycle started. After these checks, the start signal is latched in and the Started state signal is activated. It can be interrupted by certain events.

2.2.2

2.2.3

Extended AR open time, shot 1 The purpose of this function is to adapt the length of the AR Open time to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. If a permissive communication scheme is used and the permissive communication channel (for example, PLC, power-line carrier) is out of service at the fault, there is a risk of sequential non-simultaneous tripping. To ensure a sufficient

316

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

line dead time, the AR open time is extended by 0.4 s. The input signal AR01-PLCLOST is checked at tripping. See Function block diagrams. Select this function (or not) by setting the Extended t1 parameter to On (or Off). 2.2.4 Long trip signal During normal circumstances, the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration by tTrip. At a longer trip signal, the AR open dead time is extended by Extend_t1. If the Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as AR01-INHIBIT. Reclosing programs The reclosing programs can be performed with up to maximum four reclosing attempts (shots), selectable with the NoOfReclosing parameter. The first program is used at pure 3-phase trips of breakers and the other programs are used at 1-, 2- or 3-phase trips of breakers. 3ph 3-phase reclosing, one to four attempts (NoOfReclosing parameter). The output AR01-P3P is always high (=1). A trip operation is made as a three-phase trip at all types of fault. The reclosing is as a three-phase reclosing in program 1/2/3ph, described below. 1/2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot. For the example, one-shot reclosing for 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase, see Figures in Function block diagrams. Here, the AR function is assumed to be On and Ready. The breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (manoeuvre spring charged etc.). Only the 1-phase and 3-phase cases are described. AR01-START is received and sealed-in at operation of the line protection. The AR01-READY output is reset (Ready for a new AR cycle). If AR01-TR2P (2-phase trip) is low and AR01-TR3P (3-phase trip) is:
low, the timer for 1-phase reclosing open time t1 1Ph is started and the AR01-1PT1 output (auto-reclosing 1-phase, shot 1, in progress) is activated. It can be used to suppress Pole disagreement and Earth-fault protection during the 1-phase open interval. the timer for 3-phase AR open time, t1, is started (instead of t1 1Ph) and AR01-T1 is set (auto-reclosing 3-phase, shot 1, in progress). While either t1 1Ph or t1 is running, the output AR01-INPROGR is activated.

2.2.5

high,

Immediately after the start-up of the reclosing and tripping of the breaker, the input (see Function block diagrams) AR01-CBCLOSED is low (possibly also AR01-CBREADY at type OCO). The AR Open-time timer, t1 1Ph or t1, keeps on running. At the end of the set AR open time, t1 1Ph or t1, the respective SPTO or TPTO (single-phase or three-phase AR time-out, see Function block diagrams) is activated and goes on to the output module for further checks and to give a closing command to the circuit breaker.

317

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

At any kind of trip, the operation is as already described, program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter). 1/2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot. At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as in above described example, program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter). At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and no reclosing takes place. 1ph + 1*2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot. At 1-phase trip (TR2P low and TR3P low), the operation is as in above described example, program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter). At 2-phase trip (TR2P high and TR3P low), the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place! At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and no reclosing takes place. 1/2ph + 1*3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot. At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter). At 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place! 1ph + 1*2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot. At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter). At 2-phase or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place!

318

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

Table 16:
Program

Type of reclosing for different programs

1st attempt 2-4th attempt

3ph 1/2/3ph

3ph 1ph 2ph 3ph

3ph 3ph 3ph 3ph 3ph 3ph No 3ph reclosing 3ph No No 3ph reclosing 3ph 3ph No 3ph No No

1/2ph

1ph 2ph No 3ph reclosing

1ph + 1*2ph

1ph 2ph No 3ph reclosing

1/2ph + 1*3ph

1ph 2ph 3ph

1ph + 1*2/3ph

1ph 2ph 3ph

2.2.6

Blocking of a new reclosing cycle A new start of a reclosing cycle is blocked for the reclaim time after the selected number of reclosing attempts are performed. Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer An AR open-time time-out signal is received from a program module. At three-phase reclosing, a synchro-check and/or energising check or voltage check can be used. It is possible to use an internal or an external synchro-check function, configured to AR01-SYNC. If a reclosing without check is preferred, configure the input AR01-SYNC to FIXD-ON (set to 1). Another possibility is to set the output from the internal synchro-check function to a permanently active signal. Set Operation = Release in the synchro-check function. Then AR01-SYNC is configured to SYNx-AUTOOK. At confirmation from the synchro-check or if the reclosing is of single-phase type, the signal passes on. At AR01-CBREADY signal of the Close-Open (CO) type, it is checked that this signal is present to allow a reclosing. The synchrocheck and energizing check must be fulfilled within a certain period of time, tSync. If it does not, or if the other conditions are not fulfilled, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked. The Reclaim-timer defines a period from the issue of a reclosing command, after which the reclosing function is reset. Should a new trip occur within this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. When a closing command is given (Pulse AR), the reclaim timer is started.

2.2.7

319

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

There is an AR State Control, see Function block diagrams, to track the actual state in the reclosing sequence. 2.2.8 Pulsing of CB closing command The circuit breaker closing command, AR01-CLOSECB, is made as a pulse with a duration, set by the tPulse parameter. For circuit breakers without an anti-pumping function, the closing-pulse-cutting described below can be used. It is selected by means of the CutPulse parameter (set to On). In case of a new trip pulse, the closing pulse will be cut (interrupted). But the minimum length of the closing pulse is always 50 ms. At the issue of a reclosing command, the associated reclosing operation counter is also incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosings. See Function block diagrams. 2.2.9 Transient fault After the reclosing command, the reclaim timer keeps running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim, the auto-reclosing function will be reset. The circuit breaker remains closed and the operating gear ready (manoeuvre spring is recharged). AR01-CBCLOSED = 1 and AR01-CBREADY = 1. After the reclaim time, the AR state control resets to original rest state, with AR01-SETON = 1, AR01-READY = 1 and AR01-P1P = 1 (depending on the selected program). The other AR01 outputs = 0. 2.2.10 Unsuccessful signal Normally the signal AR01-UNSUC appears when a new start is received after the last reclosing attempt has been made. See Function block diagrams. It can be programmed to appear at any stage of a reclosing sequence by setting the parameter UnsucMode = On. The UNSUC signal is attained after the time tUnsuc. Permanent fault If a new trip takes place after a reclosing attempt and a new AR01-START or AR01-TRSOTF signal appears, the AR01-UNSUC (Reclosing unsuccessful) is activated. The timers for the first reclosing attempt (t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph and t1) cannot be started. Depending on the PulseCut parameter setting, the closing command may be shortened at the second trip command. After time-out of the reclaim timer, the auto reclosing function resets, but the circuit breaker remains open (AR01-CBCLOSED = 0, AR01-CBREADY = 1). Thus the reclosing function is not ready for a new reclosing cycle. See Function block diagrams and Sequence examples. 2.2.12 Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts The auto-recloser can be programmed to continue with reclosing attempts two to four (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. See figure in Function block diagrams. This is done by setting the parameter AutoCont = On and the wait time tAutoWait to desired length.

2.2.11

320

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

2.3
2.3.1

Calculations
Configuration and setting The signals are configured in the CAP configuration tool. The parameters for the automatic reclosing function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

2.3.2

Recommendations for input signals See figure 178, figure 179 and the default configuration for examples. AR01-START Should be connected to the protection function trip output which shall start the auto-recloser. It can also be connected to a binary input for start from an external contact. A logical OR gate can be used to multiply the number of start sources. AR01-ON and AR01-OFF May be connected to binary inputs for external control. AR01-INHIBIT Can be connected to binary inputs, to block the AR from a certain protection, such as a line connected shunt reactor, transfer trip receive or back-up protection or breaker-failure protection. AR01-CBCLOSED and AR01-CBREADY Must be connected to binary inputs, for pick-up of the breaker signals. If the external signals are of Breaker-not-ready type, uncharged etc., an inverter can be configured before CBREADY. AR01-SYNC Is connected to the internal synchro-check function if required. It can also be connected to a binary input. If neither internal nor external synchronizing or energizing check (dead line check) is required, it can be connected to a permanent 1 (high), by connection to FIXD-ON. AR01-PLCLOST Can be connected to a binary input, when required. AR01-TRSOTF Can be connected to the internal line protection, distance protection, trip switch-onto-fault. AR01-STTHOL Start of thermal overload protection signal. Can be connected to OVLD-TRIP to block the AR at overload. AR01-TR2P and AR01-TR3P Are connected to the function block TRIP or to binary inputs. The protection functions that give two-phase or three-phase trips are supposed to be routed via that function. Other The other input signals can be connected as required.

321

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

2.3.3

Recommendations for output signals See figure 178, figure 179 and the default configuration for examples. AR01-READY Can be connected to the Zone extension of a line protection. It can also be used for indication, if required. AR01-1PT1 and 2PT1 1-phase and 2-phase reclosing in progress is used to temporarily block an Earth-fault protection and/or a Pole disagreement function during the 1-phase or 2-phase open intervals. AR01-CLOSECB Connect to a binary output relay for circuit breaker closing command. AR01-P3P Prepare 3-phase trip: Connect to TRIP-P3PTR. AR01-P1P Permit 1-phase trip: Can be connected to a binary output for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of total loss of auxiliary voltage, the output relay drops and does not allow 1-phase trip. If needed to invert the signal, it can be made by a breaking contact of the output relay. Other The other output signals can be connected for indication, disturbance recording etc., as required.

322

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

IOM INPUT xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx AR01ON OFF BLKON BLOCKOFF INHIBIT CBREADY CBCLOSED PLCLOST RESET PROTECTION xxxx-TRIP OVLD-TRIP SOTF-TRIP ZM1--TRIP READY >1 START STTHOL >1 TRSOTF T1 T2 T3 T4 WFMASTER BLOCKED SETON INPROGR ACTIVE UNSUC

IOM OUTPUT xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

CLOSECB

SYRW-AUTO

SYNC WAIT

en02000573.vsd

Figure 178: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections

323

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

IOM INPUT xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx AR01ON OFF BLKON BLOCKOFF INHIBIT CBREADY CBCLOSED PLCLOST RESET PROTECTION xxxx-TRIP OVLD-TRIP SOTF-TRIP ZM1--TRIP TRIP-TR2P TRIP-TR3P
FIXD-ON

IOM OUTPUT BLOCKED SETON INPROGR ACTIVE UNSUC xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx TRIP-P3PTR >1 EF4--BLOCK

CLOSECB P1P P3P 1PT1 2PT1 READY T1 T2 T3 T4 WFMASTER

>1

START STTHOL TRSOTF TR2P TR3P SYNC WAIT

>1

99000097.vsd

Figure 179: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections 2.3.4 Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement Sequential reclosing at multi-breaker arrangement is achieved by giving the two line breakers different priorities. Refer to figure 180. At single breaker application, Priority is set to No, and this has no influence on the function. The signal Started is sent to the next function module. At double breaker and similar applications, Priority is set High for the Master terminal and Priority = Low for the Slave. While reclosing is in progress in the master, it issues the signal -WFMASTER. A reset delay ensures that the -WAIT signal is kept high for the breaker closing time. After an unsuccessful reclosing, it is also maintained by the signal -UNSUC. For the slave terminal, the input signal -WAIT holds back a reclosing operation. A time tWait sets a maximum waiting time for the reset of the Wait signal. At time-out, it interrupts the reclosing cycle by a WM-INH, wait for master inhibit, signal.

324

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

Terminal Master Priority = High AR01 ON BLOCKED OFF SETON BLKON BLOCKOFF INPROGR INHIBIT ACTIVE RESET UNSUC READY START SITHOL TRSOTF CBREADY CBCLOSED PLCLOST SYNC WAIT

CLOSECB

CB1

T1 T2 T3 T4 WFMASTER

Terminal Slave Priority = Low AR01 ON BLOCKED OFF SETON BLKON BLOCKOFF INPROGR ACTIVE INHIBIT UNSUC RESET READY START TRSOTF CLOSECB STTHOL CBREADY CBCLOSED PLCLOST SYNC WAIT WFMASTER T1 T2 T3 T4

CB2

*) Other input/output signals as in previous singel breaker arrangements

99000120.vsd

Figure 180: Additional input and output signals at multi breaker arrangement

325

Autorecloser (AR)

Chapter 9 Control

2.3.5

Settings Number of reclosing attempts: 1 to 4 attempts can be chosen. In most cases 1 attempt is sufficient as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first reclosing shot. In power systems with many faults caused by other phenomena than lightning, for example wind, it can be motivated with more than one reclosing attempt. There are six different possibilities in the selection of reclosing programs. What type of first shot reclosing shall be made, and for which types of faults? In completely meshed power systems it is often acceptable to use three pole auto-reclosing for all fault types, as first shot. In power systems with few parallel paths single pole auto-reclosing should be considered, in order to avoid reclosing in a phase opposition situation. In such systems auto-reclosing should be allowed for single phase faults only. It must be remembered that there will be zero sequence current flow in the power system during the single pole reclosing open time. If a permissive channel is used between the line ends, and the availability of the communication channel is considered to be low, extended dead time in case of loss of the channel should be used. Due to the secondary arc at single pole trip and auto-reclosing, the extinguishing time for the arc will be longer than for three pole trip and auto-reclosing. Typical required dead time for single pole trip and reclosing is 800 ms. Typical required dead time for trip and reclosing is 400 ms. Different local phenomena, such as moisture, salt, pollution, etc. can influence the required dead time. The open time for the first auto-reclosing shot can be set for single pole (t1 1Ph), two pole (t1 2PH) and (t1). The open time for the delayed auto-reclosing shots can be set individually (t2, t3 and t4). This setting can in some cases be restricted by national regulations. In case of reclosing based on synchrocheck a maximum wait time (tSync) can be set. If the synchrocheck does not allow reclosing within this set time there will be no autoreclosing. This setting must be matched against the setting of the synchrocheck function. The operate time of the synchrocheck is mainly dependent on the setting angle difference. A typical operation time is about 200 ms. If the system will start to oscillate during the dead time, there can be some time before the synchronizing quantities can be accepted for reclosing. This can be checked by means of dynamic simulations. As a base recommendation tSync can be set to 2.0 s. The breaker closing pulse length (tPulse) can be chosen with some margin longer that the shortest allowed pulse for the breaker (see breaker data). The tReclaim setting must be chosen so that all autoreclosing shots can be completed. The setting tTrip is used for blocking of autoreclosing in case of long trip duration. This can be the consequence of an unwanted permanent trip signal or a breaker failure. In case of two or more autoreclosing modules only one shall be chosen as master (priority high). The others should have priority low. In case of one breaker only priority none is chosen.

326

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Chapter 9 Control

3
3.1

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Application
The terminals may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the terminal or via binary outputs. Figure 181 shows an application example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command control is normally performed by a pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal. Figure 181 shows a close operation, but an open operation is performed in a corresponding way without the synchro-check condition.

Single command function CDxx

SingleCmdFunc

Configuration logic circuits

Close CB1

CmdOuty

OUTy

200 ms Userdefined conditions Synchrocheck &

MODE

99000422.vsd

Figure 181: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via configuration logic circuits Figure 182 and figure 183 show other ways to control functions, which require steady On/Off signals. The output can be used to control built-in functions or external equipment.

327

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Chapter 9 Control

Single command function CDxx

SingleCmdFunc

Function n

Function n

CmdOuty

OUTy

MODE

99000423.vsd

Figure 182: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions

Single command function CDxx

SingleCmdFunc

Configuration logic circuits

Device 1

CmdOuty

OUTy

MODE

Userdefined conditions

&

99000424.vsd

Figure 183: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external equipment via configuration logic circuits

3.2

Design
The single command function consists of one function block, CD01 for 16 binary output signals. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from the CAP tool configuration.

328

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Chapter 9 Control

0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function block may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.

The outputs can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

3.3
3.3.1

Calculations
Setting The setting parameters for the single command function are set from the CAP configuration tool. Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CmdOuty - including the name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.

329

Multiple command (CM)

Chapter 9 Control

4
4.1

Multiple command (CM)

Application
The terminals may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from other terminals via the interbay bus. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the terminal or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other terminals, these terminals have a corresponding event function block to send the information.

4.2
4.2.1

Design
General One multiple command function block CM01 with fast execution time also named Binary signal interbay communication, high speed and/or 79 multiple command function blocks CM02-CM80 with slower execution time are available in the REx 5xx terminals as options. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from the CAP configuration tool. 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.

The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from the operator station or from other terminals. One common name for the block, with a maximum of 19 characters, is set from the configuration tool CAP. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal. 4.2.2 Binary signal interbay communication The multiple command function block can also be used to receive information over the LON bus from other REx 5xx terminals. The most common use is to transfer interlocking information between different bays. That can be performed by an Event function block as the send block and with a multiple command function block as the receive block. The configuration for the communication between terminals is made by the LON Network Tool. The MODE input is set to Steady at communication between terminals and then the data are mapped between the terminals.

330

Multiple command (CM)

Chapter 9 Control

The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within an INTERVAL time, that could be set. This function is applicable only during communication between terminals over the LON bus. The INTERVAL input time is set a little bit longer than the interval time set on the Event function block (see the document Event function). If INTERVAL=0, then VALID will be 1, that is, not applicable.

4.3
4.3.1

Calculations
Settings The setting parameters for the multiple command function are set from the CAP configuration tool. The multiple command function has a common name setting (CmdOut) for the block. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. INTERVAL is used for the supervision of the cyclical receiving of data.

331

Multiple command (CM)

Chapter 9 Control

332

About this chapter

Chapter 10 Logic

Chapter 10 Logic
About this chapter This chapter describes the logic functions.

333

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

1
1.1

Tripping logic (TR)

Application
All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip logic. In its most simple alternative the logic will only link the trip signal and assure a sufficient duration of the trip signal. The tripping logic in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals offers three different operating modes: Three-phase tripping for all kinds of faults (3ph operating mode) Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase tripping for multi-phase and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request three-phase tripping. Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults, two-phase tripping for ph-ph and ph-ph-E faults and three-phase tripping for three-phase faults (1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible or at evolving multi-phase faults.

The three phase trip for all faults gives a simple solution and is often sufficient in well meshed transmission systems and in sub-transmission systems. As most faults, especially on the highest voltage levels, are single phase to earth faults, single phase tripping can be of great value. If the faulted phase is tripped only, power can be transferred on the line also during the dead time before reclosing. The single phase tripping at single phase faults must be combined with single pole reclosing. Two phase tripping can be valuable on lines running parallel to each other. To meet the different single, double, 1 and 1/2 or other multiple circuit breaker arrangements, one or more identical TR function blocks may be provided within a single terminal. The actual number of these TR function blocks that may be included within any given terminal depends on the type of terminal. Therefore, the specific circuit breaker arrangements that can be catered for, or the number of bays of a specific arrangement that can be catered for, depends on the type of terminal. One TR function block should be used for each breaker, if the line is connected to the substation via more than one breaker. Assume that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used for the line. The breaker chosen as master must in that case have single pole tripping, while the slave breaker could have three pole tripping and auto-reclosing. In case of a permanent fault only one of the breakers has to be operated at the second energising of the fault. In case of a transient fault the slave breaker reclosing is made as a three pole reclosing onto the non-faulted line. The same philosophy can be used for two-pole tripping and auto-reclosing.

334

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

1.2

Functionality
The minimum duration of a trip output signal from the TR function is 150ms. This is to secure the fault clearance. The three-pole TR function has a single input through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the terminal, or from external protection functions via one or more of the terminals binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output for connection to one or more of the terminals binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the terminal requiring this signal.

TRIP-BLOCK TRIP-TRIN Operation = On

xx00000577.vsd tTripMin

&

TRIP-TRIP

Figure 184: Simplified logic diagram for trip logic The expanded TR function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TR function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TR function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals. The expanded TR function has three trip outputs, one per phase, for connection to one or more of the terminals binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the terminal requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip. These signals are important for the cooperation with the auto-reclosing function. The expanded TR function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole. In case of multi-breaker arrangement, one TR function block can be used for each breaker, if the breaker functions differ. This can be the case if single pole trip and auto-reclosing is used.

1.3

Design
The function consists of the following basic logic parts:

335

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

1.3.1

A three-phase front logic that is activated when the terminal is set into exclusive three-phase operating mode. A phase segregated front logic that is activated when the terminal is in 1ph/3ph or 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode. An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the function operates in 1ph/3ph operating mode. An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the function operates in 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode. The final tripping circuits.

Three-phase front logic Figure 185 shows a simplified block diagram of a three-phase front logic. Descriptions of different signals are available in signal list.

TRIP-TRINL1 TRIP-TRINL2 TRIP-TRINL3 TRIP-1PTRZ TRIP-1PTREF TRIP-TRIN Program = 3ph

>1 >1 >1 &

RSTTRIP - cont.

99000456.vsd

Figure 185: Three-phase front logic - simplified logic diagram Any of active functional input signals activates the RSTTRIP internal signal, which influences the operation of the final tripping circuits. 1.3.2 Phase segregated front logic The following input signals to the single-phase front logic influence the single-phase tripping of the terminal see figure 186: Phase related tripping signals from different built-in protection functions that can operate on a phase segregated basis and are used in the terminal. The output signals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-TRINLn (n = 1...3) functional inputs. Internal phase-selective tripping signals from different phase selection functions within the terminal, like PHS (phase selection for distance protection) or GFC (general fault criteria). The output signals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-PSLn (n = 1...3) functional inputs. It is also possible to connect to these functional inputs different external phase selection signals. Single-phase tripping commands from line distance protection or carrier aided tripping commands from scheme communication logic for distance protection, which initiate single-phase tripping. These signals should be configured to the

336

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

TRIP-1PTRZ functional input. It is also possible to configure a tripping output from an earth-fault overcurrent protection, to initiate the single-pole trip in connection with some external phase selection function. This signal should be configured to the TRIP-1PTREF functional input.

TRIP-TRIN TRIP-TRINL1 TRIP-PSL1

&
TRIP-TRINL2 TRIP-PSL2

>1

L1TRIP - cont.

&
TRIP-TRINL3 TRIP-PSL3

>1

L2TRIP - cont.

& >1

>1

L3TRIP - cont.

>1
-loop

>1
-loop

>1 &
TRIP-1PTREF TRIP-1PTRZ

& & >1

50 ms t

&

99000457.vsd

Figure 186: Phase segregated front logic The TRIP-1PTRZ signal enables tripping corresponding to phase selection signals without any restriction while any phase selective external tripping signals prevent such tripping from the TRIP-1PTREF signal. If any of these signals continues for more than 50 ms without the presence of any phase selection signals, three-phase tripping command is issued. It is possible to configure the TRIP-1PTREF signal to the output signal of the EF---TRIP overcurrent, earth-fault, protection function (directional and nondirectional). This enables single-phase tripping when the faulty phase is detected by some other phase-selection element such as the phase selection in distance protection. 1.3.3 Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode Figure 187 presents the additional logic when the trip function is in 1ph/3ph operating mode. A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal activates a three pole tripping if at least one phase within the front logic initiates a trip command.

337

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

L1TRIP - cont.

150 ms

>1 >1

t
2000 ms t

RTRIP - cont.

>1

&

L2TRIP - cont.

150 ms

>1 >1

t
2000 ms t

STRIP - cont.

>1

&

L3TRIP - cont.

150 ms

>1 >1

t
2000 ms t

TTRIP - cont.

>1

&

>1 &

TRIP-P3PTR

>1 >1
-loop

99000458.vsd

Figure 187: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode If only one of internal signals LnTRIP is present without the presence of a TRIP-P3PTR signal, a single pole tripping information is send to the final tripping circuits. A three-phase tripping command is initiated in all other cases. Built-in drop-off delayed (two second) timers secure a three-phase tripping for evolving faults if the second fault occurs in different phase than the first one within a two second interval after initiation of a first tripping command. 1.3.4 Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode Figur 188 presents the additional logic, when the trip function is in 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode. A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal activates a three pole tripping if at least one phase within the front logic initiates a trip command.

338

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

L1TRIP - cont.

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

>1

>1

RTRIP - cont.

&
150 ms

L2TRIP - cont.

t
2000 ms t

>1

>1

STRIP - cont.

& &

L3TRIP - cont.

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

>1

>1

TTRIP - cont.

&

>1 &

TRIP-P3PTR

>1 >1
-loop

99000459.vsd

Figure 188: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode The logic initiates a single-phase tripping information to the final logic circuits, if only one of internal input signals (LnTRIP) is active. A two phase tripping information is send in case, when two out of three input signals LnTRIP are active. A three phase tripping information requires all three LnTRIP input signals to be active. The built in drop-off delayed (two seconds) timers secure correct three-phase tripping information, when the faults are detected within two seconds in all three phases. 1.3.5 Final tripping circuits Figur 189 present the final tripping circuits for a tripping function within the REx 5xx terminals. The TRIP-BLOCK functional input signal can block the operation of a function, so that no functional output signals become logical one. Detailed explanation of functional output signals is available in signal list.

339

Tripping logic (TR)

Chapter 10 Logic

TRIP-BLOCK RTRIP -cont.

>1
STRIP - cont.

&

TRIP-TRL1

>1
TTRIP -cont.

&

TRIP-TRL2

>1
RSTTRIP -cont.

& >1

TRIP-TRL3

TRIP-TRIP

&

>1

&
-loop

TRIP-TR3P

& & & & & >1

10 ms t 5 ms t

TRIP-TR1P

TRIP-TR2P

-loop

99000555.vsd

Figure 189: Final tripping circuits

1.4

Calculations
The parameters for the trip logic function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameters Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

340

Pole discordance logic (PDc)

Chapter 10 Logic

2
2.1

Pole discordance logic (PDc)

Application
Circuit breaker pole position discordance can occur on the operation of a breaker with independent operating gears for the three poles. The reason may be an interruption in the trip coil circuits, or a mechanical failure resulting in a stuck breaker pole. A pole discordance can be tolerated for a limited time, for instance during a single-phase trip-auto-reclose cycle. The pole discordance logic (PDc) detects a breaker pole position discrepancy not generated by a single pole reclosing and generates a three phase command trip to the circuit breaker itself.

2.2
2.2.1

Functionality
Functionality for contact based pole discordance The operation of the contact based pole discordance logic is based on checking the position of the circuit breaker through six of its auxiliary contacts: three parallel connected normally open contacts are connected in series with three parallel connected normally closed contacts. This hard-wired logic is very often integrated in the circuit breaker control cabinets and gives a closed signal in case of pole discordance in the circuit breaker. This signal is connected to the PD---POLDISC input of the pole discordance function. If the function is enabled, after a short delay, the activation of this input causes a trip command (PD---TRIP). Figure 190 shows the typical application connection for the contact based pole discordance function.

341

Pole discordance logic (PDc)

Chapter 10 Logic

C.B.

REx 5xx Terminal +

POLE DISCORDANCE
Pole Discordance Signal from C.B.

PD---BLOCK PD---1POPEN PD---POLDISC

PD---TRIP

Circuit Breaker Trip

99000467.vsd

+ External Blocking

+ 1-Phase Auto Reclose Running

visf_115.vsd

Figure 190: Typical connection diagram for pole discordance function - contact based

2.3

Design
The simplified logic diagram of the contact based pole discordance logic is shown in figure 191.

342

Pole discordance logic (PDc)

Chapter 10 Logic

PD - POLE DISCORDANCE LOGIC

TEST TEST-ACTIVE

&
BlockPD = Yes

Logic Blocked form Test PD---BLOCK PD---1POPEN

>1

Logic Enable PD---POLDISC

150 ms t

&

PD---TRIP

99000468.vsd

Figure 191: Simplified logic digram of pole discordance logic - contact based The pole discordance logic is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes) The input signal PD---BLOCK is high The input signal PD---1POPEN is high

The PD---BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance logic. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The PD---1POPEN signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase auto-reclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the auto-reclosing function is an external device, then PD---1POPEN has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is connected to a signallisation 1phase auto-reclosing in progress from the external auto-reclosing device. If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discordance status), then the function input PD---POLDISC is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel). If the pole discordance function is enabled, a 150 ms trip pulse command (PD---TRIP) is generated, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s).

343

Pole discordance logic (PDc)

Chapter 10 Logic

2.4
2.4.1

Calculations
Setting Instruction The parameters for the pole discordance protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Comments regarding settings:
Operation: Time delay , t: Pole discordance protection On/Off. Activation or de-activation of the logic. The time delay is not critical because the pole discordance logic operates mainly with load conditions. The time delay should be chosen between 0.5 and 1 s.

344

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

Chapter 10 Logic

3
3.1

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

Application
The high-speed binary out logic (HSBO--) is included as basic and is used as a supplement to the high-speed protection function (HS--) and the distance protection zone 1 function (ZM1--) in the REx 5xx terminals. Depending on the terminal type (actually the set of included functions) the following description will be valid entirely or partly. Together with the high-speed binary out logic, the high-speed (distance) protection and the (main) distance protection zone 1 obtain even shorter operate times since the critical connections to/from binary output/input are established in a more straightforward way than in the case of using the regular I/O-modules. The high-speed binary out logic also includes trip scheme logic employing the same fast connections. The HSBO trip scheme logic will run in parallel with the regular trip scheme logic configured within the terminal (ZC1P and ZCOM). In fact, information from these two functions will be used in the HSBO function.

3.2

Functionality
The operation of the high-speed binary out logic overruns all other logical circuits within the terminal and activates, with minimum time delay, the binary outputs (output relays). The same relays should also be activated by the normal functional outputs of corresponding built-in functions (TRIP function, for example). The reason for this is that the fast (phase segregated) outputs of the HSBO function should bring forward an earlier activation of trip and carrier send signals that are supposed to be continued by the regular functions (TRIP, ZC1P and ZCOM function). For example, the trip signals that are issued by the high-speed protection function through the HSBO function are presented as short pulses (20ms) and therefore they need to be extended (continued). In the general case, this would be provided for by the intervention of the TRIP function. The operation is dependent upon other functions within the terminal. To achieve correct functionality, it is absolutely necessary that all depending functions are configured correctly, set on and not blocked. With respect to the employed distance protection transfer trip scheme the HSBO function will retrieve the necessary information from the regular communication functions (ZC1P or ZCOM) in order to determine the mode of operation. The HSBO function will support intertrip, permissive under-reach and permissive overreach scheme. There is, however, one exception to the possible use of these schemes. A delayed operation within the communication functions (ZCOM or ZC1P) (i.e. tCoord > 0) is not allowed. In this case the trip scheme logic within the HSBO function should be blocked through activating input HSBO-BLKZCTR. Do not use the default value for tCoord of 50ms. The main configuration for the function is shown in figure 192 below. This configuration is made internally and cannot be altered.

345

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

Chapter 10 Logic

IOxx BIx .... BIy BIz .... ZC1P-CRMPH ZCOM-CR ZC1P-CRLn HSBOBLKZCTR HSBOBLKHSTR HSBOBLKHSCS 'Internal' in/out HSBO-TRLn HSBO-CRLn HSBO-CSLn HSBO-CSMPH & BOz HSBO-CR Fast Trip/CS outputs configured through settings: IOMOD TRmLnOUT CSLnOUT CSMPHOUT IOxx BOx BOy BOz .... Binary output contacts BOx BOy HSBO HSBO-ERROR Regular function block in/out

Binary inputs BIx BIy BIz ZC1P ZC1P-CACCLn TEST/BLOCK ZCOM ZCOM-CACC TEST/BLOCK TRIP TRIP-PSLn TEST/BLOCK HS HS-TRLn HS-CSLn HS-CSMPH ZM1 ZM1-TRLn & &

HSBOCRMPH

HSBOZC1PCACCLn HSBOZCOMCACC HSBOTRIPPSLn HSBO-HSTRLn HSBO-HSCSLn HSBOHSCSMPH HSBOZM1TRLn

en01000181.vsd

Figure 192: Simplified diagram of the high-speed binary out logic function together with depending functions

346

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

Chapter 10 Logic

According to the presented internal configuration input will be brought in from the HS, ZM1, ZC1P, ZCOM and TRIP functions. In the case of carrier receive signals, the input will be attained directly from binary input overriding the binary I/O-modules. This is obtained by means of looking up and connecting to the input contacts used for the carrier receive inputs of the ZC1P and/or the ZCOM function. This calls for that the carrier receive inputs of the latter functions must be connected directly to a binary I/O-module, with nothing in between. In figure 192 this is illustrated with ZC1P-CRLn and ZCOM-CR connected to arbitrary binary in (BIx, BIy,...). The input signals (HSBO-ZC1PCACCLn, HSBO-ZCOMCACC and HSBO-TRIPPSLn) are connected to the inputs on respective function block. This means that the high-speed binary out logic runs in parallel with those functions. But it is important that the functions are set on so the signals are received with true values. Otherwise, the logic can malfunction. Note that these signals can be blocked in the function from where they originate. Similarly, input signals HSBO-HSTRLn, HSBO-CSLn and HSBO-HSCSMPH are connected to the output of the HS function. Input signals HSBO-ZM1TRLn are connected to the output of the ZM1 function. Shown connections to in and outputs of the other function blocks (ZC1P-, ZCOM-, TRIP-, HSand ZM1-) can not be re configured. They are so called hard connections in the software and done during manufacturing. The output signals (trip and carrier send) must be configured to appropriate binary output contacts during engineering. This is done through configuring the corresponding parameters of the HSBO-function in CAP tool (IOMOD, TRmLnOUT, CSLnOUT and CSMPHOUT). It should be noted that trip output from the HSBO-function can be issued either from the HS-function or the ZM1-function, or both in parallel, depending on terminal type and setting. As specified above the common trip outputs are configured through parameters TRmLnOUT. It is possible to configure the output of all three phases to one binary output contact in order to obtain direct three-phase tripping for all kinds of faults. The blocking input signals (HSBO-BLKZCTR, -BLKHSTR and -BLK-HSCS) are normal function input signals. The configuration is done with the configuration tool CAP tool as usual. The error output signal (HSBO-ERROR) indicates if the present configuration of fast trip and carrier send output does not correspond to actual hardware (binary output cards). The signal can be used for indication or as wanted.

3.3

Design
The internal design of the functional block is shown in figure 193 below.

347

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

Chapter 10 Logic

HSBO-BLKZCTR

HSBO-CRLn

>1
HSBO-CRMPH

IO-card configuration error &

HSBO-ERROR

HSBO-ZC1CACCLn

>1
HSBO-CR

& 1
15ms

&
HSBO-ZCOMCACC

HSBO-TRLn

&
HSBO-TRIPPSLn

Regular function block in and ouput

HSBO-BLKHSTR HSBO-Test HSBO-BLKHSCS HSBO-HSTRLn HSBO-HSCSLn HSBO-HSCSMPH HSBO-ZM1TRLn

>1

'Internal' in and output

>1 & & & &

15ms

HSBO-CSLn HSBO-CSMPH

15ms

en01000182.vsd

Figure 193: Simplified logic diagram of the function block Below is a description of the internal input/output signals.

348

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

Chapter 10 Logic

Input signals:

HSBO-CRLn HSBO-CRMPH HSBO-ZC1PCACCL n HSBO-CR HSBO-ZCOMCACC HSBO-TRIPPSLn HSBO-ZM1TRLn HSBO-HSTRLn HSBO-HSCSLn HSBO-HSCSMPH

Carrier receive signal, for phase n (n=1..3), connected to the binary input. These inputs use the same signals as the inputs to the communication logic ZC1P-. A carrier receive signal, multi-phase, connected to a binary input. It uses the same signal as the input to the communication logic ZC1P-. Carrier acceleration signals, for phase n (n=1..3). They are connected internally to the input of the communication logic ZC1P- and cannot be redirected. A carrier receive signal connected to a binary input, already connected to the corresponding input of the communication logic ZCOM-. A carrier acceleration signal. Is a hard connection to the input of the communication logic ZCOM-. Phase selection signal, selected phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the input of the trip function block TRIP-. Trip signal, of phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the output of the distance protection zone 1 function block ZM1-. Trip signal, of phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the output of the high-speed function block HS---. Carrier send signals, of phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the output of the high-speed function block HS---. A carrier send signal, multi-phase. Is a hard connection to the output of the high-speed function block HS---.

Configuration parameters
Output signals:

IOMOD TRmLnOUT

Parameter for selecting the binary out card supposed to transfer the fast outputs of the HSBO function. Parameter for selecting the specific binary output contact intended for trip signal m of phase n. m is either 1 or 2. Both the TR1LnOUT-output and TR2LnOUT-output carry the same signal, for a possible double-breaker arrangement. It is recommended that these trip outputs are configured to the same contacts as the corresponding regular trip outputs (of the TRIP function). If three-pole trip is required all three trip outputs should be configured to the same contact (i.e. TRxL1OUT=TRxL2OUT=TRxL3OUT). Consider that the trip signals can be issued from the HS function and/or the ZM1 function. Parameter for selecting the specific binary output contact intended for carrier send signal of phase n. Like in the trip output case above, it is recommended that these carrier send outputs are configured to the same contacts as the corresponding regular carrier send outputs (of the ZC1P or ZCOM function). Parameter for selecting the specific binary output contact intended for the multi-phase carrier send signal. If it is applicable, connect it to the same contact as the regular multi-phase carrier send signal (of the ZC1P function).

CSLnOUT

CSMPHOUT

349

Communication channel test logic (CCHT)

Chapter 10 Logic

4
4.1

Communication channel test logic (CCHT)

Application
Many applications in secondary systems require testing of different functions with confirmed information on successfully completed test. Carrier channel test (CCHT) function serves primarily testing of communication (power line carrier) channels in applications, where continuous monitoring by some other means is not possible due to technical or economical reasons. The logic initiates sending of some impulse (carrier send signal), which starts the operation of different functions outside the logic, and checks the feedback from the external function. It reports the successful or non-successful response on initiated test. It is also possible to abort the test with some external signal, which overrules all internal process. It is possible to initiate the logic manually or automatically. Manual starts are possible by means of external push-button, connected to the binary input of a terminal. Automatic starts are possible in long time intervals with their duration dependent on setting of the corresponding timer.

4.2

Design
Figure 194 presents a simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function. Logical one on CCHT-BLOCK functional input disables completely the operation of the logic.

CCHT-BLOCK Operation=Man CCHT-START

& >1
tStart

tWait

t
tCh t

15 ms t

&
tCS

Operation=Aut

&

t -loop

>1 &
tWait t

&

CCHT-CS

CCHT-CR

&

15 ms t

&

&
CCHT-RESET

>1 &
tChOK

CCHT-ALARM

t & >1
CCHT-CHOK

99000187.vsd

Figure 194: Simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function

350

Communication channel test logic (CCHT)

Chapter 10 Logic

4.2.1

Selection of an operating mode Selection of an operating mode, which determines the automatic (internal) or manual (external) start is possible by setting the Operation = Aut and Operation = Man respectively, see figure 194. The automatic starting requires continuous presence of logical one on CCHT-START functional input. Setting of the tStart timer determines the time intervals for the automatic starts logic. Any presence of the logical one signal on the CCHT-START functional input starts the function, when in manual operating mode.

4.2.2

Operation at sending end Manual or automatic start initiates the pulse, which is 15 ms longer than the time set on a tWait timer. This pulse initiates the CCHT-CS functional output signal in duration as set on a tCS pulse timer.The same pulse starts also the time measurement by the tWait timer. The CCHT-ALARM output signal appears, if the CCHT-CR input does not become logical one within the time interval, as set on the tWait timer. The appearance of the CCHT-CR signal is safeguarded by a 15 ms timer, to prevent influence of the disturbances on a communication link. The appearance of the CCHT-CR signal within the tWait time interval activates the CCHT-CHOK output signal. It remains active for the period as set on the timer tChOK or until the CCHT-ALARM appears at new start of a CCHT function. The tCh timer, which is delayed on drop-off, prevents ringing of a complete system. It is possible to reset the CCHT-ALARM output signal by activating the CCHT-RESET functional input.

4.2.3

Operation at receiving end Activation of a CCHT-CR functional input activates instantaneously the CCHT-CS functional output, if the timer tCh has not been activated or the function has not been blocked by the active CCHT-BLOCK functional input. Duration of the CCHT-CR input signal must be longer than 15 ms to avoid operation at different disturbances on communication link.

351

Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12)

Chapter 10 Logic

5
5.1

Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12)

Application
The binary signal transfer function is preferably used for sending communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals required at the remote end. Up to 32 selectable binary send signals, internal or external, and 32 selectable binary receive signals can be transmitted. Together with the binary signals internal to the terminal, the function is utilising binary inputs and outputs. The function can be provided with various 56/64 kbit/s communication modules for optical fibre or galvanic connection. The communication can be done via direct galvanic communication line for shorter distances, via dedicated optical fibres up to around 30 km and via a communication network for longer distances.

5.2

Design
The function Binary signal transfer to remote end consists of two function blocks, RTC1 and RTC2, each handling 16 inputs (SEND01-16) and 16 outputs (REC01-16). Figure 195 shows the signal diagram for RTC1. This diagram is also valid for RTC2 since the signal inputs and outputs are the same. A signal applied to an input of one function block, e.g. RTC1-SEND01, in one terminal will be transmitted, via a data communication link, to a remote terminal and there appear at the corresponding output of the corresponding function block, that is in the example RTC1-REC01. The transmission takes 10 - 25 ms plus communication link delay. No additional security actions to that included in the communication handling, that is CRC-check, checking length of telegram and addressing, are incorporated. Both function blocks have an input BLOCK, which is available to block the operation. When the input is energized, all 16 binary input signals of that function block will be sent as zeroes. Incoming signals from remote end are not affected. An output COMFAIL is also available to announce an alarm when there is a failure in the communication with the remote terminal. The COMFAIL for both function blocks works in parallel so information will appear simultaneously on both function blocks. At COMFAIL all 16 output signal on both function blocks will be set to zero.

352

Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12)

Chapter 10 Logic

RTCnRTC BLOCK SEND01 SEND02 SEND03 SEND04 SEND05 SEND06 SEND07 SEND08 SEND09 SEND10 SEND11 SEND12 SEND13 SEND14 SEND15 SEND16 RC01NAME RC02NAME RC03NAME RC04NAME RC05NAME RC06NAME RC07NAME RC08NAME RC09NAME RC10NAME RC11NAME RC12NAME RC13NAME RC14NAME RC15NAME RC16NAME SD01NAME SD02NAME SD03NAME SD04NAME SD05NAME SD06NAME SD07NAME SD08NAME SD09NAME SD10NAME SD11NAME SD12NAME SD13NAME SD14NAME SD15NAME SD16NAME REC01 REC02 REC03 REC04 REC05 REC06 REC07 REC08 REC09 REC10 REC11 REC12 REC13 REC14 REC15 REC16 COMFAIL

xx00000224.vsd

Figure 195: Binary signal transfer to remote end RTC1, signal inputs and outputs User defined names can be applied to the inputs and outputs.These identities are set from the CAP configuration tool. A service report provides information of the status of all function block outputs as well as inputs. The status can be viewed on the local HMI. Refer to Technical reference manual for outputs and path in local HMI.

353

Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12)

Chapter 10 Logic

5.2.1

Remote end data communication The Binary signal transfer to remote end function uses the same communication functionality and hardware for communication with remote end as used for the line differential function. These items are described in the chapter Data communication in the application manual. The settings that has to be made for these items are also described in each chapter respectively. Status information of the Remote end data communication is available on the local HMI.

354

Event function (EV)

Chapter 10 Logic

6
6.1

Event function (EV)

Application
When using a Substation Automation system, events can be spontaneously sent or polled from the terminal to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the terminal that is connected to the event function block. The event function block can also handle double indication, that is normally used to indicate positions of high-voltage apparatuses. With this event function block, data also can be sent to other terminals over the interbay bus.

6.2

Functionality
The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status and events by the station HMI on either every single input or double input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station HMI. Twelve of the event function blocks are executed with fast cyclicity. That means that the time-tagging resolution on the events that are emerging from internal logical signals, created from configurable logic, is the same as the cyclicity of this logic. The time tagging resolution on the events that are emerging from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms. Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal restarted and Event buffer overflow.

6.3
6.3.1

Design
General As basic, 12 event function blocks EV01-EV12 running with a fast cyclicity, are available in REx 5xx. When the function Apparatus control is included in the terminal, additional 32 event function blocks EV13-EV44, running with a slower cyclicity, are available. Each event function block has 16 connectables corresponding to 16 inputs INPUT1 to INPUT16. Every input can be given a name with up to 19 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs can be used as individual events or can be defined as double indication events. The inputs can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under the Mask-Event function as: No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal

355

Event function (EV)

Chapter 10 Logic

OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal

Also an input PrColxx (xx=01-44) is available on the function block to define on which protocol the events shall be sent. The event function blocks EV01-EV06 have inputs for information numbers and function type, which are used to define the events according to the communication standard IEC 60870-5-103. 6.3.2 Double indication Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at a time, for example, one input for the open and one for the close position of a circuit breaker or disconnector. The double indication consists of an odd and an even input number. When the odd input is defined as a double indication, the next even input is considered to be the other input. The odd inputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00 states. To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set from the SMS under the Mask-Event function as: Double indication Double indication with midposition suppression

Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning. These states of the inputs generate events. The status is read by the station HMI on the status indication for the odd input: 6.3.3 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates a close event with the read status 1 10 generates an open event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Communication between terminals The BOUND and INTERVAL inputs are available on the event function block. The BOUND input set to 1 means that the output value of the event block is bound to another control terminal on the LON bus. The event function block is then used to send data over the LON bus to other REx 5xx terminals. The most common use is to transfer interlocking information between different bays. That can be performed by an event function block used as a send block and with a Multiple Command function block used as a receive block. The document, see section describes how to transfer the interlocking information. The configuration of the communication between control terminals is made by the LON Network Tool. The INTERVAL input is applicable only when the BOUND input is set to 1. The INTERVAL is intended to be used for cyclic sending of data to other control terminals via the LON bus with the interval time as set. This cyclic sending of data is used as a backup of the event-driven sending, which always is performed. With cyclic sending of data, the communication can be supervised by a corresponding INTERVAL input on the Multiple Command function block in another control terminal connected to the LON bus. This INTERVAL input time is set a little bit longer than the interval time set on the event function block. With INTERVAL=0, only event-driven sending is performed.

356

Event function (EV)

Chapter 10 Logic

6.4

Calculations
The event reporting can be set from the PST as: Use event masks Report no events Report all events

Use of event masks is the normal reporting of events, that is, the events are reported as defined in the database. An event mask can be set individually for each available signal in the terminal. The setting of the event mask can only be performed from the PST. All event mask settings are treated commonly for all communication channels of the terminal. Report no events means blocking of all events in the terminal. Report all events means that all events, that are set to OnSet/OnReset/OnChange are reported as OnChange, that is, both at set and reset of the signal. For double indications when the suppression time is set, the event ignores the timer and is reported directly. Masked events are still masked. Parameters to be set for the event function block are: T_SUPRyy including the suppression time for double indications. NAMEyy including the name for each input. PrColxx including the type of protocol for sending the events. INTERVAL used for the cyclic sending of data. BOUND telling that the block has connections to other terminals over the LON bus. FuncTEVx (for EV01-EV06) including the function type for sending events via IEC 60870-5-103. InfoNoyy (for EV01-EV06) including the information number for the events sending via IEC 60870-5-103.

These parameters are set from the CAP configuration tool. When the BOUND parameter is set, the settings of the event masks have no meaning.

357

Event counter (CN)

Chapter 10 Logic

7
7.1

Event counter (CN)

Application
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter has been activated. It is also provided with a common blocking function for all six counters, to be used for example at testing. Every counter can separately be set on or off by a parameter setting.

7.2

Functionality
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place. At power interrupt the counter values are stored. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing. All inputs are configured via configuration tool CAP.

7.2.1

Reporting The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reading of content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely, for example via SPA-communication.

7.3

Calculations
The parameters for the event counter function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

358

About this chapter

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Chapter 11 Monitoring
About this chapter This chapter describes the monitoring functions.

359

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

1
1.1

Disturbance report
Application
Use the disturbance report to provide the network operator with proper information about disturbances in the primary network. Continuous collection of system data and, at occurrence of a fault, storing of a certain amount of pre-fault, fault and post-fault data, contributes to the highest possible quality of electrical supply. The stored data can be used for analysis and decision making to find and eliminate possible system and equipment weaknesses. The function comprises several sub functions enabling different users to access relevant information in a structured way.

1.1.1

Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report Disturbance reports, setting and internal events in REx 5xx are stored in a non volatile flash memory. Flash memories are used in many embedded solutions for storing information due to high reliability, high storage capacity, short storage time and small size. In REx 5xx there is a potential failure problem, caused by too many write operations to the flash memory. Our experience shows that after storing more than fifty thousand disturbances, settings or internal events the flash memory exceeds its storing capacity and the component is finally defected. When the failure occurs there is no risk of unwanted operation of the protection terminal due to the self-supervision function that detects the failure. The terminal will give a signal for internal fail and go into blocking mode. The above limitation on the storage capacity of the flash memory gives the following recommendation for the disturbance report trig condition: Cyclic trig condition more often then once/day not recommended. Minute pulse input is not used as a trig condition. Total number of stored disturbance reports shall not exceed fifty thousand.

1.2

Functionality
The disturbance report is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator with more information about the disturbances in the system. Some of the facilities are basic and some are optional in the different products. For some products not all facilities are available. The facilities included in the disturbance report are: General disturbance information Indications Event recorder Fault locator Trip values (phase values) Disturbance recorder

360

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The whole disturbance report can contain information for up to 10 disturbances, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above, depending on the options installed. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss-of-power supply

D is tu rb a n c e re p o rt

D is tu rb a n c e n o .1

D is tu rb a n c e n o .2

D is tu rb a n c e n o .1 0

G e n e ra l d is t. in fo rm a tio n

In d ic a tio n

T rip v a lu e s

E vent re c o rd e r

D is tu rb a n c e re c o rd e r
9 9 0 0 0 3 1 1 .v s d

Figure 196: Disturbance report structure Up to 10 disturbances can always be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance is over-written by the new one. The nominal memory capacity for the disturbance recorder is measured with 10 analog and 48 binary signals recorded, which means that in the case of long recording times, fewer than 10 disturbances are stored. If fewer analog signals are recorded, a longer total recording time is available. This memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report. 1.2.1 Disturbance information The indications, the fault locator result (when applicable), and the trip values are available on the local HMI. For a complete disturbance report, front communication with a PC or remote communication with SMS is required. Disturbance overview is a summary of all the stored disturbances. The overview is available only on a front-connected PC or via the Station Monitoring System (SMS). The overview contains: Disturbance index Date and time Trip signals Trigger signal that activated the recording Distance to fault (requires Fault locator) Fault loop selected by the Fault locator (requires Fault locator)

Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the local human-machine interface (HMI). Here the two latest disturbances (DisturbSummary 1, which is the latest and DisturbSummary 2 which is the second latest) are presented with:

361

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Date and time Selected indications (set with the Indication mask) Distance to fault and fault loop selected by the Fault locator

The date and time of the disturbance, the trigger signal, the indications, the fault locator result and the trip values are available, provided that the corresponding functions are installed. 1.2.2 Indications Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the fault time of the disturbance. A part (or all) of these signals are automatically scrolled on the local HMI after a disturbance. Event recorder The event recorder contains an event list with time-tagged events. In the Station Monitoring System, this list is directly connected to a disturbance. Fault locator The fault locator contains information about the distance to the fault and about the measuring loop that was selected for the calculation. After changing the system parameters in the terminal, a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be made in the protection Trip values Trip values includes phasors of currents and voltages before the fault and during the fault Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. Recording times The disturbance report records information about a disturbance during a settable timeframe. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder and the event recorder register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time. Indications are only registered during the fault time. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost or tPre + tLim, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

1.2.3

1.2.4

1.2.5

1.2.6

1.2.7

362

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

tLim tPre tPost

3
xx00000316.vsd

Table 17:
1 2 3 tLim

Definitions
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting tPre to set this time. Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by tLim the limit time). Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting tPost to set this time. Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use the setting tLim to set this time.

Figure 197: The recording times definition 1.2.8 Analog signals Up to 10 analog signals (five voltages and five currents from the transformer module) can be selected for recording and triggering if the disturbance recorder function is installed. If fewer than 10 signals are selected, the maximum storing capacity in the flash memories, regarding total recording time are increased. A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the terminal. For each of the 10 analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger condition. The same applies for the current signals. The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

363

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network. The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers. 1.2.9 Binary signals Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where all available signals are grouped under each function. The 48 signals can be selected from internal logical signals and binary input signals. Each of the 48 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report. It is also possible to set if the trigger should be activated on a logic 1 or a logic 0. A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI. A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the terminal. The selected 48 signals are presented in the event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications, that are to be automatically scrolled on the HMI when a disturbance has been recorded are also selected from these 48 signals with the HMI Indication Mask. 1.2.10 Trigger signals The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report. As soon as a trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no calculation of distance to fault, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions. A trigger can be of type: Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS. When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Binary trigger Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger. The binary signal must remain in a steady state for at least 15 ms to be valid. When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report. Analog trigger All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. But the disturbance recorder function must be installed in the terminal.

364

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Retrigger Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the postfault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty network. In order to capture the new fault it is possible to allow retriggering during the PostFault recording.

1.3

Calculations
The parameters for the disturbance report function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The settings include:
Operation ReTrig SequenceNo RecordingTimes BinarySignals AnalogSignals FaultLocator

Disturbance Report (On/Off) Re-trigger during post-fault state (On/Off) Sequence number (0-255) (normally not necessary to set) Recording times for the Disturbance Report and the event/indication logging, including pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time for the entire disturbance Selection of binary signals, trigger conditions, HMI indication mask and HMI red LED option Recording mask and trigger conditions Distance measurement unit (km/miles/%) km or miles selected under line reference

User-defined names of analog input signals can be set. The user-defined names of binary signals can be set with the CAP configuration tool. The analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names. 1.3.1 Settings during normal conditions
Table 18:
HMI Setting menu

How the settings affect different functions in the disturbance report

Function DisturDisturbance sum- bance mary (on recorder HMI) Indica-ti ons Event list (SMS) Trip val- Fault ues locator

Operation Recording times

Operation (On/Off) Recording times (tPre, tPost, tLim)

Yes No

Yes Yes

Yes No

Yes Yes

Yes No

Yes No

365

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

HMI Setting menu

Function

DisturDisturbance sum- bance recorder mary (on HMI)

Indica-ti ons

Event list (SMS)

Trip val- Fault ues locator

Binary signals

Trigger operation and trigger level Indication mask (for automatic scrolling)

Yes Yes No Yes No

Yes No Yes Yes No

Yes No No Yes No

Yes No No Yes No

Yes No Yes Yes No

Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Analog signals

Operation (On/Off) Trigger over/under function Fault locator settings (Distance Unit)

Fault Locator

1.3.2

Operation Operation can be set to On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, including indications, fault locator, event recorder, and disturbance recorder. Operation = Off: Disturbances are not stored. LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed. No disturbance summary is scrolled on the local HMI.

Operation = On: Disturbances are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI and from a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS). LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored. The disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

Post re-trigger can be set to On or Off Postretrig = On: Re-trigger during the set post-fault time is enabled. Postretrig = Off: Re-trigger during the set post fault time is not accepted. 1.3.3 Sequence number Normally, this setting option is seldom used. Each disturbance is assigned a number in the disturbance report. The first disturbance each day normally receives SequenceNo = 0. The value of SequenceNo that can be read in the service report is the number that will be assigned to the next disturbance registered during that day.

366

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

In normal use, the sequence number is increased by one for each new disturbance until it is reset to zero each midnight. 1.3.4 Recording times The different recording times for the disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time). These recording times affect the disturbance recorder and event recorder functions. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording.

1.3.5

Binary signals Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where all available signals are grouped function by function. The 48 signals can be selected among internal logical signals and binary input signals. Each selected signal is registered by the disturbance recorder, event recorder, and indication functions during a recording. The CAP configuration tool is used to configure the signals. A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. This name can comprise up to 13 characters and is set with the CAP configuration tool. For each of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a trigger for the start of the disturbance report (TrigOperation), and if the trigger should be activated at a logical 1 or 0 level (TrigLevel). The indications in the disturbance summary, that are automatically scrolled on the HMI when a disturbance is registered, are also selected from these 48 signals using the indication mask.

1.3.6

Analog signals For each of the 10 analog signals (five voltages and five currents), Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. If fewer than 10 signals are selected, the maximum storing capacity in the flash memories for total recording time becomes longer. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger condition. The same applies for the current signals. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation and triggers even if Operation = Off. A user-defined name for each of the analog input signals can be entered. It can consist of up to 13 characters and is a general setting valid for all relevant functions within the terminal.

1.3.7

Behavior during test mode When the terminal is set to test mode, the behavior of the disturbance report can be controlled by the test mode disturbance report settings Operation and DisturbSummary available on the local HMI. The impact of the settings are according to the following table:

367

Disturbance report

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Table 19:
Operation

Disturbance report settings

DisturbSummary Then the results are...

Off

Off

Disturbances are not stored. LED information is not displayed on the HMI and not stored. No disturbance summary is scrolled on the HMI. Disturbances are not stored. LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are displayed on the local HMI but not stored in the terminal. Disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared. The information is not stored in the terminal. The disturbance report works as in normal mode. Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored. The disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared. All disturbance data that is stored during test mode remains in the terminal when changing back to normal mode.

Off

On

On

On or Off

368

Indications

Chapter 11 Monitoring

2
2.1

Indications
Application
The indications from all the 48 selected binary signals are shown on the local human-machine interface (HMI) and on the Station Monitoring System (SMS) for each recorded disturbance in the disturbance report. The LEDs on the front of the terminal display start and trip indications.

2.2

Functionality
The indications shown on the HMI and SMS give an overview of the status of the 48 event signals during the fault. The indications for each recorded disturbance are presented on the HMI. All selected signals can be internally produced signals or emerge from binary input channels. The indications are registered only during the fault time of a recorded disturbance, as long as any trigger condition is activated. A part or all of these indications can be automatically scrolled on the local HMI after a disturbance is recorded, until acknowledged with the C button on the HMI. They are selected with the indication mask. The signal name for internal logical signals presented on the screen follows the signal name, which can be found in the signal list in each function description of the Technical reference manual. Binary input signals are displayed with their user-defined names. The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:

Steady light Flashing light Dark

In Service Internal fail, the INT--FAIL internal signal is high No power supply

Yellow LED:

Steady light Flashing light

A disturbance report is triggered The terminal is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:

Steady light Flashing light

Trig on binary signal with HMI red LED option set The terminal is in configuration mode

369

Indications

Chapter 11 Monitoring

2.3

Calculations
The parameters for the disturbance report function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

370

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

3
3.1

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Application
Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment. This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations. The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is characterized by great flexibility as far as starting conditions and recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance recorders are not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and they can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another. The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is fully adequate for the recording of disturbances for the protected object. Use available software tools to retrieve the recordings and the evaluation software REVAL to analyze, evaluate and print recordings.

3.2

Functionality
Disturbance recording is based on the continuous collection of network data, analog values and binary signals, in a cyclic buffer. The buffer operates according to the FIFO principle, old data will be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.

(Store recording,active triggers must reset)

tLim Pre-fault trig-on

(New recording started)

Fault

tPost or tLim
(Store recording)

trig-off
(All triggers)

trig-on
(New recording started, Store previous recording)

Post-fault
99000313.vsd

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the data storage continues in another part of the memory. The storing goes on as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. The length of this additional part is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten.

371

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the terminal. 3.2.1 Recording Capacity The recording function can record all analog inputs in the transformer module and up to 48 binary signals. To maximise the use of the memory, the number of analog channels to be recorded is user-selectable by programming and can be set individually for each analog input. The recorded binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals created by the functions. Memory capacity The maximum number of recordings stored in the memory is 10. So depending on the set recording times and the recording of the enabled number of channels, the memory can contain a minimum of six and a maximum of 10 disturbance recordings comprising of both header part and data part. But the header part for the last 10 recordings is always available. Time tagging The terminal has a built-in, real-time clock and calendar. This function is used for time tagging of the recorded disturbances. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. Signal processing The processing of analog signals is handled by a dedicated DSP (digital signal processor). Other functions are implemented in the main CPU. The memory is shared with other functions. The numerical signals coming from the A/D conversion module in serial form are converted to parallel form in a dedicated DSP. The analog trigger conditions are also checked in the DSP. A check of the start conditions is performed by searching for a maximum value. This is a positive peak. The function also seeks a minimum value, which is the negative peak. When this is found, the absolute average value is calculated. If this value is above the set threshold level for the overfunction on the channel in question, an overfunction start on that channel is indicated. The overfunction is indicated with a greater than (>) sign. Similarly, if the average value is below the set threshold level for underfunction on the channel in question, an underfunction start on that channel is indicated. The underfunction is indicated with a less than (<) sign. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function that is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operating time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms in a 50 Hz network. The numerical data, along with the result of the trigger condition evaluation, are transmitted to the main CPU. The main CPU handles these functions: Evaluation of the manual start condition Evaluation of the binary start condition, both for true binary input signals and for internally created logical signals Storage of the numerical values for the analog channels

3.2.2

3.2.3

3.2.4

372

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The numerical data for the analog channels are stored in a cyclic pre-fault buffer in a RAM. When a trigger is activated, the data storage is moved to another area in the RAM, where the data for the fault and the subsequent post-fault period are stored. Thus, a complete disturbance recording comprises the stored data for the pre-fault, fault, and post-fault period. The RAM area for temporary storage of recorded data is divided into sub-areas, one for each recording. The size of a subarea is governed by the sum of the set pre-fault (tPre) and maximum post-trigger (tLim) time. There is a sufficient memory capacity for at least four consecutive recordings with a maximum number of analog channels recorded and with maximum time settings. Should no such area be free at the time of a new trigger, the oldest recording stored in the RAM is overwritten. When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs. This post-recording processing comprises: Merging the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals stored in an event buffer Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording comprises the stored and time-tagged disturbance data along with relevant data from the database for configuration and parameter set-up. Some parameters in the header of a recording are stored with the recording, and some are retrieved from the parameter database in connection with a disturbance. This means that if a parameter that is retrieved from the parameter database was changed between the time of recording and retrieval, the collected information is not correct in all parts. For this reason, all recordings should be transferred to the Station Monitoring System (SMS) workstation and then deleted in the terminal before any such parameters are changed.

3.3

Design
The recordings can be divided into two parts, the header and the data part. The data part contains the numerical values of recorded analog and binary channels. The header contains clearly written basic information about the disturbance. A part of this information is also used by REVAL to reproduce the analog and binary signals in a correct and user-friendly way. Such information is primary and secondary instrument transformer ratings.
Table 20:
Parameter General

Disturbance header
Parameter database Stored with disturance

Station, object and ID Date and time Sequence number CT earthing Time synchronization source

x x x x x

373

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Parameter

Parameter database

Stored with disturance

Collection window parameters tPre, tPost, tLim Prefault phase-to-phase voltage and current RMS values Trig signal and test flag
Analog signals

x x x

Signal name Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Undertrig: level and operation Overtrig: level and operation Undertrig status at time of trig Overtrig status at time of trig Instantaneous phase voltage at time of trig Instantaneous phase current at time of trig Phase voltage and phase current before trig (prefault) Phase voltage and phase current after trig (fault)
Binary signals

x x x x x x x x x x

Signal name Type of contact (trig level) Trig operation Signal status at time of trig Trig status at time of trig x x

x x

3.4

Calculations
The parameters specific for the disturbance recording function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The list of parameters in the Technical reference manual, explains the meaning of the abbreviations used in connection with setting ranges. Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere in the menu tree are linked to the information on a recording. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and PT ratios.

374

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The sequence number of the recordings is a specific parameter for the disturbance recorder and is used to identify the different recordings. By combining the date and the sequence number for a recording, the recording can be uniquely identified. The read value on the local human-machine interface (HMI) display is the sequence number that the next recorded disturbance receives. The number is automatically increased by one for each new recording and is reset to zero at each midnight. The sequence number can also be set manually.

375

Event recorder (ER)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

4
4.1

Event recorder (ER)

Application
When using a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS), an event list can be available for each of the recorded disturbances in the disturbance report. Each list can contain up to 150 time-tagged events. These events are logged during the total recording time, which depends on the set recording times (pre-fault, post-fault and limit time) and the actual fault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all the 48 selected binary signals are logged and time tagged. This list is a useful instrument for evaluating a fault and is a complement to the disturbance recorder. To obtain this event list, the event recorder function (basic in some terminals and optional in others) must be installed.

4.2

Functionality
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the events are collected by the main processing unit, from the 48 selected binary signals. The events can come from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are collected during the total recording time, tRecording, and they are stored in the disturbance report memory at the end of each recording. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event list is the user-defined name that can be programmed in the terminal. The time tagging of events emerging from internal logical signals and binary input channels has a resolution of 1 ms.

4.3

Calculations
The parameters for the event recorder function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The settings of the event recorder consist of the signal selection and the recording times. It is possible to select up to 48 binary signals, either internal signals or signals coming from binary input channels. These signals coincide with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance recorder. The disturbance summary indications that are to scroll automatically on the local human-machine interface (HMI), can only be selected from these 48 event channels. Each of the up to 48 event channels can be selected from the signal list, consisting of all available internal logical signals and all binary input channels. For each of the binary input and output signals, a user-defined name can be programmed.

376

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

5
5.1

Fault locator (FLOC)

Application
The main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast, selective and reliable operation for faults on a protected line section. Besides this, information on distance to fault is very important for those involved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information on the fault location greatly decreases the downtime of the protected lines and increases the total availability of a power system. The distance to the fault, which is calculated with a high accuracy, is stored for the last ten recorded disturbances. This information can be read on the HMI or transferred via serial communication within the Station Monitoring System (SMS) or Station Control System (SCS). The distance to fault can be recalculated for the latest 10 disturbances by using the measuring algorithm for different fault loops or for changed system parameters.

5.2
5.2.1

Functionality
Distance-to-fault locator The distance-to-fault locator (FLOC-) in the REx 5xx terminals is an essential complement to different line protection functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. Thus, the fault can be quickly located for repairs. The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance. The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or miles as selected on the HMI. The accuracy of measurement depends somewhat on the accuracy of the system parameters as entered into REx 5xx (for example source impedances at both ends of the protected line). If some parameters have actually changed in a significant manner relative to the set values, new values can be entered locally or remotely and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved. In order to compensate for the influence of the zero-sequence mutual impedance Zm0 on the distance-to-fault calculation in case of faults on double circuit lines, the terminal has a special current transformer input for the residual current from the parallel line. Any start of the disturbance reporting unit also starts the operation of the FLOC- function. The distance to the fault automatically appears on the local HMI, if the fault is also detected by the phase selection elements within the terminal. The currents and voltages before and during the fault are available via SCS/SMS. The terminal saves, in any other case, the pre-fault and fault values of currents and voltages for a particular disturbance. At any time a calculation of the distance to fault for a selected fault loop can be initiated manually.

377

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The information on distance to fault automatically appears on the local HMI for the first fault only, if more than one fault appears within a time shorter than 10 seconds. Automatic reclosing on persistent faults enables this. In such a case the first set of data is more accurate than the second set. The unit also stores the phasors of currents and voltages for the last faults. A calculation can be initiated locally or remotely. The percentage value is also binary coded, thus the distance to fault value can also be read on binary outputs of the terminal. Additional information is specified in symbols before the distance-to-fault figure:
* E > A non-compensated model was used for calculation Error, the fault was found outside the measuring range The fault is located beyond the line, in forward direction

Two signs can be combined, for example, *>

5.3

Measuring principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance. The calculation algorithm used in the distance-to-fault locator in REx 5xx line-protection terminals compensates for the effect of double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

5.4

Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 198 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.

378

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

L F

ZA

A IA

pZL IF

IB

(1-p).ZL

ZB

UA

RF

xx01000171.vsd

Figure 198: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends. From figure 198 it is evident that:

U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
(Equation 228)

Where: IA IF
p

is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault, is the fault current and is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A IF = ------DA
(Equation 229)

Where: IFA DA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

379

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 230)

In case of phase short circuits, the change in the line currents is used directly. For earth faults, the better defined positive-sequence quantities, which eliminate the influence of the zero sequence currents of the network are used. Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA - RF U A = I A p Z L + ------DA
(Equation 231)

Table 21:
Fault type:

Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

UA IA IFA

L1-N

UL1A

IL1A + KN x INA

3 -- ( I L 1 A I 0A ) 2

L2-N

UL2A

IL2A + KN x INA

3 -- ( I L2A I 0A ) 2
3 -- ( I L3A I0A ) 2
IL1 L 2A

L3-N

UL3A

IL3A + KN x INA

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2-N UL1A-UL2A L2-L3, L2-L3-N L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL2A-UL3A UL3A-UL1A

IL1A - IL2A IL2A - IL3A IL3A - IL1A

IL2L3A IL3L1A

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Z0L Z 1L K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
(Equation 232)

I is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault. In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

380

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

For double lines, the fault equation is:

I FA - RF + I 0P Z 0M U A = I A p Z 1L + ------DA
(Equation 233)

Where: I0P Z0M DA is a zero sequence current of the parallel line, is a mutual zero sequence impedance and is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B

(Equation 234)

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z 0M I 0P Z0L Z 1L - + ---------------- ------K N = ----------------------3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A
(Equation 235)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases. Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 231 or 234 is a function of p, the general equation 233 can be written in the form:
2

p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
(Equation 236)

Where:

UA ZB - + --------------------------+1 K 1 = --------------I A ZL Z L + ZA DD
(Equation 237)

UA ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K2 = ------------- IA Z L Z L + Z A DD
(Equation 238)

381

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

IF A ZA + ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K 3 = -------------- I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
(Equation 239)

and: ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines. IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table. KN is calculated automatically according to equation 235. ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 236 applies to both single and parallel lines. Equation 236 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
(Equation 240)
2

p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 241)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 241, and then inserted to equation 240. According to equation 240, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation. Equation 240 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected. If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.

5.5

The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:
U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F I A
(Equation 242)

Where: IA is according to table 21.

382

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models do not function and the display indicates whether the non-compensated model was used when calculating the distance to the fault.

5.6

Design
When calculating the distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are filtered from disturbance data stored in digital sample buffers. When the disturbance report function is triggered, the fault locator function starts to calculate the frequency of the analog channel U1. If the calculation fails, a default frequency is read from the database to ensure further execution of the function. Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking the non-periodic changes. The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5 and U5. If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation of the complex values of currents and voltages. The estimation uses samples during one period before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values. If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values starts 1.5 period before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on the shape of the signals. The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation of pre-fault trip values. The phase selectors from the distance protection function provide the necessary information for the selection of the loop to be used for the calculation. The following loops are used for different types of faults: for 3 phase faults: loop L1 - L2. for 2 phase faults: the loop between the faulted phases. for 2 phase to earth faults: the loop between the faulted phases. for phase to earth faults: the phase to earth loop.

5.7

Calculations
The parameters for the fault locator function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The list of parameters (see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual) explains the meaning of the abbreviations. Figure 199 also presents these system parameters graphically. Note, that all impedance values relate to their secondary values and to the total length of the protected line. The conversion procedure follows the same rules as for the distance-protection function.

383

Fault locator (FLOC)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1A+jX1A Z0m=Z0m+jX0m R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1B+jX1B

en01000131.vsd

Figure 199: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function. For a single-circuit line, the figures for mutual zero-sequence impedance (X0M, R0M) are set at zero. The source impedance is not constant in the network. However, this has a negligible influence on the accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, because only the phase angle of the distribution factor has an influence on the accuracy. The phase angle of the distribution factor is normally very low and practically constant, because it is dominated by the positive-sequence line impedance, which has an angle close to 90. Always set the source impedance resistance to values other than zero. If the actual values are not known, the values that correspond to the source impedance characteristic angle of 85 give satisfactory results.

384

Trip value recorder (TVR)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

6
6.1

Trip value recorder (TVR)

Application
The main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast, selective and reliable operation for faults on a protected object. Besides this, information on the values of the currents and voltages before and during the fault is valuable to understand the severity of the fault. The trip value recorder in the REx 5xx series of terminals provides this information on the HMI and via SCS/SMS. The function is an optional software module in the terminal. The function calculates the pre-fault and fault values of currents and voltages and presents them as phasors with amplitude and argument.

6.2

Design
Pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are filtered from disturbance data stored in digital sample buffers. When the disturbance report function is triggered, the trip value recorder function starts to calculate the frequency of the analog channel U1. If the calculation fails, a default frequency is read from database to ensure further execution of the function. Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking the non-periodic changes. The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5 and U5. If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation of the complex values of currents and voltages. The estimation uses samples during one period before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values. If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the prefault values starts 1.5 period before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The postfault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on the shape of the signals. The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation of pre-fault trip values.

6.3

Calculations
The parameters for the trip value recorder function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Customer specific names for all the ten analog inputs (five currents and five voltages) can be entered. Each name can have up to 13 alphanumeric characters. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

385

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

7
7.1

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Application
Fast, reliable supervision of different analog quantities is of vital importance during the normal operation of a power system. Operators in the control centres can, for example: Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network Supervise the busbar voltage and frequency

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Current and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic information on measured phase currents and voltages in different points within the power system. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input measuring quantities to power and energy meters, protective devices and so on. Further processing of this information occurs within different control, protection, and monitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchical systems in the secondary power system.

7.2

Functionality
The REx 5xx protection, control, and monitoring terminals have as basic the functionality to measure and further process information about up to five input currents and five input voltages. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of terminal and built-in options. Additional information is also available: Mean values of measured currents I in the first three current measuring channels (I1, I2, I3). Mean values of measured voltages U in the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3). Three-phase active power P as measured by the first three current measuring channels (I1, I2, I3) and the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3). Three-phase reactive power Q as measured by the first three current measuring channels (I1, I2, I3) and the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3). Three-phase apparent power S as measured by the first three current (I1, I2, I3) and the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3). Frequency f.

The accuracy of measurement depends on the requirements. Basic accuracy satisfies the operating (information) needs. An additional calibration of measuring channels is necessary and must be ordered separately when the requirements on accuracy of the measurement are higher. Refer to the technical data and ordering particulars for the particular terminal. The information on measured quantities is then available for the user at different locations: Locally by means of the local human-machine interface (HMI) unit. Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC). Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)

386

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

7.2.1

Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS).

User-defined measuring ranges Each measuring channel has an independent measuring range from the others. This allows the users to select the most suitable measuring range for each measuring quantity on each monitored object of the power system. This gives a possibility to optimize the functionality of the power system. Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channel by means of four built-in operating thresholds, figure 200. The monitoring has two different modes of operating: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values. Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the LowWarn or LowAlarm pre-set values.

7.2.2

Y HIALARM = 1 HiAlarm HIALARM = 0 HIWARN = 1 HiWarn HIWARN = 0 Hysteresis

t LOWWARN = 0 LowWarn LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 0 LowAlarm LOWALARM = 1

99000507.vsd

Figure 200: Presentation of the operating limits. Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal: HIWARN HIALARM LOWWARN LOWALARM

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 200.

387

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel. 7.2.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available: Periodic reporting. Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel. Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series. Dead-band reporting.

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision: Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS). Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS).

Amplitude dead-band supervision If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user, then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measuring sample. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 201 shows an example of periodic reporting with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one second from each others.

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Y3 Y2 Y Y Y Y

Value Reported Value Reported Y Y

Y1

t
99000529.vsd

Figure 201: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

388

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits. Integrating dead-band supervision The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit, figure 202, where an example of reporting with integrating dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one second from each other. The last value reported, Y1 in figure 202 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Y A >= pre-set value

A1 >= pre-set value Y3 Y2 A1 Value Reported

A2 >= pre-set value A2 Y4 Value Reported A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value

A4 A3 A5
A6

Value Reported (1st) A Y1

A7

Value Reported

Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd

Figure 202: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision. Periodic reporting The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time intervals between 1 and 3600 s. The measuring channel reports the value even if it has not changed for more than the set limits of amplitude or integrating dead-band supervision. To disable periodic reporting, set the reporting time interval to 0 s, figure 203.

389

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported

Y3 Y2 Y4

Value Reported

Y1

Y5 t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Value 5

99000528.vsd

Figure 203: Periodic reporting. Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision The newly measured value is reported: After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired or When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision function.

The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

390

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Value Reported Value Reported (1st)

Value Reported

Value Reported

Value Reported Y Y Y Y

Value Reported

Value Reported Value Reported Y Y

Y1

Y Y

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

t
99000531.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 204: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel. Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision. This means that the new value is reported only if the set time period expired and if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observed time, figure 205 and figure 206. The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

391

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported

Value not Reported

Value not Reported

Y2 Y Y

Y Y

Value Reported

Y1

Y3 t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

t
99000508.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 205: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series.

A1 < pre-set value Y Value Reported (1st) Value not Reported

A1 + A2 >= preset value Value Reported

Y1

A1

A2 Y2

t (*) Value 1 Value 2

t (*) Value 3 t
99000509.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt Figure 206: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

392

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Combination of periodic reportings The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for the dead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 22 presents the dependence between different settings and the type of reporting for the new value of a measured quantity.
Table 22:
EnDeadB*

Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnIDeadB* EnDeadBP* RepInt* Reporting of the new value

Off Off

Off On

Off On

0 t>0

No measured values is reported. The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, during this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series). The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if, during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series). The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at least one of the dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series). The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limits are exceeded. The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded. The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits was exceeded. The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If the dead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when the corresponding dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision).

On

Off

On

t>0

On

On

On

t>0

Off On On x

On Off On x

Off Off Off Off

0 0 0 t>0

* Please see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual for further explanation

7.3

Design
The design of the alternating quantities measuring function follows the design of all REx 5xx-series protection, control, and monitoring terminals that have distributed functionality, where the decision levels are placed as closely as possible to the process. The measuring function uses the same input current and voltage signals as other protection and monitoring functions within the terminals. The number of input current and voltage transformers depends on the type of terminal and options included. The maximum possible configuration comprises five current and five voltage input channels. Measured input currents and voltages are first filtered in analog filters and then converted to numerical information by an A/D converter, which operates with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

393

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The numerical information on measured currents and voltages continues over a serial link to one of the built-in digital signal processors (DSP). An additional Fourier filter numerically filters the received information, and the DSP calculates the corresponding values for the following quantities:

5I A 5U
CALIBRATION

SCS HMI

DSP

PROCESSING SMS LOGIC

99000510.vsd

Figure 207: Simplified diagram for the function This information is available to the user for operational purposes.

7.4

Calculations
The parameters for the monitoring of AC analog measurements function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. The user can determine the rated parameters for the terminal. Rated frequency fr Position of the earthing point of the main CTs (CTEarth), which determines whether the CT earthing point is towards the protected object or the busbar

The other basic terminal parameters, related to any single analog input, can be set under the configuration menu. The user can determine the base values, the primary CTs and VTs ratios, and the user-defined names for the analog inputs of the terminal. U1: U2: ac voltage base value for analog input U2: U2b ac voltage base value for analog input U1: U1b voltage transformer input U1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U1Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U1: Name

394

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

U3: U4: U5: I1: I2: I3: I4: I5:

voltage transformer input U2 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U2Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U2: Name

ac voltage base value for analog input U3: U3b voltage transformer input U3 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U3Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U3: Name

ac voltage base value for analog input U4: U4b voltage transformer input U4 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U4Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U4: Name

ac voltage base value for analog input U5: U5b voltage transformer input U5 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U5Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U5: Name

ac current base value for analog input I1: I1b current transformer input I1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I1Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I1: Name

ac current base value for analog input I2: I2b current transformer input I2 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I2Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I2: Name

ac current base value for analog input I3: I3b current transformer input I3 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I3Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I3: Name

ac current base value for analog input I4: I4b current transformer input I4 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I4Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I4: Name

ac current base value for analog input I5: I5b

395

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

U: I: P: Q: S: f:

current transformer input I5 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I5Scale Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I5: Name

Name (of up to 13 characters) of the average voltage U: Name

Name (of up to 13 characters) of the average current I: Name

Name (of up to 13 characters) of the active power P: Name

Name (of up to 13 characters) of the reactive power Q: Name

Name (of up to 13 characters) of the apparent power S: Name

Name (of up to 13 characters) of the frequency value f: Name

The names of the first 10 quantities automatically appears in the REVAL evaluation program for each reported disturbance. The PST Parameter Setting Tool has to be used in order to set all remaining parameters that are related to different alternating measuring quantities. In the settings menu it is possible to set all monitoring operating values and the hysteresis directly in the basic units of the measured quantities for each channel and for each quantity. The dead-band limits can be set directly in the corresponding units of the observed quantity for the: Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS) Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS)

The IDBS area is defined by the following formula:

IDeadB IDBS = --------------------------- = IDe adB ts ReadFreq

(Equation 243)

Where:

396

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

IDeadB ReadFreq ts = 1/ReadFreq

is a set operating value for IDBS in corresponding unit. is the reading frequency. It has a constant value of 1Hz. is the time between two samples (fixed to 1s).

The setting value for IDBS is IDeadB, and is expressed in the measuring unit of the monitored quantity (kV, A, MW, Mvar, MVA or Hz). The value is reported if the time integral area is greater than the value IDBS. If a 0.1 Hz variation in the frequency for 10 minutes (600 s) is the event that should cause the reporting of the frequency monitored value, than the set value for IDeadB is 60 Hz. The hysteresis can be set under the setting Hysteres. Alarm and warning thresholds have to be set respectively under the settings HiAlarm (LowAlarm) and HiWarn (LowWarn).

Note!
It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband in an optimized way to minimize the load on the station bus.

397

Increased accuray of AC input quantities (IMA)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

8
8.1

Increased accuray of AC input quantities (IMA)

Application
Select the increased accuracy option to increase the measuring accuracy of analog input channels, thus also increasing the accuracy of calculated quantities such as frequency, active and reactive power.

8.2

Functionality
The increased accuracy is reached by a factory calibration of the hardware. Calibration factors are stored in the terminal. If the transformer input module, A/D conversion module or the main processing module is replaced, the terminal must be factory calibrated again to retain the increased accuracy.

398

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

9
9.1

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Application
Fast, reliable supervision of different analog quantities is of vital importance during the normal operation of a power system. Operators in the control centres can, for example: Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network Supervise the busbar voltages Check the temperature of power transformers, shunt reactors Monitor the gas pressure in circuit breakers

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Current and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic information on measured phase currents and voltages in different points within the power system. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input measuring quantities to power and energy meters. Different measuring transducers provide information on electrical and non-electrical measuring quantities such as voltage, current, temperature, and pressure. In most cases, the measuring transducers change the values of the measured quantities into the direct current. The current value usually changes within the specified mA range in proportion to the value of the measured quantity. Further processing of the direct currents obtained on the outputs of different measuring converters occurs within different control, protection, and monitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchical systems in the secondary power system.

9.2

Functionality
The REx 5xx control, protection and monitoring terminal have a built-in option to measure and further process information from 6 up to 36 different direct current information from different measuring transducers. Six independent measuring channels are located on each independent mA input module and the REx 5xx terminals can accept from one up to six independent mA input modules, depending on the case size. Refer to the technical data and ordering particulars for the particular terminal. Information about the measured quantities is then available to the user on different locations: Locally by means of the local human-machine-interface (HMI) Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC) Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS) Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS)

9.2.1

User-defined measuring ranges The measuring range of different direct current measuring channels is settable by the user independent on each other within the range between -25 mA and +25 mA in steps of 0.01 mA. It is only necessary to select the upper operating limit I_Max higher than the lower one I_Min.

399

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

The measuring channel can have a value of 2 of the whole range I_Max - I_Min above the upper limit I_Max or below the lower limit I_Min, before an out-of-range error occurs. This means that with a nominal range of 0-10 mA, no out-of-range event will occur with a value between -0.2 mA and 10.2 mA. User can this way select for each measuring quantity on each monitored object of a power system the most suitable measuring range and this way optimize a complete functionality together with the characteristics of the used measuring transducer. 9.2.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity The user can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channel by means of six built-in operating limits, figure 208. Two of them are defined by the operating range selection: I_Max as the upper and I_Min as the lower operating limit. The other four operating limits operate in two different modes: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the LowWarn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Y RMAXAL = 1 HIALARM = 1 HiAlarm HIALARM = 0 HIWARN = 1 HIWARN = 0 Hysteresis RMAXAL = 0

I_Max

HiWarn

LOWWARN = 0 LowWarn LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 0 LowAlarm LOWALARM = 1 I_Min RMINAL = 1 RMINAL = 0

99000532.vsd

Figure 208: Presentation of the operating limits Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal: RMAXAL HIWARN HIALARM

400

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

LOWWARN LOWALARM RMINAL

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 208. The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel. 9.2.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor in the unit, HMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available: Periodic reporting Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series Dead-band reporting

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision: Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS). Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS).

Amplitude dead-band supervision If the changed value compared to the last reported value is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by users, and if this is detected by a new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 209 shows an example of periodic reporting with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated at time intervals depending on the sampling frequency chosen by the user (SampRate setting). After the new value is reported, the new Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the new Y set limits.

401

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Y3 Y2 Y Y Y Y

Value Reported Value Reported Y Y

Y1

t
99000529.vsd

Figure 209: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting Integrating dead-band supervision The measured value is updated if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit figure 210, where an example of reporting with integrating dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated at time intervals depending on the sampling frequency chosen by the user (SampRate setting). The last value reported, Y1 in figure 210 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with low variations that can last for relatively long periods.

402

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Y A >= pre-set value

A1 >= pre-set value Y3 Y2 A1 Value Reported

A2 >= pre-set value A2 Y4 Value Reported A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value

A4 A3 A5
A6

Value Reported (1st) A Y1

A7

Value Reported

Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd

Figure 210: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision Periodic reporting The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time intervals between 1 and 3600 s (setting RepInt). The measuring channel reports the value even if it has not changed for more than the set limits of amplitude or integrating dead-band supervision, figure 211. To disable periodic reporting, set the reporting time interval to 0 s.

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported

Y3 Y2 Y4

Value Reported

Y1

Y5 t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Value 5

99000528.vsd

Figure 211: Periodic reporting

403

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision The newly measured value is reported: After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, OR; When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision function.

The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.
Value Reported

Value Reported Value Reported (1st)

Value Reported

Value Reported Y Y Y Y

Value Reported

Value Reported Value Reported Y Y

Y1

Y Y

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

t
99000531.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 212: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel. Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision. This means that the new value is reported only if the set time period expired AND if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observed time figure 213 and figure 214. The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

404

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported

Value not Reported

Value not Reported

Y2 Y Y

Y Y

Value Reported

Y1

Y3 t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

t
99000508.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 213: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series

A1 < pre-set value Y Value Reported (1st) Value not Reported

A1 + A2 >= preset value Value Reported

Y1

A1

A2 Y2

t (*) Value 1 Value 2

t (*) Value 3 t
99000509.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 214: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

405

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Combination of periodic reportings The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for the dead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 23 presents the dependence between different settings and the type of reporting for the new value of a measured quantity.
Table 23:
EnDeadB *

Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnIDeadB * EnDeadBP * RepInt * Reporting of the new value

Off Off

Off On

Off On

0 t>0

No measured values is reported The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, during this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series) The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if, during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series) The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at least one of the dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series) The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limits are exceeded The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits was exceeded The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If the dead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when the corresponding dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision)

On

Off

On

t>0

On

On

On

t>0

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On x

On x

Off Off

0 t>0

* Please see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual for further explanation

9.3

Design
The design of the mA input modules follows the design of all REx 5xx-series protection, control, and monitoring terminals that have distributed functionality, where the decision levels are placed as closely as possible to the process. Each independent measuring module contains all necessary circuitry and functionality for measurement of six independent measuring quantities related to the corresponding measured direct currents.

406

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

On the accurate input shunt resistor (R), the direct input current (from the measuring converter) is converted into a proportional voltage signal (the voltage drop across the shunt resistor is in proportion to the measured current). Later, the voltage signal is processed within one differential type of measuring channel figure 215.

REx 5xx Terminal

Measuring Converter

Udc

DC DC

99000533.vsd

Figure 215: Simplified diagram for the function The measured voltage is filtered by the low-pass analog filter before entering the analog to digital converter (A/D). Users can set the sampling frequency of the A/D converter between 5 Hz and 255 Hz to adapt to different application requirements as best as possible. The digital information is filtered by the digital low-pass filter with the (sinx/x)3 response. The filter notch frequency automatically follows the selected sampling frequency. The relation between the frequency corresponding to the suppression of -3 dB and the filter notch frequency corresponds to the equation:
f 3dB = 0, 262 fnotch
(Equation 244)

Using optocouplers and DC/DC conversion elements that are used separately for each measuring channel, the input circuitry of each measuring channel is galvanically separated from: The internal measuring circuits The control microprocessor on the board

A microprocessor collects the digitized information from each measuring channel. The microprocessor serves as a communication interface to the main processing module (MPM). All processing of the measured signal is performed on the module so that only the minimum amount of information is necessary to be transmitted to and from the MPM. The measuring module receives information from the MPM on setting and the command parameters; it reports the measured values and additional informationaccording to needs and values of different parameters.

407

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Each measuring channel is calibrated very accurately during the production process. The continuous internal zero offset and full-scale calibration during the normal operation is performed by the A/D converter. The calibration covers almost all analog parts of the A/D conversion, but neglects the shunt resistance. Each measuring channel has built in a zero-value supervision, which greatly rejects the noise generated by the measuring transducers and other external equipment. The value of the measured input current is reported equal to zero (0) if the measured primary quantity does not exceed 0.5% of the maximum measuring range. The complete measuring module is equipped with advanced self-supervision. Only the outermost analog circuits cannot be monitored. The A/D converter, optocouplers, digital circuitry, and DC/DC converters, are all supervised on the module. Over the CAN bus, the measuring module sends a message to the MPM for any detected errors on the supervised circuitry.

9.4

Calculations
The PST Parameter Setting Tool has to be used in order to set all the parameters that are related to different DC analog quantities. Users can set the 13 character name for each measuring channel. All the monitoring operating values and the hysteresis can be set directly in the mA of the measured input currents from the measuring transducers. The measured quantities can be displayed locally and/or remotely according to the corresponding modules that are separately set for each measuring channel by the users (five characters). The relation between the measured quantity in the power system and the setting range of the direct current measuring channel corresponds to this equation:

ValueMax ValueMin --------------------------------------------------Valu e = ValueMin + ( I IMin ) ---------IMax IMin

(Equation 245)

Where:
I_Min I_Max ValueMin ValueMax Value is the set value for the minimum operating current of a channel in mA. is the set value for the maximum operating current of a channel in mA. is the value of the primary measuring quantity corresponding to the set value of minimum operating current of a channel, I_Min. is the value of the primary measuring quantity corresponding to the set value of maximum operating current of a channel, I_Max. is the actual value of the primary measured quantity.

Figure 216 shows the relationship between the direct mA current I and the actual value of the primary measured quantity, Value.

408

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

Value

ValueMax

ValueMin IMax - ValueMax IMin IMax - IMin IMin IMax I

ValueMin

99000534.vsd

Figure 216: Relationship between the direct current (I) and the measured quantity primary value (Value) The dead-band limits can be set directly in the mA of the input direct current for: Amplitude dead-band supervision ADBS Integrating dead-band supervision IDBS

The IDBS area [mAs] is defined by the following equation:

I DeadB - = IDeadB t s IDBS = ----------------------------SampRate

(Equation 246)

409

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

Chapter 11 Monitoring

where: IDeadB SampRate ts = 1/SampRate is the set value of the current level for IDBS in mA. is the sampling rate (frequency) set value, in Hz. is the time between two samples in s.

If a 0.1 mA variation in the monitored quantity for 10 minutes (600 s) is the event that should cause the trigger of the IDBS monitoring (reporting of the value because of IDBS threshold operation) and the sampling frequency (SampRate) of the monitored quantity is 5 Hz, than the set value for IDBS (IDeadB) will be 300 mA:

IDBS = 0.1 600 = 60 [ mA s ]

(Equation 247)

IDeadB = IDBS SampRate = 60 5 = 300 [ mA ]

(Equation 248)

The polarity of connected direct current input signal can be changed by setting the ChSign to On or Off. This way it is possible to compensate by setting the possible wrong connection of the direct current leads between the measuring converter and the input terminals of the REx 5xx series unit. The setting table lists all setting parameters with additional explanation.

Note!
It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband in an optimized way to minimize the load on the station bus.

410

About this chapter

Chapter 12 Metering

Chapter 12 Metering
About this chapter This chapter describes the metering functions.

411

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

Chapter 12 Metering

1
1.1

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

Application
The pulse counter function provides the Substation Automation system with the number of pulses, which have been accumulated in the REx 5xx terminal during a defined period of time, for calculation of, for example, energy values. The pulses are captured on the Binary Input Module (BIM) that is read by the pulse counter function. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via LON to the station HMI or read via SPA as a service value. The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses for kWh and kvarh in both directions from external energy meters. Up to 12 binary inputs in a REx 5xx can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz.

1.2

Functionality
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are read from the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset, and an event is created. The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is synchronised with absolute system time. That means, a cycle time of one minute will generate a pulse counter reading every full minute. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI). The pulse counter in REx 5xx supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialisation of the terminal or by turning the pulse counter operation parameter Off/On. The reported value to station HMI over the LON bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of: Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.

412

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

Chapter 12 Metering

1.3

Design
The function can be regarded as a function block with a few inputs and outputs. The inputs are divided into two groups: settings and connectables (configuration). The outputs are divided into three groups: signals (binary), service value for SPA, and an event for LON. Figure 217 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.

SingleCmdFunc OUTx SingleCmdFunc OUTx I/O-module BIx Pulse INPUT OUT Pulse length >1s

PulseCounter BLOCK INVALID RESTART TIMIT_VAL BLOCKED NEW_VAL BIM_CONN NAME

EVENT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

"PCxx-name"

SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.Cycle time = 30s...60min 3.Analog Event Mask = No/Report

Database Pulse counter value: 0...2147483647 LON analog event data msg ( M_PC_T) *Identity *Value *Time *Pulse Counter Quality

xx00000543.vsd

Figure 217: Overview of the pulse counter function The BLOCK and TMIT_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to TMIT_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second. The BIM_CONN input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM). If BIM_CONN is connected to another function block, the INVALID signal is activated to indicate the configuration error. The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 19 characters. Each pulse counter function block has four output signals: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED, and NEW_VAL. These signals can be connected to an Event function block for event recording.

413

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

Chapter 12 Metering

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration. The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after terminal start-up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle. The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked: The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report.

1.4
1.4.1

Calculations
Setting From the PST Parameter Setting Tool under SETTINGS/PC01-12 (Pulse Counter) in the terminal tree, these parameters can be set individually for each pulse counter: Operation = Off/On Cycle Time = 30s / 1min / 1min30s / 2min / 2min30s / 3min / 4min / 5min / 6min / 7min30s / 10min / 12min / 15min / 20min / 30min / 60min.

Under EVENT MASKS/Analogue events/Pulse Counter in PST, the reporting of the analogue events can be masked: Event Mask = No Events/Report Events

The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the pulse counter function block is made with the CAP configuration tool. On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 ms, that is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms. The input oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That means that the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. From the PST under CONFIGURATION/Binary I/O-modules/Oscillation in the terminal tree and from the local HMI, the values for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed.

Note!
The setting is common for all channels on a Binary Input Module, that is, if changes of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board used for pulse counting.

414

About this chapter

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

About this chapter This chapter describes the system protection and control functions.

415

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

1
1.1

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Application
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large jumps in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, which disturb the balance of energy in the system, can cause oscillations of mechanical masses referred to as power swings. In a recoverable situation the oscillations will decay and stable operation will be resumed; in a non-recoverable situation the power swings become so severe that the synchronism is lost between the generators of the system, a condition referred to as pole slipping. In the case of pole slipping, the excitation of the machines is generally intact, but there are strong oscillations of real and reactive power. Even though the modern power systems are designed and operate with high degree of security against power swings and even more against pole slipping, these two phenomena may occur especially during abnormal system conditions. If the pole slipping condition is allowed to persists in smaller parts of a power system than other machines may follow and the stability of a system as a whole is in danger. Apart from the electrical phenomena, oscillations of mechanical masses also expose the generators and other equipment to considerable pulsating mechanical stresses. Available technology and the costs of the corresponding protection devices dictated in the past the use of the pole slip protection relays only close to the power generators. They were for this reason treated as a part of a generator protection scheme. Their use deeper in the network was not so common. Such approach resulted often in unselective splits of already troubled power systems, which have lost some valuable generating capacities. Modern, functional library oriented approach within the microprocessor based protection terminals makes it possible to utilize the pole slip protection function more often and deeper in the power network. This way it enables better selectivity of the pole slip protection and intact power generation in different islands. A separate pole slip protection function still remains as a dedicated generator protection in the vicinity of synchronous machines, to protect them against the oscillations which could harm in great extent their functionality The Pole Slip Protection (PSP) function as built in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals, and described in this document comprises all functionality necessary for the detection, evaluation and corresponding reaction on the pole slipping phenomena in power systems. It is applicable together with different line protection functions (distance protection, line differential protection) deeper in the power network as well as a part of a generator protection system in power plants.

1.1.1

Oscillations of mechanical masses in power system Figure 218 presents a two machine system with a power line between busbars A and B. The electromotive forces EA and EB can differ in their magnitude. It is important, that their relative phase angle
= A B
(Equation 249)

416

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

changes with time. The voltage difference

UD = E A EB
(Equation 250)

changes in its magnitude and direction and causes this way the current between both generators to change accordingly. Figure 218: Two machine system. Figure 219 presents an example of the voltage and current measured in one phase of a line between two generators during the oscillations caused by the changing of the relative angle . The minimum value of current corresponds to the minimum angle between the electromotive forces. The maximum value of the current corresponds to the condition when the voltages

EA
(Equation 251)

and

EB
(Equation 252)

have the opposite direction.

100

100

50

30 .iL1 e AL1 ( t ) 0.9 0.95 1 1.05 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7

50

100 100 0.9 t

99001020.vsd
1.75

Figure 219: Current (solid line) and voltage (dashed line) in relay point during the pole slip condition.

417

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Oscillations in measured voltage and current reflect naturally also in impedance, measured by the impedance (distance) relays. Figure 220 a) and 220 b) present two examples of the impedance trajectories in impedance plane during the system oscillations. Both figures include also the example of an operating characteristics of a modern distance protection. The measured impedance can enter the operating area of the distance protection and causes its unwanted operation. It is for this reason necessary to detect the oscillations and prevent such unwanted operations before the measured impedance enters the distance protection operating characteristics.

jX EA > EB

jX

EA = EB

R EA < EB a) b)
99001021.vsd

Figure 220: Impedance trajectories in relay point during the pole slip (figure a) and power swing (figure b) phenomena. The recoverable oscillations are understood under the expression "power-swing". The generators in a two-machine system remain during the disturbance in synchronism. They only change their relative angle from one to another value over a transient period. The impedance locus might enter the operating characteristic of the distance relay (see Figure 220 b), but generally does not cross the complete R-X plain. In a non-recoverable situation the oscillations are so severe, that the synchronism is lost between the generators of a system. The condition is referred to as a pole-slip. At least one generator starts to change its frequency and the resulting slip frequency may increase up to 10 Hz (in 50 Hz system). The measured impedance usually enters the distance relay"s operating characteristic and crosses the complete impedance plain, as presented schematically on Figure 220 a. Oscillations during abnormal system conditions Modern power systems operate very close to their technical limits but are also built with higher security against the mechanical oscillations than ever before. Today it is nearly impossible to start the oscillations only by very big difference in produced and consumed power. At the same time some short oscillations are much more frequent than before. They are initiated by some bigger events (faults) in power systems and disappear relatively fast after the normal operating conditions have been restored (e.g. single-pole autoreclosing).

418

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 221 presents an impedance trajectory as seen on protected power line by a distance protection function in phase L2 during the dead time of a single pole autoreclosing, after the single phase-to-earth fault L1-N has been cleared. The circuit breaker has been successfully closed after the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing has expired.

90 120

3
60

112.829

2
150 30

4
ZPS L2 t 180 0 50 100

1
0 25.451

210

330

240 270 arg ZPS L2 t

300
99001022.vsd

Figure 221: Impedance trajectory as seen by a L2-N impedance measuring element. The remarks on Figure 221 have the following meaning: 1. Load impedance in phase L2 during normal operating conditions. 2. Impedance measured during the L1-N fault. 3. Impedance trajectory and its direction during the dead time of a single pole autoreclosing in phase L1. 4. Operating characteristic of the line distance protection.

419

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The impedance as measured by a healthy phase measuring elements (phase L2 in case on Figure 221 might enter the operating area of the distance protection in impedance plain and initiate an unwanted trip. Modern distance protection devices must incorporate a corresponding functionality, which detects the oscillations in each phase separately and prevents the unnecessary operation of the main protection function. The oscillation in power system should be recognized preferably by the measuring elements, if detected simultaneously in more than one phase. The operating logic, which requires the detection in two out of three phases increases in great extent the security and dependability of an applied protection scheme in special operating conditions, like: Oscillations during dead time of single pole auto-reclosing. Slow increase of initial fault currents at different kinds of high resistive earth faults.

A special logic circuit, as applied in the pole slip protection used by the REx 5xx terminals makes possible an adaptive use of the so called "one out of three" or "two out of three" phase detection criteria. This possibility becomes important for the correct detection of the oscillations in power systems with multipole tripping and reclosing function applied on double-circuit parallel operating EHV transmission lines. Speed of oscillations Figure 222 presents informatively the phase currents as recorded at one end of the protected 500 kV transmission line during the pole-slip situation in a power system. The oscillations have been initiated by a single-phase-to-earth fault in phase L1 (increased magnitude of the phase current).

7.116

i L1s t i L2s t i L3s t 2

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

3.238

99001023.vsd

4 10 t 940

Figure 222: Phase currents in relay point during the pole slip conditions caused by a L1-N fault. The pole-slip frequency is in most cases not constant. The initial oscillation speed is generally low and increases with time if the system starts the non recoverable oscillation.

420

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The described dependency might influence the dependability of the distance protection scheme at slowly developing single-phase-to-earth faults. It can at the same time jeopardize the security of the same protection scheme when the oscillations obtain higher speed. The pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals uses the adaptive criteria for the impedance speed to distinguish between the slow initial faults and increased speed of the measured impedance at consecutive oscillations. 1.1.2 Requirements on protection systems during pole slip conditions in network Two, generally contradictory requirements apply today on the protection systems when mechanical masses in power systems start to oscillate. The requirements depend on the general role, which the protected element plays within the power system. Figure 223 presents a transmission line connecting a big production (power plants) with the rest of the power system, which depends very much on the delivered electric energy from the external resources. The goal in such case is to keep the protected element (power line) of a power system in operation under all system conditions as long as possible. This requirement is extended even to emergency conditions, i.e. two phase operation of power line during dead time of a single-pole autoreclosing. It is at the same time expected from the line protection system to operate selectively for all line faults, which may occur during the oscillations. In such case it is recommended to use within the REx 5xx terminals the so called Power Swing Detection (PSD) function together with Power Swing Logic (PSL).

GENERATION

~ ~ ~
99001024.vsd

TRANSMISSION LINES

POWER SYSTEM

Figure 223: Power line delivering the electrical power to the consuming area. Generator protection must prevent damages to the generators in the power plant independent of all other system conditions. The pole slip protection is in such case used closed to the generators. The second typical network configuration is presented in Figure 224. Inter-connection transmission lines connect two big and generally independent power systems. Mechanical oscillations appear in this case between two different systems and are dangerous for the stability of each system separately.

421

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

SYSTEM A

TRANSMISSION LINE

SYSTEM B

99001025.vsd

Figure 224: Transmission lines interconnecting two big power systems. The goal in this particular case of a pole slip situation is to trip selectively (from the power system point-of-view) the connecting element(s) between two different systems. The disconnection of a healthy power line is not selective in a classical way of understanding, but prevents the total collapse of at least one independent system. The pole slip protection is in such case installed on the interconnection lines and sometimes even deeper in each power system. Oscillations and faults in power system It has been already mentioned that the oscillations in modern power systems appear as the consequences of sudden changes, caused either by big changes of a load or by different faults. Faults on different elements may appear also during the mechanical oscillations. Very high demands are put today in such cases on modern protection equipment. The modern power utilities permit no more any decrease of either dependability or security of the protection systems for the faults in primary system when their mechanical masses oscillate due to one or another reason. The protection system must remain stable for all kinds of external faults and must operate reliably for all internal faults. Some longer operating times are acceptable but should not jeopardize the complete system selectivity. Integration of different protection functions within the same modern numerical protection terminals makes it possible to combine their operation and program their interdependence under different system operating conditions. Fast development of modern digital communication systems increases additionally the application of such adaptive functionality.

1.2
1.2.1

Functionality
Theory of operation Measured impedance in relay point on a protected power line, see figure 218, may follow different trajectories when the generators of a two machine system start to oscillate. Some of the most characteristic trajectories are presented on figure 225.

422

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

jX 4 5

ZSB

ZL 9

3 7

10 R

8 12

11

6
99001026.vsd

ZSA

Figure 225: Impedance trajectories during oscillations in power system and basic operating characteristics of the pole slip protection. The impedance measuring device is located in the origin of the R-X plane. The ZSA source impedance is located behind the relay. The ZSB source impedance presents the continuation of the line impedance ZL. The complete impedance between the ends of vectors ZSA and ZSB is called a system impedance ZS. The magnitude and the position of the system impedance within the impedance plain determines the electrical centre of the possible oscillation. The electrical center ZCO is located in the middle of the system impedance, when both EMFs have the same magnitude.

Z S = ZS A + Z L + ZS B = R S + jX S
(Equation 253)

423

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

1 - Z S Z SA = RC O + jXCO Z CO = -2
(Equation 254)

The following equation apply in general conditions, when the EMFs at both generators are not equal:

ZS - ZA ZCO = ------------------EB --------1+ EA

(Equation 255)

The oscillation detection characteristics 1 and 2 in figure 225 are in their resistive part parallel to the system impedance as long as its characteristic angle S exceeds 75 degrees. The same applies also to the resistive tripping characteristics 3 and 4.
X S S = atan -----R
S

(Equation 256)

The reactive tripping characteristics 5 and 6, see figure 225 are rectangular on the system impedance characteristic and form with the R axis an angle of

S 90

O
(Equation 257)

as long as

S 75

O
(Equation 258)

Impedance trajectory 7 on figure 225 presents a typical trajectory during a (probably) recoverable power swing, when the load current flows from A towards B (see figure in Application). Similarly presents the impedance trajectory 8 a power swing, which started from the reverse load condition. Characteristic for both trajectories is that they do not pass the complete system impedance, which means that there is no pole slip condition in power system. The second trajectory passes the left tripping characteristic, 4 on figure 225, which could be a necessary condition for the non-recoverable oscillation and might require a tripping action.

424

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Impedance trajectories 9, 10, 11, and 12 on figure 225 are characteristic for the pole slip conditions. They pass the system impedance line and complete impedance plain. Their shapes depend on particular system conditions. The measured impedance would follow the 12 trajectory only in case, when EA and EB voltages have exactly the same magnitude. Trajectory 9 is characteristic for the case when

EA > E B
(Equation 259)

and trajectory 11 for the opposite case. The results of system studies should determine the necessary operating conditions for the pole slip protection in different situations. 1.2.2 Detection of the oscillations and transitions The operating principle used for the detection of the oscillations over the protected primary element is based on a well proven

( Z) (t)
(Equation 260)

method as presented schematically in figure 226. An oscillation is recognized by the measuring element if the measured impedance needs to change from a ZEXT external impedance boundary to a ZINT internal impedance boundary (se also boundaries 1 and 2 on figure 225) a time, which is longer than the time t set on the corresponding timer. Faster changes of the measured impedance are recognized as faults. Power swing and pole slip are not only a three-phase phenomena. It is for this reason necessary to monitor the impedance in each phase separately. The pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals has built-in oscillation detectors in each phase separately. Impedance may change relatively slow also at developing high resistive faults, which might influence the unwanted operation of the oscillation detectors, when set to detect the oscillations with the highest possible speed (slip frequency up to 10Hz). The pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals has a built in adaptive criterion. The operation of this criterion is based on the fact that the initial oscillations are usually slow. They increase their speed after a certain number of slips. First oscillations are this way detected by a timer, see figure 226, with longer set time delay. The consecutive oscillations are detected by an additional timer, which has its operating time set shorter to be able to detect also the high speed oscillations

425

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

jX

ZEXT

&
ZINT Impedance trajectory R
99001027.vsd

t t

OSCILLATION

Figure 226: Detection of the oscillation by the (DZ)/(Dt) method. The oscillation is recognized as a transition only, if the transition impedance enters the impedance operating characteristic, see figure 225, at one side of the impedance plane and leaves it on the other side. Two different transitions are recognized by the PSP: Transition from forward to reverse (FwRv), when the measured impedance first enters the right side (R) or upper part (X) and leaves at the left (-R) or bottom (-X) part of the oscillation detection characteristic. Transition from reverse to forward (RvFw), when the measured impedance first enters the left (-R) or bottom (-X) part and leaves at the right (R) or upper (X) part of the oscillation detection characteristic.

It is not always necessary to trip the circuit breaker after that the first pole slip has been detected. This especially applies to recoverable slips, which occur during the abnormal system conditions. If one slip occurs during the dead time of a single pole autoreclosing on a power line it is still possible that the system will recover after the circuit breaker reconnects the third phase see figure 218. However, if more consecutive slips occur, than it is better to disconnect the line and prevent this way the collapse of a complete system as well as big electrical and mechanical stresses of the primary equipment. The PSP in REx 5xx terminals has built in counters, which count the number of the consecutive slips in the system. Separate counters count: The slips which enter the impedance area between the reactive tripping characteristics 5 and 6, see figure 225. The slips with remote electrical centers, which enter the inner boundary of the oscillation detection characteristic, boundary 2 on figure 225, but remain outside the first operating area.

Settings of the resistive reach for the external and for the internal boundary of the oscillation detection element depend on the minimum load impedance ZLmin of the protected element, which is calculated according to the equation:

426

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

( U m in ) Z Lm in = ------------------S max

(Equation 261)

Where: Umin[kV] Smax[MVA] Minimum possible system phase to phase voltage (real value). Maximum possible loading of a protected element.

The resistive reach of the external boundary depends on the line length as follows.

R1EXT = Z L m in K L
(Equation 262)

The KL factor depends on the line length and has the following values: KL=0.9 for lines longer than 150 km KL=0.85 for lines longer than 80 km and shorter than 150 km KL=0.8 for lines shorter than 80 km

The corresponding load angle is this way equal to:

ZS A + Z L + ZS B ext = 2 atan -----------------------------------------2 R 1EXT

(Equation 263)

Maximum frequency fsi of the initial slips is mostly between 2Hz and 3Hz. It should be known from the system stability studies. The suggested setting value for the initial timer tP1 is 45ms. The corresponding value of the internal load angle is this way equal to:

int = 360 fsi tP1 + e xt

(Equation 264)

This determines the required setting of the internal resistive boundary:

427

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Z SA + ZL + Z SB R1INT = ----------------------------------------- int 2 tan ------ 2

(Equation 265)

Setting for the tP2 timer, determining the maximum slip frequency for the consecutive slips, follows the equation:

i nt ext tP2 = ------------------------- 360 f sm

(Equation 266)

fsm is a maximum slip frequency of the consecutive slips, which are still supposed to be detected by the pole slip protection. The PSP issues a tripping command after any of counters reaches the set number of consecutive slips and the measured impedance passes one of the resistive tripping characteristics, 3 and 4 on figure 225. 1.2.3 Tripping on way in and on way out The PSP protection in REx 5xx terminals has built-in two resistive tripping characteristics, see figure 227: Right tripping characteristic, which passes in the impedance plain the first and the fourth quadrant. Left tripping characteristic, which passes in the impedance plain the second and the third quadrant.

428

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

jX 4 ZS ZSB

|EA| = |EB|
L

3 ZL
Z1

ZL

LT

ZC0 ZR
R

Z1RTR

R R1LTR R1RTR

ZSA
99001028.vsd

Figure 227: Left (4) and right (3) tripping characteristics and setting of their resistive reach R1LTR and L1RTR respectively. Both tripping characteristics are parallel with the system impedance Zs as long as the system characteristic angle

S 75

(Equation 267)

In other cases the declination angle is automatically set equal to 75. The resistive tripping characteristics make possible to control the tripping angle between the EMFs of both generators and this way prevent extremely high electrical and mechanical stresses of circuit breakers. Two operating modes are available, dependent on which characteristic is selected for tripping at particular type of the impedance transition. If we simplify the expressions and equalize the characteristics with their resistive reach settings R1LTR and R1RTR respectively, than the following operating modes are possible: Operation on way in for the transition from forward to reverse (FwRv). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of FwRv transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area left of the R1RTR operating characteristic, 3 in figure 225 and figure 227.

429

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Operation on way out for the transition from forward to reverse (FwRv). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of FwRv transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area left of the R1LTR operating characteristic, 4 in figure 225 and figure 227. Operation on way in for the transition from reverse to forward (RvFw). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of RvFw transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area right of the R1LTR operating characteristic, 4 in figure 225 and figure 227. Operation on way out for the transition from reverse to forward (RvFw). The PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of RvFw transitions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area right of the R1RTR operating characteristic, 3 in figure 225 and figure 227.

It is possible to activate each operating mode separately, to suit the operation the best to the particular system conditions. Setting of the resistive reach for the left resistive tripping characteristic follows the equations:

R1LTR = Re ( Z1LTR ) + Im ( Z1LTR ) tan ( 90 S )

(Equation 268)

1 j - Z 1 + --------------------------------------- ZS A Z1LTR = -2 S L tan 180 ----- 2

(Equation 269)

See in figure 225 and figure 227 for the explanation of different parameters. Setting of the resistive reach for the right tripping characteristic follows the equations:

R 1RTR = Re Z1RTR Im ( Z1RTR ) tan ( 90 S )

(Equation 270)

1 j - Z 1 -------------------Z 1RTR = - Z SA 2 S R ----tan 2

(Equation 271)

Equations 13 to 16 are derived according to in figure 227, which means when

430

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

E A = EB
(Equation 272)

This calculation satisfies also in great extent the system requirements, when both EMFs differ in their magnitude. 1.2.4 Close-in and remote end tripping areas The number of slips usually permitted by the pole slip protection is lower for the slips with electrical center closer to the relay point (within the protected element) and higher for the slips with electrical center deeper in the network (external to the protected element). The PSP in REx 5xx terminals has for this reason built-in a possibility to distinguish between the slips with close-in and remote electrical centers as well as to distinguish the number of slips required for the tripping command in one or another region. Two reactance characteristics, 5 and 6 in figure 225, divide the complete operating area into two different parts. The first area is a so called close-in operating area. This area is limited in the impedance plain by four operating characteristics 3, 4, 5, and 6 in figure 225. The number of required slips for tripping within this area is usually lower than the number of slips required for tripping in the remote tripping area. The second area is a so called remote tripping area. This area is limited in the impedance plain by the operating characteristics 2, 3, 4, and 5 in forward direction as well as 2, 3, 4, and 6 in reverse direction, see figure 225. PSP also provides a delayed back-up trip (TRIPSUM) for oscillation in close-in operating area or remote tripping area. This trip will work when the center of the oscillation is detected either on the protected line or on the neighbor line or next zone. In both cases PSP compares the number of slips to nDel, therefore, to enable this functionality TRFast and TRDel should be set to ON.

1.3

Design
The pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals measures the phase impedance separately in each phase according to the following equation:

U Ln ZmLn = --------ILn
(Equation 273)

Where: ULn ILn are measured phase voltages (n = 1, 2,3) are measured phase currents (n = 1, 2, 3)

431

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 228 presents the operating characteristic for the pole slip protection in impedance plane with all the corresponding setting parameters. For detailed information on setting parameters see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual.

jX X1FINT

ZSB X1FEXT

ZL

X1PSLFW R1PSLFW

SCA

R R1LEXT R1LINT R1LTR R1REXT R1RINT R1RTR

X1PSLRV R1PSLRV ZSA

99001029.vsd

Figure 228: Operating characteristic of the pole slip protection with corresponding settings in the impedance plane. The phase impedances are calculated in a digital signal processor and the following binary signals are used later on within the functional logic: ZOUTPSLn when the measured impedance enters the external impedance detection boundary in phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3). See figure in Application. ZINPSLn when the measured impedance enters the internal impedance detection boundary in phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3). See figure in Application.

432

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

FwRvLn when transition from forward to reverse direction has been detected in phase Ln. RvFwLn when transition from reverse to forward direction has been detected in phase Ln. Additional signals, which determine the position of the measured impedance regarding all specified operating characteristics. The positioning is performed in each phase separately.

1.3.1

Detection of oscillations The oscillations are recognized, if detected in one or two out of all three phases. The user can select by the configuration, which of the operating modes is active during different system conditions. It is possible to have the one out of three mode active during normal three-phase operating conditions and switch to two out of three mode during the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing on a protected line

>1
tW t ZOUTPSL1 tP1

tP2

&

&
ZINPSL1 ZOUTPSL2

& &
tP1 t

>1 &

>1

DET1of3 - int.

ZINPSL2 ZOUTPSL3 tP1 t

&
ZINPSL3

& >1 &

xx01000252.vsd

Figure 229: Simplified logic diagram for a one-out-of-three oscillation detection logic The oscillation is detected in one out of three operating mode (see figure 229 and 230) if in at least one phase the time difference, when the measured impedance enters the external (ZOUTPSLn) and the internal (ZINPSLn) impedance boundary, is longer than the time set on the tP1 timer. The output signal DET1of3 remains logical one as long as the measured impedance in at least one phase remains within the external boundary. The oscillation is recognized as the consecutive one, if the measured impedance re-enters in at least one phase the external boundary within the time interval set on tW waiting timer. In such case the tP2 timer becomes the relevant one for the determination of a consecutive oscillation. This makes it possible to detect the consecutive slips with higher speed than the initial one.

433

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 230 presents a simplified logic diagram for the two out of three operating mode of the oscillation detection logic. The basic operating principle is the same as for the one of three operating mode with the difference that the initial oscillation must be detected in at least two phases, before the DET2of3 output signal becomes logical one.

& & &

ZOUTPSL1

>1
tW t

&

tP2 t

&
ZINPSL1 ZOUTPSL2

tP1 t

& &

tP1

&
ZINPSL2 ZOUTPSL3

&
tP1

&

>1

>1

DET2of3 - int.

&
ZINPSL3

& & & & >1 &

&

xx01000253.vsd

Figure 230: Simplified logic diagram for a two-out-of-three oscillation detection logic. 1.3.2 Logic for cooperation with the line distance protection It has already been mentioned that the transition impedance might enter the operating area of the line distance protection function and cause its unwanted operation, if the necessary counter measures have not been provided. The pole slip protection detects the transient impedance and can be used as a disabling function for the line distance protection function within the same REx 5xx protection and control terminal. Figure 231 presents in simplified form the logic diagram used for the cooperation with the associated line distance protection, when necessary. The PSP-START output logical signal can be used within the terminal configuration, to block the operation of different distance protection zones. Its appearance depends on the selection of the one out of three or two out of three operating mode, which is possible by the corresponding connection of the following functional input signals: PSP--REL1P, which releases the one out of three operating mode. PSP--BLK1P, which blocks the one out of three operating mode. PSP--REL2P, which releases the two out of three operating mode.

434

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

PSP--BLK2P, which blocks the two out of three operating mode

The following conditions block the PSP--START output signal and might this way release the operation of the distance protection function even during the oscillation conditions. PSP--BLOCK - input functional signal, which blocks the operation of the complete pole slip protection The PSP--START signal is disabled, if the measured impedance remains within the external impedance boundary for the time, which is longer as the time interval set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this functionality by the continuous presence of a logical one signal on functional input PSP--BLK1.

ZOUTPSL1 ZOUTPSL2 ZOUTPSL3 tEF t

>1 ZINPSL1 & ZINPSL2 ZINPSL3 & >1

PSP--ZOUT

PSP--ZIN

PSP--TRSP PSP--I0CHECK DET-int. PSP--BLK2

&

10 ms t

>1 tR1 t

& tR2 t

>1

INHIBIT

PSP--BLK1 PSP--BLOCK DET1of3 - int. PSP--REL1P PSP--BLK1P DET2of3 - int. PSP--REL2P PSP--BLK2P & &

&

tHZ >1 t

&

PSP--START

99001032.vsd

Figure 231: Logic for cooperation with distance protection function. The PSP--START output signal is disabled after the time delay set on the tR1 timer, if the oscillation appears before the functional input signal PSP--I0CHECK becomes logical one. This way it is possible to block the PSP

435

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

function and release the operation of the line distance protection, if for example, an earth fault appears in the network during the oscillations. This functionality can be disabled by the logical one signal on the PSP--BLK2 functional input. The PSP--START functional input is disabled, if the measured impedance have been detected within the external operating boundary in all three phases and the PSP--I0CHECK functional input signal became logical one within the time interval shorter than the time delay set on timer tEF after the PSD--TRSP logical input changed from logical one to logical zero. This function prevents the appearance of the PSP--START output signal in cases, when one pole of the circuit breaker closes on persistent single phase fault after the single pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single phase fault and single pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swinging in the remaining two phases.

1.3.3

Tripping criteria The complete impedance operating area is divided on two detection and two trip regions as presented schematically on figure 232. Detection area is divided on forward-reverse detection region i.e transition from forward to reverse (TRANFwRv) and reverse-forward detection region i.e transition from reverse to forward (TRANRvFw). Trip area is divided on fast trip region and delayed trip region.

436

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

jX

1 2 4

R1LTR SCA

R1RTR

5 6

en01000062.vsd

Where: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Forward - reverse detection region Reverse - forward detection region Fast trip region Delayed trip region System impedance Internal operating boundary External operating boundary

Figure 232: The impedance operating plain is divided on two detection regions and two trip regions. The flow charts on figure 233 and figure 234 present completely the operation of the PSP for the FwRv transitions and the RvFw transitions respectively. PSP also provides a delayed back-up trip (TRIPSUM) for oscillation in fast or delayed region. Summation trip will work if the center of the oscillation is detected either on the protected line (fast region) or on the adjacent line (delayed region). In both cases PSP compares number of

437

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

slips to nDel, therefore to enable this functionality TRFast and TRDel should be set to On. Summation trip operation is shown on figure 235 and figure 236 for the FwRv transitions and the RvFw transitions respectively.

New FwRv oscillation detected YES NO Next FwRv oscillation detected before tW elapsed YES START YES YES NO Next FwRv oscillation detected before tW elapsed

NO

TRFwRv=On

YES

Impedance within fast region YES

NO

Impedance within delay region YES

NO

NO

TRFastFwRv=On

TRDelFwRv=On

NO

YES

YES

YES nFast=nFast+1

Oscillation FwRv Completed

NO

nFast=nFastFwRv

NO nDel=nDelFwRv

Oscillation FwRv Completed

YES

nDel=nDel+1

YES

YES

NO

TROutFwRv=On

NO

TRIncFwRv=On

TRIncFwRv=On

NO

TROutFwRv=On

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Impedance passes R1LTR YES

NO

Impedance passes R1RTR YES

Impedance passes R1RTR YES

NO

Impedance passes R1LTR

NO

YES

TRIP

en00000717.vsd

438

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 233: Flow-chart presenting the operation of the pole slip protection for the forward to reverse transition (FwRv) after the oscillation has been detected.

New RvFw oscillation detected YES NO Next RvFw oscillation detected before tW elapsed YES START YES YES NO Next RvFw oscillation detected before tW elapsed

NO

TRRvFw =On

YES

Impedance within fast region YES

NO

Impedance within delay region YES

NO

NO

TRFastRvFw=On

TRDelRvFw=On

NO

YES

YES

YES nFast=nFast+1

Oscillation RvFw Completed

NO

nFast=nFastRvFw

NO nDel=nDelRvFw

Oscillation RvFw Completed

YES

nDel=nDel+1

YES

YES

NO

TROutRvFw=On

NO

TRIncRvFw=On

TRIncRvFw=On

NO

TROutRvFw=On

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Impedance passes R1RTR YES

NO

Impedance passes R1LTR YES

Impedance passes R1LTR YES

NO

Impedance passes R1RTR

NO

YES

TRIP

en00000718.vsd

439

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 234: Flow-chart presenting the operation of the pole slip protection for the reverse to forward transition (RvFw) after the oscillation has been detected.

440

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

New FwRv oscillation detected YES NO Next FwRv oscillation detected before tW elapsed YES START YES

NO

TRFwRv=On

YES

Impedance within fast region YES

NO

Impedance within delay region YES

NO

NO

TRFastFwRv=On

TRDelFwRv=On

NO

YES

YES

nSum=nSum+1

YES

Oscillation FwRv Compeited

NO

nSum=nDelFwRv

YES

NO

TROutFwRv=On

NO

TRIncFwRv=On

YES

YES

NO

Impedance passes R1LTR YES

NO

Impedance passes R1RTR YES

TRIPSUM

en00000719.vsd

Figure 235: Flow-chart presenting summation trip (TRIPSUM) of the pole slip protection for the forward to reverse transition (FwRv).

441

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

New RvFw oscillation detected YES NO Next RvFw oscillation detected before tW elapsed YES START YES

NO

TRRvFw=On

YES

Impedance within fast region YES

NO

Impedance within delay region YES

NO

NO

TRFastRvFw=On

TRDelRvFw=On

NO

YES

YES

nSum=nSum+1

YES

Oscillation RvFw Completed

NO

nSum=nDelRvFw

YES

NO

TROutRvFw=On

NO

TRIncRvFw=On

YES

YES

NO

Impedance passes
R1RTR

NO

Impedance passes R1LTR YES

YES

TRIPSUM

en00000720.vsd

Figure 236: Flow-chart presenting summation trip (TRIPSUM) of the pole slip protection for the reverse to forward transition (RvFw).

442

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

1.4
1.4.1

Calculations
Setting instructions The parameters for the pole strip protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Necessary technical data These setting instructions are prepared as a setting example for the power network reduced to the two machine system as presented on figure 237. Figure 237: Power system reduced to a two machine system. Following are the necessary technical data: Rated system voltage:

U r = 400kV
(Equation 274)

Minimum expected system voltage:

Umin = 380kV
(Equation 275)

Rated system frequency:

f r = 50Hz
(Equation 276)

Ratio of voltage instrument transformers:

400 --------- [ kV ] Up 3 - = 3636 ------ = ----------------------0.11 Us ---------- [ kV ] 3
(Equation 277)

Ratio of current instrument transformers used:

443

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Ip 1200 [ A ] --- = --------------------- = 1200 Is 1[A]

(Equation 278)

Line length:

L = 210 km
(Equation 279)

Line positive sequence impedance:

ZLp = ( 10.71 + j75.6 ) ohm
(Equation 280)

Source A positive sequence impedance:

ZS Ap = ( 1.15 + j43.5 ) ohm

(Equation 281)

Source B positive sequence impedance:

Z SB p = ( 5.3 + j35.7 ) ohm

(Equation 282)

Maximum expected load in forward direction (at minimum system voltage Umin).

Sm a x = 1000MVA
(Equation 283)

with power factor

cos ( max ) = 0.95

(Equation 284)

Maximum expected slip frequency for consecutive slips:

444

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

f sm ax = 8Hz
(Equation 285)

Expected initial slip frequency:

f si = 2.5Hz
(Equation 286)

The required tripping angle at pole slip conditions must be between the following values (determined by the system studies and electrical characteristics of the used primary equipment):

trL 115

(Equation 287)

trR 245

(Equation 288)

It is supposed that similar pole slip protection device will be used on the remote line end. In such case it is suggested to program the operation of the pole slip protection for the slips in forward direction only. The result of the system studies has shown that: It is possible to have one slip over the remaining two phases between both systems during the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing. It is a high probability that the system will remain stable after the successful single pole autoreclosing. The second slip, if detected on the protected line, should be disconnected as fast as possible. For this reason the trip in incoming mode of operation is suggested. The selective operation of the pole slip protections in the complete network is obtained, if the number of the remote slips is less than four, before the system is split by the pole slip protection in the observed point.

Impedance transformation factor System data are generally presented by their primary values. This is also the case for this setting example. The corresponding impedance transformation factor is equal to:

445

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Ip 1200 [ A] ----------------------Is 1 [ A ] - = ----------------------- = 0.33 KIMP = -----Up 400 --------- [ kV ] -----Us 3 ----------------------0.11 ---------- [ kV ] 3
(Equation 289)

The secondary values of the corresponding impedances are equal to:

ZL = KIMP ZLp = ( 3.53 + j24.95 ) ohm
(Equation 290)

ZS A = KIMP ZS Ap = ( 0.38 + j 14.36) ohm

(Equation 291)

Z S B = KIMP ZS Bp = ( 1.75 + j11 78 ) ohm

(Equation 292)

Minimum load impedance Minimum load impedance appears in forward direction and is calculated according to equation 293:

( Um in ) - KI MP = 47.63ohm ZL m in = ------------------S m ax
(Equation 293)

System impedance and center of oscillations The system impedance is according to equation 289 equal to:

Z S = Z SA + ZL + Z SB = ( 5.63 + j51.08 ) ohm

(Equation 294)

The system characteristic angle equation 292 is equal to:

446

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

X S ----- S = atan R = 83.7

S

(Equation 295)

The corresponding setting of the system characteristic angle is this way:

SCA = 83.7

(Equation 296)

The center of the oscillation has the coordinates, equation 290:

1 - Z Z SA = ( 2.45 + j11.19 ) ohm Z CO = -2 S

(Equation 297)

Resistive reach of the external boundary in forward direction The external boundary for the oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction (right side boundary) has its resistive reach equal to, equation 294.

R1REX T = Z Lmin K L = 42.87ohm

(Equation 298)

We considered in this case

K L = 0.9
(Equation 299)

because the line is longer than 150km. The corresponding load angle is according to equation 295 equal to:

Z SA + ZL + Z SB -------------------- = 61.88 e xt = 2 atan ---------------------2 R 1REXT

(Equation 300)

Resistive reach of the internal boundary in forward direction We assume the setting of the first transition timer tP1 = 45ms. This brings the necessary load angle for the right internal boundary of the oscillation detection characteristic, equation 295:

447

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

int = 360 f si tP 1 + ext = 102.4

(Equation 301)

The corresponding resistive reach setting is this way equation 296218:

Z SA + ZL + Z SB ------------------ = 20.69o hm R1RINT = -----------------------int 2 tan ------ 2

(Equation 302)

It is necessary to check that this operating characteristic, see figrue covers completely the distance protection zones, which should be blocked during the power swings in system, if the pole slip protection is used also for these purposes. In this particular case we check only the primary fault resistance, which could be covered by the corresponding distance protection zones:

1 R Fp = --------------- R1RI NT 0.95 = 59.5ohm KIM P

(Equation 303)

This resistive reach satisfies in most practical cases for the resistive covering of the distance protection zones one and two. Factor 0.95 in equation 303 is considered as a safety factor. In this way we can keep the setting of the first transition timer to tP1 = 45ms. Setting of the tP2 timer The tP2 timer serves the detection of (generally faster) consecutive slips. Its setting is calculated according to equation 298 and the specified value of the maximum expected slip frequency:
i nt ext - = 14ms tP 2 = ------------------------ 360 f s m
(Equation 304)

The required value is well over the minimum suggested value of 10ms. The maximum detectable slip frequency with setting of the tP2 timer equal to tP2min = 10ms and with unchanged settings of the impedance oscillation detection boundaries is equal to:
in t ext ----------------- = 11.25Hz f smax = ----------------- 360 tP2m in
(Equation 305)

This is a very high value, which usually does not appear in a real power system.

448

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Settings of the reverse oscillation detection resistive boundaries It has been mentioned that the similar pole slip protection device is intended to be used at the remote line end. The maximum load in reverse direction is also much smaller than in forward direction. The system requirements require this way only the operation for the pole slips with their electrical center in forward direction. The reverse (left side) resistive reach of the oscillation detection characteristics can be for this reason equal to the one in forward direction:

R1LEXT = R1REXT = 42.87ohm

(Equation 306)

R1L INT = R1RINT = 20.69ohm

(Equation 307)

Setting of the right and left tripping characteristics The necessary setting of the resistive reach for the right tripping characteristic is calculated according to equation 302 and equation 303:

1 j - Z SA = ( 18.72 + j9.38 ) ohm - Z 1 -----------------------Z1RTR = -2 S trR - tan --------2

(Equation 308)

R 1RTR = Re Z1RTR Im ( Z1RTR ) tan ( 90 S )

(Equation 309)

R 1 R T R = 17.68 o h m
(Equation 310)

The condition R1RTR<R1RINT is in this way fulfilled. Necessary setting of the resistive reach for the left tripping characteristic is calculated according to equations.

1 j - ZS A - Z 1 + ------------------------------------------Z1LTR = -2 S trL -------tan 180 2

(Equation 311)

449

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Z1L TR = ( 18.72 + j9.38 ) ohm

(Equation 312)

R1L TR = Re ( Z1LTR ) + Im ( Z1LTR ) tan ( 90 S )

(Equation 313)

R1LTR = 19.76ohm
(Equation 314)

The condition R1RTR<R1RINT is in this way fulfilled. Setting of the reactive tripping characteristics The reactive operating characteristics are presented in figure 218, and marked by 5 for the operation in forward direction and by 6 for the operation in reverse direction. Since it is required to operate only for the pole slip situation with centers of slips in forward direction, and because a similar device will be used at the remote line terminal, only the operation for the transition from forward to reverse direction (FwRv) is required. This kind of operation does not require any reverse reach. It is recommended for this reason to set the corresponding setting parameters to their minimum values.

R 1 P S L R v = 0.1 o h m
(Equation 315)

X1PSLRv = 0.1oh m
(Equation 316)

The tripping characteristic in forward direction should cover the slips with their electrical center on the protected power line. 10% of safety margin is sufficient in order not to overreach for the slips with their centers on the adjacent power lines. The necessary settings are equal to:

R1PS LFw = 0.9 Re ( ZL ) = 3.18oh m

(Equation 317)

X1P SLFw = 0.9 Im ( ZL ) = 22.45oh m

(Equation 318)

450

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Setting of the reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristics The reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristic should cover in forward and in reverse direction with sufficient margin (10 to 15%) the power lines and other elements, for which the pole slip protection should provide also the back up protection for the slips with remote centers of the oscillations. System studies should determine the necessary reach as well as the number of permitted remote slips more in details. We assume in this example that the pole slip protection should also block the operation of the distance protection zones one and two. Zone two must be set to at least 120% of the protected line. The necessary reactive reach of the internal boundary in the forward direction is this way equal to:
X 1 F IN T = 1.15 1.2 Im ( Z L ) = 34.43 o h m
(Equation 319)

Reactive reach of the external oscillation detection boundary should permit the same speed of detected slips as the one determined in the resistive direction. We can even provide some additional margin (5%).
X1FEXT = 1.05 ( R1REXT R1RINT ) + X1FINT
(Equation 320)

X1FEXT = 57.73ohm
(Equation 321)

Setting of the reactive reach in the reverse direction depends on the system conditions. In our case we do not need to cover any special distance protection zone. It is also not necessary to operate for the slips with their center in the reverse direction, since the remote end pole slip protection takes care of such cases. It is anyway suggested to set the reactive reach in reverse direction to at least 10% of the one in forward direction. The impedance difference between the internal and the internal boundary should also in this case permit detection of the same slip frequency as in the forward direction. The necessary values are:
X 1 R IN T = 0.1 X 1 F IN T = 3.44 o h m
(Equation 322)

X1REXT = 1.05 ( R1REXT R1RINT ) + X1RINT

(Equation 323)

451

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

X1REXT = 26.75ohm
(Equation 324)

Setting of the tW waiting timer Setting of the waiting timer influences the detection of the consecutive slips. The tW timer must be set higher than the time the measured impedance needs after leaving the impedance detection area and entering it again on the other side of the impedance plain. It is necessary to consider the minimum possible speed of the oscillations, which might occur in the system. The time necessary for the impedance to move from the internal left impedance boundary (after the FwRv transition has been completed) to the external right impedance boundary (to start the detection of the new oscillation) is calculated according to the equation:

Rext + ( 360 L int ) - = 1.79 s tW = 1.3 --------------------------------------------------------360 fsmin

(Equation 325)

Where:
Rext Lint

Corresponding load angle at the right external resistive boundary (in our case they equal to 61.9 deg) Corresponding load angle at the left internal resistive boundary (in our case equal to 298.1 deg) Minimum expected slip frequency in a system (should not be considered less than 0.2 Hz)

fsmin

Factor 1.3 is a safety factor, which could be considered also in most other cases, when the exact technical characteristics of the system are not known. Setting of the tripping modes and the transition counters The pole slip protection should according to the system requirements operate only for the slips with their electrical center on the protected power line and for the transitions from the forward to the reverse direction. It is for this reason necessary to set the parameters related to the reverse to forward (RvFw) transition to the following values: TrRvFw = Off TrIncRvFw = Off TrOutRvFw = Off TrFastRvFw = Off TrDelRvFw = Off nFastRvFw = 10 nDelRvFw = 10

452

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

According to the results of the system studies the following settings are applicable for the transitions detected from forward to the reverse direction: TrFwRv = On TrIncFwRv = On TrOutFwRv = Off TrFastFwRv = On TrDelFwRv = On nFastFwRv = 1 nDelFwRv = 3

Additional timers in the oscillation detection circuits Timers tR1, tR2, tEF, and tHZ are used in the oscillation detection logic (see figure in Design) to suit the oscillation detection to different system conditions. Their settings must be co-ordinated with the time delays set on different protection devices, like distance protection, directional or non directional residual overcurrent protection, dead time of the single pole autoreclosing, etc. tHz hold timer The tHz hold timer prolongs the duration of the PSP--START signal, which can be used for blocking the distance protection zones. Its setting should be with a certain margin (10 to 15%) longer than the time required for the detection of the consecutive slips with fastest slip frequency in a system. In our case the required value is equal to:

1 - = 144ms tHZ = 1.15 ------f sm

(Equation 326)

tR1 inhibit timer The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current 3I0 on the inhibit criteria for the PSP function. It prevents the operation of the function for short transients in the residual current as measured by the terminal. The time delay of 50 ms is suggested as default, when the residual current criteria is used. tR2 inhibit timer The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PSP--START signal, if the measured impedance remains within the impedance detection area for more than the set time. This time delay is generally set to 2 seconds, when used in the protection. tEF timer The setting of the tEF timer must cover with sufficient margin the opening time of the associated circuit breaker and the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing together with the circuit breaker closing time.

453

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

2
2.1
2.1.1

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Application
General The low active power protection function (LAPP) can be used wherever a low active power signal is needed. The main purpose of the function is to provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. Three different application examples for the low active power protection function (LAPP) are given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feeding line, a line connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit breaker in another substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local low active power criterion is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals.

2.1.2

Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line A typical application for the low active power protection (LAPP) function is a power transformer directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in figure 238.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 238: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line. Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in order to open also the line circuit breaker. The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line. Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

454

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The active power, in at least two of the phases at the feeding end of the line, decreases, when the differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and the breaker contacts open. This means, that a low active power function, properly set, could provide a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the transformer, with basically unchanged dependability. The LAPP function could preferably be integrated in the line protection in the sending end. 2.1.3 Line connected shunt reactor A typical application for the low active power protection (LAPP) function is a line connected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 239. Shunt reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage lines. Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will occur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2 Line connected shunt reactor CT3 TRIP IDIFF> Load CS

~
Source

Xsource

en03000121.vsd

Figure 239: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor. 2.1.4 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip A typical application for the low active power protection (LAPP) function is a breaker failure protection with transfer trip. Figure 240 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two transmission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates correctly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single pole tripping capabilities.

455

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

A FAULT L1 B1

C B4 BFP CS L2 CR LDD

B2

TRIP

B5

B3

TRIP

TRIP

B6

en03000122.vsd

Figure 240: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip. The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third circuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C. A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR signal. Depending on the rest of the network the low active power criterion, in at least two phases, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due to false CR signals.

2.2
2.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the low active power protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the low active power protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated active power, P, based on measured voltage and current. The direction of P is compared to settings. The directionality is conditioned by undervoltage and undercurrent elements, and the complete function is conditioned by a fuse failure function.

This section describes the method used when the value and the direction of the active power, P, are calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked. 2.2.2 Active power calculation The active power is calculated for each phase separately as

456

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

P ph = Uph I ph cos ( )
(Equation 327)

where

Uph

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component

I ph
cos ( )

is the power factor is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according to figure 241.

Im

Uph

Iph

Re

en03000123.vsd

Figure 241: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active power calculation. 2.2.3 Direction of active power According to equation 327 the direction of active power is defined as: forward, if Pph > 0, i.e. if -90< <90, and reverse, if Pph < 0, i.e. if 90< <270

The direction of active power is illustrated in figure 242. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of the active power, Pph, goes below the setting, irrespective of the direction of the power.

457

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Q High-set Operating area for Forward direction

PHigh<

Q High-set Operating area for Reverse direction P

PHigh<

en03000124.vsd

Figure 242: Direction of active power. 2.2.4 Conditioning elements The status of the fuse failure function is received as a binary input, LAPP-VTSU, to the function block.The undervoltage element is included in the LAPP function. If the magnitude of any phase voltage is below the limit value, which is 10% of the terminal rated voltage, the directional measurement is blocked, and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless the setting.
Unon-directional = 10% of Urated

The undercurrent element is included in the LAPP function. If the magnitude of any phase current is below the limit value, which equals to 3% of terminal rated current, the directional measurement is blocked and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless the setting.
Inon-directional = 3% of Irated

2.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic trip logic block and fuse failure logic

When the active power in any phase decreases to a value below the low-set limit, PLow<, the LAPP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the active power in any phase decreases to a value below the high-set limit, PHigh<, the LAPP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The LAPP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active power in at least 2 phases is lower than PLow<,

458

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

carrier received signal, LAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The LAPP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active power in at least 2 phases is lower than PHigh<, carrier received signal, LAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

All binary output signals are deactivated when the input LAPP-BLOCK or LAPP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The LAPP-BLOCK or LAPP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input LAPP-BLOCK or LAPP-VTSU can cause a trip from the LAPP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the LAPP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 243. There are five output signals from the LAPP function:
LAPP-STLOW: LAPP-TRLOW: LAPP-STHIGH: LAPP-TRHIGH: LAPP-NODIR Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip Non-directional indication

The blocking signals LAPP-BLOCK and LAPP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the set value has been reached, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active power is lower than the set value in two of the three phases and the carrier receive signal LAPP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction of the active power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively. The amplitude of U and I are computed for each phase and compared with predefined limits (blocking limits). If the amplitude is considered to be under the limit, the signal LAPP-NODIR is set. Blocking limits corresponds to 10% resp. 2.5% of nominal values of I and U.

459

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

LAPP_L1FW LAPP_L2FW LAPP_L3FW LAPP_U_BLOCK1 LAPP_U_BLOCK2 LAPP_U_BLOCK3 & LAPP_L1L LAPP_L2L LAPP_L3L LAPP_I_BLOCK1 LAPP_I_BLOCK2 LAPP_I_BLOCK3 LAPP_Dir Low & LAPP_L1H LAPP_L2H LAPP_L3H LAPP_Dir High LAPP_ Dir Oper LAPP_L1RV LAPP_L2RV LAPP_L3RV LAPP_CR LAPP_BLOCK LAPP_VTSU LAPP_TEST & LAPP_ TEST BLK
en01000358.vsd
RV RV

1 & LAPP_STLOW

& 1 & &

LAPP_tLow

&

1 & &
FW

LAPP_TRLOW

1 1 LAPP_NODIR

& 1 & &

LAPP_tHigh

&

1 & &
FW

LAPP_TRHIGH

& 1

LAPP_STHIGH

Figure 243: Simplified logic diagram for the low active power protection function.

460

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

2.4
2.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the low active power protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the LAPP function there are in total eight settings: Operation: The operation of the entire LAPP function has to be set to either On or Off. DirOper: The directionality of the entire LAPP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this parameter is set to Off the LAPP function operates irrespective of the direction of the active power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the active power has to coincide with the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip. DirLow: The direction of low-set LAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. DirHigh: The direction of high-set LAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. PLow<: This is the low-set limit of the active power. If the active power decreases below this limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the product of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/3V) and the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g 110/3V*1A=63.5W. To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have to be taken into account. It is important to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the total three-phase active power divided by 3. PHigh<: This is the high-set limit of the active power. If the active power decreases below this limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LAPP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power recovers to a value over the set-limit, PLow<, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is activated. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LAPP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power recovers to a value over the set-limit, PHigh<, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is activated. The pick-up level for PLow< and PHigh<, should be set, with some margin, to the lowest active power level that can appear during normal operation conditions. For any application where the active power direction, in the power system element under consideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the LAPP function is recommended, i.e. DirOper should be set to On. If the active power flow can be in one direction only, non-directional operation of the LAPP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off.

461

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direction, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application. The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier received signals, should normally be set to zero. 2.4.2 Setting example Figure 244 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The LAPP function is going to be implemented in the feeding end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 244: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line. Relevant data for the LAPP function setting are shown in table 24.
Table 24:
CT1 ratio VT1 ratio CT2 ratio CT3 ratio

Relevant data for the LAPP function setting

200/1 55000/3 / 110/3 150/1 600/5

Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Minimum active power to the load 1.5 MW

Since this is a step-down transformer, with no downstream generation, non-directionality is used. For this simple example we use the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, comes from the transformer differential protection, which in most applications not have any intentional time delay. Therefore we also choose the time delay of the LAPP function to be zero. The following procedure shows how to calculate the LAPP function pick-up value. Minimum active power to the load is 1.5 MW. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

462

Low active power protection (LAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

P <

primary

1 - 0.80 1.5MW = 0.4MW = -3

(Equation 328)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

Psecondary

110 -------1 3 110 - ---------------- = 400000 ----------------------------- W = 4W = P primary --------200 55000 200 55000 --------------3
(Equation 329)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 330)

The setting of the parameter PLow< will therefore be:

4W PLow< = -----------------= 0.063 = 6.3% 63.5VA

(Equation 331)

463

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

3
3.1
3.1.1

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Application
General The combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) can be used wherever a low reactive power signal is needed. The trip criterion is a function of the set value and the actual active power according to:
Q trip = Q set + P
(Equation 332)

where: 01

This design gives the user a possibility to increase the sensitivity for high levels of active power. The main purpose of the combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) is to provide a local criterion, that is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. Three different application examples for the combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) are given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feeding line, a line connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit breaker in another substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local combined low active and reactive power criterion is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals. 3.1.2 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line A typical application for the combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) is a power transformer directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in figure 245.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

464

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 245: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line. Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in order to open also the line circuit breaker. The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line. Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker. The active power, in at least two of the phases at the sending end of the line, decreases, when the differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and the breaker contacts open. This means, that a combined low active and reactive power function, properly set, could provide a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the transformer, with basically unchanged dependability. The LARP function could preferably be integrated in the line protection in the sending end. 3.1.3 Line connected shunt reactor A typical application for the combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) is a line connected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 246. Shunt reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage lines. Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will occur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2 Line connected shunt reactor CT3 TRIP IDIFF> Load CS

~
Source

Xsource

en03000121.vsd

Figure 246: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor. Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the local line circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end. The line protection in the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection, and will only operate for

465

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal. To avoid line trips at the remote end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion can be added at the remote end. Low active and reactive power in at least two of the phases (suppose that not more than one breaker pole get stuck in the reactor end), is therefore found to be a very useful criterion to increase security. 3.1.4 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip A typical application for the combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) is a breaker failure protection with transfer trip. Figure 247 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two transmission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates correctly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single pole tripping capabilities.

A FAULT L1 B1

C B4 BFP CS L2 CR LDD

B2

TRIP

B5

B3

TRIP

TRIP

B6

en03000122.vsd

Figure 247: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip. The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third circuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C. A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR signal. Depending on the rest of the network the combined low active and reactive power criterion, in at least two phases, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due to false CR signals.

3.2
3.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the combined low active and reactive power protection function, as well as specific algorithms used.

466

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The algorithm of the combined low active and reactive power protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated active power, P, and the reactive power, Q, based on measured voltage and current. The direction of Q is compared to settings. The directionality is conditioned by undervoltage and undercurrent elements, and the complete function is conditioned by a fuse failure function.

This section describes the method used when the value and the direction of the active power, P, and the reactive power, Q, are calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked. 3.2.2 Active and reactive power calculation The active and reactive power are calculated for each phase separately as:

P ph = U ph Iph cos ( )

Q ph = Uph I ph sin ( )

(Equation 333)

where: is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component,

U ph I ph
cos() is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component,

is the power factor, and is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according to figure 248.

Im

Uph

Iph

Re

en03000123.vsd

Figure 248: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active and reactive power calculation.

467

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

3.2.3

Direction of reactive power According to equation 333, the direction of reactive power is defined as: forward, if Qph>0, i.e. if 0<<180, and reverse, if Qph<0, i.e. if 180<<360

The direction of reactive power is illustrated in figure 249. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of the reactive power, Qph, goes below the setting, irrespective of the direction of the reactive power. Since only the absolute value of the active power is used, the direction of the active power does not affect the functionality.

k
QHigh< High-set operating area for Forward direction

High-set operating area for Reverse direction QHigh<

en03000119.vsd

where: k is declination angle of operating characteristic

Figure 249: Direction of reactive power. 3.2.4 Conditioning elements The status of the fuse failure function is received as a binary input, LARP-VTSU, to the function block. The undervoltage element is included in the LARP function. If the magnitude of any phase voltage is below the limit value, which is 10% of the terminal rated voltage, the directional measurement is blocked, and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless the setting.
Unon-directional = 10% of Urated

468

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The undercurrent element is included in the LARP function. If the magnitude of any phase current is below the limit value, which equals to 3% of terminal rated current, the directional measurement is blocked and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless the setting.
Inon-directional = 3% of Irated

3.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, block and fuse failure logic.

When the active/reactive power in any phase decreases to a point within the operating area, according to figure 249, for the low-set limit, QLow<, the LARP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the active/reactive power in any phase decreases to a point within the operating area for the high-set limit, QHigh<, the LARP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The LARP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases are within the operating area, carrier received signal, LARP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The LARP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases is within the operating area, carrier received signal, LAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input LARP-BLOCK or LARP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The LARP-BLOCK or LARP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input LARP-BLOCK or LARP-VTSU can cause a trip from the LARP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the LARP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 250. There are five output signals from the LARP function:

469

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

LARP-STLOW: LARP-TRLOW: LARP-STHIGH: LARP-TRHIGH: LARP-NODIR

Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip Non-directional indication

The blocking signals LARP-BLOCK and LARP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the active/reactive power enters the operating area, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active/reactive power remains in the operating area for two of the three phases, and the carrier receive signal LARP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction of the reactive power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively. The amplitude of U and I are computed for each phase and compared with predefined limits (blocking limits). If the amplitude is considererd to be under the limit, the signal LARP-NODIR is set. Blocking limits corresponds to 10% resp. 2.5% of nominal values of I and U.

470

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

LARP_L1FW LARP_L2FW LARP_L3FW LARP_U_BLOCK1 LARP_U_BLOCK2 LARP_U_BLOCK3 & LARP_L1L LARP_L2L LARP_L3L LARP_I_BLOCK1 LARP_I_BLOCK2 LARP_I_BLOCK3 LARP_Dir Low & LARP_L1H LARP_L2H LARP_L3H LARP_Dir High LARP_ Dir Oper LARP_L1RV LARP_L2RV LARP_L3RV LARP_CR LARP_BLOCK LARP_VTSU LARP_TEST & LARP_ TEST BLK
en01000356.vsd
RV RV

1 & 1
LARP_STLOW

& 1 & &

LARP_tLow

&

1 & &
FW

LARP_TRLOW

1 1 LARP_NODIR

& 1 & &

LARP_tHigh

&

1 & &
FW

LARP_TRHIGH

& 1

LARP_STHIGH

Figure 250: Simplified logic diagram for the low active and reactive power protection function.

471

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

3.4
3.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the combined low active and reactive power protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the LARP function there are in total nine settings: Operation: The operation of the entire LARP function has to be set to either On or Off. DirOper: The directionality of the entire LARP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this parameter is set to Off the LARP function operates irrespective of the direction of the reactive power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the reactive power has to coincide with the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip. DirLow: The direction of low-set LARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. DirHigh: The direction of high-set LARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. QLow<: This is the low-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power decreases below this limit, when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the product of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/3V) and the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g. 110/3*1A=63.5VAr. To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have to be taken into account. It is important to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the total three-phase reactive power divided by 3. QHigh<: This is the high-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power decreases below this limit, when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. k: This is the declination angle of the operating characteristic, shown in figure 249. The setting is made in degrees, within [0.0-45.0]. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LARP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point outside the operating characteristic, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is activated. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LARP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point outside the operating characteristic, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is activated. The pick-up level for the operating characteristic, i.e. QLow< and QHigh< in combination with k, must be set with some margin, to the lowest active/reactive power level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

472

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

For any application where the reactive power direction, in the power system element under consideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the LARP function is recommended, i.e. DirOper should be set to On. If the reactive power flow can be in one direction only, non-directional operation of the LARP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off. The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direction, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application. The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier received signals, should normally be set to zero. 3.4.2 Setting example Figure 251 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The LARP function is going to be implemented in the sending end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 251: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line. Relevant data for the LARP function setting are shown in table 25.
Table 25:
CT1 ratio VT1 ratio CT2 ratio CT3 ratio

Relevant data for the LARP function setting

200/1 55000/3 / 110/3 150/1 600/5

Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Minimum reactive power to the load Maximum cos() 1.5 Mvar 0.95

473

Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Since this is a step-down transformer, with no downstream generation, non-directionality is used. For this simple example we use the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, comes from the transformer differential protection, which in most applications not have any intentional time delay. Therefore we also choose the time delay of the LARP function to be zero. The following procedure shows how to calculate the LARP function pick-up value. Minimum reactive power to the load is 1.5 Mvar. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

Q <

primary

1 - 0.80 1.5MVAr = 0.4MVAr = -3

(Equation 334)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

Qsecondary

110 --------1 3 110 - ---------------- = 400000 ------------------------------ VAr = 4VAr = Qprimary --------200 55000 55000 200 --------------3
(Equation 335)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 336)

The setting of the parameter QLow< will therefore be:

4VAr QLow< = -----------------= 0.063 = 6.3% 63.5VA

(Equation 337)

Since the maximum power factor is 0.95, the minimum phase angle between the voltage and the current is arccos (0.95)=18 degrees. To have some margin to this value, k is chosen to 15 degrees.

474

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

4
4.1

High active power protection (HAPP)

Application
The high active power protection function (HAPP) can be used wherever a high active power signal is needed. There are a number of applications for the high active power protection, wherever active power flow has to be limited or certain actions have to be taken when the active power exceeds specific values. One example is to arm system protection schemes based on high active power transfer. Suppose that the transmission corridor, in figure 252, can transfer 500 MW on each line. With all four lines in operation, the generation shedding system, triggered by line trip, has to be armed at a transfer of 1500 MW. If one line is tripped, or out of service, and the transmission exceeds 1000 MW, the generation shedding has to be armed.

Arming

HAPP function Sum(I1-I4) CT1 Line 1

VT1 Generator rejection scheme

CT2

Line 2

~
Source

CT3

Line 3 Load & Generation

CT4

Line 4

en03000130.vsd

Figure 252: Generation shedding system armed by high active power.

4.2
4.2.1

Functionality
General In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, block and fuse failure logic.

475

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

When the active power in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, PLow>, the HAPP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the active power in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, PHigh>, the HAPP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The HAPP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PLow>, carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The HAPP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PHigh>, carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the HAPP function, is based on local criteria only. All binary outputs are deactivated when the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU can cause a trip from the HAPP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the HAPP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 253. There are four output signals from the HAPP function:
HAPP-STLOW: HAPP-TRLOW: HAPP-STHIGH HAPP-TRHIGH: Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signals HAPP-BLOCK and HAPP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the set value has been reached, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active power is higher than the set value in two of the three phases and the carrier receive signal HAPP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction of the active power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

476

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

HAPP_L1FW HAPP_L2FW HAPP_L3FW 1 & HAPP_STLOW

& HAPP_L1L HAPP_L2L HAPP_L3L 1 & & & &

HAPP_tLow

RV

&

1 &
FW

HAPP_TRLOW

HAPP_Dir Low & HAPP_L1H HAPP_L2H HAPP_L3H HAPP_Dir High HAPP_ Dir Oper HAPP_L1RV HAPP_L2RV HAPP_L3RV HAPP_CR HAPP_BLOCK HAPP_VTSU HAPP_TEST & HAPP_ TEST BLK
en01000359.vsd
RV

& 1 & &

HAPP_tHigh

&

1 & &
FW

HAPP_TRHIGH

& 1

HAPP_STHIGH

Figure 253: Simplified logic diagram for the high active power protection function. 4.2.2 Active power calculation The active power is calculated for each phase separately as:

477

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

P ph = U ph Iph cos ( )
(Equation 338)

where: is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component,

U ph I ph
cos () is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component,

is the power factor, and is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according to figure 254.

Im

Uph

Iph

Re

en03000123.vsd

Figure 254: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active power calculation. 4.2.3 Direction of active power According to equation 338, the direction of active power is defined as: forward, if Pph > 0, i.e. if -90< <90, and reverse, if Pph <0, i.e. if 90< <270

The direction of active power is illustrated in figure 255. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of the active power, Pph, exceeds the setting, irrespective of the direction of the power.

478

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Q High-set Operating area for Forward direction

PHigh>

Q High-set Operating area for Reverse direction P

PHigh>

en03000131.vsd

Figure 255: Direction of active power.

4.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, block and fuse failure logic.

When the active power in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, PLow>, the HAPP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the active power in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, PHigh>, the HAPP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The HAPP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PLow>, carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The HAPP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PHigh>, carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the HAPP function, is based on local criteria only.

479

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU can cause a trip from the HAPP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the HAPP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 256. There are four output signals from the HAPP function:
HAPP-STLOW: HAPP-TRLOW: HAPP-STHIGH HAPP-TRHIGH: Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signals HAPP-BLOCK and HAPP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the set value has been reached, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active power is higher than the set value in two of the three phases and the carrier receive signal HAPP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction of the active power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

480

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

HAPP_L1FW HAPP_L2FW HAPP_L3FW 1 & HAPP_STLOW

& HAPP_L1L HAPP_L2L HAPP_L3L 1 & & & &

HAPP_tLow

RV

&

1 &
FW

HAPP_TRLOW

HAPP_Dir Low & HAPP_L1H HAPP_L2H HAPP_L3H HAPP_Dir High HAPP_ Dir Oper HAPP_L1RV HAPP_L2RV HAPP_L3RV HAPP_CR HAPP_BLOCK HAPP_VTSU HAPP_TEST & HAPP_ TEST BLK
en01000359.vsd
RV

& 1 & &

HAPP_tHigh

&

1 & &
FW

HAPP_TRHIGH

& 1

HAPP_STHIGH

Figure 256: Simplified logic diagram for the high active power protection function.

481

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

4.4
4.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the high active power protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the HAPP function there are in total eight settings: Operation: The operation of the entire HAPP function has to be set to either On or Off. DirOper: The directionality of the entire HAPP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this parameter is set to Off the HAPP function operates irrespective of the direction of the active power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the active power has to coincide with the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip. DirLow: The direction of low-set HAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. DirHigh: The direction of high-set HAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. PLow>: This is the low-set limit of the active power. If the active power exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the product of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/3V) and the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g. 110/3V*1A=63.5W. To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have to be taken into account. It is important to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the total three-phase active power divided by 3. PHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the active power. If the active power exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HAPP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power returns to a value below the set-limit, PLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HAPP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power returns to a value below the set-limit, PHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. The pick-up level for PLow> and PHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest active power level that can appear during normal operation conditions. For any application where the active power direction, in the power system element under consideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the HAPP function is recommended, i.e. DirOper should be set to On. If the active power flow can be in one direction only, non-directional operation of the HAPP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off.

482

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direction, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application. 4.4.2 Setting example Figure 257 shows a transmission corridor comprising four lines. The HAPP function is going to be implemented in the sending end to arm the generation shedding system. Each transmission line can carry 500 MW. Two arming levels will be used: one for 4 lines in operation at 1500 MW, and another one for 3 lines in operation at 1000 MW.

Arming

HAPP function Sum(I1-I4) CT1 Line 1

VT1 Generator rejection scheme

CT2

Line 2

~
Source

CT3

Line 3 Load & Generation

CT4

Line 4

en03000130.vsd

Figure 257: Transmission corridor with generation rejection scheme. Relevant data for the HAPP function setting are shown in table 26.
Table 26: Relevant data for the HAPP function setting
1000/1 400000/3 / 110/3

CT1-CT4 ratio VT1 ratio

Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V tection parameter, set in a HMI tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Maximum active power per line 500 MW

Since high levels of active power flow can be in one direction only, non-directionality is used. For this simple example we show the setting procedure for the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, should be set to fixed true signal in the configuration. Since the protection is installed to avoid transient instability after another line trip - the arming of the generation pro-

483

High active power protection (HAPP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

tection scheme can be instantaneous. Therefore we choose the time delay of the HAPP function to be zero. A complementary low active power function can be used to disarm the generation shedding system. The following procedure shows how to calculate the HAPP function pick-up value. Maximum active power for the low-set level is chosen to 1000 MW corresponding to the capacity of two lines. Let us use 95% of this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

P<

primary

1 - 0.95 1000MW = 317MW = -3

(Equation 339)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

Psecondary

110 --------1 3 6 110 - ---------------- = 317 10 -------------------------------------- W = 87.2W = Pprimary -----------6 1000 400000 1000 0.4 10 --------------3
(Equation 340)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 341)

The setting of the parameter PLow> will therefore be:

87.2WPLow> = -----------------= 1.37 = 137% 63.5VA

(Equation 342)

484

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

5
5.1

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Application
The combined high active and reactive power protection function (HARP) can be used wherever a high reactive power signal is needed. The trip criterion is a function of the set value and the actual active power according to:
Q trip = Q set + P
(Equation 343)

where: 01

This design gives the user a possibility to stabilize the function for high levels of active power. The function can be used wherever a high reactive power criterion is needed. Typically, high reactive power output from generators, connected to transmission grids, is used as an important signal in system protection schemes to counteract voltage instability. The bus voltage, in substations with substantial nearby generation, is not a good indicator of the system health, since the voltage is kept high by the generators. The reactive power output from the generators is however very useful, since it is a measure of the effort required to keep up the voltage. To increase security the carrier received signal, CR, can be used to arm the HARP function, either manually or automatically, based on suitable criteria. The example is illustrated in figure 258.

CR for arming

HARP function

High reactive power

System Protection Scheme

VT1 Line 1

~
Generator

CT1

Line 2

en03000126.vsd

Figure 258: High reactive power detection for generator output.

485

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

5.2
5.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the combined high active and reactive power protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the combined high active and reactive power protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated active power, P, and the reactive power, Q, based on measured voltage and current. The direction of Q is compared to settings.

This section describes the method used when the value and the direction of the activepower, P, and the reactive power, Q, are calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked. 5.2.2 Active and reactive power calculation The active and reactive power are calculated for each phase separately as:

P ph = U ph Iph cos ( )

Q ph = Uph I ph sin ( )
(Equation 344)

where: is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component,

U ph I ph
cos () is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component,

is the power factor, and is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according to figure 259.

486

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Im

Uph

Iph

Re

en03000123.vsd

Figure 259: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active and reactive power calculation. 5.2.3 Direction of reactive power According to equation 344, the direction of reactive power is defined as forward, if Qph >0, i.e. if 0 < <180, and reverse, if Qph <0, i.e. if 180 < < 360.

The direction of reactive power is illustrated in figure 260. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of the reactive power, Qph, exceeds the setting, irrespective of the direction of the reactive power. Since only the absolute value of the active power is used, the direction of the active power does not affect the functionality.

Q
High-set operating area for Forward direction

k
QHigh>

P
QHigh>

P k
High-set operating area for Reverse direction

en03000127.vsd

Figure 260: Direction and operation area for high reactive power.

487

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

5.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, block and fuse failure logic.

When the active/reactive power in any phase enters the operating area, according to figure 260 , for the low-set limit, QLow>, the HARP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the active/reactive power in any phase enters the operating area for the high-set limit, QHigh>, the LARP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The HARP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases are within the low-set operating area, carrier received signal, HARP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The HARP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases are within the high-set operating area, carrier received signal, HARP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

Note!
The HARP-BLOCK or HARP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input HARP-BLOCK or HARP-VTSU can cause a trip from the HARP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the HARP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 261. There are four output signals from the HARP function:
HARP-STLOW: HARP-TRLOW HARP-STHIGH HARP-TRHIGH Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signals HARP-BLOCK and HARP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the active/reactive power enters the operating area, in any phase. If the parameter HARP-DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active/reactive power remains in the oper-

488

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

ating area for two of the three phases, and the carrier receive signal HARP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction of the reactive power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

HARP_L1FW HARP_L2FW HARP_L3FW & 2 & HARP_L1L HARP_L2L HARP_L3L &

FW
HARP_tLow

1 HARP_STLOW

RV

&

1 &

HARP_TRLOW

HARP_Dir Low HARP_L1H HARP_L2H HARP_L3H HARP_Dir High HARP_ Dir Oper HARP_L1RV HARP_L2RV HARP_L3RV HARP_CR
HARP_BLOCK HARP_VTSU

& 1
HARP_tHigh

RV

&

1 & &
FW

HARP_TRHIGH

& 1

HARP_STHIGH

HARP_TEST & HARP_ TEST BLK

en06000052.vsd

Figure 261: Simplified logic diagram for the combined high active and reactive power protection function.

489

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

5.4
5.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the combined high active and reactive power protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the HARP function there are in total nine settings: Operation: The operation of the entire HARP function has to be set to either On or Off. DirOper: The directionality of the entire HARP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this parameter is set to Off the HARP function operates irrespective of the direction of the reactive power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the reactive power has to coincide with the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip. DirLow: The direction of low-set HARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. DirHigh: The direction of high-set HARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated. QLow>: This is the low-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power exceeds this limit, when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the product of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/3V) and the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g. 110/3V*1A=63.5VAr. To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have to be taken into account. It is important to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the total three-phase reactive power divided by 3. QHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power exceeds this limit, when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. k: This is the declination angle of the operating characteristic, shown in figure 260. The setting is made in degrees, within [0.0-45.0]. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HARP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point outside the operating characteristic, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HARP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point outside the operating characteristic, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. The pick-up level for the operating characteristic, i.e. QLow> and QHigh> in combination with k, must be set with some margin, to the highest active/reactive power level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

490

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

For any application where the reactive power direction, in the power system element under consideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the HARP function is recommended, i.e. DirOper should be set to On. If the reactive power flow can be in one direction only, non-directional operation of the HARP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off. The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direction, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application. 5.4.2 Setting example Figure 262 shows a generator connected to a transmission grid. The HARP function is going to be implemented to give a "high reactive power output from the generator"-signal to the system protection scheme against voltage collapse. The HARP function should be in continuous operation, so the CR signal is set to fixed true in the configuration. In this case a pure reactive power function is desired, so k is chosen to be 0.

CR for arming

HARP function

High reactive power

System Protection Scheme

VT1 Line 1

~
Generator

CT1

Line 2

en03000126.vsd

Figure 262: HARP function for a system protection scheme. Relevant data for the HARP function setting are shown in table 27.
Table 27:
CT1 ratio VT1 ratio

Relevant data for the HARP function setting

1000/1 420000/3 / 110/3

Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Maximum acceptable reactive power output 280 Mvar

491

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Since this is a generator, with power flow in one direction only, non-directionality is used. For this simple example we use the low-setting only. To avoid triggering of the system protection scheme due to transient conditions during faults, a time delay with some margin to back-up clearance of transmission system faults is chosen. In this case tLow is chosen to 1.00 s, which gives enough time to counteract a long term voltage instability. The following procedure shows how to calculate the HARP function pick-up value. Maximum acceptable reactive power from the generator is 280 Mvar. Let us use this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

Q<

primary

1 - 280MVAr = 93.3MVAr = -3
(Equation 345)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

Q secondary

110 --------1 3 6 110 - ------------------- = 93.3 10 ------------------------------------------ VAr = 24.4VAr = Q primary -----------6 1000 420000 1000 0.42 10 ------------------3
(Equation 346)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 347)

The setting of the parameter QLow> will therefore be:

24.4VAr - = 0.384 = 38.4% QLow> = -------------------63.5VA

(Equation 348)

492

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Application
General The sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) can be used wherever a sudden change in current can be used to improve the overall functionality of the protection system. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used. Three different application examples for the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) are given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feeding line, a line connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit breaker in another substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local sudden change in current criterion is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals.

6.1
6.1.1

6.1.2

Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line The main purpose of the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) is to provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for this function is a power transformer directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in Figure 263.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 263: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line. Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in order to open also the line circuit breaker. The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line.

493

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker. A sudden change in current occurs, in at least one of the phases at the sending end of the line, when the differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and the breaker contacts open. This means, that a sudden change in current function, properly set, could provide a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the transformer, with basically unchanged dependability. The SCC1 function could preferably be integrated in the line protection in the sending end. 6.1.3 Line connected shunt reactor The main purpose of the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) is to, provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for the SCC1 function is a line connected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 264. Shunt reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage lines. Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will occur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2 Line connected shunt reactor CT3 TRIP IDIFF> Load CS

~
Source

Xsource

en03000121.vsd

Figure 264: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor. Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the local line circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end. The line protection in the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection, and will only operate for low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal. To avoid line trips at the remote end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion can be added at the remote end. Sudden change in current in at least two of the phases (suppose that not more than one breaker pole get stuck in the reactor end) is therefore found to be a very useful criterion to increase security.

494

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

6.1.4

Breaker failure protection with transfer trip The main purpose of the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) is to provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for the SCC1 function is a breaker failure protection with transfer trip. Figure 265 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two transmission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates correctly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single pole tripping capabilities.

A FAULT L1 B1

C B4 BFP CS L2 CR LDD

B2

TRIP

B5

B3

TRIP

TRIP

B6

en03000122.vsd

Figure 265: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip. The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third circuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C. A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR signal. Depending on the rest of the network the sudden change in current criterion, in at least two phases, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due to false CR signals.

6.2
6.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the sudden change in current protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the sudden change in current protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated change in current, based on measurement of the current magnitude for two consecutive cycles.This section describes the method used when the value of the change in current is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

495

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

6.2.2

Sudden change in current calculation The sudden change in current is calculated for each phase separately as

Idiff ph = AB S I ph ( k ) I ph ( k 1 )
(Equation 349)

where:

I ph ( k )

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component for power system cycle number k

Normally Idiffph is very close to zero. At a sudden change in current, increase or decrease, Idiffph will reach a substantial level.

6.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic trip logic block logic

When the sudden change in current in any phase exceeds the set limit, DIL>, the SCC1-START output signal is activated, and kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed. The SCC1-TRIP signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: SCC1 function has picked up in at least 2 phases, and the carrier received signal SCC1-CR, is true.

The SCC1-TRIP signal is kept activated until the hold time tHTrip has elapsed.

Note!
The SCC1-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input SCC1-BLOCK can cause a trip from the SCC1 function instantaneously. The design and operation of the SCC1 function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 266. There are two output signals from the SCC1 function:
SCC1-START: SCC1-TRIP: Start signal Trip signal

The blocking signal SCC1-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

496

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

SCC1_tHstart

&

SCC1_START

SCC1_L1 SCC1_L2 SCC1_L3 & & &

SCC1_tHTrip

&

SCC1_TRIP

SCC1_BLOCK SCC1_TEST & SCC1_TEST BLK

SCC1_CR

en01000362.vsd

Figure 266: Simplified logic diagram for the sudden change in residual current protection function.

6.4
6.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the sudden change in current protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the SCC1 function there are in total four settings: Operation: The operation of the entire SCC1 function has to be set to either On or Off. DIL> This is the change in current limit of the sudden change in current. If the RMS value of the current changes more than this limit, between two consecutive power system cycles, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT ratio has to be taken into account.

497

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

tHStart: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least one phase of the SCC1 function, to the reset of the start signal. tHStart is actually the duration of the true output on the SCC1-START signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds. tHTrip: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least two phases of the SCC1 function, to the reset of the trip signal. tHTrip is actually the duration of the true output on the SCC1-TRIP signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds. The pick-up level for DIL>, should be set, with some margin, to the largest sudden changes in current caused by normal switching and load changes. There is no intentional time delay in the SCC1 function. 6.4.2 Setting example Figure 267 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The SCC1 function is going to be implemented in the sending end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 267: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line.

Table 28:
CT1 ratio VT1 ratio CT2 ratio CT3 ratio

Relevant data for the SCC1 function setting

200/1 55000/3 / 110/3 150/1 600/5

Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/Analog Inputs/U1-U5 Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/Analog Inputs/I1-I5 Minimum load current Maximum sudden change in current, due to switching and load change 55 A 12 A

498

Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

To be able to achieve selectivity, for a fault at minimum load, the minimum load current must be higher than the maximum sudden change in current, due to other events than a fault, such as switching and load change. On the other hand a false SCC1-START or SCC1-TRIP can in most cases be accepted since, it must coincide with a SCC1-CR signal to take any action. The following procedure shows how to calculate the SCC1 function pick-up value. Minimum load current is 55 A. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up value. We get the following primary setting: Iprimary = 0.80 x 55A = 44A The current ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the CT ratio:

1 1 - = 44 --------- A = 0.22A I secondary = Iprimary --------200 200

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base current of the corresponding current inputs on the terminal as: Ibase = 1A The setting of the parameter DIL> will therefore be:

0.22A - = 0.22 = 22% DIL> = --------------1A

The hold time for the outputs, tHStart and tHTrip, are both set to 2s, to give long enough time to get the CR signal from the remote end. If pick-up by one of three phases is sufficient, the SCC1-START signal is used. If pick-up by two out of three phases is desired, the SCC1-TRIP signal is used.

499

Sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC)

Application
The sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC) can be used wherever a sudden change in residual current can be used to improve the overall functionality of the protection system. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used. Whenever an earth-fault occurs, or a circuit-breaker get stuck in one phase, a residual current appears, that can be used to increase the security of transfer trip arrangements.

7.1

7.2

Functionality
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the sudden change in residual current protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the sudden change in residual current protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated change in residual current, based on measurement of the current magnitude for two consecutive cycles.

This section describes the method used when the value of the change in residual current is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

7.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, and block logic.

When the sudden change in residual current exceeds the set limit, DIN>, the SCRC-START output signal is activated, and kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed. The SCRC-TRIP signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: SCRC function has picked up, and the carrier received signal, SCRC-CR, is true.

500

Sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The SCRC-TRIP signal is kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed.

Note!
The SCRC-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input SCRC-BLOCK can cause a trip from the SCRC function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the SCRC function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 268. There are two output signals from the SCRC function:
SCRC-START: SCRC-TRIP: Start signal Trip signal

The blocking signal SCRC-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

SCRC_tHStart

&

SCRC_START

SCRC_tHTrip

SCRC_R SCRC_CR SCRC_BLOCK

&

SCRC_TRIP

SCRC_TEST & SCRC_TEST BLK

en01000363.vsd

Figure 268: Simplified logic diagram for the sudden change in residual current protection function.

501

Sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

7.4
7.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the sudden change in residual current protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the SCRC function there are in total five settings: Operation: The operation of the entire SCRC function has to be set to either On or Off. DIN>:This is the change in residual current limit of the sudden change in residual current. If the RMS value of the residual current changes more than this limit, between two consecutive power system cycles, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT ratio has to be taken into account. tHStart: This is hold time from the pick-up, to the reset of the start signal. tHStart is actually the duration of the true output on the SCRC-START signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds. tHTrip: This is hold time from the pick-up, of the SCRC function, to the reset of the trip signal. tHTrip is actually the duration of the true output on the SCRC-TRIP signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds. IMeasured: This parameter has to be set to I4 or I5, depending on, from which input the current signal used in the function is taken. The pick-up level for DIN>, should be set, with some margin, to the largest sudden changes in residual current caused by normal switching and load changes. There is no intentional time delay in the SCRC function.

502

Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV)

Application
The sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV) can be used wherever a sudden change in voltage can be used to improve the overall functionality of the protection system. One application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used. Another application is to recognize network topology changes that cause sudden changes in the voltage. Also faults, tap-changer operations, shunt device switching, etc., cause sudden changes in voltage that can be captured by the SCV function.

8.1

8.2
8.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the sudden change in voltage protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the sudden change in voltage protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated change in voltage, based on measurement of the voltage magnitude for two consecutive cycles.

This section describes the method used when the value of the change in voltage is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked. 8.2.2 Sudden change in voltage calculation The sudden change in voltage is calculated for each phase separately as

Udiff ph = ABS

U ph ( k ) Uph ( k 1 )
(Equation 350)

where
is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component for power system cycle number k.

U ph ( k )

Normally Udiffph is very close to zero. At a sudden change in voltage, increase or decrease, Udiffph will reach a substantial level.

503

Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

8.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, and block and fuse failure logic

When the sudden change in voltage in any phase exceeds the set limit, DUL>, the SCV-START output signal is activated, and kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed. The SCV-TRIP signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: SCV function has picked up in at least 2 phases, and the carrier received signal, SCV-CR, is true. The SCV-TRIP signal is kept activated until the hold time tHTrip has elapsed.

Note!
The SCV-BLOCK or SCV-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input SCV-BLOCK or SCV-VTSU can cause a trip from the SCV function instantaneously. The design and operation of the SCC1 function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 269. There are two output signals from the SCV function:
SCV-START: SCV-TRIP: Start signal Trip signal

The blocking signal SCV-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

504

Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

SCV_tLow

&

SCV_START

SCV_L1 SCV_L2 SCV_L3 & & & SCV_VTSU SCV_BLOCK

1 1 1
SCV_tHigh

&

SCV_TRIP

SCV_TEST & SCV_TEST BLK

SCV_CR

en01000364.vsd

Figure 269: Simplified logic diagram for the sudden change in voltage protection function.

8.4
8.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the sudden change in voltage protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the SCV function there are in total four settings: Operation: The operation of the entire SCV function has to be set to either On or Off. DUL>: This is the change in voltage limit of the sudden change in voltage. If the RMS value of the voltage changes more than this limit, between two consecutive power system cycles, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/3=63.5 V). To find the corresponding primary value, also the VT ratio has to be taken into account.

505

Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

tHStart: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least one phase of the SCV function, to the reset of the start signal. tHStart is actually the duration of the true output on the SCV-START signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds. tHTrip: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least two phases of the SCV function, to the reset of the trip signal. tHTrip is actually the duration of the true output on the SCV-TRIP signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds. The pick-up level for DUL>, should be set, with some margin, to the largest sudden changes in voltage caused by events that is not of interest for the present SCV function. There is no intentional time delay in the SCV function.

506

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

9
9.1

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Application
The overvoltage protection function (OVP) can be used wherever a "high voltage" signal is needed. There are a number of applications for the high voltage protection. It can be used wherever a high voltage is the result of an event that has to be indicated or actions to reduce the time with high voltage levels are required. One example is to take actions to quickly reduce high voltage levels by switching out shunt capacitors or switching in shunt reactors in case of a long transmission line connected in one end only. An example is shown in figure 270. If line 1 for some reason is disconnected in the far end, the voltage will increase in the substation. The overvoltage protection will then switch out shunt capacitors connected to the bus at the low-set level and switch in shunt reactors at the high-set level.

OVP-TRHIGH OVP function OVP-TRLOW XC XL VT1 Line 1

Load & Generation

en03000129.vsd

Figure 270: Overvoltage protection to switch shunt devices.

9.2
9.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the overvoltage protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the overvoltage protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS voltage of the fundamental, based on voltage measurements.

507

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

This section describes the method used when the value of the voltage, is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked. 9.2.2 Votage calculation The voltage is calculated for each phase separately as the RMS value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component.

9.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic trip logic block and fuse failure logic

When the voltage in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, ULLow>, the OVP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the voltage in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, ULHigh>, the OVP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The OVP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the voltage in at least 2 phases exceeds the setting ULLow>, carrier received signal, OVP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The OVP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the voltage in at least 2 phases exceeds the setting ULHigh>, carrier received signal, OVP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the OVP function, is based on local criteria only. All binary outputs are deactivated when the input OVP-BLOCK or OVP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The OVP-BLOCK or OVP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input OVP-BLOCK or OVP-VTSU can cause a trip from the OVP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the OVP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 271. There are four output signals from the OVP function:

508

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

OVP-STLOW: OVP-TRLOW OVP-STHIGH OVP-TRHIGH

Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signals OVP-BLOCK and OVP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any output. A trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the voltage is higher than the set value in two of the three phases and the carrier receive signal OVP-CR is true.

&
OVP_L1L OVP_L2L OVP_L3L

OVP_STLOW

OVP_tLow

& 2
OVP_tHigh

OVP_TRLOW

t OVP_L1H OVP_L2H OVP_L3H

& 1 & 2

OVP_TRHIGH

OVP_STHIGH

OVP_CR OVP_BLOCK OVP_VTSU OVP_TEST

1 &

OVP_TEST BLK

en06000053.vsd

Figure 271: Simplified logic diagram for the overvoltage protection function.

509

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

9.4
9.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the overvoltage protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the OVP function there are in total seven settings: Operation: The operation of the entire OVP function has to be set to either On or Off. ULLow>: This is the low-set limit of the voltage. If the voltage exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/3). To find the corresponding primary value, also the VT ratio has to be taken into account. ULHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the voltage. If the voltage exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OVP low-set function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the voltage returns to a value below the set-limit, ULLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OVP high-set function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the voltage returns to a value below the set-limit, ULHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. Hysteresis: Reset ratio of the OVP function. The reset ratio can be set in the range of 94.0-99.0%. Accuracy: The accuracy has to be set to either normal or high. If high accuracy is required, a longer measuring time has to be accepted. The pick-up level for ULLow> and ULHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest voltage level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

9.4.2

Setting example Figure 272 shows a busbar in a transmission network. The OVP function is going to be implemented in the sending end to switch the shunt devices at high voltage levels.

510

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

OVP-TRHIGH OVP function OVP-TRLOW XC XL VT1 Line 1

Load & Generation

en03000129.vsd

Figure 272: Busbar with overvoltage protection. Relevant data for the OVP function setting are shown in table 29.
Table 29:
VT1 ratio

Relevant data for the OVP function setting

400000/3 / 110/3

Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Normal operating voltage interval Maximum operating voltage 410-420 kV 425 kV

Both the shunt capacitor (XC) and the shunt reactor (XL) give a voltage change of about 5 kV. Therefore the capacitor is switched out at 415 kV, and the reactor is switched in at 420 kV. The time delay is not critical, so to avoid unwanted switching due to transients, one second is chosen. The high accuracy level is chosen and the hysteresis is chosen to 99.0%, since we are dealing with quite small relative changes in voltage. The calculation of the settings for the low-set and the high-set of the voltage level is then straightforward.

110 --------3 1415 1----------- ---------- 110 --------- ---------ULLow> = Uprimary -------= --------= 1.0376 = 103.8% 400000 3 400 63.5 ------------------- 63.5 3
(Equation 351)

511

Overvoltage protection (OVP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

110 --------420 113 - -------------------- 110 --------- ---------ULHigh> = Uprimary ------- = --------= 1.0501 = 105.0% 400000 63.5 400 63.5 3 ------------------3
(Equation 352)

512

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

10
10.1

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Application
The undercurrent protection function (UCP) can be used wherever a low current signal is needed. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used Three different application examples for the undercurrent protection function (UCP) are given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feeding line, a line connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit breaker in another substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local low current criterion is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals.

10.1.1

Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line The main purpose of the undercurrent protection function (UCP) is to provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for this function is a power transformer directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in figure 273.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 273: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line. Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in order to open also the line circuit breaker. The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line. Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

513

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

The current in at least one of the phases at the sending end of the line decreases, when the differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and the breaker contacts open. This means, that an undercurrent function, properly set, could provide a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the transformer, with basically unchanged dependability. The UCP function could preferably be integrated in the line protection in the sending end. 10.1.2 Line connected shunt reactor The main purpose of the undercurrent protection function (UCP) is to, provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for the UCP function is a line connected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 274. Shunt reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage lines. Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will occur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2 Line connected shunt reactor CT3 TRIP IDIFF> Load CS

~
Source

Xsource

en03000121.vsd

Figure 274: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor. Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the local line circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end. The line protection in the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection, and will only operate for low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal. To avoid line trips at the remote end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion can be added at the remote end. Low current in at least two of the phases (suppose that not more than one breaker pole get stuck in the reactor end) is therefore found to be a very useful criterion to increase security. 10.1.3 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip The main purpose of the undercurrent protection function (UCP) is to, provide a local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for the UCP function is a breaker failure protection with transfer trip.

514

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Figure 275 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two transmission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates correctly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single pole tripping capabilities.

A FAULT L1 B1

C B4 BFP CS L2 CR LDD

B2

TRIP

B5

B3

TRIP

TRIP

B6

en03000122.vsd

Figure 275: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip. The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third circuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C. A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR signal. Depending on the rest of the network the undercurrent criterion, in at least two phases, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due to false CR signals.

10.2

Functionality
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the undercurrent protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the undercurrent protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS value of the fundamental current component, I, based on the measured current.

This section describes the method used when the value of the current, I, is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked. Current calculation The current is calculated for each phase separately as the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component.

515

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Conditioning elements There are no conditioning elements for the undercurrent function.

10.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, and block logic

When the current in any phase decreases to a value below the low-set limit, ILLow<, the UCP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the current in any phase decreases to a value below the high-set limit, ILHigh<, the UCP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The UCP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the current in at least two phases is below the low-set limit, carrier received signal, UCP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The UCP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the current in at least two phases is below the high-set limit, carrier received signal, UCP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input UCP-BLOCK is activated.

Note!
The UCP-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input LAPP-BLOCK can cause a trip from the UCP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the UCP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 276. There are four output signals from the UCP function:
UCP-STLOW: UCP-TRLOW: UCP-STHIGH: UCP-TRHIGH: Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signals UCP-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start signals, as well as the trip signals, are non-directional.

516

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

& UCP_L1L UCP_L2L UCP_L3L & & &

UCP_tHigh

UCP_STLOW

UCP_tLow

& 1

UCP_TRLOW

UCP_L1H UCP_L2H UCP_L3H & & &

UCP_CR
UCP_BLOCK

& 1 & 1

UCP_TRHIGH

UCP_STHIGH

1 UCP_TEST & UCP_TEST BLK

en01000361.vsd

Figure 276: Simplified logic diagram for the accurate undercurrent protection function.

10.4
10.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the undercurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the UCP function there are in total five settings:

517

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Operation: The operation of the entire UCP function has to be set to either On or Off. ILLow<: This is the low-set limit of the current. If the current decreases below this limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT ratio has to be taken into account. ILHigh<: This is the high-set limit of the current. If the current decreases below this limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the UCP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current recovers to a value over the set-limit, ILLow<, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the UCP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current recovers to a value over the set-limit, ILHigh<, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. The pick-up level for ILLow< and ILHigh<, should be set, with some margin, to the lowest current level that can appear during normal operation conditions. The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier received signals, should normally be set to zero. 10.4.2 Setting example Figure 277 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The UCP function is going to be implemented in the sending end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR TRIP LDD VT1 Line CT1 CT2

CS IDIFF>

TRIP

~
Source

Xsource

CT3 Power Transformer Load

en03000120.vsd

Figure 277: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line. Relevant data for the UCP function setting are shown in table 30.

518

Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Table 30:
CT1 ratio VT1 ratio CT2 ratio CT3 ratio

Relevant data for the UCP function setting

200/1 55000/ / 110/3 150/1 600/5 63.5 V

Ubx-Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic protection paramter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx-Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Minimum current to the load

1A

15A (as measred by CT1)

For this simple example we use the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, comes from the transformer differential protection, which in most applications not have any intentional time delay. Therefore we also choose the time delay of the UCP function to be zero. The following procedure shows how to calculate the UCP function pick-up value. Minimum current to the load is 15 A, as measured by CT1. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up value and we get the following setting:

1100% - = 6.0% ILLow< = 0.80 15 --------A -------------200 1A

(Equation 353)

519

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

11
11.1

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Application
The overcurrent protection function (OCP) can be used wherever a high current signal is needed. There are a number of applications for the high current protection, wherever current has to be limited or certain actions have to be taken when the current exceeds specific values. One example is to arm system protection schemes based on high line current. Suppose that the transmission corridor, in figure 278, can transfer 1500 A on each line. With all four lines in operation, the generation shedding system, triggered by line trip, has to be armed at a transfer of 4500 A. If one line is tripped, or out of service, and the transmission exceeds 3000 A, the generation shedding has to be armed.

Arming

OCP function Sum(I1-I4) CT1 Line 1

VT1 Generator rejection scheme

CT2

Line 2

~
Source

CT3

Line 3 Load & Generation

CT4

Line 4

en03000128.vsd

Figure 278: Generation shedding system armed by high current.

11.2

Functionality
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the overcurrent protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the overcurrent protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component, I.

This section describes the method used when the value of the current, I, is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

520

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Current calculation The current is calculated for each phase separately as the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component, based on the CT measurements. The overcurrent protection function is non-directional. Conditioning elements There are no conditioning elements for the overcurrent protection function.

11.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, and block logic.

When the current in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, ILLow>, the OCP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the current in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, ILHigh>, the OCP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The OCP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the current in at least 2 phases exceeds the low-set limit, carrier received signal, OCP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed

The OCP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the current in at least 2 phases exceeds the high-set limit, carrier received signal, OCP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the OCP function, is based on local criteria only. All binary outputs are deactivated when the input OCP-BLOCK is activated.

Note!
The OCP-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input OCP-BLOCK can cause a trip from the OCP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the OCP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 279. There are four output signals from the OCP function:

521

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

OCP-SRLOW: OCP-TRLOW: OCP-STHIGH: OCP-TRHIGH:

Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signal OCP-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

& OCP_L1L OCP_L2L OCP_L3L & & &

OCP_tHigh

OCP_STLOW

OCP_tLow

& 1

OCP_TRLOW

OCP_L1H OCP_L2H OCP_L3H & & &

OCP_CR

& 1 & 1

OCP_TRHIGH

OCP_STHIGH

OCP_BLOCK 1 OCP_TEST & OCP_TEST BLK

en01000366.vsd

Figure 279: Simplified logic diagram for the phase overcurrent protection.

522

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

11.4
11.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the OCP function there are in total five settings: Operation: The operation of the entire OCP function has to be set to either On or Off. ILLow>: This is the low-set limit of the current. If the current exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT ratio has to be taken into account. ILHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the current. If the current exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OCP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current returns to a value below the set-limit, ILLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OCP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current returns to a value below the set-limit, ILHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. The pick-up level for ILLow> and ILHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest current level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

11.4.2

Setting example Figure 280 shows a transmission corridor comprising four lines. The OCP function is going to be implemented in the sending end to arm the generation shedding system. Each transmission line can carry 1500 A. Two arming levels will be used: one for 4 lines in operation at 4500 A, and another one for 3 lines in operation at 3000 A.

523

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Arming

OCP function Sum(I1-I4) CT1 Line 1

VT1 Generator rejection scheme

CT2

Line 2

~
Source

CT3

Line 3 Load & Generation

CT4

Line 4

en03000128.vsd

Figure 280: Transmission corridor with generation rejection scheme. Relevant data for the OCP function setting are shown in table 31
Table 31: Relevant data for the OCP function setting
1000/1 63.5 V

CT1-CT4 ratio Ubx-Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic protection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/U1-U5 Ibx-Base current for inut Ix. This is a basic protection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/AnalogInputs/I1-I5 Maximum current per line

5A

1500 A

For this simple example we show the setting procedure for both the low-setting and the high-setting. The carrier receive signal, OCP-CR, should be set to fixed true signal in the configuration. Since the protection is installed to avoid thermal overload of the lines after another line trip - the arming of the generation protection scheme can be instantaneous. Therefore we choose the time delay of the OCP function to be zero. A complementary low current function can be used to disarm the generation shedding system. The following procedure shows how to calculate the OCP function pick-up value. Maximum current for the low-set level is chosen to 3000 A, corresponding to the capacity of two lines. Let us use 95% of this value for the pick-up value. We get the following setting:

1A 100% - ----------------- = 57.0% ILLow> = 0.95 3000A ---------------1000A 5A

(Equation 354)

524

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

Maximum current for the high-set level is chosen to 4500 A, corresponding to the capacity of two lines. Let us use 95% of this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following setting:

1A - 100% - = 85.5% ILHigh> = 0.95 4500A x --------------- -------------1000A 5A

(Equation 355)

525

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

12
12.1

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Application
The residual overcurrent protection function (ROCP) can be used wherever a high residual current signal is needed. There are a number of applications for the high residual current protection, most of them related to earth faults in low impedance earthed systems. One example is to use the residual overcurrent protection as a simple earth fault protection, as back-up for the primary earth fault protection included in the line distance protection.

12.2
12.2.1

Functionality
General The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the residual overcurrent protection function, as well as specific algorithms used. The algorithm of the residual overcurrent protection facility is rather straightforward: Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) residual current component.

This section describes the method used when the value of the residual current is calculated. 12.2.2 Current calculation The residual current is calculated as the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) measured current component. The residual overcurrent protection function is non-directional. Conditioning elements There are no conditioning elements for the residual overcurrent protection function.

12.2.3

12.3

Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described: start logic, trip logic, and block logic.

When the residual current exceeds the low-set limit, INLow>, the ROCP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the residual current exceeds the high-set limit, INHigh>, the ROCP-STHIGH output signal is activated. The ROCP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the residual current exceeds the low-set limit,

526

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

carrier received signal, ROCP-CR, is true, and time delay tLow has elapsed.

The ROCP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled: the residual current exceeds the high-set limit, carrier received signal, ROCP-CR, is true, and time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the ROCP function, is based on local criteria only. All binary outputs are deactivated when the input ROCP-BLOCK is activated.

Note!
The ROCP-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, deactivating the input ROCP-BLOCK can cause a trip from the ROCP function instantaneously. The design and operation of the ROCP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to figure 281. There are four output signals from the ROCP function:
ROCP-STLOW ROCP-TRLOW ROCP-STHIGH ROCP-TRHIGH Low-set start Low-set trip High-set start High-set trip

The blocking signal ROCP-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

527

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

&

ROCP_STLOW

ROCP_tLow

ROCP_L1L

&

ROCP_TRLOW

&

ROCP_STHIGH

ROCP_tHigh

ROCP_L1H

&

ROCP_TRHIGH

ROCP_CR

ROCP_BLOCK 1 ROCP_TEST & ROCP_TEST BLK

en03000114.vsd

Figure 281: Simplified logic diagram for the residual overcurrent protection function.

12.4
12.4.1

Calculation
Setting instructions The parameters for the residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI. For the ROCP function there are in total six settings: Operation: The operation of the entire ROCP function has to be set to either On or Off.

528

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

INLow>: This is the low-set limit of the residual current. If the residual current exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT ratio has to be taken into account. INHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the residual current. If the residual current exceeds this limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit. tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the ROCP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the residual current returns to a value below the set-limit, INLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the ROCP function to the issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the residual current returns to a value below the set-limit, INHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued. I Measured: This parameter has to be set to I4 or I5, dependig on the used current input. The pick-up level for INLow> and INHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest residual current level that can appear during normal operation conditions. The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier received signals, should normally be set to zero.

529

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions

530

About this chapter

Chapter 14 Data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

About this chapter This chapter describes the data communication and the associated hardware.

531

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1
1.1
1.1.1

Remote end data communication

Application
General The hardware communication modules (or modems) for the Remote end data communication are available in basically three different versions: for optical communication for short range pilot wire communication for galvanic connection to communication equipment according to ITU (CCITT) and EIA interface standards.

All systems are designed to be able to work at 64 kbit/s. Some of them can also work at North American standard of 56 kbit/s. This is especially pointed out in the description under each module. If the protection terminal is located at a long distance (>100 m for V.36, X.21 and RS530 and >10m for G.703) from the communication equipment or multiplexer or if the cables run through a noisy area, optical communication should be used to interconnect the protection terminal and the communication equipment. In this case the protection terminal contains module used for optical fibre communication and a suitable optical to electrical converter is installed close to the communication equipment due to the fact that there exists no standard for optical connections to communication equipment. The optical-to-electrical converters that can be used are FOX 512/515 from ABB and 21-15xx or 21-16xx from FIBERDATA. The FOX 512/515 together with optical fibre modem supports the G.703 co-directional interfacing and with restrictions for X.21 and V.36. 21-15xx supports V.35 and V.36 while 21-16xx supports X.21 and G.703. For 21-15xx and 21-16xx short range optical fibre modem is needed.

Note!
When using galvanic connection between protection terminal and communication equipment or point to point galvanic connection between two protection terminals it is essential that the cable installation is carefully done. See Installation and commissioning manual for further information. The terminal can be connected optically to FOX 512/515, provided the protection is equipped with the optical fibre modem , not the short range fibre optical modem, and the FOX is equipped with an Optical Terminal Module (OTERM).

1.2

Design
The Remote end data communication consists of two parts, one software part that handles the message structure, packing different pieces together, activate sending of the messages, unpacking received messages etc, and one hardware part forming the interface against external communication equipments. The hardware part, or built-in modems, can have either galvanic or optical connection. To ensure compatibility with a wide range of communication equipment and media,

532

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

the terminal is designed to work within the signalling bandwidth of a standard ITU (CCITT) PCM channel at 64 kbits/s. To enable the use in North American EIA PCM systems working at 56 kbits/s, some of the interfacing modules can be adapted to this bit rate. The message is based on the HDLC protocol. This is a protocol for the flow management of the information on a data communication link that is widely used. The basic information unit on an HDLC link is a frame. A frame consists of: start (or opening) flag address and control fields (if included) data to be transmitted CRC word end (or closing) flag.

The start and stop flags are 8 bit each and the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 16 bits. The data field differs if between a message sent from a slave to a master and a message sent from a master to a slave. The principle design is according to figure 282.

Start flag 8 bits

Information n x 16 bits

CRC 16 bits

Stop flag 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

Figure 282: Data message structure The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal) defined in HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used, instead a separate addressing is included in the data field. The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk of multiplexers occasionally mixing up the messages. Each terminal is given different terminal numbers. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages only from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation. No data restoration or retransmission are implemented. The hardware, consisting of a Data communication module, is placed in an applicable slot in the terminal. To add or remove the module, a reconfiguration of the terminal is done from the graphical configuration tool, CAP.

533

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1.3
1.3.1

Fibre optical module DCM-FOM

Application This module is designed for point to point optical communication, see figure 283, but can also be used for direct optical communication to a multiplexer of type FOX 512/515, see figure 284, from ABB, provided it is equipped with an Optical Terminal Module of type OTERM. The FOX 512/515 can also be used as an optical to electrical converter supporting the G.703 co-directional interfacing according to ITU (CCITT), see figure 285. FOX 512/515 can also in some cases be used for X.21 and V.36 interface but special attention must be paid to how to connect the signal. Used as an optical to electrical converter the FOX 512/515 only supports 64 kbit/s data transmission. Typical distances calculated from optical budget: 40-60 km with single mode fibre 15-20 km with multi mode fibre

Max losses: 16 dB with single mode fibre 21 dB with multi mode fibre

optical fibres REx 5xx

DCM-FOM singlemode or multimode DCM-FOM singlemode or multimode

REx 5xx

en03000159.vsd

Figure 283: Dedicated link, optical fibre connection

534

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

optical fibres FOX 515/512

REx 5xx

DCM-FOM

MUX

to the other end

other users

en03000151.vsd

Figure 284: Multiplexed link, optical fibre connection

optical fibres

Galvanic G.703 twisted pair cable with double shield < 10 m

REx 5xx

DCM-FOM

FOX 512/515

MUX
to the other end

other users

en03000152.vsd

Figure 285: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection with FOX 515 1.3.2 Design The optical communication module is designed to work with both 9/125 m single-mode fibres and 50/125 or 62,5/125 m multimode fibres at 1300 nm wavelength. The connectors are of type FC-PC (SM) or FC (MM) respectively. Two different levels of optical output power are used. The level of optical power is selected with a setting. Low power is used at short fibers in order not to saturate the receiver and thereby jeopardizing the functionality, and high power is used for long fibers to handle the high attenuation that follow. The optical budget of the modem, at high output power, is 16dB for single mode fiber and 21dB for multi mode fiber. This means that the total loss has to be less than the optical budget see table 32. The losses in the connection

535

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

in the protection terminal are not to be included in the optical budget since they are already accounted for. The maximum reach will depend on the properties of the used optical fiber but be around 15 km for multi mode fibers and 40-60 km for single mode during normal conditions. The multiplexer system can cover distances up to 200-300 km. For calculation of optical budget see, Installation and commissioning manual, chapter Configuring the 56/64 kbit data communication modules.

to Op

ive dr

to Op ever ci re

Interface converter & control logic

Fail indicator

CAN Memory

Microcontroller

99000224.vsd

Figure 286: Block diagram for the optical communication module.

536

Backplane connector

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1.3.3

Calculation Optical budget

Table 32: Sample calculation for direct connection between terminals
Single mode Distance Maximum attenuation for REx 5xx - 1300 nm 40 km -16 dB 60 km -16 dB Multi mode 15 km -21 dB

0.34 dB/km single mode 10/125 m 0.22 dB/km single mode 10/125 m 1 dB/km multimode 62.5/125 m Margins for installation, aging, etc. Losses in connection box, two contacts Margin for repair splices (0.5 dB/splice)
Maximum total attenuation

13.6 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0.4 dB
+16 dB

13.2 1.3 dB 1 dB 0.7 dB

+16 dB

15 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB
+21 dB

1.4
1.4.1

Galvanic interface
Application Interface modules for V.36, X.21 and RS530 Modules are available for the following interface recommendations, specifying the interconnection of the digital equipment to a PCM multiplexer: V.35/36 co-directional galvanic interface DCM - V36 co V.35/36 contra-directional galvanic interface DCM - V36 contra X.21 galvanic interface DCM - X21 RS530/422 co-directional galvanic interface DCM - RS 530 co RS530/422 contra-directional galvanic interface DCM - RS 530 contra

These interface modules are intended for connection to commercially available communication equipments or multiplexers and can be used both with 56 and 64 kbit/s data transmission. Since the protection communicates continuously, a permanent communication circuit is required. Consequently, the call control and handshaking features specified for some interfacing recommendations are not provided. Even if the standard claims that the reach for these interfaces are up to 1 km at 64 kbit/s it is not recommended to use that distance for protection purposes where the communication has to be reliable also under primary power system faults. This is due to the low level of the communication signals which gives low margin between signal and noise. If the protection terminal is in the

537

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

same building as the multiplexing equipment and the environment is relatively free from noise, the protection terminal may be connected directly to the multiplexer via shielded and properly earthed cables with twisted pairs for distances less than 100 m.

Note!
Due to problems of timing co-directional operation for V.35/36 and RS530 is only recommended to be used for direct back-to-back operation, for example during laboratory testing!

Galvanic V35/V36 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m REx 5xx
DCM-V36 contra

MUX
to the other end

other users

en03000153.vsd

Figure 287: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, V35/V36 contra directional

Galvanic V35/V36 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m REx 5xx
DCM-V36 co

MUX
to the other end

other users

en03000154.vsd

Figure 288: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, V35/V36 co-directional

538

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

Galvanic X.21 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m REx 5xx
DCM-X.21

MUX
to the other end

other users

en03000155.vsd

Figure 289: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, X.21

Galvanic RS530/422 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m REx 5xx
DCM-RS530 contra

MUX
to the other end

other users

en03000156.vsd

Figure 290: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, RS 530/422 contra directional

539

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

Galvanic RS530/422 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m REx 5xx
DCM-RS530 co

MUX
to the other end

other users

en03000157.vsd

Figure 291: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, RS 530/422 co-directional 1.4.2 Design

Process connector X3

CAN
Opto isolation

Memory

Process connector X2

Transceivers

DC/ DC

Microcontroller

Backplane connector
99000519.vsd

Figure 292: Block diagram for the galvanic communication module

540

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1.5
1.5.1

Short range galvanic module DCM-SGM

Application Short range galvanic modem The short range galvanic modem is used for point to point synchronous data transmission at 64 kbit/s at distances up to 3 km. Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex, over four wires in a communication (pilot wire) line according to figure 293. For shielding and earthing, please see the Installation and commissioning manual.

Twisted pair cable with double shield REx 5xx

DCM-SGM DCM-SGM

REx 5xx

en03000158.vsd

Figure 293: Dedicated link, short range galvanic modem Compared to normal data transmission standards, for example V.36, X.21 etc., the short range modem increase the operational security and admits longer distances of transmission. This is achieved by a careful choice of transmission technology, modified M-3 balanced current loop and galvanic isolation between the transmission line and the internal logic of the protection terminal. The reach will depend on the used cable. Higher capacitance between conductors and higher resistance will reduce the reach. The use of screened cables will increase the capacitance and thereby shorten the reach but this will often be compensated by the reduced noise giving a better operational security. Maximum ranges as a function of cable parameters are given in the diagram in figure 294.

541

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

Capacitance limit

Figure 294: Maximum reach for short range galvanic modem

Note!
The reaches in the diagram, figure 294, are given for twisted-pair and double-screened cables, one screen for each pair and one common outer screen. For non twisted-pair cables, the reach has to be reduced by 20%. For non pair-screened cables, the reach also has to be reduced by 20%. For non twisted and single screened cables, one common outer screen, the reach will therefor be reduced by 40%.

1.6
1.6.1

Short range fibre optical module DCM-SFOM

Application The short range optical fibre modem is used for point to point synchronous 64 kbit/s data transmission at distances of typically 3 to 5 km. The principle is according to figure 295. It can also be used together with optic fibre transceiver type 21-15xx/16xx from FIBERDATA in order to get an optical link between the protection terminal and a remotely located communication equipment as in figure 296. 21-15xx supports interfaces according to ITU (CCITT) standards V.35 and V.36 co- and contra-directional. 21-16xx supports interfaces standards X21 and G.703 according to ITU (CCITT). Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex, over two optical fibres. The fibres shall be of multi mode type, 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m. The optical budget of the modem is 15dB. This means that the total loss in the fiber optic communication path including splices, connectors and also ageing and other margins of the fiber has to be less than 15dB. The losses in the connection for the protection terminal are not to be in-

542

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

cluded in the optical budget since they are already accounted for. The maximum reach will depend on the properties of the used optical fiber but is typically between 3 and 5 km during normal conditions. The short range optical module has ST type connectors.

optical fibres REx 5xx

DCM-SFOM multimode DCM-SFOM multimode

REx 5xx

en03000150.vsd

Figure 295: Dedicated link, short range optical fibre connection

optical fibres
21-15X FIBERDATA

Galvanic V35/V36 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m V35/V36

REx 5xx

DCM-SFOM

MUX

to the other end

other users

en03000147.vsd

Figure 296: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection V35/V36 with 21-15X

543

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

optical fibres
21-16X FIBERDATA

Galvanic X.21 twisted pair cable with double shield < 100 m X.21

REx 5xx

DCM-SFOM

MUX

to the other end

other users

en03000148.vsd

Figure 297: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection X.21 with 21-16X

optical fibres
21-16X FIBERDATA

Galvanic G.703 twisted pair cable with double shield < 10 m G.703

REx 5xx

DCM-SFOM

MUX

to the other end

other users

en03000149.vsd

Figure 298: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection G.703 with 21-16X

544

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1.7
1.7.1

Co-directional G.703 galvanic interface DCM-G.703

Application Interface modules for G.703 co-directional This interface module is intended for connection to commercially available communication equipments or multiplexers with G.703 interface. It can only be used with transmission rate of 64 kbit/s. Furthermore it only supports co-directional operation. Contra-directional and centralised clock are not supported. Even if the standard claims that the reach can be rather long at 64 kbit/s, it is not recommended to use this for protection purposes where the communication has to be reliable also under primary power system faults. This is due to the low level of the communication, signals only 1 V, which gives low margin between signal and noise. If the protection and the communication equipment are located in the same room and the environment is free of noise, the protection terminal may be connected directly to the multiplexer via shielded and properly earthed cables with twisted pairs, same as shown in figure for V.36 etc, for distances up to 10 m.

Galvanic G.703 twisted pair cable with double shield < 10 m REx 5xx
DCM-G.703

MUX

to the other end

other users

en03000146.vsd

Figure 299: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, G.703

1.8
1.8.1

Carrier module
Application Use the carrier module with the appropriate galvanic or optical communication submodule for short range communication of binary signals. Use the optical communication module (DCM-SFOM) when connecting a FIBERDATA 21-15X or FIBERDATA 21-16X optical-to-electric modem. The 21-15X model supports V.35 and V.36 standards, and the 21-16X model X.21 or G.703 standards.

545

Remote end data communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1.8.2

Design The carrier module is used to connect a communication sub-module to the platform. It adds the CAN-communication and the interface to the rest of the platform. By this the capability to transfer binary signals between for example two distance protection units is added. The following three types of sub-modules can be added to the carrier module: Short range galvanic communication module (DCM-SGM) Short range optical communication module (DCM-SFOM) G.703 communication module (DCM-G.703)

The carrier module senses the type of sub-module via one of the two connectors.

Memory

Microcontroller

CAN Backplane connector

99000520.vsd

Sub-module

Figure 300: Block diagram for the carrier module.

546

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

2
2.1
2.1.1

Serial communication
Serial communication, SPA
Application Fibre optic loop The SPA communication is mainly used for SMS. It can include different numerical relays/terminals with remote communication possibilities. The fibre optic loop can contain < 20-30 terminals depending on requirements on response time. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can be made directly (if the PC is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a telephone network with ITU (CCITT) characteristics.
Table 33:
glass plastic

Max distances between terminals/nodes

< 1000 m according to optical budget < 25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

REx 5xx

SPA bus Optical fibre loop

CAP tool

REx 5xx Telephone modem

1

REx 5xx Opto/electrical converter

Telephone modem

en03000113.vsd

Where: 1 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain 1 ms accuracy for time tagging within the substation

Figure 301: Example of SPA communication structure for a station monitoring system RS485 multidrop The SPA communication is mainly used for SMS. It can include different numerical relays/terminals with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can be made directly (via a suitable RS485 interface) if the PC is located in the substation or by telephone modem through a telephone network with ITU (CCITT) characteristics. Max distance for the whole network is 100 meter.

547

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

REx 5xx
1

Substation Monitoring System

REx 5xx
2

REx 5xx
3
en03000106.vsd

Where: 1 2 3 Terminated RS485 interface Unterminated RS485 interface Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain 1 ms accuracy for time tagging within the substation

Figure 302: Example of SPA communication structure for a station monitoring system with RS485 multidrop 2.1.2 Functionality The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the terminal is a slave and the PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each optic fibre loop or RS485 network. A program is needed in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for translation of the settings sent to the terminal. Design When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is: or A correct RS485 network installation according to EIA Standard RS-485, please refer to the Installation and commissioning manual PC Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC

2.1.3

548

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed plus telephone modems. The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is CAP 540. When communicating to a front-connected PC, the only hardware required is the special front-connection cable. 2.1.4 Calculations The parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI. Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. To define the protocols to be used on the two rear communication ports, a setting is done on the local HMI. Refer to Installation and commissioning manual for setting procedure. When the communication protocols have been selected, the terminal is automatically restarted. The most important settings in the terminal for SPA communication are the slave number and baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all communication contact to the terminal. These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication and for front channel communication. The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number is unique within the used SPA loop. The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and 38400 baud. See technical data to determine the rated communication speed for the selected communication interfaces.The baud rate should be the same for the whole station, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in the same fibre optical loop or RS485 network are used, consider this when making the communication setup in the communication master, the PC. The maximum baud rate of the front connection is limited to 9600 baud. For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If telephone communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remember that the terminal does not adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions, because the speed is set on the HMI of the terminal.

2.2
2.2.1

Serial communication, IEC (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)

Application Fibre optic loop The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have a software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Table 34:
glass plastic

Max distances between terminals/nodes

< 1000 m according to optical budget < 25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

549

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

Station HMI such as Micro SCADA with LIB 520 REx 5xx REx 5xx REx 5xx
1
en03000140.vsd

IEC 60870-5-103

Where: 1 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain 1 ms accuracy within the substation

Figure 303: Example of IEC communication structure for a station monitoring system RS485 multidrop The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have a software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

550

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

REx 5xx
1

Substation Monitoring System

REx 5xx
2

REx 5xx
3
en03000106.vsd

Where: 1 2 3 Terminated RS485 interface Unterminated RS485 interface Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain 1 ms accuracy within the substation

Figure 304: Example of IEC communication structure for a station monitoring system with RS485 multidrop 2.2.2 Functionality The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point to point principle. The master must have a software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment. Design General The protocol implementation in REx 5xx consists of the following functions: Event handling Report of analog service values (measurands) Fault location Command handling - Autorecloser ON/OFF - Teleprotection ON/OFF - Protection ON/OFF

2.2.3

551

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

- LED reset - Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups) File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization

Hardware When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is: or A correct RS485 network installation according to EIA Standard RS-485, please refer to the Installation and commissioning manual PC/RTU Optical fibres, glass/plastic Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU PC/RTU

Events The events created in the terminal available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based on the event function blocks EV01 - EV06. These function blocks include the function type and the information number for each event input, which can be found in the IEC-document. See also the description of the Event function. Measurands The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the standard. Measurands sent on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol should be multiplied with 1706.25 in the master system to be correctly presented. Fault location The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and reported when the fault locator function is included in the terminal. Commands The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a dedicated function block. This block has output signals according to the protocol for all available commands. File transfer The file transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master. The eight last disturbances, that are recorded, are available for transfer to the master. A file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master can not be transferred again. The binary signals, that are reported, are those that are connected to the disturbance function blocks DRP1 - DRP3. These function blocks include the function type and the information number for each signal. See also the description of the Disturbance report.

552

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

The analog channels, that are reported, are the first four current inputs and the first four voltage inputs. 2.2.4 Calculation Settings from the local HMI The parameters for IEC communication are set via the local HMI. Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. To define the protocols to be used on the two rear communication ports, a setting is done on the local HMI. Refer to Installation and commissioning manual for setting procedure. When the communication protocol have been selected, the terminal is automatically restarded. The settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following: Individually blocking of commands Setting of measurand type Setting of main function type and activation of main function type Settings for slave number and baud rate (communication speed) Command for giving Block of information command

Each command has its own blocking setting and the state can be set to OFF or ON. The OFF state corresponds to non-blocked state and ON corresponds to blocked state. The type of measurands can be set to report standardised types, Type 3.1, Type 3.2, Type 3.3, Type 3.4 or Type 9. The use of main function type is to facilitate the engineering work of the terminal.The main function type can be set to values according to the standard, this is, between 1 and 255. The value zero is used as default and corresponds to not used. The setting for activation of main function type can be set to OFF or ON. The OFF state corresponds to non-activated state and ON corresponds to activated state. When activated the main function type overrides all other settings for function type within the terminal, that is, function type settings for event function and disturbance recorder function. When set to OFF, function type settings for event function and disturbance recorder function use their own function type settings made on the function blocks for the event function and disturbance recorder respectively. Though for all other functions they use the main function type even when set to OFF. The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255. The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 Baud or 19200 Baud. See technical data to determine the rated communication speed for the selected communication interfaces. Information command with the value one (1) blocks all information sent to the master and abort any GI procedure or any file transfer in process. Thus issuing the command with the value set to zero (0) will allow information to be polled by the master. The dialogue to operate the output from the BlockOfInformation command function is performed from different state as follows:

553

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

1. Selection active; select the: C button, and then the No box activates. Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow changes to the down arrow. E button, and then the Yes box activates. 2. Yes box active; select the: C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window. E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window. Right arrow to activate the No box. 3. No box active; select the: C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window. E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window. Left arrow to activate the Yes box. Settings from the CAP tool Event For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. In order to get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the event function shall be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask shall be set to ON_SET. In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description of the Main Function type set on the local HMI. Commands As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with eight output signals. The configuration of these signals are made by using the CAP tool. To realise the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input on an event function block. This input shall have the information number 20 (monitor direction blocked) according to the standard. File transfer For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To be able to correctly indicate SOF and FAN (see IEC 60870-5-103 7.2.6.24 and 7.2.6.6) all protection START signals must be combined into one signal, which is connected to an input of the DRP function block. This input should have information number 84,General Start. Furthermore, the combined signal should also be connected to an EV function block and have information number 84 configured. The TRxx-TRIP signal should in the same way be connecter to DRP and EV function blocks with information number 68, General Trip configured. Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorder function for the function type. Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.

554

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

2.3
2.3.1

Serial communication, LON

Application An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables communication with the terminal through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.

LON-bus REx 5xx

Station HMI such as Micro SCADA with LIB 520

Control Center

Gateway REx 5xx REx 5xx

1
en01000081.vsd

Where: 1 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain 1 ms accuracy within the substation

Figure 305: Example of LON communication structure for substation automation 2.3.2 Functionality The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer to the sections Event function and Multiple command function. Design The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application, but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting the star coupler to the terminals. To communicate with the terminals from MicroSCADA, the application library LIB 520 is needed. The HV/Control and the HV/REx 500 software modules are included in the LIB 520 high-voltage process package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA applications.

2.3.3

555

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

The HV/Control software module is intended to be used for control functions in REx 5xx terminals. This module contains the process picture, dialogues and process database for the control application in the MicroSCADA. The HV/REx 500 software module is used for setting and monitoring of the terminal via the MicroSCADA screen. At use of this function the PST Parameter Setting Tool (of v1.1 or higher) is required. 2.3.4 Calculations Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI. Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This is a software tool applied as one node on the LON bus. In order to communicate via LON, the terminals need to know which node addresses the other connected terminals have, and which network variable selectors should be used. This is organised by the LNT. The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter ServicePinMsg=YES. The node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus, or the LNT can scan the network for new nodes. The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can be changed by the LNT. If the LON communication from the terminal stops, caused by setting of illegal communication parameters (outside the setting range) or by another disturbance, it is possible to reset the LON port of the terminal. By setting the parameter LONDefault=YES, the LON communication is reset in the terminal, and the addressing procedure can start from the beginning again. There are a number of session timers which can be set via the local HMI. These settings are only for advanced use and should only be changed after recommendation from ABB.

2.4
2.4.1

Serial communication modules

SPA/IEC The serial communication module for SPA/IEC is placed in a slot at the rear of the main processing module. One of the following conection options is available for serial communication: two plastic fibre cables; (Rx, Tx) or two glass fibre cables; (Rx, Tx) or galvanic RS485

The type of connection is chosen when ordering the terminal. The fibre optic SPA/IEC port can be connected point-to-point, in a loop, or with a star coupler. The incoming optical fibre is connected to the Rx receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the Tx transmitter output. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

556

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

The electrical RS485 can be connected in multidrop with maximum 4 terminals.

Note!
Pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibre cables. 2.4.2 LON The serial communication module for LON is placed in a slot at the rear of the Main processing module. One of the following options is available for serial communication: two plastic fibre cables; (Rx, Tx) or two glass fibre cables; (Rx, Tx)

The type of connection is chosen when ordering the terminal. The incoming optical fibre is connected to the Rx receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the Tx transmitter output. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

Note!
Pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibre cables.

557

Serial communication

Chapter 14 Data communication

558

About this chapter

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

About this chapter This chapter describes the different hardware modules.

559

Platform

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

1
1.1

Platform
General
The REx 5xx platform consists of a case, hardware modules and a set of common functions. The closed and partly welded steel case makes it possible to fulfill stringent EMC requirements. Three different sizes of the case are available to fulfill the space requirements of different terminals. The degree of protection is IP 40 according to IEC 60529 for cases with the widths 1/2x19 and 3/4x19. IP 54 can be obtained for the front area in flush and semiflush applications. Mounting kits are available for rack, flush, semiflush or wall mounting. All connections are made on the rear of the case. Screw compression type terminal blocks are used for electrical connections. Serial communication connections are made by optical fibre connectors type Hewlett Packard (HFBR) for plastic fibres or bayonet type ST for glass fibres. A set of hardware modules are always included in a terminal. Application specific modules are added to create a specific terminal type or family. The common functions provide a terminal with basic functionality such as self supervision, I/O-system configurator, real time clock and other functions to support the protection and control system of a terminal.

1.2

Platform configuration
Table 35:
Module

Basic, always included, modules

Description

Backplane module (BPM)

Carries all internal signals between modules in a terminal. The size of the module depends on the size of the case. Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits. For case size 1/2x19 and 3/4x19 a version with four binary inputs and four binary outputs used. An internal fail alarm output is also available.

Power supply module (PSM)

Main processing module (MPM)

Module for overall application control. All information is processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication. Carries up to 12 digital signal processors, performing all measuring functions. The module consist of LED:s, a LCD, push buttons and an optical connector for a front connected PC Module for protection algorithm processing. Carries up to 12 digital signal processors, performing all measuring functions.

Human machine interface (LCD-HMI) Signal processing module (SPM)

560

Platform

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Table 36:
Module

Application specific modules

Description

Milliampere input module (MIM) Binary input module (BIM) Binary output module (BOM) Binary I/O module (IOM) Data communication modules (DCMs) Transformer input module (TRM) A/D conversion module (ADM) Serial communication module (SCM) LED module (LED-HMI)

Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated channels. Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command outputs including supervision function Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs. Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal. Used for galvanic separation of voltage and/or current process signals and the internal circuitry. Used for analog to digital conversion of analog process signals galvanically separated by the TRM. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication Module with 18 user configurable LEDs for indication purposes

1.3

3/4x19" platform
REx 5xx
S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21 S23 S25 S27 S29

C E

99000524.vsd

Figure 306: Hardware structure of the 3/4x19 case

561

Platform

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

1.4

1/2x19" platform
REx 5xx
S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19

C E

99000525.vsd

Figure 307: Hardware structure of the 1/2x19 case

562

Transformer module (TRM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Transformer module (TRM)

Current and voltage input transformers form an insulating barrier between the external wiring and internal circuits of the terminal. They adapt the values of the measuring quantities to the static circuitry and prevent the disturbances to enter the terminal. Maximum 10 analog input quantities can be connected to the transformer module (TRM). A TRM with maximum number of transformers has: Five voltage transformers. The rated voltage is selected at order. Five current transformers. The rated currents are selected at order.

The input quantities are the following: Three phase currents Residual current of the protected line Residual current of the parallel circuit (if any) for compensation of the effect of the zero sequence mutual impedance on the fault locator measurement or residual current of the protected line but from a parallell core used for CT circuit supervision function or independent earthfault function. Three phase voltages Open delta voltage for the protected line (for an optional directional earth-fault protection) Phase voltage for an optional synchronism and energizing check.

The actual configuration of the TRM depends on the type of terminal and included functions. See figure 308 and figure 309.

563

Transformer module (TRM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Current Input connector

CT CT

CT CT CT
Backplane connector
99000560.vsd

Figure 308: Block diagram of the TRM for REL 551, Line differential protection

564

Transformer module (TRM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Current Input connector

CT CT VT

CT CT CT VT VT
990000511.vsd

Voltage Input connector

VT VT

Figure 309: Block diagram of the TRM with maximum number of transformers used in most REx 5xx.

Backplane connector

565

A/D module (ADM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

A/D module (ADM)

The incoming signals from the intermediate current transformers are adapted to the electronic voltage level with shunts. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A/D channels are used for each input current. By that a 16-bit dynamic range is obtained with a 12 bits A/D converter. The next step in the signal flow is the analog filter of the first order, with a cut-off frequency of 500 Hz. This filter is used to avoid aliasing problems. The A/D converter has a 12-bit resolution. It samples each input signal (5 voltages and 2x5 currents) with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz. Before the A/D-converted signals are transmitted to the signal processing module, the signals are band-pass filtered and down-sampled to 1 kHz in a digital signal processor (DSP). The filter in the DSP is a numerical filter with a cut-off frequency of 250 Hz. The transmission of data between the A/D-conversion module and the signal processing module is done on a supervised serial link of RS485 type. This transmission is performed once every millisecond and contains information about all incoming analog signals.

566

A/D module (ADM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

PLD

DSP Analog MUX A/Dconverter

Control logic & buffers

Analog filters & current shunts

1-5 Voltage inputs 1-5 Current inputs

99000512.vsd

Figure 310: Block diagram for the ADM

Backplane connector

567

Main processing module (MPM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Main processing module (MPM)

The terminal is based on a pipelined multi-processor design. The 32-bit main controller receives the result from the Signal processors every millisecond. All memory management are also handled by the main controller. The module has 8MB of disc memory and 1MB of code memory. It also has 8MB of dynamic memory. The controller also serves four serial links: one high-speed CAN bus for Input/Output modules and three serial links for different types of HMI communication. The main controller makes all decisions, based on the information from the Signal processors and from the binary inputs. The decisions are sent to the different output modules and to these communication ports: Local HMI module including a front-connected PC, if any, for local human-machine communication. LON communication port at the rear (option). SPA/IEC communication port at the rear (option)

568

Main processing module (MPM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Galvanic RS485 SCM

Optical SCM

X2

COM1 X50

X1

Processors Signal processors

OR
Optical SCM

COM2 X70

RTC CAN

PLD Code Flash (1MB)

LON

Download connector X30

Main controller QUICC SRAM (8MB)

Disc Flash (8MB)

LON SRAM

en06000535.vsd

Figure 311: Block diagram for the MPM To allow easy upgrading of software in the field a special connector is used, the Download connector.

Backplane connector
569

LON EPR OM

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

5
5.1

Input/Output modules
General
The number of inputs and outputs in a REx 5xx terminal can be selected in a variety of combinations depending on the size of the rack. There is no basic I/O configuration of the terminal. The table below shows the number of available inputs or output modules for the different platform sizes.
Platform size I/O slots available 1/1x19 13 3/4x19 8 1/2x19 3

A number of signals are available for signalling purposes in the terminal and all are freely programmable. The voltage level of the input/output modules is selectable at order. Figure 312 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.

[V] 300

176 144 88 72 38 32 19 18 24/30V RL24 48/60V RL48 110/125V RL110 220/250V RL220
xx99000517.vsd

Figure 312: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

570

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Table 37:

Input voltage ranges explained

Guaranteed operation

Operation uncertain

No operation

The I/O modules communicate with the Main Processing Module via the CAN-bus on the backplane. The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 313.

[mA] 30

1 35 70 [ms]
en03000108.vsd

Figure 313: Approximate binary input inrush current

571

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

[mA] 30

1 3.5 7.0 [ms]

en05000455.vsd

Figure 314: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

5.2

Binary input module (BIM)

The binary input module contains 16 optically isolated binary inputs. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event recording functions. This enables the extensive monitoring, and evaluation of operation for the terminal and for all associated electrical circuits. The voltage level of the binary input modules is selected when the product is ordered.

572

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Opto isolated input

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
Microcontroller

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd

Figure 315: Block diagram of the binary input module

5.3

Binary output module (BOM)

The Binary output module has 24 single-output relays or 12 command-output relays. They are grouped together as can be seen in figure 316 and 317. All the output relays have contacts with a high switching capacity (trip and signal relays).

CAN

Opto isolated input

Backplane connector

Memory

573

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Process connector

Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay

Relay

Microcontroller

Memory

99000505.vsd

Figure 316: Block diagram of the binary output module Two single output relay contacts can be connected in series (which gives a command output) in order to get a high security at operation of high voltage apparatuses.

574

Backplane connector

Process connector

CAN

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Output module

3
xx00000299.vsd

Figure 317: One of twelve binary output groups The output relays are provided with a supervision function to ensure a high degree of security against unwanted operation. The status of the output circuits is continuously read back and compared with the expected status. If any discrepancy occurs, an error is reported. This function covers: interrupt or short circuit in an output relay coil failure of an output relay driver.

5.4

Binary I/O module (IOM)

The binary in/out module contains eight optically isolated binary inputs and twelve binary output contacts. Ten of the output relays have contacts with a high-switching capacity (trip and signal relays). The remaining two relays are of reed type and for signalling purpose only. The relays are grouped together as can be seen in the terminal diagram.

575

Input/Output modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Relay Relay
PWM

Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay

Memory CAN Microcontroller

Relay

Relay

Relay

99000502vsd

Figure 318: Block diagram for the binary input/output module

576

Backplane connector

Process connector

Debug & isp

Power supply module (PSM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Power supply module (PSM)

The power supply module (PSM) contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system. The wide input voltage range of the DC/DC converter converts an input voltage range from 48 to 250V, including a +/-20% tolerance on the EL voltage. The output voltages are +5, +12 and -12 Volt. The PSM, used in the 1/2x19 and 3/4x19 platforms, has built-in binary I/O with four optically isolated inputs and five outputs. One of the binary outputs is dedicated for internal fail.

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay

Memory

Process connector

Microcontroller

PWM
CAN

Super vision

Power supply

en03000162.vsd

Figure 319: Block diagram for the PSM used in 1/2x19 and 3/4x19 cases.

Backplane connector

577

mA input module (MIM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

mA input module (MIM)

The mA input module (MIM) has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. The analog inputs measure DC and low frequency currents in range of up to 20 mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory and the module will self-calibrate if the temperature should start to drift. This module communicates, like the other I/O- modules, with the Main Processing Module via the CAN-bus.

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Process connector

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Memory

Microcontroller

99000504.vsd

Figure 320: Block diagram of the mA input module

578

Backplane connector

CAN

Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

8
8.1

Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI)

Application
The local LCD HMI module consists of three LEDs (red, yellow, and green), an LCD with four lines, each containing 16 characters, six buttons and an optical connector for PC communication.

LEDs green yellow red

Ready Start Trip REx 5xx Ver X.X C=Quit E=Enter menu

Liquid Crystal Display four rows 16 characters/row

Optical connector for local PC

C E

Push buttons

en00000422.vsd

Figure 321: Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI) The PC is connected via a special cable, that has a built-in optical to electrical interface. Thus, disturbance-free local serial communication with the personal computer is achieved. Software tools are available from ABB for this communication. A PC greatly simplifies the communication with the terminal. It also gives the user additional functionality which is unavailable on the LCD HMI because of insufficient space. The LEDs on the HMI display this information:

579

Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Table 38:

The local LCD-HMI LEDs

Information

LED indication
Green:

Steady Flashing Dark

In service Internal failure No power supply

Yellow:

Steady Flashing

Disturbance Report triggered Terminal in test mode

Red:

Steady Flashing

Trip command issued from a protection function or disturbance recorder started Blocked

580

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

9
9.1

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Application
The LED indication module is an option for the feature for the REx 5xx terminals for protection and control and consists totally of 18 LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The main purpose is to present on site an immediate visual information such as protection indications or alarm signals. It is located on the front of the protection and control terminals.

9.2

Design
The 18 LED indication module is equipped with 18 LEDs, which can light or flash in either red, yellow or green color. A description text can be added for each of the LEDs. See LED indication function (HL, HLED) for details on application and functionality.

2
xx00000406.vsd

1 2

Three-color LEDs Descriptive label, user exchangeable

Figure 322: The 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

581

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

9.3
9.3.1

LED indication function (HL, HLED)

Application The LED indication module is an additional feature for the REx 500 terminals for protection and control and consists totally of 18 LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). It is located on the front of the protection and control terminal. The main purpose is, to present on site an immediate visual information on: actual signals active (or not active) within the protected bay (terminal). alarm signals handled as a simplified alarm system. last operation of the terminal. Here we understand the presentation of the signals appeared during the latest start(s) or trip(s) since the previous information has been reset.

The user of this information is the technician in substation or the protection engineer during the testing activities. The protection engineer can also be able to read the status of all LEDs over the SMS in his office as well as to acknowledge/reset them locally or remotely. 9.3.2 Functionality Each LED indication can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or re-starting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as a signaling system in collecting mode with an acknowledgment functionality. Priority Each LED can show green, yellow or red light, each with its own activation input. If more than one input is activated at the time a priority is used with green as lowest priority and red as the highest. Operating modes Collecting mode LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system. Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has been elapsed.

582

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Acknowledgment/reset From local HMI The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the C-button on the Local HMI according to the sequence in figure 323.

Dark screen

Screen scrolling disturbance indications C

Press button:

Text on HMI: C=Clear LEDs E=Enter menu

C Clear HMI-LCD LEDs

E Go to menu

If any HMI-LEDs active, text on HMI: C=HLED_ ACK_RST E=Enter menu

C Acknowledge/Reset HMI-LEDs

E Go to menu
en01000226.vsd

Figure 323: Acknowledgment/reset from local HMI From function input The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input (ACK_RST) to the function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

583

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

From SMS/SCS It is also possible to perform the acknowledgment/reset remotely from SMS/SCS. To do that, the function input (ACK_RST) has to be configured to an output of a command function block (CD or CM). The output from these command function blocks can then be activated from the SMS/SCS. Automatic reset The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light. Operating sequences The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset. The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

= No indication
G=

= Steady light
Y=

= Flash
R=

Green

Yellow

Red

en01000227.vsd

Figure 324: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

584

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Activating signal

LED
en01000228.vsd

Figure 325: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S) If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel is shown in figure 326.

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal RED

LED

en01000230.vsd

Figure 326: Operating sequence 1, two colors Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

585

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Activating signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd

Figure 327: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure 328 is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal RED

LED

Acknow.
en01000232.vsd

Figure 328: Operating sequence 3, two colors involved If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications which are not visible according to figure 329.

586

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal YELLOW Activating signal RED

LED

Acknow.
en01000233.vsd

Figure 329: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1 If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to figure 330.

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal YELLOW Activating signal RED

LED

Acknow.
en01000234.vsd

Figure 330: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2 Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated.

587

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating signal

LED

Reset
en01000235.vsd

Figure 331: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to figure 332.

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal RED

LED

Reset
en01000236.vsd

Figure 332: Operating sequence 5, two colors Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by

588

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 333.

From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6

New disturbance

&

tRestart t

&
1

&

en01000237.vsd

Figure 333: Activation of new disturbance In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 334.

589

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal YELLOW Activating signal RED

To LED

1
tMax t

&

To disturbance length control

en01000238.vsd

Figure 334: Length control of activating signals Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 335 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000239.vsd

Figure 335: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance Figure 336 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

590

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

Disturbance t Restart

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000240.vsd

Figure 336: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances Figure 337 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

591

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000241.vsd

Figure 337: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between Figure 338 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

592

18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000242.vsd

Figure 338: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset 9.3.3 Calculation The parameters for the LED indication function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

593

Serial communication modules (SCM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

10
10.1

Serial communication modules (SCM)

Design, SPA/IEC
Refer to chapter Data communication.

10.2

Design, LON
Refer to chapter Data communication.

594

Data communication modules (DCM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

11

Data communication modules (DCM)

For more information about the data communication modules, refer to the previous chapter 14 "Data communication".

595

Data communication modules (DCM)

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

596

ABB Power Technologies AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 Internet: www.abb.com/substationautomation Printed on recycled and ecolabelled paper at Elanders Novum

1MRK 506 168-UEN